Implementing Cisco MPLS

MPLS
Implementing Cisco
MPLS
Version 2.2
Student Guide
Editorial, Production, and Web Services: 06.29.07
DISCLAIMER WARRANTY: THIS CONTENT IS BEING PROVIDED AS IS. CISCO MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE CONTENT PROVIDED HEREUNDER, EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR IN ANY OTHER PROVISION OF
THIS CONTENT OR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CISCO AND YOU. CISCO SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE. This learning product may contain early release
content, and while Cisco believes it to be accurate, it falls subject to the disclaimer above.
Table of Contents
Course Introduction
Overview
Learner Skills and Knowledge
Course Goal and Objectives
Course Flow
Additional References
Cisco Glossary of Terms
Your Training Curriculum
MPLS Concepts
Overview
Module Objectives
Introducing Basic MPLS Concepts

Overview
Objectives
What Are the Foundations of Traditional IP Routing?
Example: Traditional IP Routing
Basic MPLS Features
Benefits of MPLS
What Are the MPLS Architecture Components?
MPLS Control Plane
MPLS Data Plane
MPLS LSRs
Example: LSR Architecture
Example: Basic MPLS
Summary
Introducing MPLS Labels and Label Stacks

Overview
Objectives
What Are MPLS Labels?
FEC and MPLS Forwarding
What Is the MPLS Label Format?
Where Are MPLS Labels Inserted?
Example: MPLS Label InsertionFrame-Mode MPLS
What Is an MPLS Label Stack?
Example: MPLS Label Stack
Example: MPLS Label Stack Format
What Are MPLS Label Operations?
Example: MPLS Label OperationsFrame-Mode MPLS
Summary
Identifying MPLS Applications

Overview
Objectives
Which Applications Are Used with MPLS?
What Is MPLS Unicast IP Routing?
What Is MPLS Multicast IP Routing?
What Are MPLS VPNs?
What Is MPLS TE?
What Is MPLS QoS?
What Is AToM?
AToM Examples
What Are the Interactions Between MPLS Applications?
Summary
Module Summary
References
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-12
1-14
1-15
1-17
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-29
1-29
1-29
1-30
1-31
1-32
1-33
1-35
1-36
1-37
1-38
1-39
1-40
1-41
1-41
Module Self-Check
Module Self-Check Answer Key
Label Assignment and Distribution

Overview
Module Objectives
Discovering LDP Neighbors

Overview
Objectives
Establishing an Adjacent LDP Session
What Are LDP Hello Messages?
Example: Per-Platform Label Space
Negotiating Label Space
Example: LDP Neighbor Discovery
Negotiating LDP Sessions
Discovering Nonadjacent Neighbors
Example: Applications Using Targeted LDP Sessions
Summary
Introducing Typical Label Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS

Overview
Objectives
Propagating Labels Across a Network
Example: Building Blocks for IP Forwarding
Example: Using the FIB Table to Forward Packets
Example: Using LDP
What Are LSPs?
Example: IGP Propagates Routing Information
Example: LFIB and LIB Tables
Propagating Labels Using PHP
Example: PHPBefore
Example: PHPAfter
What Is the Impact of IP Aggregation on LSPs?
Example: MPLS IP Aggregation Problem
Allocating Labels in a Frame-Mode MPLS Network
Example: Building the FIB Table
Example: Label Allocation
Distributing and Advertising Labels
Example: Label Distribution and Advertisement
Example: Interim Packet Propagation Through an MPLS Network
Example: LDP Update Sent to All Adjacent Routers
Populating the LFIB
Example: LFIB Population
Propagating Packets Across an MPLS Network
Example: Packet Propagation Through an MPLS Network
Detecting Frame-Mode Loops
Example: Normal TTL Operation
Example: TTL and Loop Detection
Example: Traceroute with Disabled TTL Propagation
Allocating Per-Platform Labels
Example: Per-Platform Label Allocation
Summary
ii
Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2
1-42
1-46
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-24
2-24
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-31
2-31
2-33
2-34
2-36
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-42
2-45
2-45
2-47
2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.
2-49
Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS

Overview
Objectives
What Is the MPLS Steady-State Operation?
What Happens in a Link Failure?
Example: Link Failure Actions
What Is the Routing Protocol Convergence After a Link Failure?
Example: Routing Protocol Convergence
What Is the MPLS Convergence After a Link Failure?
What Actions Occur in Link Recovery?
Example: Link Recovery Actions
Summary
Introducing MPLS Label Allocation, Distribution, and Retention Modes

Overview
Objectives
Label Distribution Parameters
Distributing Labels
Example: Unsolicited Downstream
Allocating Labels
Retaining Labels
Example: Liberal Retention Mode
Summary
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
2-59
2-59
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-65
2-66
2-71
Frame-Mode MPLS Implementation on Cisco IOS Platforms

Overview
Module Objectives
3-1
3-1
3-1
Introducing CEF Switching
3-3
Overview
Objectives
What Are Cisco IOS Platform-Switching Mechanisms?
Using Standard IP Switching
Example: Standard IP Switching
What Is the CEF Switching Architecture?
Configuring IP CEF
ip cef
Syntax Description
ip route-cache cef
Syntax Description
Defaults
Monitoring IP CEF
show ip cef
Summary
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-11
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms
3-13
Overview
Objectives
What Are MPLS Configuration Tasks?
Configuring the MPLS ID on a Router
mpls ldp router-id
Configuring MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface
mpls ip
mpls label protocol [tdp | ldp | both]
2-49
2-49
2-50
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-55
2-55
2-58
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-17
iii
Example: Configuring MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface

Example: Verifying MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface
Configuring a Label-Switching MTU
mpls mtu
Configuring IP TTL Propagation
mpls ip propagate-ttl
Example: Configuring IP TTL Propagation
Example: Disabling IP TTL Propagation
Configuring Conditional Label Distribution
mpls ldp advertise-labels
Example: Conditional Label Distribution Configuration
Example: Enabling Conditional Label Advertisement
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Switched WAN Media
Summary
Monitoring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms

Overview
Objectives
Monitoring MPLS
show mpls ldp parameters
show mpls interfaces
show mpls ldp discovery
Monitoring LDP
show mpls ldp neighbor
show mpls ldp bindings
Examples
Monitoring Label Switching
show mpls forwarding-table
show ip cef
Examples: show mpls forwarding table Command Output
show ip cef detail
Debugging MPLS and LDP
debug mpls packets
Summary
Troubleshooting Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms

Overview
Objectives
What Are Common Frame-Mode MPLS Issues?
Solving LDP Session Startup Issues
Solving Label Allocation Issues
Solving Label Distribution Issues
Solving Packet-Labeling Issues
show cef interface
Usage Guidelines
Solving Intermittent MPLS Failures
Solving Packet Propagation Issues
Summary
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
iv
3-18
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-32
3-33
3-37
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-41
3-45
3-47
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-53
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-63
3-63
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-72
3-74
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-77
3-78
3-81
MPLS VPN Technology
4-1
Overview
Module Objectives
4-1
4-1
Introducing VPNs
4-3
Overview
Objectives
Traditional Router-Based Network Connectivity
Advantages of VPNs
Example: VPNs
VPN Terminology
What Are the VPN Implementation Models?
What Are Overlay VPN Technologies?
What Are Peer-to-Peer VPN Technologies?
Example: Controlled Route Distribution
What Are the Benefits of VPNs?
What Are the Drawbacks of VPNs?
Summary
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-8
4-9
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
Categorizing VPNs
4-21
Overview
Objectives
What Are the Business Categories for VPNs?
What Are Extranet VPNs?
Example: Overlay VPNExtranet VPNs
Example: Peer-to-Peer VPN Extranet VPNs
What Are the Connectivity Categories for VPNs?
What Is the Central Services Extranet?
Example: Central Services Extranet
What Is a Managed Network Implementation?
Example: Hybrid Implementation
Summary
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture
4-31
Overview
Objectives
What Are the Drawbacks of Traditional Peer-to-Peer VPNs?
What Is the MPLS VPN Architecture?
What Is the Architecture of a PE Router in an MPLS VPN?
What Are the Methods of Propagating Routing Information Across the P-Network?
What Are RDs?
Is the RD Enough?
Example: VoIP Service Sample
Example: Connectivity Requirements
What Are RTs?
How Have Complex VPNs Redefined the Meaning of VPNs?
What Is the Impact of Complex VPN Topologies on Virtual Routing Tables?
Example: Impact of Complex VPN Topologies on Virtual Routing Tables
Summary
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-35
4-36
4-41
4-45
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-53
Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model

Overview
Objectives
MPLS VPN Routing Requirements and Model
What Is the MPLS VPN Routing Model?
Existing Internet Routing Support
Routing Tables on PE Routers
Identifying End-to-End Routing Update Flow
Example: End-to-End Routing Update Flow
Route Distribution to CE Routers
Example: Extending MPLS VPNs with VRF-Lite
Summary
Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets

Overview
Objectives
What Are the End-to-End VPN Forwarding Mechanisms?
What Is VPN PHP?
Propagating VPN Labels Between PE Routers
Example: VPN Label Propagation Between PE Routers
What Are the Effects of MPLS VPNs on Label Propagation?
What Are the Effects of MPLS VPNs on Packet Forwarding?
Example: Summarization in the Core
Summary
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
MPLS VPN Implementation

Overview
Module Objectives
Using MPLS VPN Mechanisms of Cisco IOS Platforms

Overview
Objectives
What Is a VRF Table?
What Is the Need for Routing Protocol Contexts?
What Are VPN-Aware Routing Protocols?
How Are VRF Tables Used?
Propagating BGP RoutesOutbound
Example: BGP Route Propagation Outbound
Propagating BGP RoutesInbound
Propagating Non-BGP RoutesOutbound
Propagating Non-BGP RoutesInbound
Summary
Configuring VRF Tables

Overview
Objectives
What Are the VRF Configuration Tasks?
Creating VRF Tables and Assigning RDs
ip vrf
Defaults
rd
Defaults
vi
4-55
4-55
4-55
4-56
4-57
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-63
4-67
4-68
4-69
4-71
4-71
4-71
4-72
4-74
4-75
4-76
4-78
4-79
4-80
4-81
4-82
4-82
4-83
4-92
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-10
5-11
5-13
5-15
5-17
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
Specifying Export and Import RTs

route-target
Defaults
Using VPN IDs
Configuring VPN IDs
vpn id
Defaults
Assigning an Interface to a VRF Table
ip vrf forwarding
Defaults
Typical Configuration to Enable VRFs
Example: MPLS VPN Network
Summary
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-26
5-27
5-27
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-30
Configuring an MP-BGP Session Between PE Routers
5-31
Overview
Objectives
Configuring BGP Address Families
router bgp
Defaults
address-family
Enabling BGP Neighbors
Configuring MP-BGP
Configuring MP-IBGP
neighbor remote-as
Defaults
neighbor update-source
Defaults
neighbor activate
Defaults
neighbor next-hop-self
Defaults
Configuring MP-BGP Community Propagation
neighbor send-community
Defaults
Disabling IPv4 Route Exchange
Example: Disabling IPv4 Route Exchange
Summary
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-46
Configuring Small-Scale Routing Protocols Between PE and CE Routers

Overview
Objectives
Configuring PE-CE Routing Protocols
Selecting the VRF Routing Context for BGP
address-family ipv4
Defaults
Command Modes
Configuring Per-VRF Static Routes
ip route vrf
Configuring RIP PE-CE Routing
Configuring EIGRP PE-CE Routing
Configuring SOO for EIGRP PE-CE Loop Prevention
set extcommunity
Defaults
ip vrf sitemap
Defaults
Summary
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-50
5-51
5-51
5-53
5-56
5-59
5-61
5-62
5-62
5-62
5-64
vii
Monitoring MPLS VPN Operations
5-65
Overview
Objectives
Monitoring VRFs
show ip vrf
Defaults
Monitoring VRF Routing
show ip protocols vrf
show ip route vrf
show ip bgp vpnv4
show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf neighbors
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
Monitoring MP-BGP Sessions
show ip bgp neighbors
Example: Sample Output from show ip bgp neighbors Command
Monitoring an MP-BGP VPNv4 Table
show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
show ip bgp vpnv4 rd route-distinguisher
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
Example: Configuring a Default RD for Two VRFs
Monitoring Per-VRF CEF and LFIB Structures
show ip cef vrf
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
show mpls forwarding vrf
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
Monitoring Labels Associated with VPNv4 Routes
Identifying Other MPLS VPN Monitoring Commands
Summary
5-65
5-65
5-66
5-66
5-66
5-70
5-70
5-71
5-72
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-80
5-81
5-81
5-81
5-82
5-82
5-83
5-83
5-84
5-85
5-86
5-86
5-87
5-87
5-87
5-88
5-89
5-90
Configuring OSPF as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers
5-91
Overview
Objectives
What Is the Enhanced OSPF Hierarchical Model?
Propagating OSPF Customer Routes
Implementing MPLS VPNs as an OSPF Superbackbone
Example: OSPF Superbackbone Implementation
Configuring OSPF PE-CE Routing
router ospf
Defaults
Using the OSPF Down Bit
Example: OSPF Down Bit
Optimizing Packet Forwarding Across the MPLS VPN Backbone
Example: Optimizing of Packet Forwarding
Using the OSPF Tag Field
Example: Routing Loops Across OSPF Domains
Example: OSPF Tag FieldRouting Loop Prevention
What Is a Sham Link?
Example: Sham Link
Configuring a Sham Link
Defaults
Command Modes
Example: Sample Sham-Link Configuration
Summary
viii
5-91
5-91
5-92
5-93
5-96
5-101
5-104
5-106
5-106
5-108
5-108
5-110
5-111
5-111
5-114
5-114
5-117
5-118
5-118
5-122
5-123
5-124
5-124
5-125
Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers

Overview
Objectives
Configuring a Per-VRF BGP Routing Context
address-family ipv4
Defaults
Command Modes
Example: Configuring per-VRF BGP Routing Context
What Are the Reasons for Limiting the Number of Routes in a VRF?
Limiting the Number of Prefixes Received from a BGP Neighbor
neighbor maximum-prefix
Defaults
Limiting the Total Number of VRF Routes
maximum routes
Defaults
Example: Limiting the Total Number of VRF Routes
Identifying AS-Override Issues
neighbor as-override
Defaults
Example: AS-Override
Example: AS-Path Prepending
Identifying Allowas-in Issues
Example: Using Allowas-in to Support Customer Site Linking Two VPNs
neighbor allowas-in
Defaults
Implementing SOO for Loop Prevention
set extcommunity
Defaults
neighbor route-map
ip vrf sitemap
Defaults
Summary
Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs
5-127
5-127
5-128
5-129
5-129
5-129
5-130
5-131
5-132
5-132
5-133
5-134
5-135
5-135
5-136
5-137
5-140
5-140
5-141
5-142
5-143
5-146
5-147
5-147
5-148
5-150
5-151
5-151
5-152
5-152
5-154
5-155
Overview
Objectives
Identifying Preliminary Steps in MPLS VPN Troubleshooting
Verifying the Routing Information Flow
Validating CE-to-PE Routing Information Flow
Validating PE-to-PE Routing Information Flow
Validating PE-to-CE Routing Information Flow
Identifying the Issues When Verifying the Data Flow
Validating CEF Status
show cef interface
Usage Guidelines
Validating the End-to-End LSP
Validating the LFIB Status
Summary
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
5-155
5-155
5-156
5-157
5-158
5-159
5-164
5-165
5-166
5-167
5-167
5-170
5-171
5-172
5-173
5-174
5-175
5-184
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-1
Overview
Module Objectives
5-127
6-1
6-1
ix
Using Advanced VRF Import and Export Features
6-3
Overview
Objectives
What Are Advanced VRF Features?
Configuring Selective VRF Import
import map
Defaults
Example: Configuring Selective VRF Import
Configuring Selective VRF Export
set extcommunity
Defaults
export map
Defaults
Example: Configuring Selective VRF Export
Summary
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-12
Introducing Overlapping VPNs
6-13
Overview
Objectives
Who Are the Participants in Overlapping VPNs?
What Are Typical Overlapping VPN Usages?
Overlapping VPN Routing
Example: Overlapping VPN Routing
Overlapping VPN Data Flow
Configuring Overlapping VPNs
Example: Overlapping VPNsConfiguration Tasks
Example: Configuring Overlapping VPN VRFs
Summary
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-18
6-19
6-19
6-21
6-22
Introducing Central Services VPNs
6-23
Overview
Objectives
What Are the Access Characteristics of a Central Services VPN?
What Are the Routing Characteristics of a Central Services VPN?
Example: Central Services VPN Routing
Identifying the Central Services VPN Data Flow Model
Configuring a Central Services VPN
Example: Configuring a Central Services VPN
Integrating a Central Services VPN with a Simple VPN
Identifying the RD Requirements When Integrating Central Services and Simple VPNs
Identifying the RT Requirements When Integrating Central Services and Simple VPNs
Example: Configuring VRFs in a Central Services and Simple VPN
Summary
Introducing the Managed CE Routers Service

Overview
Objectives
What Are the Requirements of Managed CE Routers?
What Are the VRF and RD Requirements?
Configuring Managed CE Routers
Example: Configuring VRFs
Summary
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-27
6-28
6-30
6-31
6-33
6-34
6-36
6-37
6-39
6-39
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-45
6-46
6-50
Internet Access and MPLS VPNs
7-1
Overview
Module Objectives
7-1
7-1
Introducing Internet Access with MPLS VPNs
7-3
Overview
Objectives
Customer Internet Connectivity Scenarios
Classical Internet Access
Multisite Internet Access
Wholesale Internet Access
Internet Design Models for Service Providers
Major Design Models
Internet Access Through Global Routing
Internet Access as a Separate VPN
Disadvantages of Providing Internet Access Through Route Leaking
Summary
Implementing Separate Internet Access and VPN Services
7-15
Overview
Objectives
Classical Internet Access for a VPN Customer
Using Separate Subinterfaces
Example: Internet Access Through Static Routes
Example: Dynamic Internet Access Through a Separate Subinterface
Example: Internet Access Through a Dedicated SubinterfaceTraffic Flow
Accessing the Internet from Every Customer Site
Separate Internet Access Benefits and Limitations
Summary
Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-25
Overview
Objectives
Example: Configuring the Internet Gateway in a Separate VPN
Implementing Redundant Internet Access
Implementing Classical Internet Access for a VPN Customer
Implementing Internet Access from Every Customer Site
Implementing Wholesale Internet Access
Running an Internet Backbone in a VPN
Summary
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
MPLS TE Overview
7-25
7-25
7-26
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-36
7-37
7-40
8-1
Overview
Module Objectives
8-1
8-1
Introducing the TE Concept
8-3
Overview
Objectives
What Is TE?
Business Drivers for TE
Congestion Avoidance and TE
TE with a Layer 2 Overlay Model
TE with a Layer 3 Model
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-13
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-6
8-8
8-9
8-12
xi
TE with the MPLS TE Model

Summary
References
Understanding MPLS TE Components

Overview
Objectives
Traffic Tunnels: Concepts
Traffic Tunnels: Characteristics
Traffic Tunnels Attributes
Network Links and Link Attributes
Constraint-Based Path Computation
TE Processes
Role of RSVP in Path Setup and Trunk Admission Control
Path Setup with RSVP
Trunk Admission Control with RSVP
Forwarding Traffic to a Tunnel
Forwarding Traffic to a Tunnel: Autoroute
Summary
References
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-18
8-20
8-21
8-23
8-24
8-28
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-33
8-34
8-36
8-36
Configuring MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms
8-37
Overview
Objectives
MPLS TE Configuration Road Map
Enabling Device-Level MPLS TE Support
ip cef
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (global)
Enabling MPLS TE Support in IS-IS
mpls traffic-eng
mpls traffic-eng router-id
metric-style wide
Enabling MPLS TE Support in OSPF
mpls traffic-eng area
Enabling Basic MPLS TE on an Interface
mpls ip
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (interface)
ip rsvp bandwidth
Creating and Configuring a Traffic Tunnel
interface tunnel
ip unnumbered
tunnel destination
Configuring a Traffic Tunnel
tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng
tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth
tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority
ip explicit-path
next-address
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option
Mapping Traffic into Tunnels with Autoroute
tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce
Summary
References
8-37
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-41
8-42
8-42
8-44
8-44
8-45
8-47
8-47
8-47
8-48
8-50
8-50
8-50
8-51
8-52
8-53
8-53
8-53
8-55
8-55
8-55
8-57
8-57
8-59
8-59
Monitoring Basic MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms

Overview
Objectives
Monitoring MPLS TE Tunnels
show ip rsvp interface
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels
xii
8-14
8-16
8-16
8-61
8-61
8-61
8-62
8-62
8-63
Monitoring MPLS TE
show mpls traffic-eng autoroute
show ip cef network
show ip cef vrf vrf-name network
Summary
References
Module Summary
References
Module Self-Check
Answer Key
8-66
8-66
8-68
8-69
8-70
8-70
8-71
8-71
8-72
8-75
xiii
MPLS
Course Introduction
Overview
Service providers (and enterprises acting as service providers) are faced with many challenges
in terms of customer demand, including an ongoing need for value-added services.
Conventional IP packet forwarding has several limitations, and more and more service
providers realize that something else is needed. Not only must service providers be concerned
with protecting their existing infrastructure, but they must also find ways to generate new
services that are not currently supportable using existing technologies.
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) is a high-performance method for forwarding packets
through a network. MPLS enables routers at the edge of a network to apply simple labels to
packets. This practice allows the edge devicesATM switches or existing routers in the center
of the service provider coreto switch packets according to labels, with minimal lookup
overhead. MPLS integrates the performance and traffic-management capabilities of data link
Layer 2 with the scalability and flexibility of network Layer 3 routing. When used in
conjunction with other standard technologies, MPLS allows service providers the ability to
support value-added features that are critical for their networks.
Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2 is recommended training for individuals seeking
certification as a Cisco CCIP. The focus of this course is on MPLS technology issues as those
issues apply to service providers and on how to configure new features and functions in an
existing routed environment.

This subtopic lists the skills and knowledge that learners must possess to benefit fully from the
course. The subtopic also includes recommended Cisco learning offerings that learners should
complete to benefit fully from this course.

Cisco CCNA certification
Building Scalable Cisco Internetworks (BSCI)
Configuring BGP on Cisco Routers (BGP)
Note: Practical experience with deploying and operating networks based on

Cisco network devices and Cisco IOS software is strongly recommended.
2006 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
MPLS v2.23
Course Goal and Objectives

This topic describes the course goal and objectives.
Course Goal
To design, implement, and verify an

MPLS VPN domain capable of multiple
customer sites with managed central
services and Internet access
Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS)
MPLS v2.24
Upon completing this course, you will be able to meet these objectives:
Describe the features of MPLS
Describe how MPLS labels are assigned and distributed
Configure and troubleshoot MPLS on frame-mode Cisco IOS platforms
Describe the MPLS peer-to-peer architecture and explain the routing and packetforwarding model in this architecture
Configure, monitor, and troubleshoot VPN operations
Describe how the overlapping model can be used to implement managed services and
Internet access
Describe the various Internet access implementations that are available and the benefits and
drawbacks of each model; configure, monitor, and troubleshoot basic Internet access
Configure, monitor, and troubleshoot basic MPLS TE functions
Course Introduction
Course Flow
This topic presents the suggested flow of the course materials.
Course Flow Diagram

Day 1
Day 2
Course
Introduction
A
M
MPLS VPN
Technology
MPLS Concepts
Day 3
Day 4
MPLS VPN
Implementation
Complex MPLS
VPNs
Lab
Lab
Day 5
MPLS Traffic
Engineering
Overview
Label Assignment
and Distribution
MPLS VPN
Implementation
Lab
Lab
MPLS VPN
Implementation
Complex MPLS
VPNs
Lab
Lab
Internet Access
and
MPLS VPNs
Lab
Lunch
Label Assignment
and Distribution
P
M
Frame-Mode MPLS
Implementation
Lab
MPLS VPN
Implementation
Lab
Lab
Lab
Complex MPLS
VPNs
Wrap-up
Lab
Lab
MPLS v2.25
The schedule reflects the recommended structure for this course. This structure allows enough
time for the instructor to present the course information and for you to work through the lab
activities. The exact timing of the subject materials and labs depends on the pace of your
specific class.
Additional References
This topic presents the Cisco icons and symbols that are used in this course, as well as
information on where to find additional technical references.
Cisco Icons and Symbols

Router
Edge Label
Switch
Router
Workgroup Switch
ATM
Switch
Network
Cloud,
White
Line: Ethernet
Line: Serial
MPLS v2.26
Cisco Glossary of Terms

For additional information on Cisco terminology, refer to the Cisco Internetworking Terms and
Acronyms glossary of terms at http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/ita/index.htm.
Course Introduction
Your Training Curriculum

This topic presents the training curriculum for this course.
Cisco Career Certifications

Expand Your Professional Options
and Advance Your Career
Cisco CCIP
CCIE
CCSP
CCIP
CCNA
Expert
Required
Exam
Recommended Training Through

Cisco Learning Partners
BSCI
Building Scalable Cisco Internetworks
QOS
Implementing Quality of Service
BGP
Configuring BGP on Cisco Routers
Professional
Associate
MPLS
Implementing Cisco MPLS
http://www.cisco.com/go/certifications
MPLS v2.27
You are encouraged to join the Cisco Certification Community, a discussion forum open to
anyone holding a valid Cisco Career Certification (such as Cisco CCIE, CCNA, CCDA,
CCNP, CCDP, CCIP, or CCSP). It provides a gathering place for Cisco certified
professionals to share questions, suggestions, and information about Cisco Career Certification
programs and other certification-related topics. For more information, visit
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/le3/le2/le41/learning_certification_level_home.html.
Module 1
MPLS Concepts
Overview
This module explains the features of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) compared with
those of traditional hop-by-hop IP routing. MPLS concepts and terminology, along with MPLS
label format and label switch router (LSR) architecture and operations, are explained in this
module.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe the features of MPLS. This ability
includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the basic MPLS concepts
Describe the structure and function of MPLS labels and MPLS label stacks
Describe the different MPLS applications in which you can use MPLS
1-2
Lesson 1
Introducing Basic MPLS

Concepts
Overview
This lesson discusses the basic concepts and architecture of Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS). The lesson provides information about MPLS components and labels. This lesson lays
the foundation for subsequent lessons that cover key areas, such as MPLS implementations and
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
It is important to have a clear understanding of the role of MPLS and the makeup of the devices
and components. This understanding will help you have a clear picture of how to differentiate
between the roles of certain devices and to understand how information gets transferred across
an MPLS domain.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the basic MPLS concepts, including
some advantages as compared to traditional IP routing. This ability includes being able to meet
these objectives:
Describe the foundations of traditional IP routing
Describe the basic features of MPLS
Describe the benefits of MPLS
Describe the main components of the MPLS architecture
Describe the function of the different types of LSRs
What Are the Foundations of Traditional IP

Routing?
This topic describes the foundations of traditional IP routing.
Foundations of Traditional IP Routing

Routing protocols are used to distribute Layer 3
routing information.
Forwarding decision is made based on:
Packet header
Local routing table
Routing lookups are independently performed at
every hop.
MPLS v2.21-3
Before basic MPLS functionality is explained, these three foundations of traditional IP routing
need to be highlighted:
Routing protocols are used on all devices to distribute routing information.
Each router analyzes the Layer 3 header of each packet compared to the local routing table
and makes a decision about where to forward the packet. Regardless of the routing
protocol, routers forward packets contingent on a destination address-based routing lookup.
Note
The exception to this rule is policy-based routing (PBR), where routers will bypass the
destination-based routing lookup.
The routing lookup is performed independently on every router in the network.
1-4
Example: Traditional IP Routing

This diagram shows traditional IP routing.
Traditional IP Routing
Every router may need full Internet routing

information.
Destination-based routing lookup is needed on
every hop.
MPLS v2.21-4
MPLS Concepts
1-5
Basic MPLS Features

This topic describes the basic features of MPLS.
Basic MPLS Features

MPLS leverages both IP routing and CEF
switching.
MPLS is a forwarding mechanism in which packets
are forwarded based on labels.
MPLS was designed to support multiple Layer 3
protocols
Typically, MPLS labels correspond to destination
networks (equivalent to traditional IP forwarding).
MPLS v2.21-5
MPLS is designed to leverage the intelligence associated with IP routing and the switching
model associated with Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) switching.
Note
CEF switching will be discussed in detail in the Frame-Mode MPLS Implementation on

Cisco IOS Platforms module. In summary, CEF uses a complete IP switching table, the
Forwarding Information Base (FIB) table, to make forwarding decisions. Because the FIB
contains the complete IP switching table, the router can make definitive forwarding decisions
based on the information in it.
MPLS is a packet-forwarding technology that uses appended labels to make forwarding

decisions for packets.
Within the MPLS network, the Layer 3 header analysis is done just once (when the packet
enters the MPLS domain). Labels are appended to the packet, and then the packet is
forwarded into the MPLS domain.
Simple label inspection integrated with CEF switching drives subsequent packet
forwarding.
MPLS was designed to support efficiently forwarding packets across the network core based on
a simplified header. Label switching is performed regardless of the Layer 3 routing protocol.
MPLS labels typically correspond to Layer 3 destination addresses (equal to destination-based
routing). Labels can also correspond to other parameters, such as quality of service (QoS),
source address, or a Layer 2 circuit. An MPLS label is a short, 4-byte, fixed-length, locally
significant identifier.
1-6
Benefits of MPLS
This topic describes some of the benefits of MPLS.
Benefits of MPLS
MPLS supports multiple applications including:
Unicast and multicast IP routing
VPN
TE
QoS
AToM
MPLS decreases forwarding overhead on core
routers.
MPLS can support forwarding of non-IP protocols.
MPLS v2.21-6
There are several benefits to MPLS:

MPLS decreases the forwarding overhead on the core routers.
MPLS supports multiple useful applications such as those listed here:
Unicast and multicast IP routing
VPN
Traffic engineering (TE)
QoS
Any Transport over MPLS (AToM).
Note
An overview of these applications will be provided in the Identifying MPLS Applications

lesson in this module.
MPLS supports the forwarding of non-IP protocols, because MPLS technologies are
applicable to any network layer protocol.
MPLS Concepts
1-7
What Are the MPLS Architecture Components?

MPLS consists of these two major components:
Control plane
Data plane
MPLS Control Plane

The control plane takes care of the routing information exchange and the label exchange
between adjacent devices.
MPLS Architecture: Control Plane
MPLS v2.21-7
The control plane builds a routing table (Routing Information Base [RIB]) based on the routing
protocol. Various routing protocols, such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Interior Gateway
Routing Protocol (IGRP), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), Intermediate
System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), Routing Information Protocol (RIP), and Border
Gateway Protocol (BGP), can be used in the control plane for managing Layer 3 routing.
The control plane uses a label exchange protocol to create and maintain labels internally, and to
exchange these labels with other devices. The label exchange protocol binds labels to networks
learned via a routing protocol. Label exchange protocols include MPLS Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP), the older Cisco Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP), and BGP (used by MPLS
VPN). Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is used by MPLS TE to accomplish label
exchange.
The control plane also builds two forwarding tables, a FIB from the information in the RIB, and
a label forwarding information base (LFIB) table based on the label exchange protocol and the
RIB. The LFIB table includes label values and associations with the outgoing interface for
every network prefix.
1-8
MPLS Data Plane

The data plane takes care of forwarding based on either destination addresses or labels; the data
plane is also known as the forwarding plane.
MPLS Architecture: Data Plane
MPLS v2.21-8
The data plane is a simple forwarding engine that is independent of the type of routing protocol
or label exchange protocol being used. The data plane forwards packets to the appropriate
interface based on the information in the LFIB or the FIB tables.
MPLS Concepts
1-9
MPLS LSRs
This topic describes the function of two types of MPLS devices.
MPLS Devices: LSRs
The LSR forwards labeled packets in the MPLS domain.

The edge LSR forwards labeled packets in the MPLS domain,
and it forwards IP packets into and out of the MPLS domain.
MPLS v2.21-9
The label switch router (LSR) is the basic MPLS device used for most MPLS applications.
Here are two definitions:
LSR: A device that implements label distribution procedures and primarily forwards
packets based on labels
Edge LSR: An LSR on the edge of an MPLS domain that implements label distribution
procedures, forwards packets based on labels, and primarily inserts labels on packets or
removes labels for non-MPLS devices
LSRs and edge LSRs are usually capable of doing both label switching and IP routing. Their
names are based on their positions in an MPLS domain. Routers that have all interfaces enabled
for MPLS are called LSRs because they mostly forward labeled packets. Routers that have
some interfaces that are not enabled for MPLS are usually at the edge of an MPLS domain.
These routers also forward packets based on IP destination addresses and label them if the
outgoing interface is enabled for MPLS.
Note
1-10
In a service provider MPLS environment, an edge LSR is typically known as a provider edge
(PE) router, and an LSR is known as a provider (P) router.
Label Switch Routers:

Architecture of LSRs
MPLS v2.21-10
The primary LSR functions are to exchange labels with other LSRs and to forward labeled
packets. Therefore, every LSR needs a Layer 3 routing protocol (for example, OSPF, EIGRP,
or IS-IS), and a label exchange protocol (for example, LDP or TDP).
LDP populates the LFIB table in the data plane that is used to forward labeled packets.
Note
LSRs may not be able to forward unlabeled packets if they do not have sufficient routing
information.
MPLS Concepts
1-11
Example: LSR Architecture

The figure illustrates the main components of the control and data planes for MPLS operation
on a LSR.
LSR Architecture Example
MPLS router functionality is divided into two major

parts: the control plane and the data plane.
MPLS v2.21-11
In the example LSR architecture, the control plane uses these protocols:
A routing protocol (OSPF), which receives and forwards information about IP network
10.0.0.0/8
A label exchange protocol (LDP), which receives label 24 to be used for packets with
destination address 10.0.0.0/8
(A local label 17 is generated and is sent to upstream neighbors so that these neighbors can
label packets with the appropriate label.)
The data plane uses an LFIB to forward packets based on labels:
The LFIB receives an entry from LDP, where label 24 is mapped to label 17. When the
data plane receives a packet labeled with a 24, it replaces label 24 with label 17 and
forwards the packet through the appropriate interfaces.
Note
1-12
In the example, both packet flow and routing and label updates are from left to right.
LSRs:
Architecture of Edge LSRs
MPLS v2.21-12
Besides forwarding labeled packets, edge LSRs also forward IP packets into and out of the
MPLS domain.
These combinations are possible on an edge LSR:
A received IP packet is forwarded based on the IP destination address (sent as an IP
packet.)
A received IP packet is labeled based on the IP destination address and is forwarded as a
labeled packet.
A received labeled packet is forwarded after the label is swapped (sent as a labeled packet).
A received labeled packet is forwarded as an IP packet after the label is removed.
These scenarios are possible if the network is not configured properly:
A received labeled packet is dropped if the label is not found in the LFIB table, even if the
IP destination exists in the IP forwarding tablealso called the FIB.
A received IP packet is dropped if the destination is not found in the FIB table, even if
there is an MPLS label-switched path toward the destination.
MPLS Concepts
1-13
Example: Basic MPLS

The figure illustrates a situation in which the intermediary router in the MPLS core does not
have to perform a time-consuming routing lookup. Instead, this router simply swaps a label
with another label (25 is replaced by 23) and forwards the packet based on the swapped label
(23).
Basic MPLS Example
MPLS core routers swap labels and forward packets based on simple
label lookups.
MPLS edge routers also perform a routing table lookup, and add or
remove labels.
MPLS v2.21-13
At the egress LSR, the MPLS label is removed, and an IP packet is forwarded out of the MPLS
domain.
In larger networks, the result of MPLS labeling is that only the edge routers perform a routing
lookup. The core routers simply forward packets based on the labels.
1-14
Summary
This topic summarizes the key points that were discussed in this lesson.
Summary
Traditional IP routing forwards packets based on the
destination address.
MPLS forwards packets based on labels.
MPLS supports multiple applications.
MPLS has two major architectural components:
Control plane (exchanges routing information, exchanges
labels)
Data plane (forwards packets)
LSRs implement label exchange protocols and primarily
forward packets based on labels. The role of Edge LSRs is
primarily to forward packets into and out of the MPLS
domain.
MPLS v2.21-14
MPLS Concepts
1-15
1-16
Lesson 2
Introducing MPLS Labels and

Label Stacks
Overview
This lesson explains the four fields that make up a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
label. This lesson also explains how label stacking is used and how labels are forwarded in
frame-mode environments.
To fully understand MPLS, it is necessary to have a clear understanding of the format of an
MPLS label, and the definition for each field in that label. You also need to know exactly how
information is passed from node to node in the network.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe MPLS labels and MPLS label stacks,
including the format of the MPLS label and also when and why a label stack is created. This
ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the features of MPLS labels
Describe the format and fields of an MPLS label
Describe where MPLS labels are inserted in an IP packet
Describe the features of an MPLS label stack
Describe MPLS label operations
What Are MPLS Labels?

This topic describes the features of MPLS labels.
MPLS Labels
Are 4 byte identifiers used for forwarding
decisions
Define the destination and services for a packet
Identify a forwarding equivalence class (FEC)
Have local significance
Each LSR independently maps a label to an FEC
in a label binding.
Label bindings are exchanged between LSRs.
MPLS v2.21-3
An MPLS label is a 4-byte, fixed-length, locally significant identifier that is used by network
core devices to make forwarding decisions for a packet. Labels define the destination and
services for each packet, and identify a forwarding equivalence class (FEC). The label put on a
particular packet represents the FEC to which the packet is assigned.
Labels have local significance to a label switch router (LSR). Each LSR in the network makes
an independent, local decision regarding which label value to use to represent an FEC. This
mapping is known as a label binding.
Each LSR informs its neighbors of the label bindings that it has made.
Note
1-18
Details on how the label binding are exchanged will be covered in the Label Assignment
and Distribution module.

An FEC is an integral part of MPLS forwarding.

An FEC is a group of packets forwarded:
In the same manner
Over the same path
With the same forwarding treatment
MPLS packet forwarding consists of:
Assigning a packet to a specific FEC
Determining the next hop of each FEC
MPLS forwarding is connection-oriented.
MPLS v2.21-4
The FEC is a group of IP packets that are forwarded in the same manner, over the same path,
and with the same forwarding treatment. An FEC might correspond to a destination IP
subnetwork, but it also might correspond to any traffic class that the edge LSR considers
significant. For example, all traffic with a certain value of IP precedence might constitute an
FEC.
MPLS packet forwarding consists of these two elements:
At the ingress to the MPLS network, packets are classified and assigned to a specific FEC
using a label. No further packet classification is done in the MPLS network.
Throughout the MPLS network, all packets in an FEC are forwarded using the next-hop
address for the FEC. The label value changes as the IP packet traverses the network. When
a labeled packet is sent from one LSR to the next-hop LSR, the label value carried by the
packet is the label value that the next-hop LSR assigned to represent the FEC of the packet.
Note
Details on MPLS forwarding will be discussed in the Frame-Mode MPLS Implementation on

Cisco IOS Platforms module.
MPLS uses FEC-based forwarding to evolve connectionless IP networks to connection-oriented

networks.
MPLS Concepts
1-19
What Is the MPLS Label Format?

This topic describes the format and fields of an MPLS label.
MPLS Label Format
MPLS uses a 32-bit label field that contains the

information that follows:
20-bit label (a number)
3-bit experimental field (typically used to carry IP precedence
value)
1-bit bottom-of-stack indicator (indicates whether this is the
last label before the IP header)
8-bit TTL (equal to the TTL in the IP header)
MPLS v2.21-5
A label contains the fields listed in this table.

Label Fields
1-20
Field
Description
This is the actual label. The values 0 to 15 are reserved.
This field is typically used to define a class of service (CoS) or IP

precedence value.
MPLS allows multiple labels to be inserted; this bit determines if

this label is the last label in the packet. If this bit is set (1), it
indicates that this is the last label.
This field has the same purpose as the time-to-live (TTL) field in
the IP header; it is used to prevent the indefinite looping of
packets.
Where Are MPLS Labels Inserted?

This topic describes where MPLS labels are inserted in an IP packet.
MPLS Labels
MPLS technology is intended to be used anywhere
regardless of Layer 1 media and Layer 2
encapsulation.
Frame-mode MPLS is MPLS over a frame-based
Layer 2 encapsulation
The label is inserted between the Layer 2 and
Layer 3 headers.
Cell-mode MPLS is MPLS over ATM.
The fields in the ATM header are used as the
label.
MPLS v2.21-6
MPLS is designed for use on virtually any media and Layer 2 encapsulation.
Frame-mode MPLS is the typical mode of MPLS, because most Layer 2 encapsulations are
frame-based. In frame-mode MPLS, the 32-bit label is inserted between the Layer 2 and Layer
3 headers.
ATM is a special case of Layer 2 encapsulation where fixed-length cells are used.
Note
If you are using ATM as a WAN link and the ATM switches do not act as LSRs, you are still
running frame-mode MPLS.
Cell-mode MPLS is MPLS using ATM Layer 2 encapsulation, where the ATM switch is
participating as an LSR. In cell-mode MPLS, a label cannot be inserted on every cell; therefore,
the virtual path identifier/virtual channel identifier (VPI/VCI) fields in the ATM header are
used as a label.
Note
Cell-mode MPLS is briefly mentioned here for reference purposes. This course will focus on
frame-mode MPLS, which is more prevalent in the industry.
MPLS Concepts
1-21
Example: MPLS Label InsertionFrame-Mode MPLS

The figure shows an edge router that receives a normal IP packet.
MPLS Labels: Frame-Mode MPLS
MPLS v2.21-7
The edge LSR then does these tasks:

The router performs routing lookup to determine the outgoing interface.
The router assigns and inserts a label between the Layer 2 frame header and the Layer 3
packet header, if the outgoing interface is enabled for MPLS and if a next-hop label for the
destination exists. This inserted label is also called the shim header.
The router then changes the Layer 2 protocol identifier (PID) or Ethertype value in the
Layer 2 frame header to indicate that this is a labeled packet.
The router sends the labeled packet.
Note
1-22
Other routers in the MPLS core simply forward packets based on the received label.
What Is an MPLS Label Stack?

This topic describes the features of an MPLS label stack.
MPLS Label Stack

Usually only one label is assigned to a packet, but
multiple labels in a label stack are supported.
These scenarios may produce more than one label:
MPLS VPNs (two labels): The top label points to the
egress router, and the second label identifies the VPN.
MPLS TE (two or more labels): The top label points to
the endpoint of the traffic engineering tunnel and the
second label points to the destination.
MPLS VPNs combined with MPLS TE (three or more
labels).
MPLS v2.21-8
Simple MPLS uses just one label in each packet. However, MPLS does allow multiple labels in
a label stack to be inserted in a packet.
These applications may add labels to packets:
MPLS Virtual Private Networks (VPNs): With MPLS VPNs, Multiprotocol Border
Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) is used to propagate a second label that is used in addition to
the one propagated by Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) or Tag Distribution Protocol
(TDP).
Cisco MPLS Traffic Engineering (MPLS TE): MPLS TE uses Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP) to establish label-switched path (LSP) tunnels. RSVP also propagates
labels that are used in addition to the one propagated by LDP or TDP.
A combination of these mechanisms and other advanced features might result in three or more
labels being inserted into one packet.
MPLS Concepts
1-23

This figure shows multiple labels in an MPLS label stack.
Outer label is used for switching the packet in the MPLS network
(points to TE destination)
Inner labels are used to separate packets at egress points (points
to egress router, and identifies VPN)
MPLS v2.21-10
The outer label is used to switch the MPLS packet across the network. In this case, the outer
layer is a traffic engineering (TE) label pointing to the endpoint of a TE tunnel.
The inner labels are ignored by the intermediary routers. In this case, the inner labels are used
to point to the egress router and to identify the VPN for the packet.
1-24

This figure shows the format of multiple labels in a frame-mode MPLS label stack.
The PID in a Layer 2 header specifies that the payload starts

with a label (labels) followed by an IP header.
The bottom-of-stack bit indicates whether the label is the last
label in the stack.
The receiving router uses the top label only.
MPLS v2.21-10
An MPLS PID in the Layer 2 header is used to identify every MPLS packet type. These
Ethertype values are used to identify Layer 3 protocols with most Layer 2 encapsulations:
Unlabeled IP unicast: PID = 0x0800 identifies that the frame payload is an IP packet.
Labeled IP unicast: PID = 0x8847 identifies that the frame payload is a unicast IP packet
with at least one label preceding the IP header. The bottom-of-stack bit indicates when the
IP header actually starts.
Labeled IP multicast: PID = 0x8848 identifies that the frame payload is a multicast IP
packet with at least one label preceding the IP header. The bottom-of-stack bit indicates
when the IP header actually starts.
The top label of the label stack appears first in the packet, and the bottom label appears last.
The bottom-of-stack bit in each MPLS label defines if the label is the last label in the packet. If
this bit is set to 1, it indicates that this is the last label.
MPLS Concepts
1-25
What Are MPLS Label Operations?

This topic describes MPLS label operations used when forwarding packets.
MPLS Label Operations

An LSR can perform these functions:
Insert (impose or push) a label or a stack of
labels on ingress edge LSR
Swap a label with a next-hop label or a stack of
labels in the core
Remove (pop) a label on egress edge LSR
MPLS v2.21-11
An IP packet going through an MPLS domain experiences the following:

On an ingress edge LSR, a label or a stack of labels is inserted (imposed). The label
corresponds to the assigned FEC for the packet.
On a core or interior LSR, the top label is swapped with a next-hop label or a stack of
labels.
At the egress edge LSR, the label is removed.
1-26
Example: MPLS Label OperationsFrame-Mode MPLS

This figure shows label operations in an MPLS network using frame-mode MPLS.
MPLS Label Operations: Frame Mode
On ingress, a label is assigned and imposed.

LSRs in the core swap labels based on the contents of the label
forwarding table.
On egress, the label is removed and a routing lookup is used to forward
the packet.
MPLS v2.21-12
All LSRs are capable of forwarding IP packets or labeled packets.

In this example, the ingress edge LSR performs a routing lookup and assigns a label.
The middle router simply swaps the label.
The egress edge LSR removes the label and optionally performs a routing lookup.
MPLS Concepts
1-27
Summary
Summary
An MPLS label is a 4 byte identifier used for
forwarding decisions.
A MPLS label corresponds to an FEC.
MPLS frame-mode labels are inserted between the
Layer 2 and Layer 3 headers.
MPLS supports multiple labels in one packet,
creating a label stack.
LSRs can perform these operations:
Insert (impose) a label on ingress edge LSR
Swap a label
Remove (pop) a label on egress edge LSR
1-28
MPLS v2.21-13
Lesson 3
Identifying MPLS Applications

Overview
This lesson describes some of the different types of applications with which you can use
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS). These applications are discussed at a high level.
Interaction among multiple applications is also discussed because there are various methods for
exchanging labels. Regardless of the differences in the control plane, all of the applications use
a single label-forwarding engine in the data plane.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the different MPLS applications with
which you can use MPLS. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the various applications that are used with MPLS
Describe the features of MPLS unicast IP routing
Describe the features of MPLS multicast IP routing
Describe MPLS use in VPNs
Describe MPLS use in TE environments
Describe MPLS use in QoS environments
Describe AToM
Identify the interactions that occur between various MPLS applications
Which Applications Are Used with MPLS?

This topic describes various applications that are used with MPLS.
MPLS Applications
MPLS is already used in many different
applications:
Unicast IP routing
Multicast IP routing
MPLS TE
QoS
MPLS VPNs (course focus)
AToM
MPLS v2.11-3
MPLS is a technology used for the delivery of IP services. MPLS can be used in different
applications, as outlined here:
Unicast IP routing is the most common application for MPLS.
Multicast IP routing is treated separately because of different forwarding requirements.
MPLS TE is an add-on to MPLS that provides better and more intelligent link use.
Differentiated QoS can also be provided with MPLS.
MPLS VPNs are implemented using labels to allow overlapping address space between
VPNs. MPLS VPN is the focus of this course.
AToM is a solution for transporting Layer 2 packets over an IP or MPLS backbone.
1-30
What Is MPLS Unicast IP Routing?

This topic describes the features of MPLS unicast IP routing.
MPLS Unicast IP Routing

Basic MPLS service supports unicast IP routing.
MPLS unicast IP routing provides enhancement over
traditional IP routing.
The ability to use labels for packet forwarding:
Label-based forwarding provides greater efficiency.
The FEC corresponds to a destination address stored
in the IP routing table.
Labels support connection-oriented services.
The capability to carry a stack of labels assigned to a
packet:
Label stacks allow implementation of enhanced
applications.
MPLS v2.11-4
Basic MPLS supports unicast IP routing.

There are two significant enhancements that MPLS unicast IP routing provides over traditional
IP routing:
The ability to use labels for packet forwarding
The capability to carry a stack of labels assigned to a packet
As discussed in the Introducing Basic MPLS Concepts lesson, using labels for packet
forwarding increases efficiency in network core devices because the label swapping operation
is less CPU intensive than a routing lookup. MPLS can also provide connection-oriented
services to IP traffic due to forwarding equivalence class (FEC)-based forwarding.
Note
The MPLS unicast IP traffic FEC corresponds to a destination network stored in the IP
routing table.
MPLS support for a label stack allows implementation of enhanced applications, such as
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), traffic engineering (TE), and enhanced quality of service
(QoS).
MPLS Concepts
1-31
What Is MPLS Multicast IP Routing?

This topic describes the features of MPLS multicast IP routing.
MPLS Multicast IP Routing

MPLS can also support multicast IP routing:
A dedicated protocol is not needed to support multicast
traffic across an MPLS domain.
Cisco Protocol Independent Multicast Version 2 with
extensions for MPLS is used to propagate routing
information and labels.
The FEC is equal to a destination multicast address stored
in the multicast routing table.
MPLS v2.11-5
Multicast IP routing can also use MPLS. Cisco Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Version
2 with extensions for MPLS is used to propagate routing information and labels.
The FEC is equal to a destination multicast address.
1-32
What Are MPLS VPNs?

This topic describes MPLS use in VPNs.
MPLS VPNs
MPLS VPNs are highly scaleable and support IP services
such as:
Multicast
Quality of QoS
Telephony support within a VPN
Centralized services including content and web hosting to a VPN
Networks are learned via an IGP from a customer or via BGP

from other MPLS backbone routers.
Labels are propagated via MP-BGP. Two labels are used:
The top label points to the egress router.
The second label identifies the outgoing interface on
the egress router or a routing table where a routing lookup is
performed.
FEC is equivalent to a VPN site descriptor or VPN routing table.

MPLS v2.11-6
MPLS enables highly scaleable VPN services to be supported. For each MPLS VPN user, the
network appears to function as a private IP backbone over which the user can reach other sites
within the VPN organization, but not the sites of any other VPN organization. MPLS VPNs are
a common application for service providers. Building VPNs in Layer 3 allows delivery of
targeted services to a group of users represented by a VPN.
MPLS VPNs are seen as private intranets, and support IP services such as those listed here:
Multicast
QoS
Telephony support within a VPN
Centralized services including content and web hosting to a VPN
Customer networks are learned via an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) (Open Shortest Path
First [OSPF], External Border Gateway Protocol [EBGP], Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing
Protocol [EIGRP], Routing Information Protocol version 2 [RIPv2], or static) from a customer,
or via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) from other MPLS backbone routers.
MPLS Concepts
1-33
MPLS VPNs use two labels:

The top label points to the egress router.
The second label identifies the outgoing interface on the egress router or a routing table
where a routing lookup is performed.
Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) is needed in the top label to link edge label switch routers
(LSRs) with a single label-switched path (LSP) tunnel. Multiprotocol BGP (MP-BGP) is used
in the second label to propagate VPN routing information and labels across the MPLS domain.
The MPLS VPN FEC is equivalent to a VPN site descriptor or VPN routing table.
1-34
What Is MPLS TE?

This topic describes MPLS use in TE environments.
MPLS TE
MPLS TE supports constraints-based routing
MPLS TE enables the network administrator to
Control traffic flow in the network
Reduce congestion in the network
Make best use of network resources
MPLS TE requires OSPF or IS-IS with extensions to hold the
entire network topology in their databases.
OSPF and IS-IS should also have some additional information
about network resources and constraints.
RSVP is used to establish TE tunnels and to propagate labels.
MPLS v2.11-7
Another application of MPLS is TE. MPLS TE enables an MPLS backbone to replicate and
expand upon the TE capabilities of Layer 2 ATM and Frame Relay networks. MPLS TE
supports constraint-based routing in which the path for a traffic flow is the shortest path that
meets the resource requirements (constraints) of the traffic flow. Factors such as bandwidth
requirements, media requirements, and the priority of one traffic flow versus another can be
taken into account. TE capabilities enable the administrator of a network to accomplish these
goals:
Control traffic flow in the network
Reduce congestion in the network
Make best use of network resources
MPLS TE has these special requirements:
Every LSR must see the entire topology of the network (only OSPF and Intermediate
System-to-Intermediate System [IS-IS] hold the entire topology).
Every LSR needs additional information about links in the network. This information
includes available resources and constraints. OSPF and IS-IS have extensions to propagate
this additional information.
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is used to establish TE tunnels and to propagate the
labels.
Every edge LSR must be able to create an LSP tunnel on demand. RSVP is used to create an
LSP tunnel and to propagate labels for TE tunnels.
MPLS Concepts
1-35
What Is MPLS QoS?

This topic describes MPLS use in QoS environments.
MPLS QoS
MPLS QoS provides differentiated types of service
across an MPLS network.
MPLS QoS offers:
Packet classification
Congestion avoidance
Congestion management.
MPLS QoS is an extension to unicast IP routing

that provides differentiated services.
Extensions to LDP are used to propagate different
labels for different classes.
The FEC is a combination of a destination network
and a class of service.
MPLS v2.11-8
MPLS QoS enables network administrators to provide differentiated types of service across an
MPLS network. MPLS QoS offers packet classification, congestion avoidance, and congestion
management.
Note
MPLS QoS functions map nearly one-for-one to IP QoS functions on all interface types.
Differentiated QoS is achieved by using MPLS experimental bits or by creating separate LSP
tunnels for different classes. Extensions to LDP are used to create multiple LSP tunnels for the
same destination (one for each class).
The FEC for MPLS QoS is equal to a combination of a destination network and a class of
service (CoS).
1-36
What Is AToM?
This topic describes Any Transport over MPLS (AToM).
Any Transport over MPLS

AToM transports Layer 2 traffic over an IP or MPLS
backbone.
AToM accommodates many types of Layer 2 frames,
including Ethernet, Frame Relay, ATM, PPP, and
HDLC.
AToM enables connectivity between existing data link
layer (Layer 2) networks by using a single, integrated,
packet-based network infrastructure.
AToM forwarding uses two-level labels.
AToM also offers performance, scalability, and other
MPLS enhancements such as TE, fast reroute, and
QoS.
MPLS v2.11-9
AToM is the Cisco solution for transporting Layer 2 traffic over an IP or MPLS backbone.
AToM extends the usability of an IP or MPLS backbone by enabling it to offer both Layer 2
and Layer 3 services. The AToM product set accommodates many types of Layer 2 frames,
including Ethernet, Frame Relay, ATM, PPP, and High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC),
across various Cisco router platforms including Cisco 7200, 7400, 7500, 7600, 10700, and
12000 Series Routers.
AToM enables service providers to supply connectivity between customer sites with existing
data link layer (Layer 2) networks by using a single, integrated, packet-based network
infrastructure.
AToM uses a directed LDP session between edge LSRs (or provider edge (PE) routers) for
setting up and maintaining connections. Directed LDP is unicast based, and establishes a TCP
session across potentially multiple hops. Forwarding occurs through the use of two-level labels,
switching between the PE routers. The external label (tunnel label), routes the packet over the
MPLS backbone to the egress PE from the ingress PE. The virtual circuit (VC) label determines
the egress interface, and it binds the Layer 2 egress interface to the tunnel label.
AToM also offers performance, scalability, and new value-added services using other MPLS
enhancements such as TE, fast reroute, and QoS.
Note
A detailed discussion of AToM is beyond the scope of this course. A general overview of
AToM with links to more detailed information may be found at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6646/products_ios_protocol_option_home.html
A technical overview of AToM may be found at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6603/products_white_paper09186a00804fbda5.shtml
MPLS Concepts
1-37
AToM Examples
This topic provides an overview of some AToM technologies.
Examples of AToM
Ethernet over MPLS (EoMPS)
Supports the transport of Ethernet frames across an MPLS
core for a particular Ethernet or virtual LAN (VLAN) segment
Applications include TLS and VPLS
ATM over MPLS

Supports two types of transport mechanisms of ATM frames
across an MPLS core:
AAL5-over-MPLS mode
Cell-relay mode
Frame Relay over MPLS

Supports transport of Frame Relay packets over MPLS core
Carries BECN, FECN, DE, and C/R in a control word header
MPLS v2.11-10
Ethernet over MPLS (EoMPLS) is the transport of Ethernet frames across an MPLS core. It
transports all frames received on a particular Ethernet or VLAN segment, regardless of the
destination MAC information. It does not perform MAC learning or MAC lookup for
forwarding packets from the Ethernet interface. Some applications include Transparent LAN
Services (TLS) between facilities, and Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS), which is a class
of VPN that supports the connection of multiple sites in a single bridged domain over a
managed IP or MPLS network.
ATM over MPLS is another supported technology. There are two types of transport
mechanisms for ATM over MPLS:
ATM adaptation layer 5 (AAL5)-over-MPLS mode: ATM interface assembles the
AAL5 protocol data unit (PDU) with either AAL5 Subnetwork Access Protocol (AAL5
SNAP) or AAL5 multiplexer (AAL5 MUX) encapsulation at the boundary and transports it
across the network as a single MPLS packet.
Cell-relay mode: The ATM interface receives cells and transports them across the MPLS
core. Cell relay with cell packing is used to send multiple cells in one MPLS frame,
improving the efficiency of cell transport.
Frame Relay over MPLS (FRoMPLS) is also supported. In this application, traffic is
encapsulated in MPLS packets and forwarded across the MPLS network. When encapsulating
FRoMPLS, the Frame Relay header and the frame check sequence (FCS) are stripped from the
packet. The bits for backward explicit congestion notification (BECN), forward explicit
congestion notification (FECN), discard eligibility (DE), and command/response (C/R) are
carried across the MPLS network in the control word header.
1-38
What Are the Interactions Between MPLS

Applications?
This topic identifies the interactions that occur between MPLS applications.
Interactions Between MPLS Applications
MPLS v2.11-11
The figure shows the overall architecture when multiple applications are used.
Regardless of the application, the functionality is always split into the control plane and the
data (forwarding) plane, as discussed here:
The applications may use a different routing protocol and a different label exchange
protocol in the control plane.
The applications all use a common label-switching data (forwarding) plane.
Edge LSR Layer 3 data planes may differ to support label imposition and disposition.
In general, a label is assigned to an FEC.
MPLS Concepts
1-39
Summary
Summary
MPLS is used in many applications: unicast IP routing, multicast IP
routing, MPLS VPNs, MPLS TE, QoS, and AToM.
Basic MPLS provides unicast IP routing using an IP routing
protocol and a label distribution protocol.
MPLS multicast IP routing does not need a dedicated protocol to
support multicast traffic across an MPLS domain.
MPLS VPNs provide highly scaleable VPNs providing IP services.
MPLS TE supports constraints-based routing.
MPLS QoS extends unicast IP routing and provides differentiated
services.
AToM transports Layer 2 traffic over an IP or MPLS backbone.
Some MPLS applications may use a different routing and label
exchange protocol; however, the applications all use the same
label-forwarding engine.
1-40
MPLS v2.11-12
Module Summary
This topic summarizes the key points that were discussed in this module.
Module Summary
MPLS is a new forwarding mechanism in which
packets are forwarded based on labels.
MPLS uses a 32-bit label format, which is inserted
between Layer 2 and Layer 3. Labels can be
inserted, swapped, or removed.
MPLS applications can use different routing and
label exchange protocols while still using the same
label-forwarding engine.
MPLS v2.21-1
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) forwards packets based on labels. MPLS can be
implemented in ATM networks to provide optimal routing across Layer 2 ATM switches.
MPLS uses the concept of a label stack where multiple labels are supported in one packet. You
can use MPLS in many applications. When many MPLS applications are being used, all
applications use a single label-forwarding engine.
References
For additional information, refer to these resources:
RFC 3031, Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3031.txt
RFC 3032, MPLS Label Stack Encoding
http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3032.tx.
MPLS Concepts
1-41
Module Self-Check
Use the questions here to review what you learned in this module. The correct answers and
solutions are found in the Module Self-Check Answer Key.
Q1)
What are three foundations of traditional IP routing? (Choose three.) (Source:

Introducing Basic MPLS Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q2)
Which three statements are true? (Choose three.) (Source: Introducing Basic MPLS
Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q3)
C)
D)
data plane
forwarding plane
system plane
control plane
The MPLS label field consists of how many bits? (Source: Introducing Basic MPLS
Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
1-42
Traditional IP routing does not support traffic engineering.

Traditional IP routing would force all traffic to use the same path based on
destination.
Using MPLS TE, traffic can be forwarded based on parameters such as QoS
and source address.
MPLS does not support traffic engineering.
The label distribution protocol (either LDP or TDP) is the responsibility of the _____.
(Source: Introducing Basic MPLS Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q5)
MPLS uses labels to forward packets.

MPLS works only in IP networks.
MPLS labels can correspond to a Layer 3 destination address, QoS, source
address, or Layer 2 circuit.
MPLS does not require a routing table lookup on core routers.
In MPLS TE, which two statements are true? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing Basic
MPLS Concepts)
A)
B)
Q4)
Routing protocols are used on all devices to distribute routing information.

Regardless of protocol, routers always forward packets based on the IP
destination address only (except for using PBR).
Routing lookups are performed on every router.
Routing is performed by assigning a label to an IP destination.
64 bits
32 bits
16 bits
8 bits
Q6)
Which two statements are true? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing Basic MPLS
Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q7)
MPLS labels can correspond to which type of addresses? (Source: Introducing Basic
MPLS Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q8)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
In frame-mode MPLS, labels are typically inserted between the Layer 2 header
and the Layer 3 header.
MPLS labels are inserted after the Layer 3 header in frame-mode MPLS.
In cell-mode MPLS, MPLS uses the VPI/VCI fields as the label.
MPLS will not work in ATM networks.
MPLS labels are 32 bits.
MPLS labels are 64 bits.
How long is the actual MPLS label contained in the MPLS label field? (Source:
Introducing MPLS Labels and Label Stacks)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q11)
control plane
ground plane
data plane
routing plane
Which three statements are true? (Choose three.) (Source: Introducing MPLS Labels
and Label Stacks)
A)
Q10)
Layer 2 source addresses

Layer 3 source addresses
Layer 2 destination addresses
Layer 3 destination addresses
Which term is best described as a simple label-based forwarding engine? (Source:

Introducing Basic MPLS Concepts)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q9)
An edge LSR is a device that inserts labels on packets or removes labels, and
forwards packets based on labels.
An LSR is a device that primarily labels packets or removes labels.
An LSR is a device that forwards packets based on labels.
An end LSR is a device that primarily inserts labels on packets or removes
labels.
32 bits long
8 bits long
16 bits long
20 bits long
Which two statements are true? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing MPLS Labels and
Label Stacks)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Usually one label is assigned to an IP packet.

Usually two labels are assigned to an IP packet.
Two labels will be assigned to an MPLS VPN packet.
One label will be assigned to an MPLS VPN packet.
MPLS Concepts
1-43
Q12)
What are two normal functions of an edge LSR? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing
MPLS Labels and Label Stacks)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q13)
Cisco routers automatically assign the IP precedence value to which field in the MPLS
label? (Source: Introducing MPLS Labels and Label Stacks)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q14)
QoS is achieved by using the protocol bits in the MPLS label field.
QoS is achieved by using the TTL bits in the MPLS label field.
QoS is achieved by using the experimental bits in the MPLS label field.
At this time, QoS is not supported by MPLS.
In MPLS VPN networks, which statement is true? (Source: Identifying MPLS

Applications)
A)
B)
C)
D)
1-44
RSVP is used to create an LSP tunnel.

RSVP propagates labels for TE tunnels.
RSVP assigns labels for TE tunnels.
RSVP is not used to create an LSP tunnel.
When MPLS is used for QoS, which statement is true? (Source: Identifying MPLS
Applications)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q17)
unlabeled IP unicast (PID = 0x0800)

labeled IP unicast (PID = 0x0847)
unlabeled IP multicast (PID = 0x8846)
labeled IP multicast (PID = 0x8848)
Which two statements are true regarding RSVP? (Choose two.) (Source: Identifying
MPLS Applications)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q16)
TTL field
experimental field
top-of-stack field
The IP precedence value is not copied to the MPLS field; this value remains in
the IP packet.
What is NOT a valid Ethertype used to identify Layer 3 protocols with most Layer 2
encapsulations? (Source: Introducing MPLS Labels and Label Stacks)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q15)
impose labels at the ingress router

impose labels at the egress router
pop labels at the ingress router
pop labels at the egress router
Labels are propagated via LDP or TDP.

Next-hop addresses instead of labels are used in an MPLS VPN network.
Labels are propagated via MP-BGP.
Two labels are used; the top label identifies the VPN, and the bottom label
identifies the egress router.
Q18)
Which two statements are true regarding interactions between MPLS applications?
(Choose two.) (Source: Identifying MPLS Applications)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q19)
The forwarding plane is the same for all applications.

Differences exist in the forwarding plane depending on the MPLS application.
The control plane is the same for all applications.
Differences exist in the control plane depending on the MPLS application.
In MPLS VPNs, what does the FEC refer to? (Source: Identifying MPLS Applications)
A)
B)
C)
D)
IP destination network
MPLS ingress router
core of the MPLS network
VPN destination network
MPLS Concepts
1-45
1-46
Q1)
A, B, C
Q2)
A, C, D
Q3)
B, C
Q4)
Q5)
Q6)
A, C
Q7)
Q8)
Q9)
A, C, E
Q10)
Q11)
A, C
Q12)
A, D
Q13)
Q14)
Q15)
A, B
Q16)
Q17)
Q18)
A, D
Q19)
Module 2
Label Assignment and

Distribution
Overview
This module describes the assignment and distribution of labels in a Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS) network, including neighbor discovery and session establishment
procedures. Label distribution, control, and retention modes will also be covered. This module
also covers the functions and benefits of penultimate hop popping (PHP).
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe how MPLS labels are assigned and
distributed. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe how LDP neighbors are discovered
Describe how the LIB, FIB, and LFIB tables are populated with label information
Describe how convergence occurs in a frame-mode MPLS network
Describe MPLS label allocation, distribution, and retention modes
2-2
Lesson 1

Overview
This lesson takes a detailed look at the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) neighbor discovery
process via hello messages and the type of information that is exchanged. The lesson also
describes the events that occur during the negotiation phase of LDP session establishment and
concludes with the nonadjacent neighbor discovery process.
This lesson provides an understanding of how an LDP neighbor is discovered and what type of
information is sent back and forth between two neighbors. The lesson also discusses situations
in which the neighbor is not directly connected to a peer. This information will provide a
further understanding of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technology.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how LDP neighbors are discovered.
This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe how LDP sessions are established between adjacent neighbors
Describe the contents of an LDP hello message
Describe negotiating label space as it applies to LDP session establishment
Describe how LDP neighbors are discovered
Describe the process of LDP session negotiation between LDP neighbors
Describe how LDP sessions are established between nonadjacent neighbors
Establishing an Adjacent LDP Session

This topic describes how LDP sessions are established between neighbors.
LDP Neighbor Session Establishment

LDP establishes a session in two steps:
Hello messages are periodically sent on all MPLS-enabled
interfaces.
MPLS-enabled routers respond to received hello
messages by attempting to establish a session with the
source of the hello messages.
LDP link hello message is a UDP packet sent to the all
routers on this subnet multicast address (224.0.0.2).
TCP is used to establish the session.
Both TCP and UDP use well-known LDP port number 646.
MPLS v2.22-3
LDP is a standard protocol used to exchange labels between adjacent routers.

Note
Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP) is an older Cisco proprietary protocol that has the same
functionality as LDP. Although the remainder of this lesson will focus on LDP, it should be
noted that TDP, as the predecessor of LDP, works in a similar fashion.
LDP periodically sends hello messages (every 5 seconds). If the label switch router (LSR) is
adjacent or one hop from its neighbor, the LSR sends out LDP link hello messages to all the
routers on the subnet as User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets with a multicast destination
address of 224.0.0.2 (all routers on a subnet) and destination port number of 646. (TDP uses
destination port 711.)
A neighboring LSR enabled for LDP will respond by opening a TCP session with the same
destination port number 646, and the two routers begin to establish an LDP session through
unicast TCP.
2-4
What Are LDP Hello Messages?

This topic describes the contents of an LDP link hello message.
LDP Link Hello Message
Hello messages are sent to all routers reachable through an

interface.
LDP uses well-known port number 646 with UDP for hello
messages.
A 6-byte LDP identifier (TLV) identifies the router
(first 4 bytes) and label space (last 2 bytes).
The source address used for an LDP session can be set by
adding the transport address TLV to the hello message.
MPLS v2.22-4
The contents of an LDP link hello message are as follows:

Destination IP address (224.0.0.2), which reaches all routers on the subnetwork
Destination port, which equals the LDP well-known port number 646
The actual hello message, which may optionally contain a transport address type, length,
value (TLV) to instruct the peer to open the TCP session to the transport address instead of
the source address found in the IP header
The LDP identifier (LDP ID) is used to uniquely identify the neighbor and the label space.
Note
Label space defines the way MPLS assigns labels to destinations. Label space can either be
per-platform or per-interface.
Multiple LDP sessions can be established between a pair of LSRs if they use multiple label
spaces.
2006, Cisco Systems, Inc.
2-5
Example: Per-Platform Label Space

This example illustrates per-platform label space.
Label Space: Per-Platform
The label forwarding information base (LFIB) on an LSR does not

contain an incoming interface.
The same label can be used on any interface and is announced to all
adjacent LSRs.
The label is announced to adjacent LSRs only once and can be used
on any link.
Per-platform label space is less secure than per-interface
label space.
MPLS v2.22-5
Per-platform label space is used with frame-mode MPLS, where one label is assigned to a
destination network and sent to all LDP peers. This label can then be used on any incoming
interface. The per-platform label space minimizes the number of LDP sessions and allows
upstream label-switched path (LSP) tunnels to span parallel links, because the same label is
used on all of those links. However, per-platform label space is less secure than per-interface
label space, because untrusted routers could use labels that were never allocated to them.
2-6

This topic describes negotiating label space as it applies to LDP session establishment.
LSRs establish one LDP session per label space.

Per-platform label space requires only one LDP
session, even if there are multiple parallel links
between a pair of LSRs.
Per-platform label space is announced by setting
the label space ID to 0, for example:
LDP ID = 1.0.0.1:0
MPLS v2.22-6
If a pair of routers is connected over two or more parallel links and uses frame-mode MPLS,
the routers try to establish multiple sessions by using the same LDP ID. Because the routers are
using per-platform label space, this action will result in only one session remaining; the other
session will be broken.
Per-platform label space is identified by setting the label space ID to 0 in the LDP ID field.
For all frame-mode interfaces, only one LDP session between a pair of LSRs is used because
frame-mode MPLS uses per-platform label space.
2-7

This topic describes how LDP neighbors are discovered.
LDP Neighbor Discovery
An LDP session is established from the router with the higher

IP address.
MPLS v2.22-7
Example: LDP Neighbor Discovery

In the figure, three out of four routers periodically send out LDP hello messages (the fourth
router is not MPLS-enabled).
Routers that have the higher IP addresses must initiate the TCP session.
Note
The highest IP address of all loopback interfaces on a router is used. If no loopback

interfaces are configured on the router, the highest IP address of a configured interface that
was operational at LDP startup is used.
After the TCP session is established, routers will keep sending LDP hello messages to
potentially discover new peers or to identify failures.
2-8
Negotiating LDP Sessions

This topic describes the process of LDP neighbor session negotiation between LDP neighbors.
LDP Session Negotiation
Peers first exchange initialization messages.

The session is ready to exchange label mappings after
receiving the first keepalive.
MPLS v2.22-8
LDP session negotiation is a three-step process, as follows:

Step 1
Establish the TCP session.
Step 2
Exchange initialization messages.
Step 3
Exchange initial keepalive messages.
Note
LDP keepalives are sent every 60 seconds.
After these steps have occurred, the two peers will start exchanging labels for networks that
they have in their main routing tables.
2-9
Discovering Nonadjacent Neighbors

This topic describes how LDP discovers nonadjacent neighbors.
LDP Discovery of Nonadjacent Neighbors

LDP neighbor discovery of nonadjacent neighbors
differs from normal discovery only in the
addressing of hello packets:
Hello packets use unicast IP addresses instead
of multicast addresses.
When a neighbor is discovered, the mechanism to
establish a session is the same.
MPLS v2.22-9
If the LSR is more than one hop from its neighbor, it is not directly connected or adjacent to its
neighbor. The LSR can be configured with the mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vrf-name] ip-address
targeted command to send a directed hello message as a unicast UDP packet specifically
addressed to the nonadjacent neighbor LSR. The directed hello message is called an LDP
targeted hello.
The rest of the session negotiation is the same as for adjacent routers. The nondirectly
connected LSR will respond to the hello message by opening a unicast TCP session with the
same destination port number 646, and the two routers begin to establish an LDP session. (If
the path between two LSRs has been traffic engineered and has LDP enabled, the LDP session
between them is called a targeted session.)
2-10
Example: Applications Using Targeted LDP Sessions

This figure lists some applications that use targeted LDP sessions.
Targeted LDP Session Applications

MPLS Fast Reroute (FRR)
MPLS Nonstop Forwarding (NSF)
MPLS LDP Session Protection
MPLS v2.22-10
Here are some applications that use targeted LDP sessions:

MPLS Fast Reroute (FRR), which is the ability to locally patch traffic onto a backup tunnel
in case of a link or node failure with a failover time of 50 ms or lower
MPLS Nonstop Forwarding (NSF), which allows a router to recover from disruption in
control plane service (specifically, the LDP component) without losing its MPLS
forwarding state
MPLS LDP Session Protection, which provides faster LDP convergence when a link
recovers following an outage by maintaining LDP bindings for a period of time
2-11
Summary
Summary
UDP multicast is used to discover adjacent LDP
neighbors, while TCP is used to establish a session.
LDP hello messages contain an identifier field that
uniquely identifies the neighbor and the label space.
Per-platform label space requires only one LDP session.
An LDP session is initiated in TCP from the higher IP
address router.
LDP session negotiation is a three-step process:
establishing the TCP session, exchanging initialization
messages, and exchanging initial keepalive messages.
Nonadjacent neighbor discovery is accomplished by
using unicast IP addresses instead of multicast.
2-12
MPLS v2.22-11
Lesson 2
Introducing Typical Label

Distribution in Frame-Mode
MPLS
Overview
This lesson discusses how label allocation and distribution function in a frame-mode network.
Also covered are penultimate hop popping (PHP) and how the Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) data structures are built. This lesson is essential to understanding the basic
fundamentals of how information gets distributed and placed into the appropriate tables for
both labeled and unlabeled packet usage.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how the Label Information Base
(LIB), Forwarding Information Base (FIB), and label forwarding information base (LFIB)
tables are populated with label information. This ability includes being able to meet these
objectives:
Describe how labels are propagated across a network
Describe the function of LSPs
Describe the function of PHP
Describe the impact that IP aggregation has on LSPs
Describe how labels are allocated in a frame-mode MPLS network
Describe how MPLS labels are distributed and advertised in a frame-mode network
Describe how the LFIB table is populated in an MPLS network
Describe how IP packets cross an MPLS network
Describe how frame-mode loops are detected
Describe the approaches for assigning labels to networks
Propagating Labels Across a Network

This topic describes how labels are propagated across a network.
MPLS Unicast IP Routing Architecture

MPLS introduces a label field that is used for
forwarding decisions.
Although labels are locally significant, they have to be
advertised to directly reachable peers.
One option would be to include this parameter in
existing IP routing protocols.
The other option is to create a new protocol to
exchange labels.
The second option has been used because there are
too many existing IP routing protocols that would have
to be modified to carry labels.
MPLS v2.22-3
One application of MPLS is unicast IP routing. A label is assigned to destination IP networks

and is later used to label packets sent toward those destinations.
Note
In MPLS terminology, a forwarding equivalence class (FEC) in MPLS unicast IP routing

equals an IP destination network.
Standard or vendor-specific routing protocols are used to advertise IP routing information.

MPLS adds a new piece of information that must be exchanged between adjacent routers.
Here are the two possible approaches to propagating this additional information (labels)
between adjacent routers:
Extend the functionality of existing routing protocols
Create a new protocol dedicated to exchanging labels
The first approach requires much more time and effort because of the large number of different
routing protocols: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-to-Intermediate
System (IS-IS), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), Interior Gateway
Routing Protocol (IGRP), Routing Information Protocol (RIP), and so on. The first approach
also causes interoperability problems between routers that support this new functionality and
those that do not. Therefore, the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) selected the second
approach.
2-14

Architecture (Cont.)
MPLS v2.22-4
Example: Building Blocks for IP Forwarding

The figure shows the building blocks used by routers to perform traditional IP forwarding.
The control plane consists of a routing protocol that exchanges routing information and
maintains the contents of the main routing table. When combined with Cisco Express
Forwarding (CEF), the IP forwarding table in the data plane forwards the packets through the
router.
The Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) in the control plane exchanges labels and stores them in
the Label Information Base (LIB). This information is then used in the data plane to provide
MPLS functionality, as follows:
A label is added to the IP forwarding table (FIB) to map an IP prefix to a next-hop label.
A locally generated label is added to the LFIB and mapped to a next-hop label.
These forwarding scenarios are possible when MPLS is enabled on a router:
An incoming IP packet is forwarded by using the FIB table and sent out as an IP packet
(the usual CEF switching).
An incoming IP packet is forwarded by using the FIB table and sent out as a labeled IP
packet (the default action if there is a label assigned to the destination IP network).
An incoming labeled packet is forwarded by using the LFIB table and sent out as a labeled
IP packet.
An incoming labeled packet has its label removed, is inspected against the FIB table, and is
forwarded as an IP packet.
2-15

MPLS v2.22-5
Example: Using the FIB Table to Forward Packets

The figure shows a scenario in which IP packets are successfully forwarded by using the FIB
table.
Note
CEF is the only Layer 3 switching mechanism that uses the FIB table. CEF must be enabled
on all routers running MPLS, and on all ingress interfaces receiving unlabeled IP packets
that are to be propagated as labeled packets.
Labeled packets, on the other hand, are not forwarded because of a lack of information in the
LFIB table. Normal MPLS functionality prevents the forwarding from happening, because no
adjacent router is going to use a label unless this router previously advertised the label.
The example illustrates that label switching tries to use the LFIB table only if the incoming
packet is labeled, even if the destination address is reachable by using the FIB table.
Note
2-16
The LIB table will hold all locally generated labels by a label switch router (LSR). The LFIB
table contains labels that are used to switch packets.

MPLS v2.22-6
Example: Using LDP

The figure shows a router where OSPF is used to exchange IP routing information, and LDP is
used to exchange labels. The router has attached the locally significant label 25 to the prefix
10.0.0.0/8 and advertised it to its neighbors. The label 23 has been assigned to prefix 10.0.0.0/8
by the upstream neighbor of the router (to the right in the diagram).
When an incoming IP packet to 10.1.1.1 arrives, it is forwarded by using the FIB table, where a
next-hop label dictates that the outgoing packet should be labeled with label 23.
When a downstream router participating in MPLS receives a packet for 10.1.1.1, it will attach
the label 25 and forward it to this router. When this router receives the labeled packet, it will
swap the label value of 25 with a label value of 23 based on the LFIB table. With this process,
the incoming (locally significant) label 25 is swapped with the next-hop label 23.
2-17
What Are LSPs?

This topic describes the function of label-switched paths (LSPs).
Label-Switched Path
An LSP is a sequence of LSRs that forwards labeled packets
of a certain forwarding equivalence class.
MPLS unicast IP forwarding builds LSPs based on the
output of IP routing protocols.
LDP advertises labels only for individual segments in
the LSP.
LSPs are unidirectional.
Return traffic uses a different LSP (usually the reverse
path because most routing protocols provide
symmetrical routing).
An LSP can take a different path from the one chosen by an
IP routing protocol (MPLS TE).
MPLS v2.22-7
An LSP is a sequence of LSRs that forwards labeled packets for a particular FEC. Each LSR
swaps the top label in a packet traversing the LSP. An LSP is similar to Frame Relay or ATM
virtual circuits.
In MPLS unicast IP forwarding, the FECs are determined by destination networks found in the
main routing table. Therefore, an LSP is created for each entry found in the main routing table.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) entries are the only exceptions and are covered in the MPLS
Virtual Private Network Technology module.
An Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) is used to populate the routing tables in all routers in an
MPLS domain. LDP is used to propagate labels for these networks and build LSPs.
LSPs are unidirectional. Each LSP is created over the shortest path, selected by the IGP, toward
the destination network. Packets in the opposite direction use a different LSP. The return LSP is
usually over the same LSRs, except that packets form the LSP in the opposite order.
Cisco MPLS Traffic Engineering (MPLS TE) can be used to change the default IGP shortest
path selection.
2-18
LSP Building
The IP routing protocol determines the path.
MPLS v2.22-8
Example: IGP Propagates Routing Information

The figure illustrates how an IGP, such as OSPF, IS-IS, or EIGRP, propagates routing
information to all routers in an MPLS domain. Each router determines its own shortest path.
LDP, which propagates labels for those networks and routers, adds labels to the FIB and LFIB
tables.
2-19
In the figure below, an LSP is created for a particular network. This LSP starts on router A and
follows the shortest path, determined by the IGP.
LSP Building (Cont.)
LDP propagates labels to convert the path to an LSP.

MPLS v2.22-9
Example: LFIB and LIB Tables

The figure shows the contents of LFIB and LIB tables. Frame-mode MPLS uses a liberal label
retention mode, which means that each LSR keeps all labels received from LDP peers, even if
they are not the downstream peers for network X.
Liberal retention mode is evident after comparing the contents of the LIB and LFIB tables.
Only those labels that come from the next-hop router are inserted into the LFIB table.
Note
2-20
Notice that router G receives a pop label from final destination router I. The pop action
results in the removal of the label rather than swapping labels. This allows the regular IP
packet to be forwarded.
Propagating Labels Using PHP

This topic describes the function of PHP.
PHP: Before
Double lookup is not an optimal way of

forwarding labeled packets.
A label can be removed one
hop earlier.
MPLS v2.22-10
Example: PHPBefore
The figure illustrates how labels are propagated and used in a typical frame-mode MPLS
network. The check marks show which tables are used on individual routers. The egress router
in this example must do a lookup in the LFIB table to determine whether the label must be
removed and if a further lookup in the FIB table is required.
PHP removes the requirement for a double lookup to be performed on egress LSRs.
2-21
PHP: After
A label is removed on the router before the last

hop within an MPLS domain.
MPLS v2.22-11
Example: PHPAfter
The figure illustrates how a predefined label pop, which corresponds to the pop action in the
LFIB, is propagated on the first hop or the last hop, depending on the perspective. The term
pop means to remove the top label in the MPLS label stack instead of swapping it with the
next-hop label. The last router before the egress router therefore removes the top label.
PHP slightly optimizes MPLS performance by eliminating one LFIB lookup.
2-22
PHP
Penultimate hop popping optimizes MPLS performance
(one less LFIB lookup).
PHP does not work on ATM. (virtual path identifier/virtual
channel identifier cannot be removed.)
The pop or implicit null label uses a reserved value when
being advertised to a neighbor.
MPLS v2.22-12
PHP optimizes MPLS performance by reducing the number of table lookups on the egress
router.
Note
A pop label is encoded with a value of 3 for LDP or a value of 1 for Tag Distribution Protocol
(TDP). This label instructs upstream routers to remove the label instead of swapping it. What
will be displayed in the LIB table of the router will be imp-null rather than the value of 3 or
1.
2-23
What Is the Impact of IP Aggregation on LSPs?

This topic describes the impact that IP aggregation has on LSPs.
Impact of IP Aggregation on LSPs
IP aggregation breaks an LSP into two segments.

Router C is forwarding packets based on Layer 3 information.
MPLS v2.22-13
Example: MPLS IP Aggregation Problem

The figure illustrates a potential problem in an MPLS domain.
An IGP propagates the routing information for network 10.1.1.0/24 from router E to other
routers in the network. Router C uses a summarization mechanism to stop the proliferation of
all subnetworks of network 10.1.0.0/16. Only the summary network 10.1.0.0/16 is sent to
routers B and A.
LDP propagates labels concurrently with the IGP. The LSR that is the endpoint of an LSP
always propagates the pop label.
Router C has both networks in the routing table, as listed here:
10.1.1.0/24 (the original network)
10.1.0.0/16 (the summary)
Router C, therefore, sends a label, 55 in the example, for network 10.1.1.0/24 to router B.
Router C also sends a pop label for the new summary network 10.1.0.0/16 that originates on
this router. Router B, however, can use the pop label only for the summary network 10.1.0.0/16
because it has no routing information about the more specific network 10.1.1.0/24 because this
information was suppressed on router C.
2-24
The summarization results in two LSPs for destination network 10.1.1.0/24. The first LSP ends
on router C, where a routing lookup is required to assign the packet to the second LSP.
Impact of IP Aggregation on LSPs (Cont.)

IP aggregation breaks an LSP into two segments.
Aggregation should not be used where end-to-end LSPs are
required, such as with:
MPLS VPNs
MPLS TEs
MPLS-enabled ATM network
Transit BGP where core routers are not running BGP
MPLS v2.22-14
Aggregation should also not be used where an end-to-end LSP is required. Typical examples of
networks that require end-to-end LSPs are as follows:
An MPLS Virtual Private Network (VPN) backbone
A network that uses MPLS TE
An MPLS-enabled ATM network
A transit BGP autonomous system (AS) where core routers are not running BGP
2-25
Allocating Labels in a Frame-Mode MPLS

Network
This topic describes how labels are allocated and distributed in a frame-mode MPLS network.
Label Allocation in a Frame-Mode MPLS

Network
Label allocation and distribution in a frame-mode
MPLS network follows these steps:
IP routing protocols build the IP routing table.
Each LSR assigns a label to every destination in the IP
routing table independently.
LSRs announce their assigned labels to all other LSRs.
Every LSR builds its LIB, LFIB, and FIB data structures based
on received labels.
MPLS v2.22-15
Unicast IP routing and MPLS functionality can be divided into these steps:
Routing information exchange using standard or vendor-specific IP routing protocols
(OSPF, IS-IS, EIGRP, and so on)
Generation of local labels (One locally unique label is assigned to each IP destination found
in the main routing table and stored in the LIB table.)
Propagation of local labels to adjacent routers, where these labels might be used as nexthop labels (stored in the FIB and LFIB tables to enable label switching)
These data structures contain label information:
The LIB, in the control plane, is the database used by LDP where an IP prefix is assigned a
locally significant label that is mapped to a next-hop label that has been learned from a
downstream neighbor.
The LFIB, in the data plane, is the database used to forward labeled packets received by the
router. Local labels, previously advertised to upstream neighbors, are mapped to next-hop
labels, previously received from downstream neighbors.
The FIB, in the data plane, is the database used to forward unlabeled IP packets received by
the router. A forwarded packet is labeled if a next-hop label is available for a specific
destination IP network. Otherwise, a forwarded packet is not labeled.
2-26
Example: Building the FIB Table

The figure illustrates that all routers learn about network X via an IGP such as OSPF, IS-IS, or
EIGRP.

Network: Building the IP Forwarding Table
IP routing protocols are used to build IP routing tables on all

LSRs.
FIBs are initially built based on IP routing tables with no
labeling information.
MPLS v2.22-16
The FIB table on router A contains the entry for network X that is mapped to the IP next-hop
address B. At this time, a next-hop label is not available, which means that all packets are
forwarded in a traditional fashion (as unlabeled packets).
2-27
Example: Label Allocation

This example illustrates label allocation in a frame-mode MPLS network.

Network: Allocating Labels
Every LSR allocates a label for every destination in the IP

routing table.
Labels have local significance.
Label allocations are asynchronous.
MPLS v2.22-17
In this example, router B generates a locally significant and locally unique label 25 assigned to
IP network X. Router B generates this label independently of other routers (asynchronous
allocation of labels).
Note
2-28
Labels 0 to 15 are reserved. Each LSR independently assigns a local label to each non-BGP
IP prefix in its routing table. Labels are not assigned to BGP routes in the routing table.

Network: LIB and LFIB Setup
LIB and LFIB structures have to be initialized on the LSR

allocating the label.
MPLS v2.22-18
When a label is assigned to an IP prefix, it is stored in these two tables:

The LIB table is used to maintain the mapping between the IP prefix (network X), the local
label (25), and the next-hop label (not available yet).
The LFIB table is modified to contain the local label mapped to the pop action (label
removal). The pop action is used until the next-hop label is received from the downstream
neighbor.
Note
The FIB table does not yet contain a label for forwarding packets to network X.
2-29

Network: Labels and Table Setup
Router A allocates a label for X independently of router B.

MPLS v2.22-19
The FIB, LIB, and LFIB tables are updated similarly on router A after it allocates local label 12
for network X. The tables have specific roles:
The LIB table is used to maintain the mapping between the IP prefix (network X), the local
label (12), and the next-hop label (not available yet).
The LFIB table is modified to contain the local label mapped to the pop action (label
removal). The pop action is used until the next-hop label is received from the downstream
neighbor.
The FIB table does not yet contain a label for forwarding packets to network X.
2-30
Distributing and Advertising Labels

This topic describes how MPLS labels are distributed and advertised within an MPLS network.
Label Distribution and Advertisement
The allocated label is advertised to all neighbor LSRs, regardless

of whether the neighbors are upstream or downstream LSRs for
the destination.
MPLS v2.22-20
Example: Label Distribution and Advertisement

The figure illustrates the next step after a local label has been generated on router B. Router B
propagates this label, 25, to all adjacent neighbors where this label can be used as a next-hop
label.
Note
Because router B cannot predict which routers might use it as the downstream neighbor,
router B sends its local mappings to all LDP neighbors.
2-31
Label Distribution and Advertisement:

Receiving Label Advertisement
Every LSR stores the received label in its LIB.

Edge LSRs that receive the label from their
next hop also store the label information in
the FIB.
MPLS v2.22-21
Upon receiving an LDP update, router A can fill in the missing piece in its LIB, LFIB, and FIB
tables, as listed here:
Label 25 is stored in the LIB table as the label for network X received from LSR B. (Label
25 is also stored in the LIB tables on routers C and E.)
Label 25 is attached to the IP forwarding entry in the FIB table to enable the MPLS edge
functionality (incoming IP packets are forwarded as labeled packets).
The local label in the LFIB table is mapped to outgoing label 25 instead of the pop action
(incoming labeled packets can be forwarded as labeled packets).
2-32

Interim Packet Propagation
Forwarded IP packets are labeled only on the path segments

where the labels have already been assigned.
MPLS v2.22-22
Example: Interim Packet Propagation Through an MPLS

Network
The figure shows how an unlabeled IP packet is forwarded based on the information found in
the FIB table on router A. Label 25, found in the FIB table, is used to label the packet.
Router B must remove the label because LSR B has not yet received any next-hop label from
router C (the action in the LFIB is pop).
Note
The LFIB on router B is not yet complete.
Router A performs an IP lookup (CEF switching), whereas router B performs a label lookup
(label switching) in which the label is removed and a normal IP packet is sent out of router B.
2-33
Example: LDP Update Sent to All Adjacent Routers

The figure illustrates how an LDP update, advertising label 47 for network X, from router C is
sent to all adjacent routers, including router B.

Further Label Allocation
Every LSR will eventually assign a label for every

destination.
MPLS v2.22-23
After all routers in an MPLS domain independently distribute their labels as routers A and B
did, an LSP tunnel exists for network X spanning from router A to router C.
Note
2-34
This example discussed only the label allocation and distribution process for one prefix. In
actual practice, the LSRs and edge LSRs would concurrently allocate and distribute labels
for all of the prefixes in their routing table.

Receiving Label Advertisement
Every LSR stores received information in its LIB.

LSRs that receive their label from their next-hop LSR will also populate
the IP forwarding table.
MPLS v2.22-24
Router B can now map the entry for network X in its FIB, and the local label 25 in its LIB, to
the next-hop label 47 received from the downstream neighbor router C.
2-35
Populating the LFIB

This topic describes how the LFIB table is populated in an MPLS network.
Populating the LFIB
Router B has already assigned a label to network X and created an

entry in the LFIB.
The outgoing label is inserted in the LFIB after the label is received
from the next-hop LSR.
MPLS v2.22-25
Example: LFIB Population

After router C advertises label 47 to adjacent routers, the LSP tunnel for network X has two
hops. The components are as follows:
On router A, network X is mapped to the next-hop label 25 (router B).
On router B, label 25 is mapped to the next-hop label 47 (router C).
Router C still has no next-hop label. Label 47 is therefore mapped to the pop action.
Note
2-36
In the figure, label distribution is from right to left, and packet forwarding is from left to right.
Propagating Packets Across an MPLS Network

This topic describes how IP packets cross an MPLS network.
Packet Propagation Across

an MPLS Network
MPLS v2.22-26
Example: Packet Propagation Through an MPLS Network

The figure illustrates how IP packets are propagated across an MPLS domain. The steps are as
follows:
Step 1
Router A labels a packet destined for network X by using the next-hop label 25
(CEF switching by using the FIB table).
Step 2
Router B swaps label 25 with label 47 and forwards the packet to router C (label
switching by using the LFIB table).
Step 3
Router C removes the label and forwards the packet to router D (label switching by
using the LFIB table).
2-37
Detecting Frame-Mode Loops

This topic describes how frame-mode loops are detected.
Loop Detection
LDP relies on loop detection mechanisms built into IGPs that
are used to determine the path.
If, however, a loop is generated (that is, misconfiguration
with static routes), the TTL field in the label header is used to
prevent indefinite looping of packets.
TTL functionality in the label header is equivalent to TTL in
the IP headers.
TTL is usually copied from the IP headers to the label
headers (TTL propagation).
MPLS v2.22-27
Loop detection in an MPLS-enabled network relies on more than one mechanism.

Most routing loops are prevented by the IGP used in the network. MPLS for unicast IP
forwarding simply uses the shortest paths determined by the IGP. These paths are typically
loop-free.
If, however, a routing loop does occur (for example, because of misconfigured static routes),
MPLS labels also contain a time-to-live (TTL) field that prevents packets from looping
indefinitely.
The TTL functionality in MPLS is equivalent to that of traditional IP forwarding. Furthermore,
when an IP packet is labeled, the TTL value from the IP header is copied into the TTL field in
the label. This is called TTL propagation.
2-38
Normal TTL Operation
Cisco routers have TTL propagation enabled by default.

On ingress: TTL is copied from IP header to label header.
On egress: TTL is copied from label header to IP header.
MPLS v2.22-28
Example: Normal TTL Operation

The figure illustrates how the TTL value 5 in the IP header is decreased and copied into the
TTL field of the label when a packet enters an MPLS domain.
All other LSRs decrease the TTL field only in the label. The original TTL field is not changed
until the last label is removed when the label TTL is copied back into the IP TTL.
TTL propagation provides a transparent extension of IP TTL functionality into an MPLSenabled network.
2-39
TTL and Loop Detection
Labeled packets are dropped when the TTL is decreased to 0.

MPLS v2.22-29
Example: TTL and Loop Detection

The figure illustrates a routing loop between routers B and C. The packet looping between
these two routers is eventually dropped because the value of its TTL field reaches 0.
2-40
Disabling TTL Propagation

TTL propagation can be disabled.
The IP TTL value is not copied into the TTL field of the label,
and the label TTL is not copied back into the IP TTL.
Instead, the value 255 is assigned to the label header TTL
field on the ingress LSR.
Disabling TTL propagation hides core routers in the MPLS
domain.
Traceroute across an MPLS domain does not show any core
routers.
MPLS v2.22-30
TTL propagation can be disabled to hide the core routers from the end users. Disabling TTL
propagation causes routers to set the value 255 into the TTL field of the label when an IP
packet is labeled.
The network is still protected against indefinite loops, but it is unlikely that the core routers will
ever have to send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) reply to user-originated
traceroute packets.
2-41
Traceroute with Disabled

TTL Propagation
The first traceroute packet (ICMP or UDP)

that reaches the network is dropped on
router A.
An ICMP TTL exceeded message is sent to
the source from router A.
MPLS v2.22-31
Example: Traceroute with Disabled TTL Propagation

These figures illustrate the result of a traceroute across an MPLS network that does not use
TTL propagation.
The first traceroute packetICMP or User Datagram Protocol (UDP)that reaches the MPLS
network is dropped on the first router (A), and an ICMP reply is sent to the source. This action
results in an identification of router A by the traceroute application.
2-42
Traceroute with Disabled

TTL Propagation (Cont.)
The second traceroute packet that

reaches the network is dropped on
router D.
An ICMP TTL exceeded message is
sent to the source from router D.
MPLS v2.22-32
The traceroute application increases the initial TTL for every packet that it sends. The second
packet, therefore, would be able to reach one hop farther (router B in the example). However,
the TTL value is not copied into the TTL field of the label. Instead, router A sets the TTL field
of the label to 255. Router B decreases the TTL of the label, and router C removes the label
without copying it back into the IP TTL. Router D then decreases the original IP TTL, drops
the packet because the TTL has reached zero, and sends an ICMP reply to the source.
The traceroute application has identified router D. The next packets would simply pass through
the network.
The final result is that a traceroute application was able to identify the edge LSRs, but not the
core LSRs.
2-43
Impact of Disabling TTL Propagation

Traceroute across an MPLS domain does not show
core routers.
TTL propagation has to be disabled on all label
switch routers.
Mixed configurations (some LSRs with TTL
propagation enabled and some with TTL propagation
disabled) could result in faulty traceroute output.
TTL propagation can be enabled for forwarded traffic
onlytraceroute from LSRs does not use the initial
TTL value of 255.
MPLS v2.22-33
Cisco routers have TTL propagation enabled by default.

If TTL propagation is disabled, it must be disabled on all routers in an MPLS domain to
prevent unexpected behavior.
TTL can be optionally disabled for forwarded traffic only, which allows administrators to use
traceroute from routers to troubleshoot problems in the network.
2-44
Allocating Per-Platform Labels

This topic describes the approaches for assigning labels to networks.
Per-Platform Label Allocation
An LFIB on a router usually does not contain an

incoming interface.
The same label can be used on any
interfaceper-platform label allocation.
LSR announces a label to an adjacent LSR only once,
even if there are parallel links between them.
MPLS v2.22-34
Here are the two possible approaches for assigning labels to networks:
Per-platform label allocation: One label is assigned to a destination network and
announced to all neighbors. The label must be locally unique and valid on all incoming
interfaces. This is the default operation in frame-mode MPLS.
Per-interface label allocation: Local labels are assigned to IP destination prefixes on a
per-interface basis. These labels must be unique on a per-interface basis.
Example: Per-Platform Label Allocation

The figure illustrates how one label (25) is assigned to a network and used on all interfaces.
The same label is propagated to both routers A and C.
The figure also shows how one label is sent across one LDP session between routers A and B
even though there are two parallel links between the two routers.
2-45
Per-Platform Label Allocation: Benefits and

Drawbacks of Per-Platform Label Allocation
Benefits:
Smaller LFIB
Faster label exchange
Drawback:
Insecure: Any neighbor LSR
can send packets with any label
in the LFIB.
MPLS v2.22-35
A potential drawback of per-platform label allocation is illustrated in the figure, which shows
how an adjacent router can send a labeled packet with a label that has not been previously
advertised to this router (label spoofing). If label switching has not been enabled on that
interface, the packet will be discarded. If label switching has been enabled on this interface, the
packet would be forwarded, causing a possible security issue.
On the other hand, per-platform label allocation results in smaller LIB and LFIB tables and a
faster exchange of labels.
2-46
Summary
Summary
Labels are propagated across a network either by
extending the functionality of existing routing
protocols or by creating a new protocol that is
dedicated to exchanging labels.
An LSP is a sequence of LSRs that forward labeled
packets of a certain forwarding equivalence class.
Penultimate hop popping optimizes MPLS
performance (one less LFIB lookup).
IP aggregation can break an LSP into two segments.
Every LSR assigns a label for every destination in
the IP routing table.
MPLS v2.22-36
Summary (Cont.)
Although labels are locally significant, they have to
be advertised to directly reachable peers.
Outgoing labels are inserted in the LFIB after the
label is received from the next-hop LSR.
Packets are forwarded using labels from the LFIB
table rather than the IP routing table.
If TTL propagation is disabled, traceroute across an
MPLS domain does not show core routers.
LSR announces a label to an adjacent LSR only
once, even if there are parallel links between them.
MPLS v2.22-37
2-47
2-48
Lesson 3
Introducing Convergence in
Frame-Mode MPLS
Overview
This lesson presents Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) convergence issues and describes how
routing protocols and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) convergence interact. This lesson
concludes with a look at link failure, convergence after a link failure, and link recovery.
It is important to understand the convergence times for LDP. It also is important to understand
how routing protocols interact with MPLS. This information will ensure a clear understanding
of how the various routing tables are built and refreshed during and after a link failure and how
recovery in an MPLS network takes place.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how convergence occurs in a framemode MPLS network. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the MPLS steady-state environment
Describe what happens in the routing tables when a link failure occurs
Describe routing protocol convergence after a link failure
Describe frame-mode MPLS convergence after a link failure
Describe IP and MPLS convergence actions after a link failure has been resolved
What Is the MPLS Steady-State Operation?

This topic describes an MPLS network steady-state operation.
Steady-State Operation Description
Occurs after the LSRs have exchanged the labels, and the LIB,
LFIB, and FIB data structures are completely populated
MPLS v2.22-3
MPLS is fully functional when the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) and LDP have populated
all the tables, as listed here:
Main IP routing (routing information base [RIB]) table
Label Information Base (LIB) table
Forwarding Information Base (FIB) table
Label forwarding information base (LFIB) table
Although it takes longer for LDP to exchange labels (compared with an IGP), a network can
use the FIB table in the meantime; therefore, there is no routing downtime while LDP
exchanges labels between adjacent LSRs.
2-50
What Happens in a Link Failure?

This topic describes what happens in the routing tables when a link failure occurs.
Link Failure Actions
Routing protocol neighbors and LDP neighbors are lost after a

link failure.
Entries are removed from various data structures.
MPLS v2.22-4
Example: Link Failure Actions

The figure illustrates how a link failure is handled in an MPLS domain. The steps are as
follows:
The overall convergence fully depends on the convergence of the IGP used in the MPLS
domain.
When router B determines that router E should be used to reach network X, the label
learned from router E can be used to label-switch packets.
LDP stores all labels in the LIB table, even if the labels are not used, because the IGP has
decided to use another path.
This label storage is shown in the figure, where two next-hop labels were available in the LIB
table on router B. The label status of router B just before MPLS label convergence is as
follows:
Label 47 was learned from router C and is currently unavailable; therefore, because of the
failure, label 47 has to be removed from the LIB table.
Label 75 was learned from router E and can now be used at the moment that the IGP
decides that router E is the next hop for network X.
2-51
What Is the Routing Protocol Convergence After

a Link Failure?
This topic describes the routing protocol convergence that occurs in an MPLS network after a
link failure.
Routing Protocol Convergence
Routing protocols rebuild the IP routing table and the IP

forwarding table.
MPLS v2.22-5
Example: Routing Protocol Convergence

The figure illustrates how two entries are removed, one from the LIB table and one from the
LFIB table, when the link between routers B and C fails. This can be described as follows:
Router B has already removed the entry from the FIB table, once the IGP determined that
the next hop was no longer reachable.
Router B has also removed the entry from the LIB table and the LFIB table given that the
LDP has determined that router C is no longer reachable.
2-52
What Is the MPLS Convergence After a Link

Failure?
This topic describes MPLS convergence that occurs in an MPLS network after a link failure.
MPLS Convergence
The LFIB and labeling information in the FIB are rebuilt

immediately after the routing protocol convergence, based on
labels stored in the LIB.
MPLS v2.22-6
After the IGP determines that there is another path available, a new entry is created in the FIB
table.
This new entry points toward router E, and there is already a label available for network X via
router E.
This information is then used in the FIB table and the LFIB table to reroute the LSP tunnel via
router E.
2-53
MPLS Convergence After a Link Failure

MPLS convergence in frame-mode MPLS does not
affect the overall convergence time.
MPLS convergence occurs immediately after the
routing protocol convergence, based on labels
already stored in the LIB.
MPLS v2.22-7
The overall convergence in an MPLS network is not affected by LDP convergence when there
is a link failure.
Frame-mode MPLS uses liberal label retention mode, which enables routers to store all
received labels, even if the labels are not being used.
These labels can be used, after the network convergence, to enable immediate establishment of
an alternative LSP tunnel.
2-54
What Actions Occur in Link Recovery?

This topic describes actions in IP and MPLS convergence after a failure has been resolved.
Link Recovery Actions
Routing protocol neighbors are discovered after link recovery.

MPLS v2.22-8
Example: Link Recovery Actions

The figure illustrates the state of the routing tables at the time the link between routers B and C
becomes available again.
2-55
Link Recovery Actions:

IP Routing Convergence
IP routing protocols rebuild the IP routing table.

The FIB and the LFIB are also rebuilt, but the label information
might be lacking.
MPLS v2.22-9
The IGP determines that the link is available again and changes the next-hop address for
network X to point to router C. However, when router B also tries to set the next-hop label for
network X, it has to wait for the LDP session between routers B and C to be reestablished.
A pop action is used in the LFIB table on router B while the LDP establishes the session
between routers B and C. This process adds to the overall convergence time in an MPLS
domain. The downtime for network X is not influenced by LDP convergence because normal
IP forwarding is used until the new next-hop label is available.
Note
2-56
Although this behavior has no significant effect on traditional IP routing, it can significantly
influence MPLS Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). This is because the VPN traffic cannot be
forwarded before the LDP session is fully operational.
Link Recovery Actions:

MPLS Convergence
Routing protocol convergence optimizes the forwarding path
after a link recovery.
The LIB might not contain the label from the new next hop by
the time the IGP convergence is complete.
End-to-end MPLS connectivity might be intermittently broken
after link recovery.
Use MPLS TE for make-before-break recovery.
MPLS v2.22-10
Link recovery requires that an LDP session be established (reestablished), which adds to the
convergence time of LDP.
Networks may be temporarily unreachable because of the convergence limitations of routing
protocols.
Cisco MPLS Traffic Engineering (MPLS TE) can be used to prevent longer downtime when a
link fails or is recovering.
2-57
Summary
Summary
MPLS is fully functional when the LIB, LFIB, and FIB tables
are populated.
Overall network convergence is dependent upon
the IGP.
Upon a link failure, entries are removed from several routing
tables.
MPLS convergence after link failure in a frame-mode network
does not affect overall convergence time.
MPLS data structures after link failure may not contain
updated data by the time the IGP convergence is complete.
2-58
MPLS v2.22-11
Lesson 4
Introducing MPLS Label

Allocation, Distribution, and
Retention Modes
Overview
In this lesson, label distribution parameters are discussed. The differences between label
distribution parameters are covered, and the default Cisco parameter sets are identified.
There are different modes of operation for Multiprotocol Label Switchingt (MPLS). It is
important to have a clear idea of what mode of operation is used under what condition, and if
some situations will allow for multiple combinations of these modes.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the MPLS label allocation,
distribution, and retention modes used in Cisco MPLS networks. This ability includes being
able to meet these objectives:
Describe the parameters used in Cisco MPLS label distribution and allocation
Describe the way in which labels are distributed to neighbors in frame-mode MPLS
Describe the way in which labels are allocated to neighbors in frame-mode MPLS
Describe the way in which labels are retained in frame-mode MPLS

This topic describes the parameters used in frame-mode MPLS label distribution and allocation.

Frame-mode MPLS architecture defines several label
allocation and distribution parameters:
Per-platform label space
Unsolicited downstream label distribution
Independent label allocation control
Liberal label retention
MPLS v2.22-3
Frame-mode MPLS parameters include:

Per-platform label space, where labels must be unique for the entire platform (router)
Note
Per-platform label space was discussed in the Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode

MPLS lesson.
Unsolicited downstream distribution of labels, where all routers can asynchronously

generate local labels and propagate those labels to adjacent routers
Independent control mode, where all routers can start propagating labels independently of
one another
Liberal label retention mode, where unused labels are kept (This applies because multiple
labels may be received for a prefix, but only one is used.)
2-60
Distributing Labels
This topic describes the way in which labels are distributed to neighbors in frame-mode MPLS.
Label Distribution:
Unsolicited Downstream
The label for a prefix is allocated and advertised to all neighbor

LSRs, regardless of whether the neighbors are upstream or
downstream LSRs for the destination.
MPLS v2.22-4
Unsolicited downstream distribution of labels is a method where each router independently

assigns a label to each destination IP prefix in its routing table. This mapping is stored in the
Label Information Base (LIB) table, which sends it to all Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
peers. There is no control mechanism to govern the propagation of labels in an ordered fashion.
Example: Unsolicited Downstream

The figure illustrates how router B creates a local label (25) and sends that label to all its
neighbors. The same action is taken on other routers after the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP)
has put network X into the main routing table.
Each neighbor then decides upon one of these options regarding the label:
Use the label (if router B is the closest next hop for network X)
Keep the label in the LIB table
Ignore the label
2-61
Allocating Labels
This topic describes independent control to allocate labels to neighbors in frame-mode MPLS.
Label Allocation: Independent Control
An LSR can always assign a label for a prefix, even if it has no

downstream label.
Independent control can be used only for LSRs with Layer 3
capabilities.
MPLS v2.22-5
Independent control mode for allocating labels is usually combined with unsolicited
downstream propagation of labels, where labels can be created and propagated independently
of any other label switch router (LSR). When independent control mode is used, an LSR might
be faced with an incoming labeled packet where there is no corresponding outgoing label in the
label forwarding information base (LFIB) table. An LSR using independent control mode must
therefore be able to perform full Layer 3 lookups. Independent control mode can be used only
on LSRs with edge LSR functionality.
2-62
Retaining Labels
This topic describes the liberal label retention mode used in frame-mode MPLS.
Label Retention: Liberal Retention Mode
Each LSR stores the received label in its LIB, even when the
label is not received from a next-hop LSR.
Liberal label retention mode improves convergence speed.
MPLS v2.22-6
Liberal label retention mode dictates that each LSR keep all labels received from LDP peers,
even if they are not the downstream peers for network X.
Example: Liberal Retention Mode

The figure shows how router C receives and keeps the label received from router B for network
X, even though router D is the downstream peer.
2-63
Summary
Summary
There are four MPLS label distribution parameters: label
space, label distribution, label allocation, and label retention.
Frame-mode MPLS distributes labels using downstream
unsolicited label distribution
Frame-mode MPLS allocates labels to neighbors using
independent control
Frame-mode MPLS uses liberal label retention
2-64
MPLS v2.22-7
Module Summary
Module Summary
LDP uses multicast UDP for neighbor discovery and unicast
TCP for session establishment
LDP is used for label distribution
Overall network convergence is dependent on the IGP, not
the MPLS convergence
Frame-mode MPLS parameters include:
Per-platform label address space
Unsolicited downstream label distribution
Indepedent control for label allocation
Liberal label retention
MPLS v2.22-1
In a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) network, labels are distributed by Label

Distribution Protocol (LDP) after neighbor discovery and session establishment. Label
information is populated in Label Information Base (LIB), Forwarding Information Base (FIB),
and label forwarding information base (LFIB) tables.
References
RFC 3031, Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture
RFC 3036, LDP Specification
2-65
Module Self-Check
Q1)
Which multicast address does LDP use to send hello messages? (Source: Discovering
LDP Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q2)
What does per-platform label space require? (Source: Discovering LDP Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q3)
the highest IP address

the loopback address
the lowest IP address
whichever LDP neighbor sends the fist hello message
Exchanging initialization messages is which step in the LDP session negotiation

process? (Source: Discovering LDP Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
first step
second step
third step
not required in LDP session negotiation
Q6)
LDP discovers nonadjacent neighbors by broadcasting _____ IP addresses. (Source:

Discovering LDP Neighbors)
Q7)
LDP and TDP use which two well-known port numbers? (Choose two.) (Source:
Discovering LDP Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
2-66
contains the source address

contains the multicast address
contains the TCP destination port
uniquely identifies the neighbor and the label space
LDP sessions are initiated by using which address? (Source: Discovering LDP
Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q5)
only one LDP session

one session per interface
multiple sessions for parallel links
Per-platform is not a proper term in MPLS terminology.
What is the purpose of the LDP identifier in a hello message? (Source: Discovering
LDP Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q4)
224.0.0.1
224.0.0.2
224.0.0.12
224.0.20.0
LDP uses 464.

LDP uses 646.
LDP uses 711.
TDP uses 171.
TDP uses 646.
TDP uses 711.
Q8)
In frame-mode MPLS networks, the number of LDP sessions that are required between
neighbors is determined by which of these choices? (Source: Discovering LDP
Neighbors)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q9)
Which statement best describes PHP? (Source: Introducing Typical Label Distribution
in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q10)
local generated label

outgoing label
local address
next-hop address
When an IP packet is to be label-switched as it traverses an MPLS network, which

table is used to perform the label switching? (Source: Introducing Typical Label
Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q13)
default operation for frame-mode MPLS

an approach that results in larger LIB and LFIB tables
an approach that results in slower label exchange
a future enhancement for MPLS
Which three of the answer choices are contained in the LFIB? (Choose three.) (Source:
Introducing Typical Label Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q12)
PHP works only for TDP and not for LDP.

PHP works only for LDP and not for TDP.
PHP optimizes MPLS performance.
PHP is configurable and by default is disabled.
Which description applies to per-platform label allocation? (Source: Introducing

Typical Label Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q11)
the number of interfaces

the number of different label spaces
the number of LDP processes running a router
the information contained in the source address field of the hello message
response
LIB
FIB
FLIB
LFIB
Which statement is correct? (Source: Introducing Typical Label Distribution in FrameMode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
An IP forwarding table resides on the data plane; LDP (or TDP) runs on the
control plane; and an IP routing table resides on the data plane.
An IP forwarding table resides on the data plane; LDP (or TDP) runs on the
control plane; and an IP routing table resides on the control plane.
An IP forwarding table resides on the control plane; LDP (or TDP) runs on the
control plane; and an IP routing table resides on the data plane.
An IP forwarding table resides on the control plane; LDP (or TDP) runs on the
control plane; and an IP routing table resides on the control plane.
2-67
Q14)
Which two tables contain label information? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing
Typical Label Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q15)
What generates a label update? (Source: Introducing Typical Label Distribution in

Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q16)
LIB
LFIB
FIB
FLIB
Upon a link failure, which three tables are updated to reflect the failed link? (Choose
three.) (Source: Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
2-68
keep-all-labels mode
liberal label max-all mode
liberal label retention mode
A router in a frame-mode network does not keep all labels; the router keeps
only the labels that it will use.
Which table is NOT used to determine if MPLS is fully functional? (Source:

Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q20)
The label TTL is copied back into the IP TTL.

The IP TTL is copied back into the TTL of the label.
The IP TL is not copied back into the TTL of the label.
TTL label propagation can not be disabled.
What enables routers in a frame-mode MPLS network to store all received labels, even
if they are not being used? (Source: Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q19)
LSPs are bidirectional.

LSPs are unidirectional.
LDP advertises labels for the entire LSP.
LDP advertises labels only for individual segments in the LSP.
Which statement is correct regarding TTL propagation being disabled? (Source:

Introducing Typical Label Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q18)
UDP
OSPF
EIGRP
LDP
Which two statements are correct? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing Typical Label
Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q17)
LIB
main IP routing table
FLIB
LFIB
LIB
LFIB
FIB
FLIB
Q21)
Which statement best describes how a link failure is handled in an MPLS network?
(Source: Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q22)
Upon a link recovery, which three tables are updated to reflect the failed link? (Choose
three.) (Source: Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q23)
LFIB
FLIB
FIB
LIB
Which of the following statements best describes convergence in a frame-mode MPLS

network after a link failure has occurred and been restored? (Source: Introducing
Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q24)
Overall convergence depends on LDP.

Overall convergence depends on the IGP that is used.
Upon a link failure, only LDP convergence is affected.
Upon a link failure, only the IGP convergence is affected.
MPLS convergence occurs after IGP convergence.

MPLS convergence occurs before IGP convergence peer to peer.
If a failure occurs with the IGP, MPLS convergence is not affected.
If a failure occurs with the IGP, MPLS will not be able to converge after the
IGP failure has been corrected unless the MPLS process is bounced.
Which statement is NOT a label distribution parameter? (Source: Introducing MPLS

Label Allocation, Distribution, and Retention Modes)
A)
B)
C)
D)
label space
label quality
label retention
label allocation and distribution
Q25)
Frame-mode MPLS uses ________ label space. (Source: Introducing MPLS Label
Allocation, Distribution, and Retention Modes)
Q26)
Which type of label distribution is used in Cisco frame-mode MPLS networks?

(Choose one.) (Source: Introducing MPLS Label Allocation, Distribution, and
Retention Modes)
A)
B)
C)
D)
downstream-on-demand
unsolicited downstream
solicited downstream
unsolicited downstream-on-demand
Q27)
The mode of label allocation for frame-mode MPLS is ________ control. (Source:
Introducing MPLS Label Allocation, Distribution, and Retention Modes)
Q28)
What is the label retention mode used in Cisco frame-mode MPLS networks? (Source:
Introducing MPLS Label Allocation, Distribution, and Retention Modes)
A)
B)
C)
D)
total
light
liberal
conservative
2-69
Q29)
Which statement is correct? (Source: Introducing MPLS Label Allocation, Distribution,

and Retention Modes)
A)
B)
C)
D)
2-70
By default, routers with frame interfaces use per-platform label space.

By default, ATM switches use per-platform label space.
By default, routers with ATM interfaces use per-platform label space and
conservative label retention mode.
By default, routers with frame interfaces use conservative label retention mode.

Q1)
Q2)
Q3)
Q4)
Q5)
Q6)
unicast
Q7)
B, F
Q8)
Q9)
Q10)
Q11)
A, B, D
Q12)
Q13)
Q14)
A, D
Q15)
Q16)
B, D
Q17)
Q18)
Q19)
Q20)
A, B, C
Q21)
Q22)
A, C, D
Q23)
Q24)
Q25)
per-platform
Q26)
Q27)
independent
Q28)
Q29)
2-71
2-72
Module 3
Frame-Mode MPLS
Implementation on Cisco IOS
Platforms
Overview
This module provides a review of switching implementations, focusing on Cisco Express
Forwarding (CEF). The module also covers the details of implementing frame-mode
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) on Cisco IOS platforms, giving detailed configuration,
monitoring, and debugging guidelines. In addition, this module includes the advanced topics of
controlling time-to-live (TTL) propagation and label distribution.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe the tasks and commands necessary
to implement MPLS on frame-mode Cisco IOS platforms. This ability includes being able to
meet these objectives:
Explain the features of CEF switching
Configure frame-mode MPLS on Cisco IOS platforms
Monitor frame-mode MPLS on Cisco IOS platforms
Troubleshoot frame-mode MPLS problems on Cisco IOS platforms
3-2
Lesson 1
Introducing CEF Switching

Overview
This lesson explains the Cisco IOS platform-switching mechanisms by reviewing standard IP
switching and Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) switching, including configuration and
monitoring commands.
It is important to understand what part CEF switching plays in a Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) network. CEF must be running as a prerequisite to implementing MPLS on a Cisco
router; therefore, an understanding of the purpose of CEF and how it functions will provide an
awareness of how the network uses CEF information when forwarding packets.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the features of CEF switching. This
Describe the various switching mechanisms used by Cisco IOS platforms
Describe the function of standard IP switching on Cisco IOS platforms
Describe the architecture of CEF switching
Configure IP CEF switching
Monitor IP CEF switching
What Are Cisco IOS Platform-Switching

Mechanisms?
This topic describes the various switching mechanisms used by Cisco IOS platforms.
Cisco IOS Platform Switching Mechanisms

The Cisco IOS platform supports three IP switching
mechanisms:
Routing table driven switchingprocess switching
Full lookup for every packet
Cache driven switchingfast switching
Most recent destinations entered in the cache
First packet always process-switched
Topology driven switching
CEF (prebuilt FIB table)
MPLS v2.23-3
The first and the oldest switching mechanism available in Cisco routers is process switching.
Because process switching must find a destination in the routing table (possibly a recursive
lookup) and construct a new Layer 2 frame header for every packet, it is very slow and is
normally not used.
To overcome the slow performance of process switching, Cisco IOS platforms support several
switching mechanisms that use a cache to store the most recently used destinations. The cache
uses a faster searching mechanism, and it stores the entire Layer 2 frame header to improve the
encapsulation performance. The first packet whose destination is not found in the fastswitching cache is process-switched, and an entry is created in the cache. The subsequent
packets are switched in the interrupt code using the cache to improve performance.
The latest and preferred Cisco IOS platform-switching mechanism is CEF, which incorporates
the best of the previous switching mechanisms. CEF supports per-packet load balancing
(previously supported only by process switching), per-source or per-destination load balancing,
fast destination lookup, and many other features not supported by other switching mechanisms.
The CEF cache, or Forwarding Information Base (FIB) table, is essentially a replacement for
the standard routing table.
3-4
Using Standard IP Switching

This topic describes the function of standard IP switching on Cisco IOS platforms.
Standard IP Switching Review
MPLS v2.23-4
There is a specific sequence of events that occurs when process switching and fast switching
are used for destinations learned through Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).
Example: Standard IP Switching

The figure illustrates this process. Here is a description of the sequence of events:
When a BGP update is received and processed, an entry is created in the routing table.
When the first packet arrives for this destination, the router tries to find the destination in
the fast-switching cache. Because the destination is not in the fast-switching cache, process
switching has to switch the packet when the process is run. The process performs a
recursive lookup to find the outgoing interface. The process switching may possibly trigger
an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) request or find the Layer 2 address in the ARP
cache. Finally, it creates an entry in the fast-switching cache.
All subsequent packets for the same destination are fast-switched, as follows:
The switching occurs in the interrupt code (the packet is processed immediately).
Fast destination lookup is performed (no recursion).
The encapsulation uses a pregenerated Layer 2 header that contains the destination
and Layer 2 source (MAC) address. (No ARP request or ARP cache lookup is
necessary.)
Whenever a router receives a packet that should be fast-switched but the destination is not in
the switching cache, the packet is process-switched. A full routing table lookup is performed,
and an entry in the fast-switching cache is created to ensure that the subsequent packets for the
same destination prefix will be fast-switched.
3-5
What Is the CEF Switching Architecture?

This topic describes the architecture of CEF switching.
CEF Switching Review
MPLS v2.23-5
CEF uses a different architecture from process switching or any other cache-based switching
mechanism. CEF uses a complete IP switching table, the FIB table, which holds the same
information as the IP routing table. The generation of entries in the FIB table is not packettriggered but change-triggered. When something changes in the IP routing table, the change is
also reflected in the FIB table.
Because the FIB table contains the complete IP switching table, the router can make definitive
decisions based on the information in it. Whenever a router receives a packet that should be
CEF-switched, but the destination is not in the FIB, the packet is dropped.
The FIB table is also different from other fast-switching caches in that it does not contain
information about the outgoing interface and the corresponding Layer 2 header. That
information is stored in a separate table, the adjacency table. The adjacency table is more or
less a copy of the ARP cache, but instead of holding only the destination MAC address, it holds
the Layer 2 header.
Note
3-6
If the router carries full Internet routing, enabling CEF may consume additional memory.
Enabling distributed CEF will also affect memory utilization on Versatile Interface Processor
(VIP) modules (Cisco 7500 Series Routers) or line cards (Cisco 12000 Series Internet
Routers), because the entire FIB table will be copied to all VIP modules or line cards.
Configuring IP CEF
This topic describes how to configure CEF on Cisco IOS platforms.
Configuring IP CEF

This command starts CEF switching and creates the FIB
table.
The distributed keyword configures distributed CEF
(running on VIP or line cards).
All CEF-capable interfaces run CEF switching.

Disables CEF switching on an interface
Usually not needed
MPLS v2.23-6
ip cef
To enable CEF on the route processor card, use the ip cef global command in global
configuration mode. To disable CEF, use the no form of this command. Use the appropriate
form of the command:
ip cef [distributed]
no ip cef [distributed]
Syntax Description
distributed (optional): Enables the distributed CEF operation. This option distributes the CEF
information to the line cards. The line cards perform express forwarding.
CEF is disabled by default, excluding these platforms:
CEF is enabled on Cisco 7100 Series Routers.
CEF is enabled on Cisco 7600 Series Routers, and distributed CEF is enabled on some
Cisco 7600 Series Line Cards.
Distributed CEF is enabled on Cisco 12000 Series Internet Routers.
3-7
ip route-cache cef
To enable CEF operation on an interface after the CEF operation has been disabled, use the ip
route-cache cef command in interface configuration mode. To disable CEF operation on an
interface, use the no form of this command. Use the form that follows of the two commands:
ip route-cache cef
no ip route-cache cef
Syntax Description
This command has no arguments or keywords.
Defaults
When standard CEF or distributed CEF operations are enabled globally, all interfaces that
support CEF are enabled by default.
3-8
Monitoring IP CEF
This topic describes how to monitor CEF on Cisco IOS platforms.
Monitoring IP CEF
MPLS v2.23-7
show ip cef
To display unresolved entries in the FIB table or to display a summary of the FIB, use this form
of the show ip cef EXEC command: show ip cef [unresolved | summary].
To display specific entries in the FIB table based on IP address information, use this form of
the show ip cef command in EXEC mode: show ip cef [network [mask [longer-prefix]]]
[detail].
To display specific entries in the FIB table based on interface information, use this form of the
show ip cef command in EXEC mode: show ip cef [type number] [detail].
3-9
The table describes the parameters for the show ip cef command.
show ip cef Syntax Description
3-10
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Displays unresolved FIB entries
(Optional) Displays a summary of the FIB
(Optional) Displays the FIB entry for the specified destination

network

network and mask
(Optional) Displays the FIB entries for all the specific destinations
(Optional) Displays detailed FIB entry information
(Optional) Interface type and number for which to display FIB

entries
Summary
Summary
Three different switching mechanisms are used on Cisco IOS
platforms: routing table driven, cache driven, and topology
driven.
Entries received with no destination address information are
process-switched; subsequent packets are fast-switched.
Generation of entries in the FIB table is caused by a change
trigger; when something in the routing table changes, the
change is also reflected in the FIB table.
CEF is configured globally.
The show ip cef command is used to monitor CEF operation.
MPLS v2.23-8
3-11
3-12
Lesson 2
Configuring Frame-Mode
MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms
Overview
This lesson describes how to configure frame-mode Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) on
Cisco IOS platforms. The mandatory configuration tasks, and commands and their correct
syntax usage, are discussed in this lesson. The lesson also covers some advanced configurations
such as label-switching maximum transmission unit (MTU), IP time-to-live (TTL) propagation,
and conditional label distribution. Also discussed in this lesson is the operation of frame-mode
MPLS over switched WAN media.
It is important to understand how to enable and configure MPLS to successfully complete the
Lab 3-1: Establishing the Core MPLS Environment.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure frame-mode MPLS
on Cisco IOS platforms. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the MPLS configuration tasks
Configure the MPLS ID on a router
Configure MPLS on a frame-mode interface
Configure a label-switching MTU
Configure IP TTL propagation
Configure conditional label distribution
Configure frame-mode MPLS on switched WAN media
What Are MPLS Configuration Tasks?

This topic describes the MPLS configuration tasks.
MPLS Configuration Tasks

Mandatory:
Enable CEF switching
Configure LDP on every label-enabled interface
Optional:
Configure the MPLS ID
Configure MTU size for labeled packets
Configure IP TTL propagation
Configure conditional label advertising
MPLS v2.23-3
To enable MPLS, you must first enable Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) switching. Depending
on the Cisco IOS software release, you may need to establish the range for the label pool.
You must enable Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) on the interface by using label switching.
Optionally, the maximum size of labeled packets may be changed.
By default, the TTL field is copied from the IP header and placed in the MPLS label when a
packet enters an MPLS network. To prevent core routers from responding with (Internet
Control Message Protocol [ICMP]) TTL exceeded messages, disable TTL propagation. If TTL
propagation is disabled, the value in the TTL field of the label is 255.
Note
Ensure that all routers have TTL propagation either enabled or disabled. If TTL is enabled in
some routers and disabled in others, the result may be that a packet leaving the MPLS
domain will have a larger TTL value than when it entered.
By default, a router will generate and propagate labels for all networks that it has in the routing
table. If label switching is required for only a limited number of networks (for example, only
for router loopback addresses), configure conditional label advertising.
3-14

This topic describes how to configure the MPLS identifier (MPLS ID) on a router.
Specifies a preferred interface for determining the

LDP router ID:
Parameters
interface: Causes the IP address of the specified interface
to be used as the LDP router ID, provided that the interface
is operational
force: Alters the behavior of the
command to force the use of the named interface as the
LDP router ID
MPLS v2.23-4
mpls ldp router-id

To specify a preferred interface for determining the LDP router ID, use the mpls ldp router-id
command in global configuration mode. To remove the preferred interface for determining the
LDP router ID, use the no form of this command. This illustrates the two commands:
mpls ldp router-id interface [force]
no mpls ldp router-id
This table describes the parameters for the mpls idp router-id command.
mpls idp router-id Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Causes the IP address of the specified interface to be used as

the LDP router ID, provided that the interface is operational
(Optional) Alters the behavior of the mpls ldp router-id

command to force the use of the named interface as the LDP
router ID
Defaults
The mpls ldp router-id command is disabled.
3-15
Configuring MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface

This topic describes how to configure MPLS on a frame-mode interface.
Configuring MPLS on a Frame-Mode

Interface
Enables label switching on a frame-mode interface

Starts LDP on the interface
Starts selected label distribution protocol on the specified

interface
MPLS v2.23-5
mpls ip
To enable label switching of IP version 4 (IPv4) packets on an interface, use the mpls ip
command in interface configuration mode. To disable IP label switching on this interface, use
the no form of this command. This illustrates the two commands:
mpls ip
no mpls ip
Syntax Description
Defaults
Label switching of IPv4 packets is disabled on this interface.
3-16
mpls label protocol [tdp | ldp | both]

To select the label distribution protocol to be used on an interface, use the mpls label protocol
command in interface configuration mode. To revert to the default label distribution protocol,
use the no form of this command. This illustrates the two commands:
mpls label protocol protocol
no mpls label protocol protocol
This table describes the parameters for the mpls label protocol [tdp | ldp | both] command.
mpls label protocol [tdp | ldp | both] Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Enables Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP) on an interface
Enables LDP on an interface
Enables TDP and LDP on an interface
Defaults
TDP has been the default label distribution protocol. Starting in Cisco IOS Release 12.4(3), the
default MPLS label distribution protocol is LDP.
3-17

Interface: Example 1
MPLS v2.23-6
Example: Configuring MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface

The figure shows the configuration steps needed to enable MPLS on an edge label switch router
(LSR). The configuration includes an access control list (ACL) that denies any attempt to
establish a TDP session from an interface that is not enabled for MPLS. In the example in the
figure, router A has the NoTDP access list applied to serial 3/1, which is not enabled for
MPLS.
You must globally enable CEF switching, which automatically enables CEF on all interfaces
that support it. (CEF is not supported on logical interfaces, such as loopback interfaces.)
Nonbackbone interfaces have an input ACL that denies TCP sessions on the well-known port
number 711 (TDP).
3-18

Interface: Example 2
MPLS v2.23-7
When combining Cisco routers with equipment of other vendors, you may need to use standard
LDP (MPLS). TDP (tag switching) can be replaced by LDP on point-to-point interfaces.
However, you can also use both protocols on shared media if some devices do not support
TDP.
Label switching is more or less independent of the distribution protocol, so there should be no
problem in mixing the two protocols. TDP and LDP are functionally very similar, and both
populate the Label Information Base (LIB) table.
3-19
Verifying MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface:

Example

MPLS v2.23-8
Example: Verifying MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface

When verifying the MPLS configuration, you will find that depending on the Cisco IOS
release, the show running-config command will display some of the ldp commands as tagswitching commands.
Note
Starting with Cisco IOS Release 12.4(3), the default MPLS label distribution protocol has
changed from TDP to LDP. If no protocol is explicitly configured by the mpls label protocol
command, LDP is the default label distribution protocol. LDP configuration commands will
be saved by using the MPLS form of the command rather than the tag-switching form.
Before Cisco IOS Release 12.4(3), commands were saved using the tag-switching form
of the command for backward compatibility.
Use caution when upgrading the image on a router that uses TDP. Ensure that the TDP
sessions are established when the new image is loaded. You can accomplish this by issuing
the global configuration command mpls label protocol tdp. Issue this command and save it
to the startup configuration before loading the new image. Alternatively, you can enter the
command and save the running configuration immediately after loading the new image.
3-20

This topic describes how to configure a label-switching MTU.

Label switching increases the maximum MTU requirements on
an interface because of the additional label header.
Interface MTU is automatically increased on WAN interfaces;
IP MTU is automatically decreased on LAN interfaces.
Label-switching MTU can be increased on LAN interfaces
(resulting in jumbo frames) to prevent IP fragmentation.
The jumbo frames are not supported by all LAN switches.
MPLS v2.23-9
mpls mtu
To set the per-interface MTU for labeled packets, use the mpls mtu interface configuration
command. This shows these commands:
mpls mtu bytes
no mpls mtu
This table describes the parameters for the mpls mtu command.
mpls mtu Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
MTU in bytes
Defaults
The minimum MTU is 64 bytes. The maximum depends on the type of interface medium.
Note
The show mpls interface type number detail command can be used to check the MPLS
MTU setting.
3-21
Configuring Label-Switching MTU: Example
MPLS v2.23-10
One way of preventing labeled packets from exceeding the maximum size (and being
fragmented as a result) is to increase the MTU size of labeled packets for all segments in the
label-switched path (LSP) tunnel. The problem will typically occur on LAN switches, where it
is more likely that a device does not support oversized packets (also called jumbo frames or,
sometimes, giants or baby giants). Some devices support jumbo frames, and some need to be
configured to support them.
The MPLS MTU size is increased automatically on WAN interfaces and needs to be increased
manually on LAN interfaces.
The MPLS MTU size has to be increased on all LSRs attached to a LAN segment.
Additionally, the LAN switches used to implement switched LAN segments need to be
configured to support jumbo frames. No additional configuration is necessary for shared LAN
segments implemented with hubs.
A different approach is needed if a LAN switch does not support jumbo frames. The problem
may be even worse for networks that do not allow ICMP MTU discovery messages to be
forwarded to sources of packets and if the Dont Fragment bit (DF bit) is strictly used. This
situation can be encountered where firewalls are used.
3-22

This topic describes how to configure IP TTL propagation.
By default, IP TTL is copied into the MPLS label at

label imposition, and the MPLS label TTL is copied
(back) into the IP TTL at label removal.
This command disables IP TTL and label TTL
propagation.
TTL value of 255 is inserted in the label header.
The TTL propagation has to be disabled on ingress
and egress edge LSRs.
MPLS v2.23-11
To set the TTL value on output when the IP packets are being encapsulated in MPLS, use the
mpls ip propagate-ttl command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable this feature, use the no
form of this command. This illustrates these two commands:
no mpls ip propagate-ttl
Syntax Description
This command has no optional keywords or arguments.
Defaults
The MPLS TTL value on packet output is set based on the IP TTL value on packet input.
3-23
Configuring IP TTL Propagation:

Example
MPLS v2.23-12
Example: Configuring IP TTL Propagation

The figure illustrates typical traceroute behavior in an MPLS network. Because the label header
of a labeled packet carries the TTL value from the original IP packet, the routers in the path can
drop packets when the TTL is exceeded. Traceroute will therefore show all the routers in the
path. This is the default behavior.
In the example, router C1 is executing a trace command that results in this behavior. The steps
for this process are as follows:
Step 1
The first packet is an IP packet with TTL=1. Router A decreases the TTL and drops
the packet because it reaches 0. An ICMP TTL exceeded message is sent to the
source.
Step 2
The second packet sent is an IP packet with TTL=2. Router A decreases the TTL,
labels the packet (the TTL from the IP header is copied into the label), and forwards
the packet to router B.
Step 3
Router B decreases the TTL value, drops the packet, and sends an ICMP TTL
exceeded message to the source.
Step 4
The third packet (TTL=3) experiences a similar processing to the previous packets,
except that router C is not the one dropping the packet based on the TTL in the IP
header. Router B, because of penultimate hop popping (PHP), previously removed
the label, and the TTL was copied back to the IP header (or second label).
The fourth packet (TTL=4) reaches the final destination, where the TTL of the IP packet is
examined.
3-24

Disabling IP TTL Propagation Example
MPLS v2.23-13
If TTL propagation is disabled, the TTL value is not copied into the label header. Instead, the
label TTL field is set to 255. The probable result is that the TTL field in the label header will
not decrease to 0 for any router inside the MPLS domain (unless there is a forwarding loop
inside the MPLS network).
If the traceroute command is used, ICMP replies are received only from those routers that see
the real TTL stored in the IP header.
Example: Disabling IP TTL Propagation

In the figure, router C1 is executing the traceroute command, but the core routers do not copy
the TTL to and from the label. This situation results in this behavior:
Step 1
The first packet is an IP packet with TTL=1. Router A decreases the TTL, drops the
packet, and sends an ICMP TTL exceeded message to the source.
Step 2
The second packet is an IP packet with TTL=2. Router A decreases the TTL, labels
the packet, and sets the TTL to 255.
Step 3
Router B decreases the TTL in the label to 254 and forwards a labeled packet with
TTL set to 254.
Step 4
Router C removes the label, decreases the IP TTL, and sends the packet to the nexthop router (C2). The packet has reached the final destination.
Note
The egress MPLS router may, in some cases, be seen in the trace printout, for example, if
the route toward C2 is carried in Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), not in the Interior Gateway
Protocol (IGP).
3-25

Extended Options
)#
Selectively disables IP TTL propagation for:

Forwarded traffic (Traceroute does not work for
transit traffic labeled by this router.)
Local traffic (Traceroute does not work from the
router but works for transit traffic labeled by this
router.)
MPLS v2.23-14
Use the mpls ip propagate-ttl global configuration command to control generation of the TTL
field in the label when the label is first added to the IP packet. By default, this command is
enabled, which means that the TTL field is copied from the IP header and inserted into the
MPLS label. This aspect allows a trace command to show all of the hops in the network.
To use a fixed TTL value (255) for the first label of the IP packet, use the no form of the mpls
ip propagate-ttl command. This action hides the structure of the MPLS network from a trace
command. Specify the types of packets to be hidden by using the forwarded and local
arguments. Specifying no mpls ip propagate-ttl forwarded allows the structure of the MPLS
network to be hidden from customers but not from the provider. Here are the most common
applications of this command:
mpls ip propagate-ttl [forwarded | local]
no mpls ip propagate-ttl [forwarded | local]
This table describes the parameters for the mpls ip propagate-ttl command.
mpls ip propagate-ttl Syntax Description
3-26
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Hides the structure of the MPLS network from a trace

command only for forwarded packets; prevents the trace
command from showing the hops for forwarded packets
(Optional) Hides the structure of the MPLS network from a trace

command only for local packets; prevents the trace command
from showing the hops only for local packets
Defaults
By default, this command is enabled. The TTL field is copied from the IP header. A trace
command shows all of the hops in the network.
Usage Guidelines
By default, the mpls ip propagate-ttl command is enabled, and the IP TTL value is copied to
the MPLS TTL field during label imposition. To disable TTL propagation for all packets, use
the no mpls ip propagate-ttl command. To disable TTL propagation only for forwarded
packets, use the no mpls ip propagate-ttl forwarded command. This action allows the
structure of the MPLS network to be hidden from customers, but not from the provider.
This feature supports the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) document ICMP Extensions
for Multiprotocol Label Switching.
3-27

Disabling IP TTL Propagation Example
MPLS v2.23-15
Typically, a service provider likes to hide the backbone network from outside users but allow
inside traceroute to work for easier troubleshooting of the network.
This goal can be achieved by disabling TTL propagation for forwarded packets only, as
described here:
If a packet originates in the router, the real TTL value is copied into the label TTL.
If the packet is received through an interface, the TTL field in a label is assigned a value of
255.
The result is that someone using traceroute on a provider router will see all of the backbone
routers. Customers will see only edge routers.
The opposite behavior can be achieved by using the no mpls ip propagate-ttl local command,
although this is not usually desired.
3-28
Configuring Conditional Label Distribution

This topic describes how to configure conditional label distribution.
Conditional Label Distribution

Configuration
By default, labels for all destinations are announced to all LDP or

TDP neighbors.
This command enables you to selectively advertise some labels
to some LDP or TDP neighbors.
Conditional label advertisement works only over frame-mode
interfaces.
Parameters:
for
The IP access list that selects the
destinations for which the labels will be generated
to
The IP access list that selects the MPLS
neighbors that will receive the labels
MPLS v2.23-16
mpls ldp advertise-labels

To control the distribution of locally assigned (incoming) labels by means of LDP, use the
mpls ldp advertise-labels command in global configuration mode. This command is used to
control which labels are advertised to which LDP neighbors. To prevent the distribution of
locally assigned labels, use the no form of this command, as shown here:
mpls ldp advertise-labels [for prefix-access-list [to peer-access-list]]
no mpls ldp advertise-labels [for prefix-access-list [to peer-access-list]]
This table describes the parameters for the mpls idp advertise-labels command.
mpls idp advertise-labels Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) This parameter specifies which destinations should

have their labels advertised.
(Optional) This parameter specifies which LSR neighbors should

receive label advertisements. An LSR is identified by its router ID,
which consists of the first 4 bytes of its 6-byte LDP identifier.
3-29

Configuration: Example
The customer is already running IP infrastructure.
MPLS is needed only to support MPLS VPN services:
Labels should be generated only for loopback interfaces
(BGP next hops) of all routers.
All loopback interfaces are in one contiguous address
block (192.168.254.0/24).
MPLS v2.23-17
Example: Conditional Label Distribution Configuration

The example here describes where conditional label advertising can be used. The existing
network still performs normal IP routing, but the MPLS LSP tunnel between the loopback
interfaces of the LSR routers is needed to enable MPLS Virtual Private Network (VPN)
functionality.
Using one contiguous block of IP addresses for loopbacks on provider edge (PE) routers can
simplify the configuration of conditional advertising.
3-30

Configuration Steps
Step 1: Enable CEF and label switching.
MPLS v2.23-18
In the first step, CEF switching and MPLS have to be enabled on all core interfaces. The MPLS
MTU size may be adjusted on the LAN interfaces.
3-31

Configuration Steps (Cont.)
Step 2: Enable conditional label advertisement.
MPLS v2.23-19
In the second step, disable label propagation and enable conditional label advertising. Within
the mpls ldp advertise-labels command, specify the neighbors to which the labels are to be
sent and the networks for which the labels are to be advertised.
Example: Enabling Conditional Label Advertisement

In the figure, the labels for all networks permitted by ACL 90 are sent to all neighbors matched
by ACL 91 (in this example, this would be all TDP or LDP neighbors).
3-32
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Switched

WAN Media
This topic describes how to configure frame-mode MPLS on switched WAN media.
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on

Switched WAN Media
Why:
Run MPLS over ATM networks that do not
support MPLS.
This could be the potential first phase in ATM network
migration.
How:
Configure MPLS over ATM point-to-point subinterfaces on
the routers.
MPLS v2.23-20
When an underlying ATM infrastructure that does not support cell-mode MPLS is used, MPLS
can still be used across point-to-point permanent virtual circuits (PVCs). The MPLS
configuration is equal to that on any other Layer 2 media.
This activity could be the first phase of an ATM network migration.
3-33
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Switched WAN Media:

MPLS over ATM Forum PVCs
Routers view the ATM PVC as a frame-mode MPLS interface.

TDP or LDP is run between the adjacent routers.
Many LSPs can be established over one ATM PVC.
The ATM network is not aware of MPLS between the routers.
MPLS v2.23-21
If frame-mode MPLS on an ATM interface is enabled, TDP or LDP neighbor relationships are
established between the two PVC endpoint routers and not with the attached ATM switch.
Labeling of packets happens at the process level (in software), while segmentation and
reassembly happen on the interface (in hardware), regardless of the type of packet.
Switching is performed based on the virtual path identifier/virtual channel identifier (VPI/VCI)
value in the ATM header that is used for this particular PVC, and is not related to Layer 3 IP
information.
3-34

MPLS over ATM Forum PVCs (Cont.)
Create a point-to-point ATM subinterface.

Configure ATM PVC on the subinterface.
Start label switching and LDP or TDP on the interface.
MPLS v2.23-22
Configuring frame-mode MPLS on an ATM interface involves using the same interface
command (mpls ip). Because this implementation is frame-mode MPLS (versus cell-mode)
over ATM, the interface is defined as a point-to-point subinterface.
The ATM parameters are not related to MPLS, because the labeled traffic is using a standard
ATM Forum point-to-point PVC.
3-35

MPLS over Frame Relay Networks
Create a point-to-point or multipoint Frame Relay subinterface.

Configure Frame Relay DLCI on the subinterface.
Start label switching and LDP or TDP on the interface.
MPLS v2.23-23
Enabling MPLS on a Frame Relay PVC, also called a data-link connection identifier (DLCI), is
no different from doing so on any other point-to-point media.
Routers insert a label between the frame and the IP header. The TDP or LDP session is
established between the two IP endpoints connected through a Frame Relay network.
3-36
Summary
Summary
Some of the MPLS configuration tasks are mandatory and some are
optional.
The command
interface for determining the LDP router ID.
Use the
or
(interface level).
specifies a preferred
commands to enable MPLS
Label switching increases maximum MTU size on an interface.

TTL propagation must be disabled on ingress and egress
edge LSRs.
Conditional label advertisement works only on frame-mode
interfaces.
When frame-mode MPLS on an ATM interface is enabled, LDP
relationships are established between the PVC endpoints and not
with the attached ATM switch.
MPLS v2.23-24
3-37
3-38
Lesson 3
Monitoring Frame-Mode MPLS

on Cisco IOS Platforms
Overview
This lesson describes the procedures for monitoring Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) on
Cisco IOS platforms by listing the syntax and parameter descriptions; looking at interfaces,
neighbor nodes, and Label Information Base (LIB) and label forwarding information base
(LFIB) tables; and outlining the usage guidelines for the commands.
It is very important to know what commands you can use to verify correct operation of MPLS
in the network. The information here will help you when you encounter problems with framemode interfaces that have MPLS running in the network.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to use monitoring commands in
frame-mode MPLS on Cisco IOS platforms. This ability includes being able to meet these
objectives:
Monitor MPLS
Monitor LDP
Monitor label switching
Debug MPLS and LDP
Monitoring MPLS
This topic describes how to monitor MPLS.
MPLS Monitoring Commands

Displays LDP parameters on the local router

Displays MPLS status on individual interfaces

Displays all discovered LDP neighbors
MPLS v2.23-3

To display available Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) parameters, use the show mpls ldp
parameters command in privileged EXEC mode.
Syntax Description

To display information about one or more interfaces that have the MPLS feature enabled, use
the show mpls interfaces [interface] [detail] command in EXEC mode.
The table describes the parameters for the show mpls interfaces command.
show mpls interfaces Syntax Description
3-40
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Defines the interface about which to display labelswitching information
(Optional) Displays detailed label-switching information for the

specified interface

To display the status of the LDP discovery process (Hello protocol), use these commands in
privileged EXEC mode:
show mpls ldp discovery [vrf vpn-name]
show mpls ldp discovery [all]
The show mpls ldp discovery command displays all MPLS-enabled interfaces and the
neighbors that are present on the interfaces.
show mpls ldp discovery Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Displays the neighbor discovery information for the

specified Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing or forwarding
instance (vpn-name)
(Optional) Displays LDP discovery information for all VPNs when

the all keyword is specified alone in this command, including
those in the default routing domain
3-41
MPLS Monitoring Commands:

MPLS v2.23-4
The table describes the significant fields in the display.
3-42
show mpls ldp parameters Field Description

Field
Description
Protocol version
This field indicates the version of LDP running on the platform.
Downstream label pool
This field describes the range of labels available for the platform
to assign for label-switching purposes. The available labels range
from the smallest value (min label) to the largest label value (max
label), with a modest number of labels at the low end of the range
(reserved labels), reserved for diagnostic purposes.
Session hold time
This field indicates the time that an LDP session is to be

maintained with an LDP peer without receiving LDP traffic or an
LDP keepalive message from the peer.
Keepalive interval
This field indicates the interval of time between consecutive

transmissions of LDP keepalive messages to an LDP peer.
Discovery hello
This field indicates the amount of time to remember that a

neighbor platform wants an LDP session without receiving an
LDP hello message from the neighbor (hold time), and the time
interval between the transmissions of consecutive LDP hello
messages to neighbors (interval).
Discovery targeted hello
This field indicates the amount of time to remember that a

neighbor platform wants an LDP session when one of the these
situations occurs:
The neighbor platform is not directly connected to the router.
The neighbor platform has not sent an LDP hello message.
This intervening interval is known as hold time.
This field also indicates the time interval between the
transmissions of consecutive hello messages to a neighbor not
directly connected to the router.
LDP for targeted sessions
This field reports the parameters that have been set by the mpls
ldp neighbor targeted command.
LDP initial/maximum backoff
This field reports the parameters that have been set by the mpls
ldp backoff command.
3-43


MPLS v2.23-5
The show mpls interfaces command will show only those interfaces on which MPLS has been
configured.
show mpls interfaces Field Description
Field
Description
Interface
Interface name
IP
Yes if IP label switching (sometimes called hop-by-hop label

switching) has been enabled on this interface
Tunnel
Yes if label-switched path (LSP) tunnel labeling has been

enabled on this interface
Tagging operational
Operational state; Yes if labeled packets can be sent over this

interface
Labeled packets can be sent over an interface if an MPLS
protocol is configured on the interface and the required Layer 2
negotiations have occurred.
3-44


MPLS v2.23-6

3-45
show mpls ldp discovery Field Description

Field
Description
Local LDP Identifier
This field indicates the LDP identifier (LDP ID) for the local router.
An LDP ID is a 6-byte construct displayed in the form IP
address:number.
By convention, the first 4 bytes of the LDP ID constitute the router
ID; integers, starting with 0, constitute the final 2 bytes of the IP
address:number construct.
Interfaces
This field lists the interfaces that are engaging in LDP discovery
activity, as described here:
The xmit field indicates that the interface is transmitting LDP
discovery hello packets.
The recv field indicates that the interface is receiving LDP
discovery hello packets.
The (ldp) or (tdp) field indicates the label distribution protocol
configured for the interface.
The LDP (or Tag Distribution Protocol [TDP]) identifiers indicate
LDP (or TDP) neighbors discovered on the interface.
Targeted Hellos
This field lists the platforms to which targeted hello messages are
being sent, as described here:
The xmit, recv, and (ldp) or (tdp) fields are as described for
the Interfaces field.
The active field indicates that this label switch router (LSR)
has initiated targeted hello messages.
The passive field indicates that the neighbor LSR has
initiated targeted hello messages and that this LSR is
configured to respond to the targeted hello messages from
the neighbor.
3-46
Monitoring LDP
This topic describes how to monitor LDP.
LDP Monitoring Commands

Displays individual LDP neighbors

Displays more details about LDP neighbors

Displays LIB
show mpls ldp bindings [network {mask | length} [longer-prefixes]]
[local-label label [- label]} [remote-label label [- label] [neighbor address]
[local]
MPLS v2.23-7

To display the status of LDP sessions, use these show mpls ldp neighbor commands in
show mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vpn-name] [address] [interface] [detail]
show mpls ldp neighbor [all]
show mpls ldp neighbor Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
vrf vpn-name
(Optional) Displays the LDP neighbors for the specified VPN

routing or forwarding instance (vpn-name)
address
(Optional) Identifies the neighbor with this IP address
interface
(Optional) Defines the LDP neighbors accessible over this

interface
detail
(Optional) Displays information in long form
all
(Optional) Displays LDP neighbor information for all VPNs when

the all keyword is specified alone in this command, including
those in the default routing domain
3-47

To display the contents of the LIB, use this show mpls ldp bindings command in privileged
EXEC mode: show mpls ldp bindings [network {mask | length} [longer-prefixes]]
[local-label label [-label]] [remote-label label [-label]] [neighbor address] [local].
show mpls ldp bindings Syntax Description
3-48
Parameter
Description
vrf vpn-name
(Optional) This parameter displays the label bindings for the specified
VPN routing or forwarding instance (vpn-name).
network
(Optional) This parameter defines the destination network number.
mask
(Optional) This parameter specifies the network mask, written as

A.B.C.D.
length
(Optional) This parameter specifies the mask length (1 to 32

characters).
longer-prefixes
(Optional) This parameter selects any prefix that matches mask with a
length from 1 to 32 characters.
local-label label-label
(Optional) This parameter displays entries matching local label values.

Use the label-label argument to indicate the label range.
remote-label label-label
(Optional) This parameter displays entries matching the label values

assigned by a neighbor router. Use the label-label argument to
indicate the label range.
neighbor address
(Optional) This parameter displays the label bindings assigned by the

selected neighbor.
local
(Optional) This parameter displays the local label bindings.
LDP Monitoring Commands:

show mpls ldp neighbor detail
MPLS v2.23-8
The status of the LDP session is indicated by State: Oper (operational).

To display the status of LDP sessions, issue these show mpls ldp neighbor commands in
show mpls ldp neighbor [vrf vpn-name] [address] [interface] [detail]
show mpls ldp neighbor [all]
Usage Guidelines
The show mpls ldp neighbor command can provide information about all LDP neighbors, or
the information can be limited to the following:
Neighbor with specific IP address
LDP neighbors known to be accessible over a specific interface
3-49
This table describes the significant fields in the display.

show mpls ldp neighbor Field Description
Field
Description
Peer LDP Ident
This field displays the LDP ID of the neighbor (peer) for this
session.
Local LDP Ident
This field displays the LDP ID for the local LSR for this session.
TCP connection
This field displays the TCP connection used to support the LDP
session, shown in the format that follows:
peer IP address.peer port
local IP address.local port
3-50
State
This field displays the state of the LDP session. Generally, this is
Oper (operational), but transient is another possible state.
Msgs sent/rcvd
This field displays number of LDP messages sent to and received

from the session peer. The count includes the transmission and
receipt of periodic keepalive messages, which are required for
maintenance of the LDP session.
Downstream on demand
This field indicates that the downstream-on-demand method of

label distribution is being used for this LDP session. When the
downstream-on-demand method is used, an LSR advertises its
locally assigned (incoming) labels to its LDP peer only when the
peer requests them.
Downstream
This field Indicates that the downstream method of label

distribution is being used for this LDP session. When the
downstream method is used, an LSR advertises all of its locally
assigned (incoming) labels to its LDP peer (subject to any
configured access list restrictions).
Up time
This field displays the length of time that the LDP session has
existed.
LDP discovery sources
This field displays the source (or sources) of LDP discovery

activity that led to the establishment of this LDP session.
Addresses bound to peer LDP

Ident
This field displays the known interface addresses of the LDP

session peer. These are addresses that might appear as nexthop addresses in the local routing table. They are used to
maintain the LFIB.
Peer holdtime
This field displays the time that it takes to remove the relationship
if no keepalives are received within this period.
KA interval
This field displays the keepalive interval.
Peer state
This field shows the status of the neighbor relationship.
LDP Monitoring Commands:


MPLS v2.23-9

To display the contents of the LIB, use this show mpls ldp bindings command in privileged
EXEC mode: show mpls ldp bindings [vrf vpn-name] [network {mask | length} [longerprefixes]] [local-label label [-label]] [remote-label label [-label]] [neighbor address] [local].
show mpls ldp bindings Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
vrf vpn-name
(Optional) This parameter displays the label bindings for the

specified VPN routing or forwarding instance (vpn-name).
network
(Optional) This parameter defines the destination network

number.
mask
(Optional) This parameter specifies the network mask, written as

A.B.C.D.
length
(Optional) This parameter specifies the mask length (1 to 32

characters).
longer-prefixes
(Optional) This parameter selects any prefix that matches mask

with a length from 1 to 32 characters.
local-label label-label
(Optional) This parameter displays entries matching local label

values. Use the label-label argument to indicate the label range.
remote-label label-label
(Optional) This parameter displays entries matching the label

values assigned by a neighbor router. Use the label-label
argument to indicate the label range.
neighbor address
(Optional) This parameter displays the label bindings assigned by

the selected neighbor.
local
(Optional) This parameter displays the local label bindings.
3-51
Usage Guidelines
The show mpls ldp bindings command displays label bindings learned by the LDP or TDP.
Examples
This sample output from the show mpls ldp bindings command displays the contents of the
entire LIB.

3-52

This topic describes how to monitor label switching.

Displays contents of LFIB

Displays label or labels attached to a packet during label
imposition on edge LSR
MPLS v2.23-10

To display the contents of the MPLS LFIB, use this show mpls forwarding-table command in
privileged EXEC mode: show mpls forwarding-table [{network {mask | length} | labels label
[-label]| interface interface | next-hop address | lsp-tunnel [tunnel-id]}] [detail].
show ip cef
To display entries in the FIB that are unresolved or to display a summary of the FIB, use the
this form of the show ip cef command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip cef [unresolved |
summary].
To display specific entries in the FIB based on IP address information, use this form of the
show ip cef command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip cef [network [mask [longerprefix]]] [detail].
To display specific entries in the FIB based on interface information, use this form of the show
ip cef command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip cef [type number] [detail].
3-53
Monitoring Label Switching:

MPLS v2.23-11

To display the contents of the MPLS LFIB, use this show mpls forwarding-table command in
privileged EXEC mode: show mpls forwarding-table [{network {mask | length} | labels label
[-label]| interface interface | next-hop address | lsp-tunnel [tunnel-id]}] [detail].
show mpls forwarding-table Syntax Description
3-54
Parameter
Description
network
(Optional) Displays destination network number
mask
Displays IP address of destination mask whose entry is to be

shown
length
Displays number of bits in mask of destination
labels label-label
(Optional) Shows only entries with specified local labels
interface interface
(Optional) Shows only entries with specified outgoing interface
next-hop address
(Optional) Shows only entries with specified neighbor as next hop
lsp-tunnel tunnel-id
(Optional) Shows only entries with specified LSP tunnel, or all

LSP tunnel entries
detail
(Optional) Displays information in long form (includes length of

encapsulation, length of MAC string, maximum transmission unit
(MTU), and all labels)
Examples: show mpls forwarding table Command Output

This is a sample output from the show mpls forwarding table command.

[T] = Forwarding through an LSP tunnel.

Note
View additional tagging information with the detail option.
3-55

show mpls forwarding-table detail

MPLS v2.23-12
3-56
show mpls forwarding table Field Description

Field
Description
Local tag
This field displays the label assigned by this router.
Outgoing tag or VC
This field displays the label assigned by the next hop or virtual
path identifier/virtual channel identifier (VPI/VCI) used to get to
next hop. Some of the entries that you can specify in this column
are as follows:
[T]: Forwarding is through an LSP tunnel.
untagged: There is no label for the destination from the next hop,
or label switching is not enabled on the outgoing interface.
Pop tag: The next hop advertised an implicit null label for the
destination, and this router popped the top label.
Prefix or Tunnel ID
This field displays the address or tunnel to which packets with

this label are going.
Bytes tag switched
This field displays the number of bytes switched with this

incoming label.
Outgoing interface
This field displays the interface through which packets with this
label are sent.
Next Hop
This field displays the IP address of the neighbor that assigned

the outgoing label.
MAC/Encaps
This field displays the length in bytes of Layer 2 header, and

length in bytes of packet encapsulation, including Layer 2 header
and label header.
MTU
This field displays the MTU of the labeled packet.
Tag Stack
This field displays all the outgoing labels. If the outgoing interface
is transmission convergence-ATM (TC-ATM), the virtual circuit
descriptor (VCD) is also shown.
18F18847 00010000
This field displays the actual encapsulation in hexadecimal form.

There is a space shown between Layer 2 and the label header.
3-57

show ip cef detail

MPLS v2.23-13
show ip cef detail

To display detailed FIB entry information for all FIB entries, use this show ip cef detail
command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip cef [type number] [detail].
show ip cef detail Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
unresolved
(Optional) Displays unresolved FIB entries
summary
(Optional) Displays a summary of the FIB
network

network
mask

network and mask
longer-prefix
(Optional) Displays FIB entries for all more specific destinations
detail
(Optional) Displays detailed FIB entry information
type number
(Optional) Displays interface type and number for which to

display FIB entries
Usage Guidelines
The show ip cef command without any keywords or arguments shows a brief display of all FIB
entries.
The show ip cef detail command shows detailed FIB entry information for all FIB entries.
3-58

This topic describes how to debug MPLS and LDP.

Debugs TDP adjacencies, session establishment, and
label bindings exchange

Debugs LFIB events: label creations, removals, rewrite,
and so on

Debugs labeled packets switched by the router
MPLS v2.23-14
A large number of debug commands are associated with MPLS on Cisco IOS platforms. The
debug mpls ldp commands debug various aspects of LDP protocol, from label distribution to
exchange of the application layer data between adjacent LDP-speaking routers.
Note
Use debug commands with caution. Enabling debugging can disrupt operation of the
router under high load conditions. Before you start a debug command, always consider
the output that the command may generate and the amount of time this may take. You
should also look at your CPU load before debugging by using the show processes
cpu command. Verify that you have ample CPU available before beginning the
debugging process.
The debug mpls lfib commands display LFIB-related events (allocation of new labels, removal
of labels, and so on).
The debug mpls packets command displays all labeled packets switched by the router (through
the specified interface).
Caution
Use the debug mpls packets command with care, because it generates output for every
packet processed.
Furthermore, enabling the debug mpls packets command causes fast and distributed label
switching to be disabled for the selected interfaces. To avoid adversely affecting other
system activity, use this command only when traffic on the network is at a minimum.
3-59
debug mpls packets

To display labeled packets switched by the host router, use the debug mpls packets command
in privileged EXEC mode. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.
This illustrates these two commands:
debug mpls packets [interface]
no debug mpls packets [interface]
debug mpls packets Syntax Description
3-60
Field
Description
Hs0/0
Displays the identifier for the interface on which the packet was
received or transmitted
Recvd
Displays the packet received
Xmit
Displays the packet transmitted
CoS
Displays the class of service (CoS) field from the packet label
header
TTL
Displays the time-to-live (TTL) field from the packet label header
(no tag)
Displays the last label popped off the packet and transmitted
unlabeled
Tag(s)
Displays a list of labels on the packet, ordered from the top of the
stack to the bottom
Summary
Summary
The
command will show only those
interfaces that have had mpls enabled.
Use the
table.
Use the
LFIB table.
command to display the LIB

command to display the
Use the
command with care because it
causes fast and distributed switching to be disabled.
MPLS v2.23-15
3-61
3-62
Lesson 4
Troubleshooting Frame-Mode
MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms
Overview
This lesson looks at some of the common issues that arise in Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) networks. For each issue discussed, there is a recommended troubleshooting procedure
to resolve the issue.
It is very important to know what commands you can use to verify correct operation of MPLS
in the network. The information here will help you when you encounter problems with framemode interfaces that have MPLS running in the network.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to troubleshoot frame-mode
MPLS problems on Cisco IOS platforms. This ability includes being able to meet these
objectives:
Identify the common issues that arise in MPLS networks
Solve LDP session startup issues
Solve label allocation issues that can arise in MPLS networks
Solve label distribution issues that can arise in MPLS networks
Solve packet-labeling issues that can arise in MPLS networks
Solve intermittent MPLS failures
Solve packet propagation issues in MPLS networks
What Are Common Frame-Mode MPLS Issues?

This topic identifies some of the common frame-mode issues that arise in MPLS networks.
Symptoms of Common Frame-Mode MPLS

Issues
The LDP session does not start.
Labels are not allocated.
Labels are not distributed.
Packets are not labeled, although the labels have
been distributed.
MPLS intermittently breaks after an interface
failure.
Large packets are not propagated across the
network.
MPLS v2.23-3
Here are the common issues that can be encountered while you are troubleshooting a framemode MPLS network:
The Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) session does not start.
The LDP session starts, but the labels are not allocated or distributed.
Labels are allocated and distributed, but the forwarded packets are not labeled.
MPLS stops working intermittently after an interface failure, even on interfaces totally
unrelated to the failed interface.
Large IP packets are not propagated across the MPLS backbone, even though the packets
were successfully propagated across the pure IP backbone.
This discussion will cover each of these issues and provide recommended steps for
troubleshooting them.
3-64
Solving LDP Session Startup Issues

This topic describes how to solve LDP session startup issues found in MPLS networks.
LDP Session Startup Issues

Symptom
LDP neighbors are not discovered.
The show mpls ldp discovery command does not display
expected LDP neighbors.
Diagnosis
MPLS is not enabled on the adjacent router.
Verification
Verify with the show mpls interface command on the
adjacent router.
MPLS v2.23-4
Diagnosis: If MPLS is enabled on an interface, but no neighbors are discovered, it is likely that
MPLS is not enabled on the neighbor.
The router is sending discovery messages, but the neighbor is not replying because it does not
have LDP enabled.
Solution: Enable MPLS on the neighboring router.
3-65
LDP Session Startup Issues (Cont.)

Symptom
Diagnosis
There is a label distribution protocol mismatchTDP on
one end, LDP on the other end.
Verification
Verify with the show mpls interface detail command on both
routers.
MPLS v2.23-5
Diagnosis: Another possibility is that the neighbor has a different label distribution protocol
enabled on the interface, such as when LDP is enabled on one end and Tag Distribution
Protocol (TDP) is enabled on the other end.
Solution: Use one of these solutions:
Change the label distribution protocol on this end.
Change the label distribution protocol on the other end.
Enable both label distribution protocols on this end.
Enable both label distribution protocols on the other end.
3-66

Symptom
Diagnosis
Packet filter drops LDP neighbor discovery packets.
Verification
Verify access list presence with the
command.
Verify access list contents with the
command.
MPLS v2.23-6
Diagnosis: MPLS configurations match on both ends, but the session still does not get
established. Check whether there are any input access lists that deny discovery messages.
Solution: Remove or change the access list to allow User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets
with source and destination port number 646 (711 for TDP).
Make sure that the access list also allows TCP to and from port 646 (711 for TDP).
3-67

Symptom
LDP neighbors are discovered; the LDP session is not
established.
The show mpls ldp neighbor command does not
display a neighbor in operational state.
Diagnosis
The connectivity between loopback interfaces is
broken; the LDP session is usually established
between loopback interfaces of adjacent LSRs.
Verification
Verify connectivity with the extended
command.
MPLS v2.23-7
Diagnosis: LDP neighbors are exchanging hello packets, but the LDP session is never
established.
Solution: Check the reachability of the loopback interfaces, because they are typically used to
establish the LDP session. Make sure that the loopback addresses are exchanged via the Interior
Gateway Protocol (IGP) used in the network.
3-68
Solving Label Allocation Issues

This topic describes how to solve label allocation issues that could arise in MPLS networks.
Label Allocation Issues

Symptom
Labels are not allocated for local routes.
The
command does not
display any labels.
Diagnosis
CEF is not enabled.
Verification
Verify with the
command.
MPLS v2.23-8
Diagnosis: Labels are not allocated for any or some of the local routes. Use the show ip cef
command to verify whether Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) switching is enabled on all
MPLS-enabled interfaces.
Solution: Enable CEF switching by using the ip cef command in global configuration mode or
the ip route-cache cef command in interface mode.
3-69
Solving Label Distribution Issues

This topic describes how to solve label distribution issues that can arise in MPLS networks.
Label Distribution Issues

Symptom
Labels are allocated, but not distributed.
Using the
command on the
adjacent LSR does not display labels from this LSR.
Diagnosis
There are problems with conditional label distribution.
Verification
Debug label distribution with the
.
Examine the neighbor LDP router IP address with the
command.
Verify that the neighbor LDP router IP address is matched
by the access list specified in the
command.
MPLS v2.23-9
Symptom: Labels are generated for local routes on one label switch router (LSR) but are not
received on neighboring LSRs.
Solution: Check whether conditional label advertising is enabled and verify both access lists
that are used with the command.
3-70
Solving Packet-Labeling Issues

This topic describes how to solve packet-labeling issues that can arise in MPLS networks.
Packet Labeling Issues

Symptom
Labels are distributed, but packets are not labeled.
Using the
command does not
show that labeled packets are being sent.
Diagnosis
CEF is not enabled on the input interface (potentially
because of a conflicting feature being configured).
Verification
Verify with the
command.
MPLS v2.23-10
Symptom: Labels exist, but packets are not labeled. The show interface accounting command
does not display any labeled packets.
Solution: Enable CEF switching by using the ip route-cache cef interface command and make
sure that there is no feature enabled on the interface that is not supported in combination with
CEF switching. Verify whether CEF is enabled on an individual interface with the show cef
interface command.
3-71
Packet Labeling Issues: show cef interface

MPLS v2.23-11
show cef interface

The show cef interface command is used in privileged EXEC mode to display CEF interface
information.
The table describes the parameters for the show cef interface type number [detail] command.
show cef interface Syntax Descriptions
Parameter
Description
type number
Displays interface number and the number about which to display

CEF-related information
detail
(Optional) Displays detailed CEF information for the specified

interface port number
Usage Guidelines
The show cef interface command is available on routers that have route processor (RP) cards
and line cards.
You can use this command to show the CEF state on an individual interface.
3-72

show cef interface Field Descriptions
Field
Description
interface type number is {up |

down}
Indicates status of the interface
Internet address
Displays Internet address of the interface
ICMP redirects are {always sent |

never sent}
Indicates how packet forwarding is configured
Per-packet load balancing
Displays status of load balancing in use on the interface

(enabled or disabled)
Inbound access list {# | Not set}
Displays number of access lists defined for the interface
Outbound access list
Displays number of access lists defined for the interface
Hardware idb is type number
Displays interface type and number configured
Fast switching type
Indicates switching mode in useused for troubleshooting
IP Distributed CEF switching

{enabled | disabled}
Indicates the switching path used
Slot n Slot unit n
Displays the slot number
Transmit line accumulator
Indicates the maximum number of packets allowed in the

transmit queue
IP MTU
Displays the value of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size

set on the interface
3-73
Solving Intermittent MPLS Failures

This topic describes how to solve intermittent MPLS failures.
Intermittent MPLS Failures After Interface

Failure
Symptom
The overall MPLS connectivity in a router intermittently
breaks after an interface failure.
Diagnosis
The IP address of a physical interface is used for the LDP
(or TDP) identifier. Configure a loopback interface on the
router.
Verification
Verify the local LDP identifier with the
command.
MPLS v2.23-12
Symptom: MPLS connectivity is established, labels are exchanged, and packets are labeled
and forwarded. However, an interface failure can sporadically stop an MPLS operation on
unrelated interfaces in the same router.
Details: LDP sessions are established between IP addresses that correspond to the LDP LSR
identifier (ID). The LDP LSR ID is assigned using the algorithm that is also used to assign an
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) or a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) router ID.
This algorithm selects the highest IP address of an active interface if there are no loopback
interfaces configured on the router. If that interface fails, the LDP LSR ID is lost and the TCP
session carrying the LDP data is torn down, resulting in loss of all neighbor-assigned label
information.
The symptom can be easily verified with the show mpls ldp neighbors command, which
displays the local and remote LSR ID. Verify that both of these IP addresses are associated with
a loopback interface.
Solution: Configure a loopback interface on the LSR.
Note
3-74
The LDP LSR ID will change only after the router is reloaded.
Solving Packet Propagation Issues

This topic describes how to solve packet propagation issues in an MPLS network.
Packet Propagation Issues

Symptom
Large packets are not propagated across the network.
Use of the extended
command with varying packet
sizes fails for packet sizes close to 1500 packets.
In some cases, MPLS might work, but MPLS VPN will fail.
Diagnosis
There are label MTU issues or switches that do not support
jumbo frames in the forwarding path.
Verification
Issue the
command through the forwarding path;
identify all LAN segments in the path.
Verify the label MTU setting on routers attached to LAN
segments.
Check for low-end switches in the transit path.
MPLS v2.23-13
Symptom: Packets are labeled and sent, but they are not received on the neighboring router. A
LAN switch between the adjacent MPLS-enabled routers may drop the packets if it does not
support jumbo frames. In some cases, MPLS might work, but MPLS Virtual Private Network
(VPN) will fail.
Solution: Change the MPLS MTU size, taking into account the maximum number of labels
that may appear in a packet.
3-75
Summary
Summary
Some common frame-mode issues are as follows: LDP session
does not start, labels are not allocated or distributed, and MPLS
intermittently breaks after an interface failure.
One LDP session startup issue is when LSP neighbors are not
discovered.
A label allocation issue is one in which the labels are not allocated
for local routes.
Labels may be allocated but not distributed correctly.
Ensure that there are no conflicts between CEF and any other
configured features; otherwise, packets might not be labeled.
Use loopback IP addresses, not a configured interface IP address,
to avoid MPLS connectivity intermittently breaking down.
Large packets are not propagated across the network.
3-76
MPLS v2.23-14
Module Summary
Module Summary
CEF must be running as a prerequisite to running MPLS on a
Cisco router.
Frame-mode MPLS requires CEF switching and MPLS
enabled on appropriate interfaces. Optional items include
MPLS ID, MTU, IP TTL, and conditional label advertisement.
When you encounter problems with frame-mode MPLS
interfaces, it is helpful to know the procedures for monitoring
MPLS on Cisco IOS platforms.
When you verify correct operation of MPLS in the network,
you will also need to know the recommended
troubleshooting procedures.
MPLS v2.23-1
There are many detailed configuration, monitoring, and debugging guidelines when
implementing frame-mode Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) on Cisco IOS platforms.
Advanced technologies, such as time-to-live (TTL) propagation and label distribution, are also
critical when switching implementations.
References
Cisco Express Forwarding Overview
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/products_configuration_guide_c
hapter09186a00800ca7cb.html
Configuring Cisco Express Forwarding
hapter09186a00800ca7cc.html
Multiprotocol Label Switching Overview
hapter09186a00800ca7cc.html
3-77
Module Self-Check
Q1)
What is another name for topology-driven switching? (Source: Introducing CEF

Switching)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q2)
What is the command to monitor CEF? (Source: Introducing CEF Switching)

A)
B)
C)
D)
Q3)
3-78
The packet is dropped.

The packet is cache-switched.
The packet is process-switched.
CEF switching is used.
If IP TTL propagation is not allowed, what is the value that is placed in the MPLS
header? (Source: Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q7)
The adjacency table holds the Layer 2 header, and the ARP cache does not.
The ARP cache holds the Layer 2 header, and the adjacency table does not.
Both the adjacency table and the ARP cache hold the Layer 2 header.
Neither the adjacency table nor the ARP cache holds the Layer 2 header.
What happens to a packet that should be fast-switched but the destination is not in the
switching cache? (Source: Introducing CEF Switching)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q6)
Router(config)#mpls ip cef
Router(config)#ip mpls cef
Router(config)#cef
Router(config)#ip cef
In CEF switching, what is the difference between the adjacency table and the ARP
cache? (Source: Introducing CEF Switching)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q5)
Router#show cef
Router#show mpls ip cef
Router#show ip cef
Router#show mpls cef
What is the command to enable CEF on a Cisco router? (Source: Introducing CEF
Switching)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q4)
CEF
fast switching
cache switching
process switching
0
1
254
255
The MPLS MTU is increased to _____ to support 1500-byte IP packets and MPLS
stacks up to 3 levels deep. (Source: Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS
Platforms)
Q8)
What is the correct command to enable MPLS in Cisco IOS software? (Source:
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q9)
Which two steps are NOT mandatory to enable MPLS? (Choose two.) (Source:
Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q10)
Router(config)#ip mpls
Router(config-if)#ip mpls
Router(config)#mpls ip
Router(config-if)#mpls ip
Enable CEF switching.

Configure the size of the label pool.
Configure the MTU size for labeled packets.
Configure LDP (or TDP) on every interface that will run MPLS.
What needs to be configured to specify which neighbors would selectively receive

label advertisements? (Source: Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS
Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Controlled label distribution needs to be configured.

Conditional label distribution needs to be configured.
Unsolicited label distribution needs to be configured.
All neighbors will receive all labels.
Q11)
If frame-mode MPLS is run on ATM interfaces, LDP or LDP neighbor relationships

are established between the _____ routers. (Source: Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS
on Cisco IOS Platforms)
Q12)
Which command is used to display information about the LDP Hello protocol timers?
(Source: Monitoring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q13)
Which command is used to display the contents of the LIB table? (Source: Monitoring
Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q14)
show ip cef
show ldp forwarding-table
show mpls ldp labels

show mpls ldp neighbors
Which command is used to display the contents of the LFIB table? (Source: Monitoring
A)
B)
C)
D)
show mpls ldp labels

show mpls ldp neighbors
3-79
Q15)
Which command would NOT be used to debug MPLS or LDP? (Source: Monitoring
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q16)
Which two of the answer choices would cause an LDP (or TDP) session NOT to be
established between two LSRs? (Choose two.) (Source: Troubleshooting Frame-Mode
MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q17)
show mpls ldp lib (on the local router)

show mpls ldp lib (on the remote router)
show mpls ldp bindings (on the local router)
show mpls ldp bindings (on the remote router)
Which command displays CEF interface information? (Source: Troubleshooting

A)
B)
C)
D)
router#show mpls cef interface

router#show cef interface
router(config)#show cef interface
router(config)#show mpls cef interface
Q20)
To reduce the chances of having intermittent MPLS failures because of an interface

failing, a _____ address should be configured. (Source: Troubleshooting Frame-Mode
Q21)
A LAN switch is in the network path between two LSRs. It has been discovered that
large packets are not being propagated across the network. Which of the answer
choices represents the most possible cause? (Source: Troubleshooting Frame-Mode
A)
B)
C)
D)
3-80
show cef
show lfib
show ip cef
show mpls lfib
Which command is issued to see if labels are being distributed from the local LSR?
(Source: Troubleshooting Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q19)
an access list that allows TCP/UDP port number 646

an access list that allows TCP/UDP port number 711
an access list that does not allow TCP/UDP port number 646
an access list that does not allow TCP/UDP port number 711
Which command is issued to troubleshoot label allocation issues? (Source:

Troubleshooting Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q18)
debug mpls ldp

debug mpls lfib
debug mpls packets
debug mpls ldp neighbors
The precedence bit has not been set in the MPLS label.
The TTL has not been set correctly to address this issue.
The MTU size has not been set correctly to address this issue.
This is not a legal configuration. LSRs must be directly connected.

Q1)
Q2)
Q3)
Q4)
Q5)
Q6)
Q7)
1512
Q8)
Q9)
B, C
Q10)
Q11)
PVC endpoint
Q12)
Q13)
Q14)
Q15)
Q16)
C, D
Q17)
Q18)
Q19)
Q20)
loopback
Q21)
3-81
3-82
Module 4
MPLS VPN Technology

Overview
This module introduces Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) and two major VPN design options:
the overlay VPN and the peer-to-peer VPN. The module also introduces VPN terminology and
topologies, and describes Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) VPN architecture and
operations. This module details various customer edge-provider edge (CE-PE) routing options
and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) extensions (route targets and extended community
attributes) that allow Internal Border Gateway Protocol (IBGP) to transport customer routes
over a provider network. The MPLS VPN forwarding model is also covered together with how
it integrates with core routing protocols.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe the MPLS peer-to-peer architecture
and explain the routing and packet-forwarding model in this architecture. This ability includes
being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the major terminology and topology of VPNs
Describe the characteristics of the different VPN topologies
Describe the major architectural components of an MPLS VPN
Identify the routing requirements for MPLS VPNs
Describe how packets are forwarded in an MPLS VPN environment
4-2
Lesson 1
Introducing VPNs
Overview
This lesson explains the concept of Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), and explains the VPN
terminology that is also used by the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) VPN architecture.
The lesson looks at why VPNs were first introduced, and also explains the differences between
the overlay and peer-to-peer VPN models, how they are implemented, and the benefits and
drawbacks of each implementation.
It is important to understand the background of VPNs, because you should be able to determine
when an organization might need a VPN, and explain how MPLS VPNs can help save time and
money. Understanding the different types of VPNs will allow you to recognize where the
various types of VPNs would be best used in their associated networks.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to identify the major terminology and topology
of VPNs. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the connectivity of traditional router-based networks
Describe the advantages of VPN connectivity as compared to traditional router-based
networks
Identify the two major VPN implementation models
Describe the characteristics and technologies of overlay VPNs
Describe the characteristics and technologies of peer-to-peer VPNs
Describe the benefits of each type of VPN model
Describe the drawbacks of each VPN model
Traditional Router-Based Network Connectivity

This topic describes the connectivity of traditional router-based networks.
Traditional Router-Based Networks
Traditional router-based networks connect customer sites

through routers connected via dedicated point-to-point links.
MPLS v2.24-3
Traditional router-based networks were implemented with dedicated point-to-point links

connecting customer sites. The cost of this approach was comparatively high for these reasons:
The dedicated point-to-point links prevented any form of statistical infrastructure sharing
on the service provider side, resulting in high costs for the end user.
Every link required a dedicated port on a router, resulting in high equipment costs.
4-4
Advantages of VPNs
This topic describes the advantages of VPN connectivity as compared to traditional routerbased networks.
Virtual Private Networks
VPNs replace dedicated point-to-point links with emulated

point-to-point links sharing common infrastructure.
Customers use VPNs primarily to reduce their operational
costs.
MPLS v2.24-4
VPNs were introduced very early in the history of data communications with technologies such
as X.25 and Frame Relay, which use virtual circuits to establish the end-to-end connection over
a shared service provider infrastructure. Although X.25 and Frame Relay are sometimes
considered legacy technologies and obsolete, they still share these basic benefits with modern
VPNs:
The dedicated links of traditional router-based networks have been replaced with a
common infrastructure that emulates point-to-point links for the customer, resulting in
statistical sharing of the service provider infrastructure.
Statistical sharing of the infrastructure enables the service provider to offer connectivity for
a lower price, resulting in lower operational costs for the end user.
Example: VPNs
The figure shows the statistical sharing, where the customer premises equipment (CPE) router
on the left has one physical connection to the provider edge (PE) device, and two virtual
circuits have been provisioned. Virtual circuit #1 provides connectivity to the top CPE router
on the right. Virtual circuit #2 provides connectivity to the bottom CPE router on the right.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-5
VPN Terminology
This topic identifies the terminology used in describing VPNs.
VPN Terminology
MPLS v2.24-5
There are many conceptual models and terminologies describing various VPN technologies and
implementations. The terminology is generic enough to cover nearly any VPN technology or
implementation and is thus extremely versatile.
The major parts of an overall VPN solution are always those listed here:
Provider network (P-network): The common infrastructure that the service provider uses
to offer VPN services to customers
Customer network (C-network): The part of the overall customer network that is still
exclusively under customer control
Customer sites: Contiguous parts of the C-network
A typical C-network implemented with any VPN technology would contain islands of
connectivity under customer control (customer sites) connected together via the service
provider infrastructure (P-network).
4-6
VPN Terminology (Cont.)
MPLS v2.24-6
Here is a description of the devices that enable the overall VPN solution, which are named
based on their position in the network:
The customer router that connects the customer site to the service provider network is
called a customer edge (CE) router, or CE device. Traditionally, this device is called CPE.
Service provider devices to which customer devices are attached are called PE devices. In
traditional switched WAN implementations, these devices would be Frame Relay or X.25
edge switches. In an MPLS implementation, these devices would be the edge label switch
routers (edge LSRs).
Service provider devices that provide only data transport across the service provider
backbone, and have no customers attached to them, are called provider (P) devices. In
traditional switched WAN implementations, these devices would be core (or transit)
switches. In an MPLS implementation, these devices would be the LSRs.
Note
The connecting device is still called a CE device even if it is not a router. For example, a
packet assembler/disassembler (PAD) is a CE device.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-7
What Are the VPN Implementation Models?

This topic describes the two major VPN implementation models.
VPN Implementation Models

VPN services can be offered based on two major
models:
Overlay VPNs, in which the service provider
provides virtual point-to-point links between
customer sites
Peer-to-peer VPNs, in which the service provider
participates in the customer routing
MPLS v2.24-7
Traditional VPN implementations were all based on the overlay model, in which the service
provider sold virtual circuits between customer sites as a replacement for dedicated point-topoint links. The overlay model had a number of drawbacks, which are identified in this lesson.
To overcome these drawbacks (particularly in IP-based customer networks), a new model
called the peer-to-peer VPN was introduced. In the peer-to-peer VPN model, the service
provider actively participates in customer routing.
4-8
What Are Overlay VPN Technologies?

This topic describes the characteristics and technologies of overlay VPNs.
Overlay VPNs:
Hub-and-Spoke Topology
MPLS v2.24-8
The hub-and-spoke topology is the simplest overlay VPN topologyall remote sites are linked
with a single virtual circuit to a central CE router. The routing is also extremely simplestatic
routing or a distance vector protocol such as Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is more than
adequate. If a dynamic routing protocol such as RIP is used, split-horizon updates must be
disabled at the hub router or point-to-point subinterfaces must be used at the hub router to
overcome the split-horizon problem.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-9
Overlay VPNs:
Redundant Hub-and-Spoke Topology
MPLS v2.24-9
A typical redundant hub-and-spoke topology introduces central site redundancy (more complex
topologies might also introduce router redundancy at spokes).
Each remote site is linked with two central routers via two virtual circuits. The two virtual
circuits can be used for load sharing or in a primary circuit with backup circuit configuration.
4-10
Overlay VPNs:
Layer 2 Implementation
This is the traditional switched WAN solution:

The service provider establishes Layer 2 virtual circuits
between customer sites.
The customer is responsible for all higher layers.
MPLS v2.24-10
A Layer 2 overlay VPN implementation is the traditional switched WAN model, implemented
with technologies such as X.25, Frame Relay, ATM, and Switched Multimegabit Data Service
(SMDS). The service provider is responsible for transport of Layer 2 frames between customer
sites, and the customer is responsible for all higher layers.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-11
Overlay VPNs:
IP Tunneling
VPN is implemented with IP-over-IP tunnels:

Tunnels are established with GRE or IPsec.
GRE is simpler (and quicker); IPsec provides authentication
and security.
MPLS v2.24-11
With the success of IP and associated technologies, some service providers started to
implement pure IP backbones to offer VPN services based on IP. In other cases, customers
wanted to take advantage of the low cost and universal availability of the Internet to build lowcost private networks over it.
Whatever the business reasons behind it, Layer 3 VPN implementations over the IP backbone
always involve tunnelingencapsulation of protocol units at a certain layer of the Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model into protocol units at the same or higher layer
of the OSI model.
Two well-known tunneling technologies are IP Security (IPsec) and generic routing
encapsulation (GRE). GRE is fast and simple to implement and supports multiple routed
protocols, but it provides no security and is thus unsuitable for deployment over the Internet.
An alternative tunneling technology is IPsec, which provides network layer authentication and
optional encryption to make data transfer over the Internet secure. IPsec supports only the IP
routed protocol.
4-12
Overlay VPNs:
Layer 2 Forwarding
VPN is implemented with PPP-over-IP tunnels.

VPN is usually used in access environments
(dialup, digital subscriber line).
MPLS v2.24-12
Yet another tunneling technique was first implemented in dialup networks, where service
providers wanted to tunnel customer dialup data encapsulated in PPP frames over an IP
backbone to the customer central site. To make the service provider transport transparent to the
customer, PPP frames are exchanged between the customer sites (usually a dialup user and a
central site) and the customer is responsible for establishing Layer 3 connectivity above PPP.
Here are three well-known PPP forwarding implementations:
Layer 2 Forwarding Protocol (L2F Protocol)
Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP)
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)
MPLS VPN Technology
4-13
Overlay VPNs:
Layer 3 Routing
The service provider infrastructure appears as point-to-point

links to customer routes.
Routing protocols run directly between customer routers.
The service provider does not see customer routes and is
responsible only for providing point-to-point transport of
customer data.
MPLS v2.24-13
From the Layer 3 perspective, the P-network is invisible to the customer routers, which are
linked with emulated point-to-point links. The routing protocol runs directly between customer
routers that establish routing adjacencies and exchange routing information.
The service provider is not aware of customer routing and has no information about customer
routes. The responsibility of the service provider is purely the point-to-point data transport
between customer sites.
The overlay VPN model has a number of drawbacks, most significantly the need for customers
to establish point-to-point links or virtual circuits between sites. The formula to calculate how
many point-to-point links or virtual circuits are needed in the worst case is ([n][n-1])/2, where n
is the number of sites to be connected. For example, if you need to have full mesh connectivity
between four sites, you will need a total of six point-to-point links or virtual circuits: (4 * (4-1))
/ 2. This leads to scalability issues.
4-14
What Are Peer-to-Peer VPN Technologies?

This topic describes the characteristics and technologies of peer-to-peer VPNs.
Peer-to-Peer VPNs:
Implementation Techniques
MPLS v2.24-14
To overcome the scalability issue and provide the customer with optimum data transport across
the service provider backbone, the peer-to-peer VPN concept was introduced. Here, the service
provider actively participates in customer routing, accepting customer routes, transporting those
customer routes across the service provider backbone, and finally propagating them to other
customer sites.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-15
Peer-to-Peer VPNs:
Packet Filters
MPLS v2.24-15
The first peer-to-peer VPN solutions appeared with the widespread deployment of IP in service
provider networks. Architectures similar to that of the Internet were used to build them. Special
provisions were taken into account to transform the architecture, which was targeted toward
public backbones (Internet), into a solution in which customers would be totally isolated and be
able to exchange corporate data securely.
The more common peer-to-peer VPN implementation allowed a PE router to be shared between
two or more customers. Packet filters were used on the shared PE routers to isolate the
customers. In this implementation, it was common for the service provider to allocate a portion
of its address space to each customer and manage the packet filters on the PE routers to ensure
full reachability between sites of a single customer and isolation between separate customers.
4-16
Peer-to-Peer VPNs:
Controlled Route Distribution
MPLS v2.24-16
Maintaining packet filters is a mundane and error-prone task. Some service providers have thus
implemented more innovative solutions based on controlled route distribution. In this approach,
the customer has a dedicated PE router. The core service provider (P) routers contain all
customer routes, and the dedicated PE routers contain only the routes of a single customer. This
approach requires a dedicated PE router per customer per point of presence (POP). Customer
isolation is achieved solely through lack of routing information on the PE router.
Example: Controlled Route Distribution

In the figure, the PE router for customer A, using route filtering between the P router and the
PE routers, learns only routes belonging to customer A, and the PE router for customer B learns
only routes belonging to customer B. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) with BGP communities
is usually used inside the provider backbone, because it offers the most versatile route-filtering
tools.
Note
Default routes used anywhere in the C-network or P-network break isolation between
customers and have to be avoided.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-17
What Are the Benefits of VPNs?

This topic describes the benefits of the two VPN models.
Benefits of VPN Implementations

Overlay VPN:
Well-known and easy to implement
Service provider does not participate in customer routing
Customer network and service provider network are
well-isolated
Peer-to-peer VPN:
Guarantees optimum routing between customer sites
Easier to provision an additional VPN
Only sites provisioned, not links between them
MPLS v2.24-17
Each VPN model has a number of benefits. For example, overlay VPNs have these advantages:
Overlay VPNs are well-known and easy to implement from both customer and service
provider perspectives.
The service provider does not participate in customer routing, making the demarcation
point between service provider and customer easier to manage.
On the other hand, peer-to-peer VPNs provide these advantages:
Optimum routing between customer sites without any special design or configuration effort
Easy provisioning of additional VPNs or customer sites, because the service provider
provisions only individual sites, not the links between individual customer sites
4-18
What Are the Drawbacks of VPNs?

This topic describes the drawbacks of the VPN models.
Drawbacks of VPN Implementations

Overlay VPN:
Implementing optimum routing requires a full mesh of
virtual circuits.
Virtual circuits have to be provisioned manually.
Bandwidth must be provisioned on a site-to-site basis.
Overlay VPNs always incur encapsulation overhead.
Peer-to-peer VPN:
The service provider participates in customer routing.
The service provider becomes responsible for customer
convergence.
PE routers carry all routes from all customers.
The service provider needs detailed IP routing knowledge.
MPLS v2.24-18
Each VPN model also has a number of drawbacks. Overlay VPNs have these disadvantages:
Overlay VPNs require a full mesh of virtual circuits between customer sites to provide
optimum intersite routing.
All virtual circuits between customer sites have to be provisioned manually, and the
bandwidth must be provisioned on a site-to-site basis (which is not always easy to achieve).
The IP-based overlay VPN implementations (with IPsec or GRE) incur high encapsulation
overheadranging from 20 bytes to 80 bytes per transported datagram.
The major drawbacks of peer-to-peer VPNs arise from service provider involvement in
customer routing, such as these disadvantages:
The service provider becomes responsible for correct customer routing and for fast
convergence of the C-network following a link failure.
The service provider PE routers have to carry all customer routes that were hidden from the
service provider in the overlay VPN model.
The service provider needs detailed IP routing knowledge, which is not readily available in
traditional service provider teams.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-19
Summary
Summary
Traditional router-based networks connect via dedicated pointto-point links.
VPNs use emulated point-to-point links sharing a common
infrastructure.
The two major VPN models are overlay VPN and
peer-to-peer VPN.
Overlay VPNs use well-known technologies and are easy to
implement.
Overlay VPN virtual circuits must be provisioned manually.
Peer-to-peer VPNs guarantee optimum routing between
customer sites.
Peer-to-peer VPNs require that the service provider
participate in customer routing.
4-20
MPLS v2.24-19
Lesson 2
Categorizing VPNs
Overview
This lesson explains how Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) can be categorized based on
business needs or connectivity requirements.
It is important to understand the different categories of VPNs and to know into which
environments those VPNs can be applied.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the characteristics of the different
VPN topology categories. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the major business categories for VPNs
Describe the characteristics of extranet VPNs
Identify the major connectivity categories for VPNs
Describe the characteristics of central services extranet VPNs
Describe the characteristics of managed network VPNs
What Are the Business Categories for VPNs?

This topic describes how VPNs can be categorized based on business needs.
VPN Business Category

VPNs can be categorized based on the business
needs that they fulfill:
Intranet VPNs connect sites within an organization.
Extranet VPNs connect different organizations in a
secure way.
Access VPNs (VPDNs) provides dialup access into
a customer network.
MPLS v2.24-3
Here is a list of some very popular VPN categories that classify VPNs based on the business
needs that they fulfill:
Intranet VPN: Intranet VPNs connect sites within an organization. Security mechanisms
are usually not deployed in an intranet, because all sites belong to the same organization.
Extranet VPN: Extranet VPNs connect different organizations. Extranets usually rely on
security mechanisms to ensure the protection of participating individual organizations.
Security mechanisms are usually the responsibility of individual participating
organizations.
Access VPN: Access VPNs are virtual private dial-up networks (VPDNs) that provide
dialup access into a customer network.
4-22
What Are Extranet VPNs?

This topic describes the characteristics of extranet VPNs.
Extranet VPNs:
Overlay VPN Implementation
MPLS v2.24-4
In an overlay implementation of an extranet, organizations are linked with dedicated virtual

circuits.
Example: Overlay VPNExtranet VPNs

This figure illustrates an overlay VPN implementation of an extranet. Traffic between two
organizations can flow only if one of these conditions is met:
There is a direct virtual circuit between the organizations.
A third organization linked with both organizations is willing to provide transit traffic
capability to those organizations. Because establishing virtual circuits between two
organizations is always associated with costs, the transit traffic capability is almost never
granted free of charge.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-23
Example: Peer-to-Peer VPN Extranet VPNs

This figure illustrates a peer-to-peer VPN implementation of an extranet.
Extranet VPNs:
Peer-to-Peer VPN Implementation
MPLS v2.24-5
Peer-to-peer VPN implementation of an extranet VPN is very simple compared with overlay
VPN implementationall sites are connected to the provider network (P-network), and
optimum routing between sites is enabled by default.
The cost model of peer-to-peer implementation is also simplerusually every organization
pays its connectivity fees for participation in the extranet and gets full connectivity to all other
sites.
4-24
What Are the Connectivity Categories for VPNs?

This topic identifies the major connectivity categories for VPNs.
VPN Connectivity Category

VPNs can also be categorized according to the
connectivity required between sites:
Simple VPN: Every site can communicate with every other
site.
Overlapping VPNs: Some sites participate in more than one
simple VPN.
Central services VPN: All sites can communicate with central
servers but not with each other.
Managed network: A dedicated VPN is established to manage
CE routers.
MPLS v2.24-6
The VPNs discussed so far have usually been very simple in terms of connectivity, as described
here:
In most cases, full connectivity between sites is required. (In an overlay implementation of
either an intranet or extranet VPN, this requirement usually means that a common site acts
as a transit site).
In an overlay implementation of an extranet VPN, the connectivity is limited to sites that
have direct virtual circuits established between them.
Here are descriptions of a number of advanced VPN topologies with more complex
connectivity requirements:
Overlapping VPN connectivity, in which a site participates in more than one VPN
Central services VPNs, in which the sites are split into two classes: server sites, which can
communicate with all other sites, and client sites, which can communicate only with the
servers, not with other clients
Network management VPNs, which are used to manage customer edge (CE) devices in
scenarios where the service provider owns and manages the devices
MPLS VPN Technology
4-25
What Is the Central Services Extranet?

This topic describes the characteristics of central services extranet VPNs.
Central Services Extranet
MPLS v2.24-7
A service provider can integrate the business and connectivity attributes of VPNs to offer a
central services extranet to its customers. For example, a service provider can provide
international Voice over IP (VoIP) service.
Example: Central Services Extranet

The figure illustrates this example. Every customer of this service can access voice gateways in
various countries but cannot access other customers using the same service.
4-26
What Is a Managed Network Implementation?

This topic describes the characteristics of managed network VPNs.
Managed Network
Overlay VPN Implementation
MPLS v2.24-8
A managed network VPN is traditionally implemented in combination with overlay VPN

services. Dedicated virtual circuits are deployed between any managed CE router and the
central network management system (NMS) router to which the NMS is connected.
This managed network VPN implementation is sometimes called a rainbow implementation
because the physical link between the NMS router and the core of the service provider network
carries a number of virtual circuitsone circuit per managed router.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-27
Example: Hybrid Implementation

The network diagram shows an interesting scenario in which a peer-to-peer VPN and an
overlay VPN implementation can be used together to provide end-to-end service to the
customer.
Central Services Extranet:

Hybrid (Overlay + Peer-to-Peer) Implementation
MPLS v2.24-9
The VoIP service is implemented with a central services extranet topology, which is in turn
implemented with a peer-to-peer VPN. Connectivity between provider edge (PE) routers in the
peer-to-peer VPN and customer routers is implemented with an overlay VPN based on Frame
Relay. The PE routers of the peer-to-peer VPN and the CE routers act as CE devices of the
Frame Relay network.
4-28
Summary
Summary
There are three VPN business categories: intranet
VPN, extranet VPN, and access VPN.
In an extranet VPN, organizations are linked with
dedicated virtual circuits.
There are four VPN connectivity categories: simple
VPN, overlapping VPN, central service VPN, and
managed network.
A central services extranet enables customers to
access common servers for services.
Managed networks allow customer CE devices to
be owned and managed by the service provider.
MPLS v2.24-10
MPLS VPN Technology
4-29
4-30
Lesson 3
Introducing MPLS VPN

Architecture
Overview
This lesson explains the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network
(VPN) architecture, route information propagation, route distinguishers (RDs), route targets
(RTs), and virtual routing tables.
It is important to understand how the MPLS VPN architecture is structured, what the
components of that architecture are, and how the components are used. This knowledge will
help later when you begin to look at design issues and configuration parameters.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the major architectural components of
an MPLS VPN. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the drawbacks of traditional peer-to-peer VPNs
Describe the features of the MPLS VPN architecture
Describe the architecture of a PE router in an MPLS VPN
Describe the different methods of propagating routing information across the provider
network
Describe the features of RDs
Describe the features of RTs
Describe how complex VPNs have redefined the meaning of VPNs
Describe the impact of complex VPN topologies on virtual routing tables
What Are the Drawbacks of Traditional Peer-toPeer VPNs?

This topic describes the drawbacks of the traditional peer-to-peer VPN implementation model.
Drawbacks of Traditional
Peer-to-Peer VPNs
Shared PE router:
All customers share the same
(provider-assigned or public) address space.
High maintenance costs are associated with packet filters.
Performance is lowereach packet has to pass a packet
filter.
Dedicated PE router:
All customers share the same address space.
Each customer requires a dedicated router at each POP.
MPLS v2.24-3
Pre-MPLS implementations of peer-to-peer VPNs all share a common drawback. Customers

have to share the same global address space, either using their own public IP addresses or
relying on provider-assigned IP addresses. In both cases, connecting a new customer to a peerto-peer VPN service usually requires IP renumbering inside the customer network
(C-network)an operation most customers are reluctant to perform.
Peer-to-peer VPNs based on packet filters also incur high operational costs associated with
packet filter maintenance and performance degradation because of heavy use of packet filters.
Peer-to-peer VPNs implemented with per-customer provider edge (PE) routers are easier to
maintain and can provide optimum routing performance, but they are usually more expensive
because every customer requires a dedicated router in every point of presence (POP). Thus, this
approach is usually used if the service provider has only a small number of large customers.
4-32
What Is the MPLS VPN Architecture?

This topic describes the features of the MPLS VPN architecture.
MPLS VPN Architecture

An MPLS VPN combines the best features of
an overlay VPN and a peer-to-peer VPN:
PE routers participate in customer routing,
guaranteeing optimum routing between sites and
easy provisioning.
PE routers carry a separate set of routes for each
customer (similar to the dedicated PE router
approach).
Customers can use overlapping addresses.
MPLS v2.24-4
The MPLS VPN architecture offers service providers a peer-to-peer VPN architecture that
combines the best features of overlay VPNs (support for overlapping customer address spaces)
with the best features of peer-to-peer VPNs. This list describes these characteristics:
PE routers participate in customer routing, guaranteeing optimum routing between
customer sites.
Note
In an MPLS VPN implementation, the PE router is the edge label switch router (edge LSR).
PE routers carry a separate set of routes for each customer, resulting in perfect isolation
between customers.
Customers can use overlapping addresses.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-33
MPLS VPN Architecture:

Terminology
Note:
PE Router = Edge LSR
P Router = LSR
MPLS v2.24-5
MPLS VPN terminology divides the overall network into a customer-controlled part (the Cnetwork) and a provider-controlled part (the provider network [P-network]). Contiguous
portions of the C-network are called sites and are linked with the P-network via customer edge
(CE) routers. The CE routers are connected to the PE routers, which serve as the edge devices
of the P-network. The core devices in the P-network, the provider routers (P routers), provide
transit transport across the provider backbone and do not carry customer routes.
Note
4-34
In an MPLS VPN implementation, the P router is the LSR.
What Is the Architecture of a PE Router in an

MPLS VPN?
This topic describes the architecture of a PE router in an MPLS VPN.
PE Router Architecture
PE router in an MPLS VPN uses virtual routing tables to

implement the functionality of customer dedicated PE routers.
MPLS v2.24-6
The architecture of a PE router in an MPLS VPN is very similar to the architecture of a POP
with customer-dedicated PE routers used in the dedicated-router peer-to-peer VPN model. The
only difference is that the whole architecture is condensed into one physical device with the PE
router in an MPLS VPN. Each customer is assigned an independent routing table (virtual
routing table or VRF) that corresponds to the customer dedicated PE router in the traditional
peer-to-peer model. Routing across the provider backbone is performed by another routing
process that uses a global IP routing table corresponding to the intra-POP P router in the
traditional peer-to-peer model.
Note
Cisco IOS software implements isolation between customers via virtual routing and
forwarding tables (VRF). The whole PE router is still configured and managed as a single
device, not as a set of virtual routers.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-35
What Are the Methods of Propagating Routing

Information Across the P-Network?
This topic describes the different methods of propagating routing information across the Pnetwork.
Propagation of Routing Information

Across the P-Network
Question:
How will PE routers exchange customer routing information?
Option #1: Run a dedicated IGP for each customer across the P-network.
This is the wrong answer for these reasons:
The solution does not scale.
P routers carry all customer routes.
MPLS v2.24-7
Although virtual routing tables provide isolation between customers, the data from these
routing tables still needs to be exchanged between PE routers to enable data transfer between
sites attached to different PE routers. Therefore, a routing protocol is needed that will transport
all customer routes across the P-network, while maintaining the independence of individual
customer address spaces.
An obvious solution, implemented by various VPN vendors, is to run a separate routing
protocol for each customer. There are two common implementations that require that a
per-customer routing protocol be run between PE routers:
1. The P routers participate in customer routing and pass the customer routing information
between PE routers.
2. The PE routers are connected via point-to-point tunnels, for example IP Security (IPsec),
thereby hiding the customer routing from the P routers.
The separate routing protocol for each customer is very simple to implement (and often used by
some customers), but is not appropriate in service provider environments because it simply
does not scale. The specific problems are as follows:
The PE routers have to run a large number of routing protocols.
The P routers have to carry all customer routes.
4-36

Across the P-Network (Cont.)
Question:
Option #2: Run a single routing protocol that will carry all customer routes
inside the provider backbone.
Better answer, but still not good enough:
P routers carry all customer routes.
MPLS v2.24-8
A better approach to the route propagation problem is to deploy a single routing protocol that
can exchange all customer routes across the P-network. Although this approach is better than
the previous one, the P routers are still involved in customer routing; therefore, the proposal
retains some of the same scalability issues of the previous one.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-37

Question:
Option #3: Run a single routing protocol that will carry all customer
routes between PE routers. Use MPLS labels to exchange
packets between PE routers.
The best answer:
P routers do not carry customer routes; the solution is scalable.
MPLS v2.24-9
The best solution to the customer route propagation issue is to run a single routing protocol
between PE routers that will exchange all customer routes without the involvement of the P
routers. This solution is scalable. Some of the benefits of this approach are as follows:
The number of routing protocols running between PE routers does not increase with an
increasing number of customers.
The P routers do not carry customer routes.
4-38

Question: Which protocol can be used to carry customer routes between

PE routers?
Answer:
The number of customer routes can be very large. BGP is the only
routing protocol that can scale to a very large number of routes.
Conclusion:
BGP is used to exchange customer routes directly between PE routers.
MPLS v2.24-10
The next design decision to be made is the choice of the routing protocol running between PE
routers. Given that the total number of customer routes is expected to be very large, the only
well-known protocol with the required scalability is Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). In fact,
BGP is used in the MPLS VPN architecture to transport customer routes directly between PE
routers.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-39

Question: How will information about the overlapping subnetworks of two

customers be propagated via a single routing protocol?
Answer:
Extend the customer addresses to make them unique.
MPLS v2.24-11
MPLS VPN architecture differs in an important way from traditional peer-to-peer VPN
solutions: MPLS VPNS support overlapping customer address spaces.
With the deployment of a single routing protocol (BGP) exchanging all customer routes
between PE routers, an important issue arises: how can BGP propagate several identical
prefixes, belonging to different customers, between PE routers?
The only solution to this dilemma is the expansion of customer IP prefixes with a unique prefix
that makes them unique even if they had previously overlapped. A 64-bit prefix called the RD
is used in MPLS VPNs to convert non-unique 32-bit customer addresses into 96-bit unique
addresses that can be transported between PE routers.
4-40
What Are RDs?

This topic describes the features of an RD.
Route Distinguishers
The 64-bit route distinguisher is prepended to an IPv4
address to make it globally unique.
The resulting address is a VPNv4 address.
VPNv4 addresses are exchanged between PE routers
via BGP.
BGP that supports address families other than IPv4
addresses is called MP-BGP.
A similar process is used in IPv6:
64-bit route distinguisher is prepended to a 16-byte IPv6
address.
The resulting 24-byte address is a unique VPNv6 address.
MPLS v2.24-12
The RD is used only to transform non-unique 32-bit customer IP version 4 (IPv4) addresses
into unique 96-bit VPN version 4 (VPNv4) addresses (also called VPN IPv4 addresses).
Note
Although the course will focus on VPNv4, in an IP version 6 (IPv6) implementation, the
theory is the same. Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) is enhanced to carry
IPv6 in a VPN known as VPN version 6 (VPNv6), which uses a new VPNv6 address family.
The VPNv6 address family consists of an 8-byte RD followed by a 16-byte IPv6 prefix. This
combination forms a unique VPNv6 identifier of 24 bytes.
VPNv4 addresses are exchanged only between PE routers; they are never used between CE
routers. Between PE routers, BGP must therefore support the exchange of traditional IPv4
prefixes and the exchange of VPNv4 prefixes. A BGP session between PE routers is
consequently called an MP-BGP session.
Note
The MPLS VPN implementation in Cisco IOS Release 12.4 and earlier supports only MPLS
VPN services within a single autonomous system (AS). In such a scenario, the BGP session
between PE routers is always an Internal Border Gateway Protocol (IBGP) session.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-41
Route Distinguishers (Cont.)
MPLS v2.24-13
Customer route propagation across an MPLS VPN network is done using this process:
4-42
Step 1
The CE router sends an IPv4 routing update to the PE router.
Step 2
The PE router prepends a 64-bit RD to the IPv4 routing update, resulting in a

globally unique 96-bit VPNv4 prefix.
Step 3
The VPNv4 prefix is propagated via a Multiprotocol Internal Border Gateway

Protocol (MP-IBGP) session to other PE routers.
Route Distinguishers (Cont.)
MPLS v2.24-14
Step 4
The receiving PE routers strip the RD from the VPNv4 prefix, resulting in an IPv4
prefix.
Step 5
The IPv4 prefix is forwarded to other CE routers within an IPv4 routing update.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-43
RDs: Usage in an MPLS VPN

The RD has no special meaning.
The RD is used only to make potentially overlapping IPv4
addresses globally unique.
The RD is used as a VPN identifier, but this design could not
support all topologies required by the customers.
MPLS v2.24-15
The RD has no special meaning or role in MPLS VPN architecture; its only function is to make
overlapping IPv4 addresses globally unique. The RD value has a local significance on the
router where it is configured.
Note
Because there has to be a unique one-to-one mapping between RD and virtual routing and
forwarding instances (VRFs), the RD could be viewed as the virtual routing and forwarding
(VRF) identifier in the Cisco implementation of an MPLS VPN.
The RD is configured at the PE router as part of the setup of the VPN site. The RD is not
configured on the CE router, and is not visible to the customer.
Simple VPN topologies require only one RD per customer, raising the possibility that the RD
could serve as a VPN identifier. This design, however, would not allow implementation of
more complex VPN topologies, such as when a customer site belongs to multiple VPNs.
4-44
Is the RD Enough?
This topic describes why RDs are not sufficient to identify VPNs.
Is the RD Enough?
VoIP Service Sample
Requirements:
All sites of one customer need to communicate.
Central sites of both customers need to communicate with VoIP
gateways and other central sites.
Other sites from different customers do not communicate with each
other.
MPLS v2.24-16
To illustrate the need for a more versatile VPN indicator than the RD, consider the Voice over
IP (VoIP) service.
Example: VoIP Service Sample

The figure illustrates the need for a more versatile VPN indicator than the RD. The connectivity
requirements of the VoIP service are as follows:
All sites of a single customer need to communicate.
The central sites of different customers subscribed to the VoIP service need to
communicate with the VoIP gateways (to originate and receive calls in the public voice
network) and also with other central sites to exchange intercompany voice calls.
Note
Additional security measures would have to be put in place at central sites to ensure that the
central sites exchange only VoIP calls with other central sites. Otherwise, the corporate
network of a customer could be compromised by another customer who is using the VoIP
service.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-45

The connectivity requirements of the VoIP service are illustrated in the figure.
MPLS v2.24-17
Three VPNs are needed to implement the desired connectivity: two customer VPNs and a
shared VoIP VPN. Central customer sites participate in the customer VPN and in the VoIP
VPN.
Note
The POP-X and POP-Y VoIP gateways were attached to PE router X and PE router Y in the
previous graphic.
The RD (again, a single entity prepended to an IPv4 route) cannot indicate that a site
participates in more than one VPN. A method is needed in which a set of VPN identifiers can
be attached to a route to indicate its membership in several VPNs.
4-46
What Are RTs?

This topic describes the features of an RT.
RTs: Why Are They Needed?

Some sites have to participate in more than
one VPN.
The RD cannot identify participation in more than one VPN.
RTs were introduced in the MPLS VPN architecture to
support complex VPN topologies.
A different method is needed in which a set of identifiers
can be attached to a route.
MPLS v2.24-18
RTs were introduced into the MPLS VPN architecture to support identifying a site that
participates in more than one VPN.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-47
RTs: What Are They?

RTs are additional attributes attached to VPNv4 BGP routes
to indicate VPN membership.
Extended BGP communities are used to encode these
attributes.
Extended communities carry the meaning of the attribute
together with its value.
Any number of RTs can be attached to a single route.
MPLS v2.24-19
RTs are attributes that are attached to a VPNv4 BGP route to indicate its VPN membership.
The extended BGP communities of routing updates are used to carry the RT of that update, thus
identifying to which VPN the update belongs.
As with standard BGP communities, a set of extended communities can be attached to a single
BGP route, satisfying the requirements of complex VPN topologies.
Extended BGP communities are 64-bit values. The semantics of the extended BGP community
are encoded in the high-order 16 bits of the value, making those bits useful for a number of
different applications, such as MPLS VPN RTs.
4-48
RTs: How Do They Work?

Export RTs:
Identifying VPN membership
Appended to the customer route when it is converted into
a VPNv4 route
Import RTs:
Associated with each virtual routing table
Select routes to be inserted into the virtual routing table
MPLS v2.24-20
MPLS VPN RTs are attached to a customer route at the moment that it is converted from an
IPv4 route to a VPNv4 route by the PE router. The RTs attached to the route are called export
RTs and are configured separately for each virtual routing table in a PE router. Export RTs
identify a set of VPNs in which sites associated with the virtual routing table belong.
When the VPNv4 routes are propagated to other PE routers, those routers need to select the
routes to import into their virtual routing tables. This selection is based on import RTs. Each
virtual routing table in a PE router can have a number of configured import RTs that identify
the set of VPNs from which the virtual routing table is accepting routes.
In overlapping VPN topologies, RTs are used to identify VPN membership. Advanced VPN
topologies (for example, central services VPNs) use RTs in more complex scenarios.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-49
How Have Complex VPNs Redefined the Meaning

of VPNs?
This topic describes how complex VPNs have redefined the meaning of VPNs.
VPNs Redefined
With the introduction of complex VPN topologies,
VPNs have had to be redefined:
A VPN is a collection of sites sharing common routing
information.
A site can be part of different VPNs.
A VPN can be seen as a community of interest
(closed user group).
Complex VPN topologies are supported by multiple virtual
routing tables on the PE routers.
MPLS v2.24-21
With the introduction of complex VPN topologies, the definition of a VPN has needed to be
changed. A VPN is simply a collection of sites sharing common routing information. In
traditional switched WAN terms (for example, in X.25 terminology), such a concept would be
called a closed user group (CUG).
In the classic VPN, all sites connected to a VPN shared a common routing view. In complex
VPNs, however, a site can be part of more than one VPN. This results in differing routing
requirements for sites that belong to a single VPN and those that belong to more than one VPN.
These routing requirements have to be supported with multiple virtual routing tables on the PE
routers.
4-50
What Is the Impact of Complex VPN Topologies

on Virtual Routing Tables?
This topic describes the impact of complex VPN topologies on virtual routing tables.
Impact of Complex VPN Topologies on

Virtual Routing Tables
A virtual routing table in a PE router can be used only for
sites with identical connectivity requirements.
Complex VPN topologies require more than one virtual
routing table per VPN.
As each virtual routing table requires a distinct RD value, the
number of RDs in the MPLS VPN network increases.
MPLS v2.24-22
A single virtual routing table can be used only for sites with identical connectivity
requirements. Complex VPN topologies, therefore, require more than one virtual routing table
per VPN.
Note
If sites with different requirements are associated with the same virtual routing table, some
of the sites might be able to access destinations that should not be accessible to them.
Because each virtual routing table requires a distinctive RD, the number of RDs in an MPLS
VPN network increases with the introduction of overlapping VPNs. Moreover, the simple
association between RD and VPN that was true for simple VPNs is also gone.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-51
Example: Impact of Complex VPN Topologies on Virtual

Routing Tables
To illustrate the requirements for multiple virtual routing tables, consider a VoIP service with
three VPNs (customer A, customer B, and a VoIP VPN).
Impact of Complex VPN Topologies on

Virtual Routing Tables (Cont.)
MPLS v2.24-23
The virtual routing table needs of this service are as follows:

1.
All sites of customer A (apart from the central site) can share the same virtual routing table
because they belong to a single VPN.
2.
The same is true for all sites of customer B (apart from the central site).
3.
The VoIP gateways participate only in the VoIP VPN and can belong to a single virtual
routing table.
4.
Central site A has unique connectivity requirementsit has to see sites of customer A and
sites in the VoIP VPN and, consequently, requires a dedicated virtual routing table.
5.
Likewise, central site B requires a dedicated virtual routing table.
Therefore, in this example, five different VRF tables are needed to support three VPNs. There
is no one-to-one relationship between the number of VRFs and the number of VPNs.
4-52
Summary
Summary
There are several drawback to traditional peer-to-peer VPNs.
MPLS VPN architecture combines the best features of the
overlay and peer-to-peer VPN models.
The architecture of a PE router in an MPLS VPN uses
separate virtual routers containing the routes of each
customers inside one physical router.
The most scalable method of exchanging customer routes
across a provider network is the use of a single BGP routing
protocol from PE router to PE router.
MPLS v2.24-24
Summary (Cont.)
Route distinguishers transform non-unique 32-bit addresses
into 96-bit unique addresses.
Route targets are used to identify VPN membership in
overlapping topologies.
VPNs are now considered a collection of sites sharing
common routing information.
Placing sites with different routing requirements in the same
virtual routing table will result in inconsistent routing.
MPLS v2.24-25
MPLS VPN Technology
4-53
4-54
Lesson 4
Introducing the MPLS VPN

Routing Model
Overview
This lesson explains the routing requirements for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). The lesson offers address and routing perspectives from the
customer and service provider side, and it discusses how routing tables appear on provider edge
(PE) routers. This lesson also discusses MPLS VPN end-to-end information flow,
Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP), updates, and display formats.
It is important to understand how information is routed in an MPLS VPN, and how the routing
tables are viewed and interpreted. This lesson will help you to get a clear understanding of the
similarities and differences between the global routing table and the virtual routing tables that
are created in an MPLS VPN.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to identify the routing requirements for MPLS
VPNs. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the routing requirements for MPLS VPNs
Describe the MPLS VPN routing model for CE routers, PE routers, and P routers
Describe how IPv4 is used to provide support for existing Internet routing
Identify the routing tables implemented in the PE router to support MPLS VPNs
Describe the end-to-end flow of routing updates in an MPLS VPN
Describe how an MPLS VPN determines which routes are distributed to a CE router
MPLS VPN Routing Requirements and Model

This topic describes the routing requirements and model for MPLS VPNs.
MPLS VPN Routing Requirements

CE routers have to run standard IP routing software.
PE routers have to support MPLS VPN services and IP
routing.
P routers have no VPN routes.
MPLS v2.24-3
The designers of MPLS VPN technology were faced with these routing requirements:
Customer edge (CE) routers should not be MPLS VPN-aware; CE routers should run
standard IP routing software.
PE routers must support MPLS VPN services and traditional Internet services.
To make the MPLS VPN solution scalable, provider routers (P routers) must not carry VPN
routes.
4-56
What Is the MPLS VPN Routing Model?

This section describes the MPLS VPN routing model for CE routers, PE routers, and P routers.
MPLS VPN Routing:

CE Router Perspective
The CE routers run standard IP routing software and exchange routing

updates with the PE router.
EBGP, OSPF, RIPv2, EIGRP, and static routes are supported.
The PE router appears as another router in the C-network.
MPLS v2.24-4
The MPLS VPN backbone should look like a standard corporate backbone to the CE routers.
The CE routers run standard IP routing software and exchange routing updates with the PE
routers, which appear to them as normal routers in the customer network (C-network).
Note
Since Cisco IOS Release 12.2, the choice of routing protocols that can be run between a CE
router and a PE router includes Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP),
Routing Information Protocol version 2 (RIPv2), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), External
Border Gateway Protocol (EBGP), and static routes.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-57
MPLS VPN Routing:

Overall Customer Perspective
To the customer, the PE routers appear as core routers

connected via a BGP backbone.
The usual BGP and IGP design rules apply.
The P routers are hidden from the customer.
MPLS v2.24-5
From the customer perspective, the MPLS VPN backbone looks like an intracompany Border
Gateway Protocol (BGP) backbone with PE routers performing route redistribution between
individual sites and the core backbone. The standard design rules used for enterprise BGP
backbones can be applied to the design of the C-network.
The P routers are hidden from customer view; the internal topology of the BGP backbone is
therefore transparent to the customer.
4-58
MPLS VPN Routing:

P Router Perspective
P routers do not participate in MPLS VPN routing

and do not carry VPN routes.
P routers run backbone IGP with the PE routers
and exchange information about global
subnetworks (core links and loopbacks).
MPLS v2.24-6
From the P router perspective, the MPLS VPN backbone looks even simplerthe P routers do
not participate in MPLS VPN routing and do not carry VPN routes. The P routers run only a
backbone Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) with other P routers and with PE routers, and
exchange information about core subnetworks. BGP deployment on P routers is not needed for
proper MPLS VPN operation; it might be needed, however, to support traditional Internet
connectivity that has not yet been migrated to MPLS.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-59
MPLS VPN Routing:

PE Router Perspective
PE routers:
Exchange VPN routes with CE routers via per-VPN routing protocols
Exchange core routes with P routers and PE routers via core IGP
Exchange VPNv4 routes with other PE routers via MP-IBGP sessions
MPLS v2.24-7
The PE routers are the only routers in MPLS VPN architecture that see all routing aspects of
the MPLS VPN. PE routers are able to perform these exchanges:
PE routers exchange IP version 4 (IPv4) VPN routes with CE routers via various routing
protocols running in the virtual routing tables.
PE routers exchange VPN version 4 (VPNv4) routes via Multiprotocol Internal Border
Gateway Protocol (MP-IBGP) sessions with other PE routers.
PE routers exchange core routes with P routers and other PE routers via core IGP.
4-60
Existing Internet Routing Support

This topic describes how IPv4 is used to provide support for existing Internet routing.
Support for Existing Internet Routing
PE routers can run standard IPv4 BGP in the global routing table:
PE routers exchange Internet routes with other PE routers.
CE routers do not participate in Internet routing.
P routers do not need to participate in Internet routing.
MPLS v2.24-8
The routing requirements for PE routers also extend to supporting Internet connectivityPE
routers have to exchange Internet routes with other PE routers. The CE routers cannot
participate in Internet routing if the Internet routing is performed in global address space. The P
routers could participate in Internet routing; however, Internet routing should be disabled on the
P routers to make the network core more stable.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-61

This topic identifies the routing tables implemented in the PE router to support MPLS VPNs.
PE routers contain a number of routing tables:

The global routing table contains core routes (filled with core IGP) and
Internet routes (filled with IPv4 BGP).
The VRF tables contains routes for sites of identical routing
requirements from local (IPv4 VPN) and remote
(VPNv4 via MP-BGP) CE routers.
MPLS v2.24-9
The PE routers fulfill various routing requirements imposed on them by using a number of IP
routing tables. Here are some examples:
The global IP routing table (the IP routing table that is always present in a Cisco IOS
software-based router even if it is not supporting an MPLS VPN) contains all core routes
(inserted by the core IGP) and the Internet routes (inserted from the global IPv4 BGP
table).
The virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) tables contain sets of routes for sites with
identical routing requirements. The VRFs are filled with intra-VPN IGP information
exchanged with the CE routers and with VPNv4 routes received through MP-BGP sessions
from the other PE routers.
4-62
Identifying End-to-End Routing Update Flow

This topic describes the end-to-end flow of routing updates in an MPLS VPN.
End-to-End Routing Update Flow
PE routers receive IPv4 routing updates from CE routers and

install them in the appropriate VRF table.
MPLS v2.24-10
These figures provide an overview of end-to-end routing information flow in an MPLS VPN
network.
Example: End-to-End Routing Update Flow

The figure here illustrates how PE routers receive IPv4 routing updates from the CE routers and
install them in the appropriate VRF table.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-63
End-to-End Routing Update Flow (Cont.)
PE routers export VPN routes from VRF tables into MP-BGP and
propagate them as VPNv4 routes to other PE routers.
MPLS v2.24-11
The customer routes from VRF tables are exported as VPNv4 routes into MP-BGP and
propagated to other PE routers.
Current MPLS VPN implementation in Cisco IOS software (up to Cisco IOS Release12.4)
supports MPLS VPN services only within the scope of a single autonomous system (AS). The
MP-BGP sessions between the PE routers are therefore Internal Border Gateway Protocol
(IBGP) sessions and were subject to the IBGP split-horizon rules. Either a full mesh of MPIBGP sessions is required between PE routers or route reflectors need to be used.
4-64
End-to-End Routing Update Flow:

MP-BGP Update
An MP-BGP update contains these elements:
VPNv4 address
Extended communities
(route targets, optionally SOO)
Label used for VPN packet forwarding
Any other BGP attribute (for example, AS path, local
preference, MED, standard community)
MPLS v2.24-12
An MP-BGP update exchange between PE routers contains these elements:

VPNv4 address
Extended BGP communities (route targets [RTs] are required; Site of Origin [SOO] is
optional)
Label used for VPN packet forwarding
Note
The Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets lesson explains how this label is used in the MPLS
label stack.
Mandatory BGP attributes (for example, AS path)

Optionally, the MP-BGP update can contain any other BGP attribute; for example, local
preference, multi-exit discriminator (MED), or standard BGP community.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-65
End-to-End Routing Update Flow (Cont.)
The receiving PE router imports the incoming VPNv4 routes into

the appropriate VRF based on route targets attached to the
routes.
The routes installed in the VRFs are propagated to the CE
routers.
MPLS v2.24-13
The PE routers receiving MP-BGP updates import the incoming VPNv4 routes into their VRFs
based on RTs attached to the incoming routes and on import RTs configured in the VRFs. The
VPNv4 routes installed in the VRFs are converted to IPv4 routes and then propagated to the CE
routers.
4-66

This topic describes how an MPLS VPN determines which routes are distributed to a CE
router.

A route is installed in the site VRF if it matches the
import route target attribute.
Route distribution to CE sites is driven by the
following:
Route targets
SOO attribute if defined
MPLS v2.24-14
The RTs attached to a route and the import RTs configured in the VRF drive the propagation of
the routes to the CE router.
Incoming VPNv4 routes are imported into VRFs on the receiving PE router only if at least one
RT attached to the route matches at least one import RT configured in the VRF.
When BGP is used to connect the CE and PE, the SOO attribute attached to the VPNv4 route
can also help control the IPv4 route propagation to the CE routers. A route inserted into a VRF
is not propagated to a CE router if the SOO attached to the route is equal to the SOO attribute
associated with the CE router. The SOO can thus be used to prevent routing loops in MPLS
VPN networks with multihomed sites.
To be distributed to the CE, routes need to be installed in the VRF, and not have a conflicting
SOO.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-67
Example: Extending MPLS VPNs with VRF-Lite

This topic discusses extending MPLS VPNs with Multi-VRF CE (VRF-lite).
What Is Multi-VRF CE (VRF-Lite)?

Multi-VRF CE (VRF-lite) is an application based on VRF
implementation.
VRF-lite supports multiple overlapping and independent
VRFs on the CE router.
The CE router separates traffic between client networks
using VRFs.
There is no MPLS functionality on the CE router.
No label exchange between the CE and PE router.
No labeled packet flow between the CE and PE router.
Any routing protocol supported by normal VRF can be used
in a Multi-VRF CE implementation.
MPLS v2.24-15
Although MPLS VPNs provide security and privacy as traffic travels through the provider
network, the CE router has no mechanism to guarantee private networks across its LAN
networks. To provide privacy, each client or organization is traditionally placed in a separate
VLAN or on a separate CE router. VRF-lite extends limited PE functionality to a CE router.
VRF-lite allows the CE router the ability to maintain separate VRF tables to extend the privacy
and security of an MPLS VPN down to a branch office or interface.
The CE router using VRF-lite can isolate traffic by placing each client or organization in a
separate VRF with its own IP address space. Each interface or subinterface contains its own IP
address space to separate each different client.
Similar to MPLS VRFs, routes are installed in the appropriate VRF with VRF-lite. However,
the CE router does not run MPLS.
Note
With VRF-lite, there is no label exchange, there is no Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
adjacency, and there is no labeled packet flow between PE and CE router.
The CE router needs a routing protocol or static routes to propagate routes from each specific
VRF on the CE router to the same VRF on the PE router.
Note
4-68
Additional information on VRF-lite is outside the scope of this course.
Summary
Summary
In MPLS VPNs:
CE routers run standard protocols
(static, RIPv2, OSPF, EIGRP, EBGP) to the PE
routers.
PE routers provide the VPN routing and services via
MP-BGP.
P routers do not participate in VPN routing, and only
provide core IGP backbone routing to the PE routers.
The PE router functions are extended to carry

regular Internet routing via IPv4 BGP in addition to
the MP-BGP.
MPLS v2.24-16
Summary (Cont.)
PE routers separate the global IPv4 BGP routing
table from each unique customer VPNv4 MP-BGP
routing table.
The ingress PE router receives CE customer IPv4
updates and exports these IPv4 routes to other PE
routers via MP-BGP.
The egress PE router imports the VPNv4 routes
and forwards them to the CE router as an IPv4
update.
MPLS v2.24-17
MPLS VPN Technology
4-69
4-70
Lesson 5
Forwarding MPLS VPN

Packets
Overview
This lesson explains how forwarding across a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual
Private Network (VPN) backbone occurs, identifies how labels get propagated, and explains the
effects of summarization in the core.
It is important to understand how packets are forwarded across an MPLS VPN backbone,
because this understanding will help you when you try to isolate problems in the network. This
lesson explains how the far-end label is sent to the ingress provider edge (PE) router and how
that information is shared.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how packets are forwarded in an
MPLS VPN environment. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the end-to-end MPLS VPN forwarding mechanisms
Describe the operation of PHP in an MPLS VPN environment
Describe how labels are propagated between PE routers
Describe the effects of MPLS VPNs on label propagation
Describe the effects of MPLS VPNs on packet forwarding
What Are the End-to-End VPN Forwarding

Mechanisms?
This topic describes the end-to-end MPLS VPN forwarding mechanisms.
VPN Packet Forwarding Across an MPLS

VPN Backbone: Approach 1
Approach 1: The PE routers will label the VPN packets with an LDP label for
the egress PE router, and forward the labeled packets across
the MPLS backbone.
Results:
The P routers perform the label switching, and the packet reaches the
egress PE router.
Because the egress PE router does not know which VRF to use for
packet switching, the packet is dropped.
MPLS v2.24-3
A simple MPLS-oriented approach to MPLS VPN packet forwarding across the MPLS VPN
backbone would be to label the customer packet with the label assigned by Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP) for the egress PE router. The core routers consequently would never see the
customer IP packet; instead, the core routers would see just a labeled packet targeted toward the
egress PE router. The core routers would perform simple label-switching operations, eventually
delivering the customer packet to the egress PE router. Unfortunately, the customer IP packet
would contain no VPN or virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) information that could be used
to perform VRF lookup on the egress PE router. The egress PE router would not know which
VRF to use for packet lookup and would have to drop the packet.
4-72
VPN Packet Forwarding Across an MPLS

VPN Backbone: Approach 2
Approach 2:
Result:
The PE routers will label the VPN packets with a label stack,
using the LDP label for the egress PE router as the top label,
and the VPN label assigned by the egress PE router as the
second label in the stack.
The P routers perform label switching using the top label, and the packet
reaches the egress PE router. The top label is removed.
The egress PE router performs a lookup on the VPN label and forwards
the packet toward the CE router.
MPLS v2.24-4
An MPLS label stack can be used to tell the egress PE router what to do with the VPN packet.
When using the label stack, the ingress PE router labels the incoming IP packet with two labels.
The top label in the stack is the LDP label for the egress PE router; this label guarantees that the
packet will traverse the MPLS VPN backbone and arrive at the egress PE router. The second
label in the stack is assigned by the egress PE router, and tells how to forward the incoming
VPN packet. The second label could point directly toward an outgoing interface, in which case
the egress PE router would perform label lookup only on the VPN packet. The second label
could also point to a VRF, in which case the egress PE router would first perform a label
lookup to find the target VRF, and then perform an IP lookup within the VRF.
Both methods of implementing second labels are used in Cisco IOS software. The second label
in the stack points toward an outgoing interface whenever the customer edge (CE) router is the
next hop of the VPN route. The second label in the stack points to the VRF table for aggregate
VPN routes, VPN routes pointing to a null interface, and routes for directly connected VPN
interfaces.
The two-level MPLS label stack satisfies these MPLS VPN forwarding requirements:
The P routers perform label switching on the LDP-assigned label toward the egress PE
router.
The egress PE router performs label switching on the second label (which it has previously
assigned) and either forwards the IP packet toward the CE router or performs another IP
lookup in the VRF pointed to by the second label in the stack.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-73
What Is VPN PHP?

This topic describes operation of penultimate hop popping (PHP) in an MPLS VPN
environment.
VPN PHP
Penultimate hop popping on the LDP label can be

performed on the last P router.
The egress PE router performs label lookup only on the
VPN label, resulting in faster and simpler label lookup.
IP lookup is performed only oncein the ingress PE router.
MPLS v2.24-5
PHP is the removal of the top label in the stack on the hop prior to the egress router. PHP can
be performed in frame-based MPLS networks. In these networks, the last provider router (P
router) in the label-switched path (LSP) tunnel pops the LDP label (as previously requested by
the egress PE router through LDP), and the PE router receives a labeled packet that contains
only the VPN label. In most cases, a single label lookup performed on that packet in the egress
PE router is enough to forward the packet toward the CE router. The full IP lookup through the
Forwarding Information Base (FIB) is performed only once, in the ingress PE router, even
without PHP.
4-74
Propagating VPN Labels Between PE Routers

This topic describes how labels are propagated between PE routers.
VPN Label Propagation
Question: How will the ingress PE router get the second label in the
label stack from the egress PE router?
Answer: Labels are propagated in MP-BGP VPNv4 routing updates.
MPLS v2.24-6
The previous figures showed that an MPLS label stack with the second label is required for
proper MPLS VPN operation. This label was allocated by the egress PE router. This label has
to be propagated from the egress PE router to the ingress PE routers to enable proper packet
forwarding. Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) was chosen as the propagation
mechanism. Every MP-BGP update thus carries a label assigned by the egress PE router
together with the 96-bit VPN version 4 (VPNv4) prefix.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-75
Example: VPN Label Propagation Between PE Routers

The figure illustrates VPN label propagation between PE routers.
VPN Label Propagation (Cont.)
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:
A VPN label is assigned to every VPN route by the egress

PE router.
The VPN label is advertised to all other PE routers in an MP-BGP
update.
A label stack is built in the VRF table.
MPLS v2.24-7
These steps describe the label propagation between PE routers:

Step 1
Note
The egress PE router assigns a label to every VPN route received from the attached
CE routers and to every summary route summarized inside the PE router. This label
is then used as the second label in the MPLS label stack by the ingress PE routers
when labeling VPN packets.
In the graphic, the VPN label 38 for destination 192.168.10.0 is assigned by the egress PE
router.
The VPN labels assigned locally by the PE router can be inspected with the show mpls
forwarding vrf vrf-name command.
Step 2
The VPN labels assigned by the egress PE routers are advertised to all other PE
routers together with the VPNv4 prefix in MP-BGP updates.
The labels can be inspected with the show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels command on the ingress PE
router.
The routes that have an input label but no output label are the routes received from the CE
routers (and the input label was assigned by the local PE router). The routes with an output
label but no input label are the routes received from the other PE routers (and the output label
was assigned by the remote PE router).
4-76
Step 3
The ingress PE router has two labels associated with a remote VPN route: a label for
the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) next hop assigned by the next-hop P router via
LDPand taken from the local Label Information Base (LIB)and also the label
assigned by the remote PE router and propagated via MP-BGP update. Both labels
are combined in a label stack and installed in the VRF table.
The label stack in the VRF table can be inspected using the show ip cef vrf vrf-name detail
command. The tags imposed values in the output displays the MPLS label stack. The first label
in the MPLS label stack is the LDP label forwarded toward the egress PE router, and the
second label is the VPN label advertised by the egress PE router.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-77
What Are the Effects of MPLS VPNs on Label

Propagation?
This topic describes the effects of MPLS VPNs on label propagation.
MPLS VPNs and Label Propagation

The VPN label must be assigned by the BGP next hop.
The BGP next hop should not be changed in the
MP-IBGP update propagation.
Do not use the
boundaries.
command on confederation
The PE router must be the BGP next hop.

Use the
command on the PE router.
The label must be reoriginated if the next hop is changed.

A new label is assigned every time that the MP-BGP
update crosses the AS boundary where the next hop is
changed.
MPLS v2.24-8
MPLS VPN packet forwarding works correctly only if the router specified as the BGP next hop
in the incoming BGP update is the same router as the one that assigned the second label in the
label stack. Here are three scenarios that can cause the BGP next hop to be different from the IP
address of the PE router assigning the VPN label:
If the customer route is received from the CE router via an External Border Gateway
Protocol (EBGP) session, the next hop of the VPNv4 route is still the IP address of the CE
router (the BGP next hop of an outgoing Internal Border Gateway Protocol [IBGP] update
is always identical to the BGP next hop of the incoming EBGP update). You have to
configure the next-hop-self command on the MP-BGP sessions between PE routers to
make sure that the BGP next hop of the VPNv4 route is always the IP address of the PE
router, regardless of the routing protocol used between the PE router and the CE router.
The BGP next hop should not change inside an autonomous system (AS). It can change,
however, if you use the next-hop-self command on an inter-AS boundary inside a BGP
confederation or if you use inbound the route-map command on a PE route to change the
next hop (a strongly discouraged practice). To prevent this situation, never change the BGP
next hop with the route-map or next-hop-self commands inside an AS.
The BGP next hop is always changed on an EBGP session. If the MPLS VPN network
spans multiple public autonomous systems (not just autonomous systems within a BGP
confederation), special provisions must be made in the AS boundary routers to reoriginate
the VPN label at the same time that the BGP next hop is changed. This functionality is
supported by Cisco IOS Releases 12.1(4)T, 12.2, and later.
4-78
What Are the Effects of MPLS VPNs on Packet

Forwarding?
This topic describes the effects of MPLS VPNs on packet forwarding.
MPLS VPNs and Packet Forwarding

The VPN label of the BGP route is understood only by the
egress PE router.
An end-to-end LSP tunnel is required between the ingress
and egress PE routers.
BGP next-hop addresses must be IGP routes.
LDP labels will be assigned to addresses in the global
routing table.
LDP labels are not assigned to BGP routes
(BGP routes receive VPN labels).
BGP next hops announced in IGP must not be summarized in
the core network.
Summarization breaks the LSP tunnel.
MPLS v2.24-9
For successful propagation of MPLS VPN packets across an MPLS backbone, there must be an
unbroken LSP tunnel between PE routers. This is because the second label in the stack is
recognized only by the egress PE router that has originated it, and will not be understood by
any other router should it ever become exposed.
Here are two scenarios that could cause the LSP tunnel between PE routers to break:
If the IP address of the PE router is announced as a BGP route, it will have no
corresponding LDP label and the label stack will not be built correctly. The IP address of
the PE router must be announced in the global routing table.
If the P routers perform summarization of the address range within which the IP address of
the egress PE router lies, the LSP tunnel will be disrupted at the summarization point, as
illustrated in the figure.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-79
Example: Summarization in the Core

In the figure, the P router summarizes the loopback address of the egress PE router.
MPLS VPNs and Packet Forwarding:

Summarization in the Core
MPLS v2.24-10
The LSP tunnel is broken at a summarization point, so the summarizing router needs to perform
full IP lookup. In a frame-based MPLS network, the P router would request PHP for the
summary route, and the upstream P router (or a PE router) would remove the LDP label,
exposing the VPN label to the P router. Because the VPN label is assigned not by the P router
but by the egress PE router, the label will not be understood by the P router and the VPN packet
will be dropped or misrouted.
4-80
Summary
Summary
PE routers forward packets across the MPLS VPN backbone
using label stacking.
The last P router in the LSP tunnel pops the LDP label, and
the PE router receives a labeled packet that contains only the
VPN label.
Labels are propagated between PE routers using
MP-BGP.
BGP next hops should not be announced as BGP routes.
LDP labels are not assigned to BGP routes.
MPLS v2.24-11
MPLS VPN Technology
4-81
Module Summary
Module Summary
VPNs replace dedicated links with virtual point-to-point links
on common infrastructure, reducing operating costs for
customers.
VPNs are categorized based on business need or
connectivity requirement.
MPLS VPNs prepends RDs to make unique customer
addresses, and forwards traffic based on RTs.
PE routers provide customer VPN routing and services
through MP-BGP, while CE routers run standard IP routing
protocols
Label stacking is used in forwarding packets across the
MPLS VPN backbone.
MPLS v2.24-1
The two major Virtual Private Network (VPN) design optionsoverlay VPN and peer-to-peer
VPNhave many benefits and drawbacks. The VPN topology categories and architectural
components help determine the method for forwarding packets in a Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS) VPN environment.
References
Access Cisco.com for additional information about VPNs.
4-82
Module Self-Check
Q1)
Traditional router-based networks that connected customer sties were implemented

using which type of links? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q2)
VPNs are implemented using which type of links? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q3)
PE routers carry all routes from all customers.

An overlay VPN guarantees optimum routing between customer sites.
The service provider participates in the customer routing.
The service provider provides virtual point-to-point links between customer
sites.
In the traditional switched WAN model for Layer 2 VPN implementation, what is the
service provider responsible for? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q6)
P device
CE device
PE device
CPE device
What is a characteristic of an overlay VPN? (Source: Introducing VPNs)

A)
B)
C)
D)
Q5)
emulated point-to-point
dedicated point-to-point
PVC
PSTN
Which two network elements are contained in the P-network? (Choose two.) (Source:
Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q4)
PVC
dedicated point-to-point
SVC
emulated point-to-point
packet filtering
transport of Layer 2 frames
routing updates
encapsulation of protocols
The peer-to-peer VPN concept was introduced to help overcome what type of
drawback? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
MPLS VPN Technology
4-83
Q7)
How is a peer-to-peer VPN implemented using packet filters? (Source: Introducing

VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q8)
How do you implement a peer-to-peer VPN based on controlled route distribution?

(Source: Introducing VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q9)
Which VPN type does NOT require the service provider to participate in customer
routing? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q10)
For which VPN type is it easier to provision an additional VPN? (Source: Introducing
VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q11)
overlay
peer-to-peer
central services
access VPNs
Which VPN type requires the service provider to participate in customer routing?
(Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
4-84
overlay
peer-to-peer
central services
access VPNs
Which VPN type requires the PE router to carry all routes from all customers? (Source:
Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q12)
overlay
peer-to-peer
central services
access VPNs
overlay
peer-to-peer
central services
access VPNs
Q13)
Describe the use of address space and packet routing in each of these peer-to-peer
implementations. (Source: Introducing VPNs)
Shared PE router
______________________________________________________________________
Dedicated PE router
______________________________________________________________________
Q14)
Which connectivity category should you use if all sites must have connectivity with
each other? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
Q15)
Which connectivity category should you use if all sites must have connectivity to a
server provided by the service provider? (Source: Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
Q16)
simple
overlapping
peer-to-peer
hub-and-spoke
central services
What are the connectivity requirements of a managed network VPN? (Source:

Introducing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q17)
simple
overlapping
peer-to-peer
hub-and-spoke
central services
The service provider is restricted to access of the P-network.

The service provider is granted access to the entire C-network.
The service provider is restricted to access of the managed CE routers.
The service provider grants the customer access to the PE routers but not the P
routers.
Which VPN topology has many sites connecting to a central site? (Source:
Categorizing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
simple
overlapping
peer-to-peer
hub-and-spoke
central services
MPLS VPN Technology
4-85
Q18)
When you are using a dynamic routing protocol such as RIP in a redundant hub-andspoke topology, which statement is true? (Source: Categorizing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q19)
Static routing must be used to provide connectivity from remote site to remote
site.
Split-horizon updates must be disabled at the hub router if static routing is
used.
Split-horizon updates must be disabled at the hub router if point-to-point
subinterfaces are not used.
Split-horizon updates must be enabled at the remote site router when point-topoint subinterfaces are not used.
Identify the criteria that a customer should consider when determining where virtual
circuits are established in a partial mesh topology. (Source: Categorizing VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q20)
Which component of the VPN business category is used to connect different

organizations? (Source: Categorizing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q21)
Which component of the VPN business category relies on security mechanisms to

ensure protection of participating individual organizations? (Source: Categorizing
VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q22)
overlay
peer-to-peer
central services
access VPNs
Which component of the VPN connectivity category provides full connectivity

between sites? (Source: Categorizing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
4-86
intranet VPNs
Internet VPNs
access VPNs
extranet VPNs
Which implementation of the VPN business category provides the most cost-effective
model? (Source: Categorizing VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q23)
intranet VPNs
Internet VPNs
access VPNs
extranet VPNs
simple
overlapping
central services
managed services
Q24)
Describe the connectivity in a central services extranet. (Source: Categorizing VPNs)

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q25)
Describe the connectivity in a managed network VPN. (Source: Categorizing VPNs)

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q26)
Which routers are MPLS VPNs aware of? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN
Architecture)
Q27)
Which traditional VPN module can the architecture of a PE router in an MPLS VPN be
compared to? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture)
Q28)
Which protocol is used to transport customer routes directly between PE routers?

(Source: Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q29)
RIP
VPN
BGP
OSPF
What is the function of the RD in an MPLS VPN? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN
Architecture)
______________________________________________________________________
Q30)
What is the function of the RT in MPLS VPNs? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN
Architecture)
______________________________________________________________________
Q31)
How has the introduction of complex VPN topologies redefined the meaning of a
VPN? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture)
______________________________________________________________________
MPLS VPN Technology
4-87
Q32)
What could happen if two different sites with different requirements are associated
with the same virtual routing table? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture)
______________________________________________________________________
Q33)
In which two ways do MPLS VPNs support overlapping customer address spaces?
(Choose two.) (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q34)
Which statement is true if you use the P-network IGP to propagate customer routing
information across the P-network? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q35)
P
CE
PE
Which protocol would a PE router use to support an existing Internet routing scheme?
(Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
D)
4-88
any IP routing protocol

any VPN-aware BGP protocol
any VPN-aware IP routing protocol
any VPN-aware link-state protocol
Which type of routers exchange VPNv4 routes? (Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN
Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
Q38)
to identify different customer VPNs

to allow a site to participate on more than one VPN
to convert a customer address to an MP-BGP address
to convert a non-unique IP address into a unique VPNv4 address
Which routing protocol does the CE router run? (Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN
Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q37)
The PE router must be VPN-aware.

The P router must be VPN-aware.
Customers can use overlapping address spaces.
The P router must carry all of the customer routes.
Why do MPLS VPNs implement route targets? (Source: Introducing MPLS VPN
Architecture)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q36)
by implementing unique RDs for each customer

by implementing unique RTs for each customer
by implementing different LSPs for each customer
by implementing virtual routing spaces for each customer
IS-IS
EIGRP
BGP IPv4
BGP VPNv4
Q39)
Identify the routing tables implemented in the PE router to support an MPLS VPN and
describe their contents. (Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model)
______________________________________________________________________
Q40)
What BGP function do MPLS VPNs use to transport RTs? (Source: Introducing the
MPLS VPN Routing Model)
Q41)
How does the PE router know in which VRF table to install received routes for a
customer? (Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model)
Q42)
What is the impact of an MPLS VPN on CE routers? (Source: Introducing the MPLS
VPN Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q43)
Why would IPv4 routing be enabled on the PE router? (Source: Introducing the MPLS
VPN Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q44)
those routes received via an IPv4 update

those routes received via a VPNv4 update
those routes received via the core IGP update
those routes received via the customer IGP update
What will happen if the SOO attached to the route is equal to the SOO attribute
associated with the CE router? (Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q46)
to support the MPLS VPN route update

to support the MPLS VPN route target exports
to support an existing Internet routing scheme
to support the transport of MP-BGP extended communities
Which two types of routes would an MPLS VPN install into the VRF? (Choose two.)
(Source: Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q45)
The CE routers must support BGP.

The CE routers must run a link-state protocol.
The CE routers can run any standard IP routing protocol.
The IGP of the CE routers must be upgraded to a VPN-aware IGP.
The route will not be inserted into the VRF.

The route will not be inserted into the global table.
The route will be inserted into a VRF but not propagated to a CE router.
The route will be inserted into a VRF but not propagated to neighboring PE
routers.
Why does the label stack contain two labels when supporting MPLS VPNs? (Source:
Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets)
______________________________________________________________________
MPLS VPN Technology
4-89
Q47)
Why is the VPN label not popped during the PHP process? (Source: Forwarding MPLS
VPN Packets)
______________________________________________________________________
Q48)
Which protocol is used to transport VPN labels between PE routers? (Source:

A)
B)
C)
D)
Q49)
LDP
RSVP
MP-BGP
the core IGP
In MPLS VPNs, why must the BGP next hop be set to the egress router in all MPIBGP updates? (Source: Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets)
______________________________________________________________________
Q50)
What scenarios would cause the LSP tunnel between PE routers to break? (Source:
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q51)
How can P routers forward VPN packets if they do not have VPN routes? (Source:
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q52)
Which router assigns the VPN label? (Source: Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets)
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
4-90
They forward based upon the LSP label.

They forward based upon the VPN label.
They forward based upon the MP-BGP next hop.
They forward based upon a routing table lookup of the IP address.
P
egress CE
egress PE
ingress CE
ingress PE
Q53)
What is used to identify the label that will be used to transport the VPN packet to the
egress router? (Source: Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q54)
the IGP least-cost path

the EBGP next-hop address
the MP-IBGP next-hop address
the VPN label entry in the LFIB
What is the impact of changing a BGP next hop on an MP-BGP update at

confederation boundaries? (Source: Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets)
A)
B)
C)
D)
The packet will be forwarded but over a suboptimal route.

Packet forwarding for the affected destination will be interrupted.
The first P router of the confederation that receives the packet will have to
perform a routing table lookup to identify the MP-IBGP next hop.
The ingress PE router will forward an MPLS packet to the router identified as
the next hop, where it will be converted to an IP packet and forwarded via MPIBGP.
MPLS VPN Technology
4-91

Q1)
Q2)
Q3)
A, C
Q4)
Q5)
Q6)
the need for customers to establish point-to-point links or virtual circuits between sites
Q7)
The service provider allocates portions of its address space to the customers and manages the packet filters
on the PE routers to ensure full reachability between sites of a single customer and isolation between
customers.
Q8)
The core service provider routers (P routers) contain all customer routes, and the PE routers contain only
routes of a single customer.
Q9)
Q10)
Q11)
Q12)
Q13)
Shared PE router: All customers share the same (provider-assigned or public) address space. The PE router
contains all customer routes. Packet filters are used to provide isolation between customers.
Dedicated PE router: All customers share the same address space. The P routers contain all customer
routes. A route filter is used to forward the routes of each customer to the dedicated PE router of that
customer.
4-92
Q14)
Q15)
Q16)
Q17)
Q18)
Q19)
The virtual circuits in a partial mesh can be established based on a wide range of criteria, such as traffic
pattern between sites, availability of physical infrastructure, and cost considerations.
Q20)
Q21)
Q22)
Q23)
Q24)
All customer sites can connect to the server sites.

All server sites can not connect to the customer sites.
Customer sites can not connect to each other.
Q25)
Dedicated virtual circuits are deployed between any managed CE router and the central NMS router.
Q26)
PE routers
Q27)
the dedicated PE router peer-to-peer model
Q28)
Q29)
The RD is used to transform the non-unique IP addresses of the customer into unique VPNv4 addresses.
Q30)
The RT attaches a set of VPN identifiers to a route that indicate its membership in several VPNs. This
capability allows one site to be a member of more than one VPN.
Q31)
A site can be part of more than one VPN, resulting in differing routing requirements for sites that belong to
a single VPN and those belonging to multiple VPNs.
Q32)
Some of the sites might be able to access destinations that they should not be able to access.
Q33)
A, D
Q34)
Q35)
Q36)
Q37)
Q38)
Q39)
global IP routing tablecontains all core IGP routes and the IPv4 routes; VRFscontain CE routes and
VPNv4 routes
Q40)
extended communities
Q41)
Customer routes are identified by the RT contained in the extended BGP community.
Q42)
Q43)
Q44)
B, D
Q45)
Q46)
The first label indicates the LSP that will be used to reach the egress router. The second label indicates the
VPN that the packet belongs to.
Q47)
The egress router needs the label to identify which VPN the packet belongs to.
Q48)
Q49)
The BGP next hop is used to identify which LSP will be used to get to the egress router. If the IP address
of the PE router is announced as a BGP route, it will have no corresponding LDP label and the label stack
will not be built correctly.
Q50)
If the IP address of the PE router is announced as a BGP route, it will have no corresponding LDP label
and the label stack will not be built correctly.
If the P routers perform summarization of the address range within which the IP address of the egress PE
router lies, the LSP tunnel will be disrupted at the summarization point.
Q51)
Q52)
Q53)
Q54)
MPLS VPN Technology
4-93
4-94
Module 5

Overview
This module covers Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN)
implementation on Cisco IOS platforms. The module describes the concepts of virtual routing
and forwarding (VRF) tables, the interaction between customer-to-provider routing protocols,
and Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) in the service provider backbone, and
also advanced MPLS VPN-specific routing protocol features. This module continues with a
description of MPLS VPN monitoring and debugging commands that are available on Cisco
IOS platforms and concludes with a troubleshooting lesson describing failure scenarios,
identifying symptoms, and providing remedial action.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to configure, monitor, and troubleshoot VPN
operations. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the usage of VRF instances in an MPLS VPN environment
Configure VRF tables
Configure MP-BGP sessions between PE routers
Configure small-scale routing protocols (static, RIP, and EIGRP) between CE and PE
routers
Monitor MPLS VPN operations
Configure OSPF as the routing protocol between CE and PE routers
Configure BGP as the routing protocol between CE and PE routers
Troubleshoot MPLS VPN operations
5-2
Lesson 1
Using MPLS VPN

Mechanisms of Cisco IOS
Platforms
Overview
This lesson first introduces the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) table, the major data
structure associated with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network
(VPN) implementation on Cisco IOS platforms. The lesson describes the other MPLS VPN
attributes that are associated with a VRF instance, and explains the need for routing protocol
contexts and the interaction of routing protocol contexts, VRFs, and Multiprotocol Border
Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP).
Having a clear understanding of how information is exchanged using VRFs and routing
protocol contexts will make it easier to configure VRFs in your network.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the usage of VRF tables in an MPLS
VPN environment. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the characteristics of a VRF table
Describe the need for routing protocol contexts
Describe the characteristics of VPN-aware routing protocols
Describe how VRF tables are used
Describe the outbound BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN implementation
Describe the inbound BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN implementation
Describe the outbound non-BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN
implementation
Describe the inbound non-BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN
implementation
What Is a VRF Table?

This topic describes the characteristics of a VRF table.
VRF Table
A VRF is the routing and forwarding instance for a set
of sites with identical connectivity requirements.
Data structures associated with a VRF are as follows:
IP routing table
CEF table
Set of rules and routing protocol parameters
(routing protocol contexts)
List of interfaces that use the VRF
Other information associated with a VRF is as follows:

Route distinguisher
Set of import and export route targets
MPLS v2.25-3
The major data structure associated with MPLS VPN implementation on Cisco IOS platforms
is the VRF table. This data structure encompasses an IP routing table identical in function to the
following:
The global IP routing table in Cisco IOS software
A Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) table identical in function to the global CEF
forwarding table (Forwarding Information Base [FIB])
Specifications for routing protocols running inside the VRF instance
A VRF is a routing and forwarding instance that you can use for a single VPN site or for many
sites connected to the same provider edge (PE) router if and only if these sites share exactly the
same connectivity requirements.
Other MPLS VPN attributes associated with a VRF table are as follows:
The route distinguisher (RD), which is prepended (for example, RD + IP address) to all
routes exported from the VRF into the global VPN version 4 (VPNv4)also called VPN
IP version 4 (IPv4) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) table
A set of export route targets (RTs), which are attached to any route exported from the VRF
A set of import RTs, which are used to select VPNv4 routes that are to be imported into the
VRF
5-4
What Is the Need for Routing Protocol Contexts?

This topic describes the need for routing protocol contexts.
Need for Routing Protocol Contexts

There are two backbones with
overlapping addresses.
RIP is running in both VPNs.

RIP in VPN A has to be different from
RIP in VPN B.
Cisco IOS software supports only one
RIP process per router.
MPLS v2.25-4
Traditional Cisco IOS software can support a number of different routing protocols. In some
cases, even several completely isolated copies of the same routing protocol are supported. For
example, several Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) processes can be used.
It is important to understand that for several important routing protocols, such as Routing
Information Protocol (RIP), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP),
Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), or BGP, Cisco IOS software supports
only a single copy of the protocol running in the router. These protocols cannot be used directly
between PE and customer edge (CE) routers in VPN environments because each VPN (or, more
precisely, each VRF) needs a separate, isolated copy of the routing protocol to prevent
undesired route leakage between VPNs. Furthermore, VPNs can use overlapping IP address
spaces (for example, each VPN could use subnetworks of network 10.0.0.0), which would also
lead to routing confusions if all VPNs shared the same copy of the routing protocol.
5-5
What Are VPN-Aware Routing Protocols?

This topic describes the characteristics of VPN-aware routing protocols.
VPN-Aware Routing Protocols

Routing context = routing protocol run in one VRF:
Supported by VPN-aware routing protocols:
External BGP (EBGP), EIGRP, OSPF, RIP version 2 (RIPv2),
IS-IS, static routes
Implemented as several instances of a single routing

process (EIGRP, EBGP, RIPv2, IS-IS) or as several
routing processes (OSPF)
Independent per-instance router variables for each
instance
MPLS v2.25-5
Routing contexts were introduced in Cisco IOS software to support the need for separate
isolated copies of VPN routing protocols. Routing contexts can be implemented as separate
routing processes (in OSPF), similar to traditional Cisco IOS software implementation, or as
separate isolated instances of the same routing protocol.
If the routing contexts are implemented as instances of the same routing protocol, each instance
contains its own independent routing protocol parameters. Examples would include networks
over which the routing protocol is run, timers, authentication parameters, passive interfaces,
and neighbors. This independence allows the network designer maximum flexibility in
implementing routing protocols between PE and CE routers.
5-6
How Are VRF Tables Used?

This topic describes how VRF tables are used in an MPLS VPN implementation.
VRF Table
Contains routes that should be available to a
particular set of sites
Analogous to standard Cisco IOS software routing
table; supports same set of mechanisms
VPN interfaces (physical interface, subinterfaces,
logical interfaces) assigned to VRFs:
Many interfaces per VRF
Each interface assignable to only one VRF
MPLS v2.25-6
The routes received from VRF routing protocol instances or from dedicated VRF routing
processes are inserted into the IP routing table contained within the VRF. This IP routing table
supports exactly the same set of mechanisms as the standard Cisco IOS software routing table.
These mechanisms include filter mechanisms (distribute lists or prefix lists) and interprotocol
route selection mechanisms (administrative distances).
The per-VRF Forwarding Information Base (FIB) table is built from the per-VRF routing table.
This table is used to forward all the packets received through the interfaces associated with the
VRF. Any interface can be associated with a VRF, be it a physical interface, subinterface, or a
logical interface, as long as it supports CEF switching.
Note
The requirement to support CEF switching on inbound VRF interfaces prevents certain
media or encapsulation types from being used for VPN connectivity. More notable examples
in mainstream Cisco IOS Release 12.1 include dialer interfaces, ISDN interfaces, and
Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) interfaces. Some restrictions are already lifted
in Cisco IOS Release 12.1T. Refer to the release notes of the Cisco IOS platform that you
are using for details about the interfaces and media types supporting CEF switching.
There is no limit to the number of interfaces associated with one VRF (other than the number of
interfaces supported by the router). However, each interface can be assigned to only one VRF
because the router needs to uniquely identify the forwarding table to be used for packets
received over an interface.
5-7
Propagating BGP RoutesOutbound

This topic describes the outbound BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN
implementation.
BGP Route PropagationOutbound
Two VPNs are attached to the same PE router.

Each VPN is represented by a VRF.
MPLS v2.25-7
This figure and the next figures illustrate the interactions between VRF instances of routing
processes, VRF routing tables, and the global VPNv4 BGP routing process.

The network contains two VPN customers. Ordinarily, the customer sites would be connected
to a number of PE routers. This example focuses only on a single PE router, which contains two
VRFsone for each customer. Each customer is connected to the PE router, which is running
BGP. CE-BGP-A is the CE router for customer A and is associated with VRF-A (VPN-A). CEBGP-B is the CE router for customer B and is associated with VRF-B (VPN-B).
5-8
BGP Route PropagationOutbound (Cont.)
BGP-speaking CE routers announce their prefixes to the PE router via BGP.

The instance of BGP process associated with the VRF of the PE-CE interface
collects the routes and inserts them into the VRF routing table.
MPLS v2.25-8
The CE routers are BGP neighbors of the PE router. The BGP-speaking CE routers announce
their networks via External Border Gateway Protocol (EBGP) sessions to the PE router. The PE
router associates each BGP neighbor relationship with individual VRFs. The routes received
from each VRF routing protocol instance are inserted into the IP routing table contained within
that VRF.
A per-VRF forwarding table, FIB, is built from the per-VRF routing table and is used to
forward all the packets received through the interfaces associated with the VRF.
5-9
BGP Route PropagationOutbound (Cont.)
The route distinguishers are prepended during the route export to the
BGP routes from the VRF instance of the BGP process to convert them
into VPNv4 prefixes. Route targets are attached to these prefixes.
VPNv4 prefixes are propagated to other PE routers.
MPLS v2.25-9
This figure illustrates the interactions between VRF instances of routing processes, VRF
routing tables, and the global VPNv4 BGP routing process.

The BGP routes received from BGP-speaking CE routers are copied into the MP-BGP table for
further propagation to other PE routers. This is the export process.
The IP prefixes are prepended with the RD, and the set of RTs (extended BGP communities)
configured as export RTs for the VRF is attached to the resulting VPNv4 route.
Note
5-10
There is not a separate per-VRF BGP table and global MP-BGP table in Cisco IOS software.
Propagating BGP RoutesInbound

This topic describes the inbound BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN
implementation.
BGP Route PropagationInbound
VPNv4 prefixes are received from other PE routers.

The VPNv4 prefixes are inserted into proper VRF routing tables based
on their route targets and import route targets configured in VRFs.
The route distinguisher is removed during this process.
MPLS v2.25-10
As other PE routers start originating VPNv4 routes, the MP-BGP process in the PE router
receives the routes. The routes are filtered based on RT attributes attached to them, and are
inserted into the proper per-VRF IP routing tables based on the import RTs configured for
individual VRFs. The RD that was prepended by the originating PE router is removed before
the route is inserted into the per-VRF IP routing table.
5-11
BGP Route PropagationInbound (Cont.)
Routes are received from backbone MP-BGP and imported into a VRF.
IPv4 routes are forwarded to EBGP CE neighbors attached to
that VRF.
MPLS v2.25-11
The Multiprotocol Internal Border Gateway Protocol (MP-IBGP) VPNv4 routes received from
other PE routers and selected by the import RTs of a VRF are automatically propagated as
32-bit IPv4 routes to all BGP-speaking CE neighbors of the PE router.
5-12
Propagating Non-BGP RoutesOutbound

This topic describes the outbound non-BGP route propagation process in an MPLS VPN
implementation. The example will discuss the case of RIP-speaking CE routers, but a similar
process would support other non-BGP protocols.
Non-BGP Route PropagationOutbound
RIP-speaking CE routers announce their prefixes to the PE router via RIP.

The instance of RIP process associated with the VRF of the PE-CE interface
collects the routes and inserts them into the VRF routing table.
MPLS v2.25-12
RIP-speaking CE routers identify the correct instance of RIP on the PE router when an inbound
PE interface is associated with a VRF. This association allows CE routers to announce their
networks to the appropriate per-VRF routing table.
5-13
Non-BGP Route PropagationOutbound

(Cont.)
The RIP routes entered in the VRF routing table are redistributed into BGP
for further propagation into the MPLS VPN backbone.
Redistribution between RIP and BGP has to be configured for proper
MPLS VPN operation.
MPLS v2.25-13
MP-BGP is used in the MPLS VPN backbone to carry VPN routes (prefixed with the RD) as
96-bit VPNv4 routes between the PE routers. The backbone BGP process looks exactly like a
standard Internal Border Gateway Protocol (IBGP) setup from the perspective of the VRF. The
per-VRF RIP routes therefore must be redistributed into the per-VRF instance of the BGP
process to allow them to be propagated through the backbone MP-BGP process to other PE
routers.
Caution
Failure to redistribute non-BGP routes into the per-VRF instance of BGP is one of the most
common MPLS VPN configuration errors.
Should there be an overlap between an inbound RIP update and an inbound EBGP update, the
standard route selection mechanism (administrative distance) is used in the per-VRF IP routing
table and the EBGP route takes precedence over the RIP route. EBGP precedence results from
the fact that the administrative distance of EBGP routes (20) is better than the administrative
distance of RIP routes (120).
5-14
Propagating Non-BGP RoutesInbound

This topic describes the inbound route propagation process in an MPLS VPN implementation.
Non-BGP Route PropagationInbound
MP-IBGP routes imported into a VRF are redistributed into the instance
of RIP configured for that VRF.
Redistribution between BGP and RIP has to be configured for
end-to-end RIP routing between CE routers.
MPLS v2.25-14
The MP-IBGP routes, although they are inserted in the per-VRF IP routing table, are not
propagated to RIP-speaking CE routers automatically. To propagate these MP-IBGP routes to
the RIP-speaking CE routers, you must manually configure the redistribution between per-VRF
instance of BGP and per-VRF instance of RIP.
5-15
Non-BGP Route PropagationInbound

(Cont.)
Routes redistributed from BGP into a VRF instance of RIP are sent to
RIP-speaking CE routers.
MPLS v2.25-15
When the IBGP routes from the per-VRF IP routing table are successfully redistributed into the
per-VRF instance of the RIP process, the RIP process announces these routes to RIP-speaking
CE routers, thus achieving transparent end-to-end connectivity between the CE routers.
5-16
Summary
Summary
A VRF table is a routing and forwarding instance that
associates additional attributes such as RD, import RT,
and export RT to routing entries.
Routing contexts allow multiple copies of routing
protocols to run concurrently as separate VRF instances
to prevent undesired route leakage between VPNs.
VPN-aware routing protocols allow separation of routing
tables either as separate routing processes (OSPF) or
separate isolated instances of the same protocol (BGP,
EIGRP, RIPv2).
A VRF table is used to logically separate routing
information from different VPNs.
MPLS v2.25-16
Summary (Cont.)
Outbound BGP route propagation starts with CE BGP
updates. Because the protocol source is BGP, MP-BGP can
directly prepend RDs and RTs to the respective inbound
instances of CE BGP updates.
Inbound BGP route propagation filters routes based on RT
into respective instances of VRF.
Outbound non-BGP route propagation starts with CE
protocols other than BGP. Therefore, an additional step of
redistribution is required before prepending RD
and RT.
Inbound non-BGP route propagation filters routes based on
RT into respective VRF instances. Redistribution is required
for route propagation with non-BGP speaking CEs.
MPLS v2.25-17
5-17
5-18
Lesson 2
Configuring VRF Tables

Overview
This lesson explains how to configure virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) tables, listing the
configuration tasks, syntax, and definitions of commands used for the creation of VRFs. The
lesson also provides an example of a Virtual Private Network (VPN) configuration.
It is important to know how to configure and apply a VRF table onto a routing interface. It is
essential to understand the command syntax for the configurations that you want to deploy in
your network. This lesson will provide you with the information that will enable you to succeed
at such tasks.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure VRF tables. This
Identify the tasks that are required to configure a VRF table
Create a VRF table and assign RDs
Specify export and import RTs
Describe the optional use of VPN IDs
Assign an interface to a VRF table
Describe a typical Cisco IOS configuration that enables VRF
What Are the VRF Configuration Tasks?

This topic identifies the tasks required to configure a VRF table.
VRF Configuration Tasks

VRF configuration tasks:
Create a VRF table
Assign RD to the VRF
Specify export and import route targets
(Optional) Configure a VPN ID
Assign interfaces to VRFs
MPLS v2.25-3
Configuring a VRF table and starting deployment of a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
VPN service for a customer consists of these four mandatory steps:
Create a new VRF table.
Assign a unique route distinguisher (RD) to the VRF.
Note
You must assign a unique RD to every VRF created in a provider edge (PE) router. The
same RD might be used in multiple PE routers, based on customer connectivity
requirements. The same RD should be used on all PE routers for simple VPN service.
Specify import and export route targets (RTs) for the VRF.
Note
Import and export RTs should be equal to the RD for simple VPN service.
Assign interfaces to VRFs.
5-20

This topic describes how to create a VRF table and assign RDs.
This command creates a new VRF or enters

configuration of an existing VRF.
VRF names are case-sensitive.
VRF is not operational unless you configure RD.
VRF names have only local significance.
This command assigns a route distinguisher to a VRF.

You can use ASN:nn or A.B.C.D:nn format for RD.
Each VRF in a PE router has to have a unique RD.
MPLS v2.25-4
ip vrf
To configure a VRF routing table, use the ip vrf command in global configuration mode. To
remove a VRF routing table, use the no form of this command.
ip vrf vrf-name
no ip vrf vrf-name
This table describes the parameters for the ip vrf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Name assigned to a VRF.
Defaults
No VRFs are defined. No import or export lists are associated with a VRF. No route maps are
associated with a VRF.
5-21
rd
To create routing and forwarding tables for a VRF, use the rd command in VRF configuration
submode: rd route-distinguisher.
This table describes the parameters for the rd command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
route-distinguisher
Adds an 8-byte value to an IP version 4 (IPv4) prefix to create a

VPN version 4 (VPNv4) prefix
The RD can be specified in one of these two formats:

16-bit autonomous system (AS) number followed by a 32-bit decimal number (ASN:nn)
32-bit IP address followed by a 16-bit decimal number (A.B.C.D:nn)
Defaults
There is no default. An RD must be configured for a VRF table to be functional.
Note
5-22
Once a VRF has been defined using the ip vrf command and a RD has been assigned
using the rd command, the VRF is operational. After local interfaces are bound to the VRF
with the ip vrf forwarding command, the interfaces will appear in the routing display of the
VRF table.

This topic describes how to specify export and import RTs.

Specifies an RT to be attached to every route exported from
this VRF to MP-BGP.
Allows specification of many export RTsall to be attached
to every exported route.

Specifies an RT to be used as an import filteronly routes
matching the RT are imported into the VRF.
Allows specification of many import RTsany route where at
least one RT attached to the route matches any import RT is
imported into the VRF.
Because of implementation issues, at least one export route target must also be
an import route target of the same VRF in Cisco IOS Release 12.4(T) and earlier.
MPLS v2.25-5
route-target
To create an RT extended community for a VRF, use the route-target command in VRF
submode. To disable the configuration of an RT community option, use the no form of this
command.
route-target {import | export | both} route-target-ext-community
no route-target {import | export | both} route-target-ext-community
This table describes the parameters for the route-target command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
import
VPNv4 routes that contain an extended community value that

matches the route-target-ext-community field that will be imported
into the VRF
export
The value in the route-target-ext-community field that will be

inserted into the extended community for routes exported from
the VRF to VPNv4
both
Sets the value used by both the import and export process to the
valued indicated in the route-target-ext-community field
route-target-ext-community
The RT extended community attribute for the VRF
5-23
Similar to RDs, the RTs can be specified in one of these two formats:
16-bit AS number followed by a 32-bit decimal number (ASN:nn)
32-bit IP address followed by a 16-bit decimal number (A.B.C.D:nn)
Defaults
There are no defaults. A VRF has no RT extended community attributes associated with it until
specified by the route-target command.
Specifying Export and Import RTs (Cont.)
In cases where the export RT matches the import

RT, use this form of the route-target command.
Sample router configuration for simple customer VPN:

MPLS v2.25-6
Whenever an RT is both an import and an export RT for a VRF, you can use the route-target
both command to simplify the configuration. For example, the two route-target configuration
lines in the sample router configuration in the figure could be entered with a single command:
route-target both 12703:15.
5-24
Using VPN IDs

This topic defines VPN identifiers (VPN IDs) and discusses how to configure them.
What Is a VPN ID?

A VPN identifier (VPN ID) allows you to identify VPNs by an
ID number
Not used to control distribution of routing information
Not used to associate IP addresses with VPN IDs in
routing updates
Is stored on the VRF structure for a VPN
Has the following elements:
OUI (three-octet hex number)
A VPN index (four-octet hex number identifying VPN
within the company)
Configure all PE routers that belong to the same VPN with
the same VPN ID.
Make the VPN ID unique to the Service Provider network
MPLS v2.25-7
Multiple VPNs can be configured in a router. You can use a VRF name (a unique ASCII string)
to reference a specific VPN configured in the router. Alternately, you can use a VPN ID to
identify a particular VPN in the router as described in RFC 2685. The VPN ID is stored in the
corresponding VRF structure for the VPN.
Note
Configuration of a VPN ID for a VPN is optional. You can still use a VRF name to identify
configured VPNs in the router. The VPN name is not affected by the VPN ID configuration.
These are two independent mechanisms to identify VPNs.
The MPLS VPN ID feature is not used to control the distribution of routing information or to
associate IP addresses with MPLS VPN ID numbers in routing updates.
Each VPN ID defined by RFC 2685 consists of these elements:
An Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI), a three-octet hex number. The IEEE
Registration Authority assigns OUIs to any company that manufactures components under
the International Organization for Standardization (ISO)/International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 8802 standard. The OUI is used to generate universal LAN MAC
addresses and protocol identifiers for use in local and metropolitan area network
applications. For example, an OUI for Cisco Systems is 00-03-6B (hex).
A VPN index, a four-octet hex number, which identifies the VPN within the company.
To ensure that the VPN has a consistent VPN ID, assign the same VPN ID to all the routers in
the service provider network that services that VPN.
5-25
You can use several applications to manage VPNs using the VPN ID, such as Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and RADIUS server.
Configuring VPN IDs

This section discusses how to configure VPN IDs.
Configuring VPN IDs

This command creates a VRF routing table and a CEF forwarding
table, and enters VRF configuration mode.

This command assigns the VPN ID to the VRF.
MPLS v2.25-8
vpn id
To assign a VPN ID to a VRF, use the vpn id command in the VRF configuration submode. To
disable the configuration of an RT community option, use the no form of this command.
vpn id oui:vpn-index
no vpn id oui:vpn-index
This table describes the parameters for the vpn id command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
oui
This parameter is an OUI. The IEEE organization assigns this

identifier to companies. The OUI is restricted to three octets.
vpn-index
This value identifies the VPN within the company. This VPN index
is restricted to four octets.
Defaults
By default, the VPN ID is not set.
5-26

This topic describes how to assign an interface to a VRF table.
This command associates an interface with the

specified VRF.
The existing IP address is removed from the interface
when interface is put into VRFthe IP address must be
reconfigured.
CEF switching must be enabled on the interface.
Sample router configuration:

MPLS v2.25-9
ip vrf forwarding
To associate a VRF with an interface or subinterface, use the ip vrf forwarding command in
interface configuration mode. To disassociate a VRF, use the no form of this command.
ip vrf forwarding vrf-name
no ip vrf forwarding vrf-name
This table describes the parameters for the ip vrf forwarding command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
vrf-name
Name assigned to a VRF
Defaults
The default for an interface is the global routing table.
Note
When an interface is configured with a particular VRF, its IP address is removed from the
interface and from the global routing table. This action occurs based on the assumption that
the address is not valid across multiple routing tables, and the address should be
reconfigured after the interface is associated to a VRF.
5-27
Typical Configuration to Enable VRFs

This topic describes a typical Cisco IOS configuration that enables VRFs.
MPLS VPN Network Example
The network supports two VPN customers.

Customer A runs RIP and BGP with the service
provider; customer B uses only RIP.
Both customers use network 10.0.0.0.
MPLS v2.25-10
To illustrate the use of MPLS VPN configuration commands, you can look at a configuration of
the PE router in a sample network.
Example: MPLS VPN Network

The figure illustrates a configuration of the PE router in a sample network with two VPN
customers. Customer A (with four sites) is using Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and Routing
Information Protocol (RIP) as the provider edge-customer edge (PE-CE) routing protocol, and
customer B (with two sites) is using only RIP. Both customers use private IP address space
(subnetworks of network 10.0.0.0).
5-28
MPLS VPN Network Example (Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-11
The configuration steps that you perform on the PE router so far are as follows:
Step 1
Configure VRFs for customer A and customer B.
Step 2
Assign RDs and RTs to the VRFs. Only one RD per customer is used on all PE
routers in this MPLS VPN backbone, because these customers require only simple
VPN connectivity. To simplify the configuration and troubleshooting process, the
RTs are made equal to the RDs.
Step 3
Assign PE-CE interfaces to individual VRFs.
5-29
Summary
Summary
There are four required VRF configuration tasks:
Create a VRF table
Use the ip vrf command
Assign RD to the VRF
Use the rd command
Specify export and import RTs
Use the route-target command
Assign interfaces to VRFs.
Use the ip vrf forwarding command, and reconfigure the
IP address
Configuring a numeric VPN ID is optional.

Use the vpn id command
5-30
MPLS v2.25-12
Lesson 3
Configuring an MP-BGP
Session Between PE Routers
Overview
This lesson explains the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) process in a Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN)-enabled router, listing the configuration
tasks, steps, syntax, and descriptions. The lesson also discusses BGP community propagation
and provides a Multiprotocol Internal Border Gateway Protocol (MP-IBGP) configuration
example.
Most of the configuration in an MPLS VPN depends on how the provider edge (PE) routers are
configured. Having a good grasp of exactly what is being configured and why will help greatly
to ensure that your MPLS VPN network operates as smoothly as possible.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure Multiprotocol
Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) in an MPLS VPN backbone. This ability includes being
able to meet these objectives:
Configure BGP address families
Describe the requirements for enabling BGP neighbors in an MPLS VPN environment
Identify the process steps involved in configuring MP-BGP in an MPLS VPN environment
Configure MP-IBGP in an MPLS VPN environment
Configure MP-BGP community propagation in an MPLS VPN environment
Disable IPv4 route exchange in an MPLS VPN environment

This topic describes how to configure BGP address families.

The BGP process in an MPLS VPN-enabled router
performs three separate tasks:
Global BGP routes (Internet routing) are exchanged as in
traditional BGP setup.
VPNv4 prefixes are exchanged through MP-BGP.
VPN routes are exchanged with CE routers through perVRF External Border Gateway Protocol sessions.
Address families (routing protocol contexts) are

used to configure these three tasks in the same
BGP process.
MPLS v2.25-3
Independently from the MPLS VPN architecture, the PE router can use BGP IP version 4
(IPv4) route updates to receive and propagate Internet routes in scenarios where the PE routers
are also used to provide Internet connectivity to customers.
The MPLS VPN architecture uses the BGP routing protocol in these two different ways:
VPN version 4 (VPNv4) routes are propagated across an MPLS VPN backbone using MPBGP between the PE routers.
BGP can be used as the provider edge-customer edge (PE-CE) routing protocol to
exchange VPN routes between the PE routers and the CE routers.
All three route exchange mechanisms take place in one BGP process (because only one BGP
process can be configured per router). The routing protocol contexts (called address families
from the router configuration perspective) are used to configure all three independent route
exchange mechanisms.
5-32
Configuring BGP Address Families (Cont.)
Selects global BGP routing process
Selects configuration of VPNv4 prefix exchanges

under MP-BGP sessions
Selects configuration of per-VRF PE-CE EBGP

parameters
MPLS v2.25-4
Use the address-family command in router configuration mode to select the routing context
that you would like to configure, as follows:
Internet routing (global IP routing table) is the default address family that you configure
when you start configuring the BGP routing process.
To configure MP-BGP sessions between the PE routers, use the address-family vpnv4
command.
To configure BGP between the PE routers and the CE routers within individual virtual
routing and forwarding (VRF) tables, use the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command.
router bgp
To configure the BGP routing process, use the router bgp command in global configuration
mode. To remove a routing process, use the no form of this command.
router bgp as-number
no router bgp as-number
This table describes the router bgp command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Displays the number of an autonomous system (AS) that

identifies the router to other BGP routers and tags the routing
information passed along
Defaults
No BGP routing process is enabled by default.
5-33
address-family
To enter the address family submode for configuring routing protocols, such as BGP, Routing
Information Protocol (RIP), and static routing, use the address-family command in global
configuration mode. To disable the address family submode for configuring routing protocols,
use the no form of this command.
VPNv4 unicast:
address-family vpnv4 [unicast]
no address-family vpnv4 [unicast]
IPv4 unicast:
address-family ipv4 [unicast]
no address-family ipv4 [unicast]
IPv4 unicast with CE router:
address-family ipv4 [unicast] vrf vrf-name
no address-family ipv4 [unicast] vrf vrf-name
This table describes the address-family command.

Syntax Description
5-34
Parameter
Description
Configures sessions that carry standard IPv4 address prefixes
Configures sessions that carry customer VPNv4 prefixes, each of

which has been made globally unique by adding an 8-byte route
distinguisher (RD)
(Optional) Specifies unicast prefixes
Specifies the name of a VPN VRF to associate with submode

commands
Enabling BGP Neighbors

This topic describes the requirements for enabling BGP neighbors in an MPLS VPN
environment.
BGP Neighbors
MP-BGP neighbors are configured under the BGP
routing process:
These neighbors need to be activated for each global
address family that they support.
Per-address-family parameters can be configured for
these neighbors.
VRF-specific EBGP neighbors are configured

under corresponding address families.
MPLS v2.25-5
MPLS VPN architecture defines these two types of BGP neighbors:

Global BGP neighbors (other PE routers) with which the PE router can exchange multiple
types of routes (These neighbors are defined in the global BGP definition and only have to
be activated for individual address families.)
Per-VRF BGP neighbors (the CE routers), which are configured and activated within the
address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command
5-35
Configuring MP-BGP
This topic identifies the process steps involved in configuring MP-BGP in an MPLS VPN
environment.
Configuring MP-BGP
MPLS VPN MP-BGP configuration steps:
Configure MP-BGP neighbor under BGP routing
process.
Configure BGP address family VPNv4.
Activate configured BGP neighbor for VPNv4 route
exchange.
Specify additional parameters for VPNv4 route
exchange (filters, next hops, and so on).
MPLS v2.25-6
Configure BGP connectivity between two PE routers in these four steps:

Step 1
Configure the remote PE router as a global BGP neighbor in BGP router

configuration mode.
Step 2
Define the parameters that affect all BGP route exchange (for example, source
address for the TCP session) on the global BGP neighbor.
Step 3
Select the VPNv4 address family and activate the BGP neighbor for VPNv4 route
exchange.
Step 4
Configure additional VPNv4-specific BGP parameters (filters, next-hop processing,

route maps) within the VPNv4 address family.
Note
5-36
IPv4-specific BGP parameters are still configured under the BGP router configuration mode;
there is no special IPv4 address family.
Configuring MP-IBGP
This topic describes how to configure MP-IBGP in an MPLS VPN environment.
Configuring MP-IBGP
All MP-BGP neighbors have to be configured under global BGP

routing configuration.
MP-IBGP sessions have to run between loopback interfaces.

This command starts configuration of MP-BGP routing for VPNv4
route exchange.
The parameters that apply only to MP-BGP exchange of VPNv4
routes between already configured IBGP neighbors are configured
under this address family.
MPLS v2.25-7
The initial commands needed to configure an MP-IBGP session between PE routers are as
follows:
The neighbor ip-address remote-as as-number command configures the neighboring PE
router.
The neighbor ip-address update-source interface-type interface-number command
configures the source address used for the TCP session carrying BGP updates and the IP
address used as the BGP next hop for VPNv4 routes.
The address-family vpnv4 command allows you to enter VPNv4 configuration mode,
where the additional VPNv4-specific parameters have to be configured on the BGP
neighbor.
5-37
neighbor remote-as
To add an entry to the BGP neighbor table, use the neighbor remote-as command in router
configuration mode. To remove an entry from the table, use the no form of this command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as as-number
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as as-number
This table describes the neighbor remote-as command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Neighbor IP address
Name of BGP peer group
AS to which the neighbor belongs
Defaults
There are no BGP neighbor peers.
To have the Cisco IOS software allow internal BGP sessions to use any operational interface
for TCP connections, use the neighbor update-source command in router configuration mode.
To restore the interface assignment to the closest interface, which is called the best local
address, use the no form of this command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface-type
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface-type
This table describes the neighbor update-source command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address of the BGP-speaking neighbor
Loopback interface
Defaults
The default is the best local address.
5-38
Configuring MP-IBGP (Cont.)
The BGP neighbor defined under BGP router configuration

has to be activated for VPNv4 route exchange.
The next-hop-self keyword can be configured on the MP-IBGP

session for MPLS VPN configuration if EBGP is being run
with a CE neighbor.
MPLS v2.25-8
After you define the remote PE router as a global BGP neighbor, you must activate it for
VPNv4 route exchange.
neighbor activate
To enable the exchange of information with a BGP neighboring router, use the neighbor
activate command in router configuration mode. To disable the exchange of an address with a
neighboring router, use the no form of this command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} activate
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} activate
This table describes the neighbor activate command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address of the neighboring router
Defaults
The exchange of addresses with neighbors is enabled by default for the IPv4 address family.
For all other address families, address exchange is disabled by default. You can explicitly
activate the default command by using the appropriate address family submode.
5-39
To disable next-hop processing of BGP updates on the router, use the neighbor next-hop-self
command in router configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this
command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
This table describes the neighbor next-hop-self command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address of the BGP-speaking neighbor
Defaults
Default is disabled.
5-40
Configuring MP-BGP Community Propagation

This topic describes how to configure MP-BGP community propagation in an MPLS VPN
environment.
MP-BGP Community Propagation
This command with the

option is enabled by default
by Cisco IOS software after the BGP neighbor has been
activated for VPNv4 route exchange.
The command can be used to enable propagation of standard
BGP communities attached to VPNv4 prefixes.
Usage guidelines:
Extended BGP communities attached to VPNv4 prefixes
have to be exchanged between MP-BGP neighbors for
proper MPLS VPN operation.
To propagate standard BGP communities between
MP-BGP neighbors, use the
option.
MPLS v2.25-9
MPLS VPN architecture introduced the extended community BGP attribute. BGP still
supports the standard community attribute, which has not been superseded by the extended
communities. The default community propagation behavior for standard BGP communities has
not changed. Community propagation still needs to be configured manually. Extended BGP
communities are propagated by default because their propagation is mandatory for successful
MPLS VPN operation.
The neighbor send-community command was extended to support standard and extended
communities. Use this command to configure propagation of standard and extended
communities if your BGP design relies on use of standard communities. An example of this
would be to propagate quality of service (QoS) information across the network.
5-41
neighbor send-community
To specify that BGP community attributes that are attached to a BGP route should be sent to a
BGP neighbor, use the neighbor send-community command in router configuration mode. To
remove the entry, use the no form of this command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} send-community [extended | both]
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} send-community
This table describes the neighbor send-community command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Neighbor IP address
Defaults
BGP communities are not propagated to any neighbor.
5-42
MP-BGP BGP Community Propagation

(Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-10
The configuration example provided in the Configuring VRF Tables lesson continues here
with configuration of MP-IBGP sessions on the PE router. This table describes the steps that
you need to perform.
Configuration of MP-IBGP Sessions
Step
Action
Define a loopback interface that will serve as the BGP next hop for VPNv4 routes and as
the source address for the IBGP session.
Configure the remote PE router as the global BGP neighbor.
Specify the source address for the TCP session.
Select the VPNv4 address family.
Activate the remote PE router for VPNv4 route exchange.
Disable next-hop processing for VPNv4 route exchange. This action guarantees that the
loopback 0 interface will always be the BGP next hop for VPNv4 routes propagated by
this router to its MP-IBGP neighbors.
Configure propagation of standard and extended communities.
5-43

This topic describes how to disable IPv4 route exchange in an MPLS VPN environment.
The exchange of IPv4 routes between BGP

neighbors is enabled by defaultevery configured
neighbor will also receive IPv4 routes.
This command disables the default exchange of
IPv4 routesneighbors that need to receive IPv4
routes have to be activated for IPv4 route
exchange.
Use this command when the same router carries
Internet and VPNv4 routes and you do not want to
propagate Internet routes to some PE neighbors.
MPLS v2.25-11
The BGP configuration discussed so far is appropriate for scenarios where the PE routers
provide Internet and VPN connectivity. If the PE routers provide only VPN connectivity, they
do not need Internet routing, and the IPv4 route exchange should be disabled. Here are the two
ways of disabling IPv4 route exchange:
To disable IPv4 route exchange for only a few neighbors, your best option is to disable the
IPv4 route exchange on a neighbor-by-neighbor basis by using the no neighbor activate
command.
To disable IPv4 route exchange for most (or all) of the neighbors, you can use the no bgp
default ipv4-unicast command. After you enter this command, you must manually activate
IPv4 route exchange for each configured global BGP neighbor.
5-44
Disabling IPv4 Route Exchange (Cont.)

Neighbor 172.16.32.14 receives only Internet routes.
Neighbor 172.16.32.15 receives only VPNv4 routes.
Neighbor 172.16.32.27 receives Internet and VPNv4 routes.

MPLS v2.25-12
In this example, only a subset of BGP neighbors needs to receive IPv4 routes.
Example: Disabling IPv4 Route Exchange

In the figure, the default propagation of IPv4 routes is thus disabled. IPv4 route exchangeand
VPNv4 route exchangeis manually activated on a neighbor-by-neighbor basis:
Neighbor 172.16.32.14 receives only Internet routes based on the IPv4 activation.
Neighbor 172.16.32.15 receives only VPNv4 routes based on the VPNv4 activation.
Neighbor 172.16.32.27 receives Internet and VPNv4 routes based on both IPv4 and VPNv4
activations.
5-45
Summary
Summary
Use the
command to select the routing
context that you want to configure.
Use the router bgp command to configure the BGP
routing process, and configure VRF-specific EBGP
neighbors under corresponding address families.
To configure MPLS VPN MP-BGP, you need to:
Configure MP-BGP neighbors.
Configure MP-BGP address family to start VPNv4 routing.
Activate configured MP-BGP neighbors.
Specify additional parameters for VPNv4 route exchange.
MPLS v2.25-13
Summary (Cont.)
These commands are used to configure MP-IBGP:
neighbor remote-as
neighbor activate
Use the neighbor send-community command to support
standard and extended communities.
There are two ways to disable IPv4 route exchange:
no neighbor activate command
no bgp default ipv4-unicast command.
5-46
MPLS v2.25-14
Lesson 4
Configuring Small-Scale
Routing Protocols Between PE
and CE Routers
Overview
This lesson explains the provider edge-customer edge (PE-CE) routing protocol configuration
steps and the various routing protocols that you can run between PE and CE routers. These
protocols include Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing
Protocol (EIGRP), and static routes.
It is important to understand not only what you can configure between provider edge (PE) and
customer edge (CE) routers when you are setting up Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), but also how to accomplish the configuration successfully.
This lesson looks at the configuration parameters that you need to configure an MPLS VPN
PE-CE routing exchange.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure small-scale routing
protocols between PE and CE routers. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the requirements for configuring PE-CE routing protocols
Select the VRF routing context for BGP on the PE router
Configure per-VRF static routes
Configure a RIP PE-CE routing session
Configure an EIGRP PE-CE routing session
Configuring PE-CE Routing Protocols

This topic identifies the requirements for configuring PE-CE routing protocols.
PE-CE Routing Protocols

PE-CE routing protocols are configured for
individual VRFs.
Per-VRF routing protocols can be configured in
two ways:
Per-VRF parameters are specified in routing contexts,
which are selected with the address-family command.
A separate OSPF process has to be started for each VRF.
Prior to Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)T, the overall

number of routing processes per router was
limited to 32, of which only 28 were available for
VRF assignment.
MPLS v2.25-3
After you configure virtual routing and forwarding instances (VRFs) and establish
Multiprotocol Internal Border Gateway Protocol (MP-IBGP) connectivity between PE routers,
you have to configure routing protocols between the PE router and the attached CE routers. The
PE-CE routing protocols need to be configured for individual VRFs. Sites in the same VPN but
in different VRFs cannot share the same PE-CE routing protocol.
Note
The per-VRF configuration of the PEvirtual-CE routing protocols is another good reason for
grouping as many sites into a VRF as possible.
The per-VRF routing protocols can be configured in these two ways:

Per-VRF routing protocols can be configured as individual address families belonging to
the same routing process (similar to what you have already seen for Border Gateway
Protocol [BGP]).
Per-VRF routing protocols can be configured as separate routing processes. This option is
used for more complex routing protocols that need to maintain a separate topology database
for each VRF (for example, Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]).
Note
Prior to Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)T, Cisco IOS software implementation limits the overall
number of routing protocols in a router to 32. Two routing methods are predefined (static
and connected), and two routing protocols are needed for proper MPLS VPN backbone
operationBGP and backbone Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). The number of PE-CE
routing processes was therefore limited to 28.
This restriction was removed for MPLS in Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)T.
5-48
Selecting the VRF Routing Context for BGP

This topic describes how to select the VRF routing context for BGP.
Configuring the VRF Routing Context

Within BGP
Select the per-VRF BGP context with the

command.
Configure CE External Border Gateway Protocol
neighbors in VRF context, not in global BGP
configuration.
All non-BGP per-VRF routes have to be
redistributed into a per-VRF BGP context to be
propagated by MP-BGP to other PE routers.
MPLS v2.25-4
Select the VRF routing context with the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command in the
RIP and BGP routing processes. All per-VRF routing protocol parameters (network numbers,
passive interfaces, neighbors, filters, and so on) are configured under this address family.
Note
Common parameters defined in router configuration mode are inherited by all address
families defined for this routing process and can be overridden for each individual address
family.
5-49
address-family ipv4
To enter address family configuration mode for configuring routing sessions, such as BGP, that
use standard IP version 4 (IPv4) address prefixes, use the address-family ipv4 command in
router configuration mode. To disable address family configuration mode, use the no form of
this command.
address-family ipv4 [multicast | unicast | vrf vrf-name]
no address-family ipv4 [multicast | unicast | vrf vrf-name]
This table describes the address-family ipv4 command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Specifies IPv4 multicast address prefixes
(Optional) Specifies IPv4 unicast address prefixes
(Optional) Specifies the name of the VRF instance to associate

with subsequent IPv4 address family configuration mode
commands
Defaults
IPv4 address prefixes are not enabled. Unicast address prefixes are the default when IPv4
address prefixes are configured.
Command Modes
This command is used in router configuration mode.
5-50

This topic describes how to configure per-VRF static routes.
This command configures per-VRF static routes.

The route is entered in the VRF table.
You must specify a next-hop IP address if you are
not using a point-to-point interface.
Sample router configuration:

MPLS v2.25-5
ip route vrf
To establish static routes for a VRF, use the ip route vrf command in global configuration
mode. To disable static routes, use the no form of this command.
ip route vrf vrf-name prefix mask [interface {interface-number}] [next-hop-address]
[global] [distance] [permanent] [tag tag]
no ip route vrf vrf-name prefix mask [interface {interface-number}] [next-hop-address]
[global] [distance] [permanent] [tag tag]
Note
You must specify a next-hop IP address if you are not using a point-to-point interface.
5-51
This table describes the ip route vrf command.

Syntax Description
5-52
Parameter
Description
Name of the VRF for the static route
IP route prefix for the destination, in dotted decimal notation
Prefix mask for the destination, in dotted decimal notation
(Optional) IP address of the next hop (the forwarding router that

can be used to reach that network)
(Optional) Type of network interface to use: ATM, Ethernet,

loopback, Packet over SONET (POS), or null
(Optional) Number identifying the network interface to use
(Optional) Specifies that the given next-hop address be in the

non-VRF routing table
(Optional) An administrative distance for this route
(Optional) Specifies that this route will not be removed, even if

the interface shuts down
(Optional) Label (tag) value that can be used for controlling

redistribution of routes through route maps

This topic describes how to configure a RIP PE-CE routing session.

A routing context is configured for each VRF
running RIP.
RIP parameters have to be specified in the VRF.
Some parameters configured in the RIP process
are propagated to routing contexts (for example,
RIP version).
Only RIPv2 is supported.
MPLS v2.25-6
Configuring RIP as the PE-CE routing protocol is even easier than configuring BGP. Start the
configuration of the individual routing context with the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name
command in router configuration mode. You can enter all standard RIP parameters in the perVRF routing context. Global RIP parameters entered in the scope of RIP router configuration
are inherited by each routing context and can be overwritten if needed in each routing context.
Note
Only RIP version 2 (RIPv2) not RIP version 1 (RIPv1) is supported as the PE-CE routing
protocol. It is good configuration practice to configure the RIP version as a global RIP
parameter using the version 2 command in router configuration mode.
5-53
Configuring RIP PE-CE Routing:

RIP Metric Propagation
BGP routes must be redistributed back into RIP.

The RIP hop count has to be manually set for routes redistributed
into RIP.
For end-to-end RIP networks, the following applies:
On the sending end, the RIP hop count is copied into the BGP MED.
On the receiving end, the metric transparent option copies
the BGP MED into the RIP hop count, resulting in a consistent end-toend RIP hop count.
When you are using RIP with other protocols, the metric must be
manually set.
MPLS v2.25-7
The IGP metric is always copied into the multi-exit discriminator (MED) attribute of the BGP
route when an IGP route is redistributed into BGP. Within standard BGP implementation, the
MED attribute is used only as a route selection criterion. The MED attribute is not copied back
into the IGP metric. The IGP metric has to be specified in the redistribute command or by
using the default-metric command in router configuration mode.
The MPLS VPN extension to the redistribute command (metric transparent option) allows
the MED attribute to be inserted as the IGP metric of a route redistributed from BGP back into
RIP. This extension gives transparent end-to-end (from the customer perspective) RIP routing,
as described here:
By default, the RIP hop count is inserted into the BGP attribute MED when the RIP route is
redistributed into BGP by the ingress PE router.
You can configure the value of the MED attribute (the original RIP hop count) to be copied
into the RIP hop count when the BGP route is redistributed back into RIP. This action
causes the whole MPLS VPN backbone to appear as a single hop to the CE routers.
Note
5-54
You should not change the MED value within BGP if you use the redistribute metric
transparent command.
Configuring RIP PE-CE Routing:

Example
MPLS v2.25-8
The RIP configuration in this sample network (and described here) is very easy:
The RIP routing process is configured. The RIP version is configured as the global RIP
parameter.
The RIP routing context is configured for every VRF where you want to run RIP as the
PE-CE routing protocol. The directly connected networks (configured on interfaces in the
VRF) over which you want to run RIP are specified to have standard RIP configuration.
Redistribution from BGP into RIP with metric propagation is configured.
The BGP routing context is configured for every VRF. Redistribution of RIP routes into
BGP has to be configured for every VRF for which you have configured the RIP routing
context.
5-55

This topic describes how to configure an EIGRP PE-CE routing session.

Provides EIGRP with the capability to redistribute
routes through a VPN cloud
Requires configuration of only the PE routers
Imposes no upgrade or configuration changes to
customer equipment
Supports SOO capabilities to filter VPN traffic
MPLS v2.25-9
MPLS VPN support for EIGRP between PE and CE provides EIGRP with the capability to
redistribute routes through a BGP VPN cloud. This feature is configured only on PE routers,
requiring no upgrade or configuration changes to customer equipment. This feature also
introduces EIGRP support for MPLS and BGP extended community attributes such as Site of
Origin (SOO).
5-56
Configuring EIGRP PE-CE Routing:

EIGRP Metric Propagation
)#
Enables the EIGRP AS number of the CE under the

address family.
Configures per-instance AS number.
Configures router redistribution.
External routes received without the configured metric
are not to be advertised to the CE router.
The metric can be configured in the redistribute statement
using the redistribute command or configured with the defaultmetric command.
MPLS v2.25-10
The IGP metric is always copied into the MED attribute of the BGP route when an IGP route is
redistributed into BGP. Within standard BGP implementation, the MED attribute is used only
as a route selection criterion. The MED attribute is not copied back into the IGP metric. The
metric must be configured for routes from external EIGRP autonomous systems and nonEIGRP networks before these routes can be redistributed into an EIGRP CE router. The metric
can be configured in the redistribute statement using the redistribute (IP) command or
configured with the default-metric (EIGRP) command.
5-57
Configuring EIGRP PE-CE Routing:

Example
MPLS v2.25-11
The EIGRP configuration in this sample network (and described here) is very easy:
The EIGRP routing process is configured. The EIGRP process is configured as the global
EIGRP parameter. Notice that this PE-CE configuration varies from traditional EIGRP
configuration by deferring the definition of the autonomous system (AS) number in the
routing context.
The EIGRP routing context is configured for every VRF where you want to run EIGRP as
the PE-CE routing protocol. The directly connected networks (configured on interfaces in
the VRF) over which you want to run EIGRP are specified to have standard EIGRP
configuration.
Redistribution from BGP into the customer routing context EIGRP with metric propagation
is configured.
The BGP routing context is configured for every VRF. Redistribution of the customer
routing context EIGRP routes into BGP has to be configured for every VRF for which you
have configured the EIGRP routing context.
Note
5-58
Use of the no auto-summary command is recommended to prevent undesirable results in

MPLS VPN. Use of the default auto-summary command can result in the same summary
being received from multiple other sites based on network class and, therefore, you would
not be able to determine which site to use for a more specific route.
Configuring SOO for EIGRP PE-CE Loop Prevention

This topic describes how to configure EIGRP MPLS VPN PE-CE SOO for an EIGRP PE-CE
routing session to prevent routing loops.
Implementing EIGRP SOO for Loop Prevention
MPLS v2.25-12
In this multihomed scenario, a routing loop exists.

Note
SOO is needed only for customer networks with multihomed sites. Loops can never occur in
customer networks that have only stub sites.
5-59
Implementing EIGRP SOO for Loop

Prevention (Cont.)
The SOO extended community can be used to
prevent loops in dual-homed scenarios.
All PE routers supporting EIGRP MPLS VPNs must
support the SOO extended community.
A unique SOO value must be configured for each
VPN site. This value must be used on the PE-CE
interface.
The SOO attribute is configured through a routemap command.
MPLS v2.25-13
The EIGRP MPLS VPN PE-CE SOO feature provides SOO support for EIGRP-to-BGP and
BGP-to-EIGRP redistribution. The SOO extended community is a BGP extended community
attribute that is used to identify routes that have originated from a site so that the
readvertisement of that prefix back to the source site can be prevented. The SOO extended
community uniquely identifies the site from which a PE router has learned a route. SOO
support provides the capability to filter MPLS VPN traffic on a per-EIGRP site basis. SOO
filtering is configured at the interface level and is used to manage MPLS VPN traffic and to
prevent routing loops from occurring in complex and mixed network topologies, such as
EIGRP VPN sites that contain both VPN and backdoor links.
The configuration of the SOO extended community allows MPLS VPN traffic to be filtered on
a per-site basis. The SOO extended community is configured in an inbound BGP route map on
the PE router, and is applied to the interface with the ip vrf sitemap command. The SOO
extended community can be applied to all exit points at the customer site for more specific
filtering, but must be configured on all interfaces of PE routers that provide VPN services to
CE routers.
5-60

Prevention (Cont.)
Creates a route map that sets the SOO attribute
Applies a route map that sets SOO extended

community attribute to inbound routing updates
received from this interface
MPLS v2.25-14
set extcommunity
To set the extended communities attribute, use the set extcommunity command in route map
configuration mode. To delete the entry, use the no form of this command.
set extcommunity {rt extended-community-value [additive] | soo extended-communityvalue}
no set extcommunity
set extcommunity extcommunity-type community-number [additive]
no set extcommunity extcommunity-type community-number [additive]
5-61
This table describes the parameters for the set extcommunity command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the route target (RT) extended community attribute
Specifies the SOO extended community attribute
Specifies the value to be set

The value can be one of these combinations:
autonomous-system-number:network-number
ip-address:network-number
The colon is used to separate the AS number from the network
number or the IP address from the network number.
(Optional) Adds space after the closing parenthesis; adds the

extended community to the already existing extended
communities
Defaults
No BGP extended community attributes are set by the route map.
ip vrf sitemap
To set the SOO extended community attribute, use the ip vrf sitemap command in interface
ip vrf sitemap route-map-name
no ip vrf sitemap route-map-name
This table describes the parameters for the ip vrf sitemap command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Sets the name of the route map to be used
Defaults
No route map is used to set the SOO extended community attribute.
5-62

Prevention (Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-15
In this example, a route map SOO_Support with a specific SOO value of 101:2 was defined.
The newly defined route map is then applied to vrf Customer-EIGRP-A1 that connects the
EIGRP neighbor (CE-EIGRP-A2 router) to the PE-Site-Y router.
5-63
Summary
Summary
The per-VRF routing protocols can be configured in two
ways: as individual address families belonging to the
same routing process or as separate routing processes.
Use the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command to select
the VRF routing context.
Use the ip route vrf command to establish static routes.
Use the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command to start
the configuration of individual routing context.
Use the redistribute command to configure the metric that
is copied into the MED attribute of the BGP route.
Use the SOO extended community to prevent loops in
EIGRP dual-homed scenarios.
5-64
MPLS v2.25-16
Lesson 5
Monitoring MPLS VPN

Operations
Overview
This lesson presents the commands, syntax, and descriptions for monitoring virtual routing and
forwarding (VRF) routing, Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) sessions, and
Virtual Private Network (VPN) status.
It is important to understand the network that you configure and ensure that it is operating
optimally. This lesson will explain how to monitor a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
VPN network to ensure that the network is functioning smoothly.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to monitor MPLS VPN
Monitor VRF information
Monitor VRF routing
Monitor MP-BGP sessions
Monitor an MP-BGP VPNv4 table
Monitor per-VRF CEF and LFIB structures
Monitor labels associated with VPNv4 routes
Identify the command syntax that is used with other MPLS VPN monitoring commands
Monitoring VRFs
This topic describes how to monitor VRF information.
Monitoring VRFs
Displays the list of all VRFs configured in the router
Displays detailed VRF configuration
Displays interfaces associated with VRFs

MPLS v2.25-3
show ip vrf
To display the set of defined VRFs and associated interfaces, use the show ip vrf command in
EXEC mode: show ip vrf [{brief | detail | interfaces}] [vrf-name] [output-modifiers].
This table describes the parameters for the show ip vrf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Displays concise information on the VRF (or VRFs)

and associated interfaces
(Optional) Displays detailed information on the VRF (or VRFs)

and associated interfaces
(Optional) Displays detailed information about all interfaces

bound to a particular VRF or to any VRF
(Optional) Displays the name assigned to a VRF
(Optional) For a list of associated keywords and arguments, use

context-sensitive help
Defaults
When no optional parameters are specified, the command shows concise information about all
configured VRFs.
5-66
Monitoring VRFs:
show ip vrf
MPLS v2.25-4
The show ip vrf command displays concise information about the VRF (or VRFs) and
associated interfaces. This table describes the fields displayed by this command.
Field Description
Fields
Description
Name
Specifies the VRF name
Default RD
Specifies the default route distinguisher (RD)
Interfaces
Specifies the network interfaces
5-67
Monitoring VRFs:
show ip vrf detail

MPLS v2.25-5
To display detailed information on the VRFs and associated interfaces, use the show ip vrf
detail command. This table describes the additional fields shown by this command.
Additional Field Description
5-68
Field
Description
Interfaces
Specifies the network interfaces
Export
Specifies VPN route target (RT) export communities
Import
Specifies VPN RT import communities
Monitoring VRFs:
show ip vrf interfaces
MPLS v2.25-6
To display the interfaces bound to a particular VRF (or interfaces bound to any VRF), use the
show ip vrf interfaces command, which displays the fields described in this table.
show ip vrf interfaces Field Description
Field
Description
Interface
Specifies the network interfaces for a VRF
IP-Address
Specifies the IP address of a VRF interface
VRF
Specifies the VRF name
Protocol
Displays the state of the protocol (up or down) for each VRF
interface
5-69

This topic describes how to monitor VRF routing.
Displays the routing protocols configured in a VRF
Displays the VRF routing table
Displays per-VRF BGP parameters
MPLS v2.25-7
These three commands can be used to monitor VRF routing:

The show ip protocols vrf command displays the summary information about routing
protocols running in a VRF.
The show ip route vrf command displays the VRF routing table.
The show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf command displays the VRF Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
table.

To display the routing protocol information associated with a VRF, use the show ip protocols
vrf command in EXEC mode: show ip protocols vrf vrf-name.
This table describes the parameters for the show ip protocols vrf command.
Syntax Description
5-70
Parameter
Description
Specifies the name assigned to the VRF
show ip route vrf

To display the IP routing table associated with a VRF, use the show ip route vrf command in
EXEC mode: show ip route vrf vrf-name [connected] [protocol [as-number] [tag] [outputmodifiers]] [list number [output-modifiers]] [profile] [static [output-modifiers]] [summary
[output-modifiers]] [supernets-only [output-modifiers]] [traffic-engineering [outputmodifiers]].
This table describes the parameters for the show ip route vrf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the name assigned to the VRF
(Optional) Displays all connected routes in a VRF
(Optional) To specify a routing protocol, use one of these

keywords: bgp, egp, eigrp, hello, igrp, isis, ospf, or rip
(Optional) Specifies the autonomous system (AS) number
(Optional) Specifies Cisco IOS software routing area label

(Optional) Specifies the IP access list to display
(Optional) Displays the IP routing table profile
(Optional) Displays static routes
(Optional) Displays a summary of routes
(Optional) Displays supernet entries only
(Optional) Displays only traffic-engineered routes
5-71
show ip bgp vpnv4

To display VPN address information from the BGP table, use the show ip bgp vpnv4
command in EXEC mode: show ip bgp vpnv4 {all | rd route-distinguisher | vrf vrf-name} [ipprefix/length [longer-prefixes] [output-modifiers]] [network-address [mask] [longer-prefixes]
[output-modifiers]] [cidr-only] [community] [community-list] [dampened-paths] [filter-list]
[flap-statistics] [inconsistent-as] [neighbors] [paths [line]] [peer-group] [quote-regexp]
[regexp] [summary] [labels].
This table describes the parameters for the show ip bgp vpnv4 command.
Syntax Description
5-72
Parameter
Description
Displays the complete VPN version 4 (VPNv4) database
Displays Network Layer Reachability Information (NLRI) prefixes

that have a matching RD
Displays NLRI prefixes associated with the named VRF
(Optional) Displays the IP prefix address (in dotted decimal

notation) and length of mask (0 to 32)
(Optional) Displays the entry, if any, that exactly matches the

specified prefix parameter, and all entries that match the prefix
in a longest-match sensethat is, prefixes for which the
specified prefix is an initial substring

(Optional) Displays the IP address of a network in the BGP

routing table
(Optional) Displays the mask of the network address, in dotted

decimal notation
(Optional) Displays only routes that have non-natural net masks
(Optional) Displays routes matching this community
(Optional) Displays routes matching this community list
(Optional) Displays paths suppressed on account of dampening

(BGP route from peer is up and down)
(Optional) Displays routes conforming to the filter list
(Optional) Displays flap statistics of routes
(Optional) Displays only routes that have inconsistent

autonomous systems of origin
(Optional) Displays details about TCP and BGP neighbor

connections
(Optional) Displays path information
(Optional) Displays a regular expression to match the BGP AS

paths
(Optional) Displays information about peer groups
(Optional) Displays routes matching the AS path regular

expression
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Displays routes matching the AS path regular

expression
(Optional) Displays BGP neighbor status
(Optional) Displays incoming and outgoing BGP labels for each

NLRI
Monitoring VRF Routing:


MPLS v2.25-8
The show ip protocols vrf command displays summary information about all routing protocol
instances active in the specified VRF. The fields displayed by this command are shown in this
table.
Field Description
Field
Description
Gateway
Displays the IP address of the router ID for all routers in the

network
Distance
Displays the metric used to access the destination route
Last Update
Displays the last time that the routing table was updated from the
source
5-73

show ip route vrf

MPLS v2.25-9
The show ip route vrf command displays the contents of the VRF IP routing table in the same
format used by the show ip route command.
5-74


MPLS v2.25-10

To display BGP neighbors configured in a VRF, use the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf neighbors
command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip bgp vpnv4 {all | vrf vrf-name} neighbors.
This table describes the parameters for the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf neighbors command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies VPNv4 information
Displays the complete VPNv4 database
Displays neighbors associated with the named VRF
Displays details about TCP and BGP neighbor connections
Defaults
This command has no default values.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display detailed information about BGP neighbors associated with the
MPLS VPN architecture.
5-75

This topic describes how to monitor MP-BGP sessions
This command displays global BGP neighbors and

the protocols negotiated with these neighbors.
MPLS v2.25-11
The show ip bgp neighbors command is described in detail in Cisco IOS documentation. This
command is used to monitor BGP sessions with other PE routers and the address families
negotiated with these neighbors.
Monitoring MP-BGP Sessions:


5-76
MPLS v2.25-12
Monitoring MP-BGP Sessions:

show ip bgp neighbors (Cont.)

MPLS v2.25-13

To display information about the TCP and BGP connections to neighbors, use the show ip bgp
neighbors command in EXEC mode: show ip bgp neighbors [neighbor-address] [receivedroutes | routes | advertised-routes | {paths regexp} | dampened-routes].
This table describes the parameters for the show ip bgp neighbors command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Displays the address of the neighbor whose routes you

have learned from
If you omit this argument, all neighbors will be displayed.
(Optional) Displays all received routes (both accepted and

rejected) from the specified neighbor
(Optional) Displays all routes that are received and accepted

This parameter is a subset of the output from the receivedroutes keyword.
(Optional) Displays all the routes that the router has advertised to
the neighbor
(Optional) Matches the paths received
(Optional) Displays the dampened routes to the neighbor at the

IP address specified
5-77
Example: Sample Output from show ip bgp neighbors

Command
This table describes the fields shown in the sample output.
Field Descriptions
Field
Description
BGP neighbor
IP address of the BGP neighbor and its AS number

If the neighbor is in the same AS as the router, the link between
them is internal; otherwise, the link is considered external.
remote AS
AS of the neighbor
external link
Indicates that this peer is either an External Border Gateway

Protocol (EBGP) peer or an IBGP peer
internal link
BGP version
BGP version being used to communicate with the remote router

The router ID (an IP address) of the neighbor is also specified.
remote router ID
IP address of the neighbor
BGP state
Internal state of this BGP connection
up for
Amount of time, in seconds, that the underlying TCP connection

has been in existence
Last read
Time that BGP last read a message from this neighbor
hold time
Maximum amount of time that can elapse between messages

from the peer
keepalive interval
Time period, in seconds, between sending keepalive packets,

which helps ensure that the TCP connection is up
Neighbor capabilities
BGP capabilities advertised and received from this neighbor

Note: A state of advertised and received indicates an active
neighbor relationship.
Here is sample output from the show ip bgp neighbors command:

5-78
This table describes the fields shown in the sample output.

Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Address family IPv4 Unicast:
IPv4 unicast-specific properties of this neighbor
Address family VPNv4
VPNv4-specific properties of this neighbor
Note
For detailed information, please consult the Cisco IOS reference manual.
5-79

This topic describes how to monitor an MP-BGP VPNv4 table.
Displays whole VPNv4 table.
Displays only BGP parameters (routes or neighbors)

associated with specified VRF.
Any BGP
command can be used with these
parameters.
Displays only BGP parameters (routes or neighbors)

associated with the specified RD.
MPLS v2.25-14
The show ip bgp vpnv4 command displays IP version 4 (IPv4) BGP information and VPNv4
BGP information. To display VPNv4 BGP information, use one of these keywords:
all to display the whole contents of the VPNv4 BGP table
vrf vrf-name to display VPNv4 information associated with the specified VRF
rd route-distinguisher to display VPNv4 information associated with the specified RD
5-80
Monitoring an MP-BGP VPNv4 Table:

show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf-name

MPLS v2.25-15
show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf

To display VPNv4 information from the BGP database associated with a VRF, use the show ip
bgp vpnv4 vrf command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name [ipprefix/length [longer-prefixes] [output-modifiers]] [network-address [mask] [longer-prefixes]
[output-modifiers]] [cidr-only] [community][community-list] [dampened-paths] [filter-list]
[flap-statistics] [inconsistent-as] [neighbors] [paths [line]] [peer-group] [quote-regexp]
[regexp] [summary] [tags].
This table describes the syntax for the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display VPNv4 information that is associated with a VRF from the BGP
database. A similar commandshow ip bgp vpnv4 alldisplays all available VPNv4
information. The show ip bgp vpnv4 summary command displays BGP neighbor status.
5-81
Monitoring an MP-BGP VPNv4 Table:


MPLS v2.25-16

To display all VPNv4 routes that contain a specified RD, use the show ip bgp vpnv4 rd
command in privileged EXEC mode: show ip bgp vpnv4 rd route-distinguisher [ipprefix/length [longer-prefixes] [output-modifiers]] [network-address [mask] [longer-prefixes]
[output-modifiers]] [cidr-only] [community][community-list] [dampened-paths] [filter-list]
[flap-statistics] [inconsistent-as] [paths [line]] [quote-regexp] [regexp] [summary] [tags].
This table describes the syntax for the show ip bgp vpnv4 rd route-distinguisher command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Displays NLRI prefixes that have a matching RD
Defaults
There is no default. An RD must be configured for a VRF to be functional.
5-82
Usage Guidelines
An RD creates a VRF and specifies the default RD for a VPN. The RD is added to the
beginning of the customer IPv4 prefixes to change them into globally unique VPN IPv4
prefixes.
Either an RD is an AS-relative RD, in which case it is composed of an AS number and an
arbitrary number, or it is an IP-address-relative RD, in which case it is composed of an IP
address and an arbitrary number.
You can enter an RD in either of these formats:
16-bit AS number: your 32-bit number
For example, 101:3.
32-bit IP address: your 16-bit number
For example, 192.168.122.15:1.
Example: Configuring a Default RD for Two VRFs

This example shows how to configure a default RD for two VRFs. The example illustrates the
use of both AS-relative and IP-address-relative RDs:

5-83
Monitoring Per-VRF CEF and LFIB Structures

This topic describes how to monitor per-VRF Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) and label
forwarding information base (LFIB) structures.
Monitoring per-VRF CEF and LFIB

Structures
Displays per-VRF CEF table
Displays details of an individual CEF entry,

including label stack
Displays labels allocated by an MPLS VPN for

routes in the specified VRF
MPLS v2.25-17
These three commands can be used to display per-VRF FIB and LFIB structures:
The show ip cef vrf command displays the VRF Forwarding Information Base (FIB).
The show ip cef vrf detail command displays detailed information about a single entry in
the VRF FIB.
The show mpls forwarding vrf command displays all labels allocated to VPN routes in the
specified VRF.
5-84

Structures (Cont.)

The show ip cef command can also display the label stack associated
with the MP-IBGP route.
MPLS v2.25-18
show ip cef vrf

To display the CEF forwarding table associated with a VRF, use the show ip cef vrf command
in privileged EXEC mode: show ip cef vrf vrf-name [ip-prefix [mask [longer-prefixes]]
[detail] [output-modifiers]] [interface interface-number] [adjacency [interface interfacenumber] [detail] [discard] [drop] [glean] [null] [punt] [output-modifiers]] [detail [outputmodifiers]] [non-recursive [detail] [output-modifiers]] [summary [output-modifiers]] [traffic
[prefix-length] [output-modifiers]] [unresolved [detail] [output-modifiers]].
The label stack in the VRF table can be inspected using the show ip cef vrf vrf-name detail
command. The tags imposed values in the output displays the MPLS label stack. The first label
in the MPLS label stack is the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) label forwarded toward the
egress provider edge (PE) router, and the second label is the VPN label advertised by the egress
PE router.
5-85
This table describes the syntax for the show ip cef vrf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Name assigned to the VRF
(Optional) IP prefix of entries to show, in dotted decimal notation

(A.B.C.D)
(Optional) Mask of the IP prefix, in dotted decimal notation
(Optional) Displays table entries for all of the more specific routes
(Optional) Displays detailed information for each CEF table entry

(Optional) Type of network interface to use: ATM, Ethernet,

loopback, Packet over SONET (POS), or null
Number identifying the network interface to use
(Optional) Displays all prefixes resolving through adjacency
Discards adjacency
Drops adjacency
Gleans adjacency
Null adjacency
Punts adjacency
(Optional) Displays only nonrecursive routes
(Optional) Displays a CEF table summary
(Optional) Displays traffic statistics
(Optional) Displays traffic statistics by prefix size
(Optional) Displays only unresolved routes
Defaults
Usage Guidelines
Used with the vrf-name argument, the show ip cef vrf command shows a shortened display of
the CEF table.
Used with the detail keyword, the show ip cef vrf command shows detailed information for all
CEF table entries.
5-86

Structures (Cont.)

MPLS v2.25-19
show mpls forwarding vrf

To display label-forwarding information for advertised VRF routes, use the show mpls
forwarding vrf command in EXEC mode.
show mpls forwarding vrf vrf-name [ip-prefix/length [mask]] [detail] [output-modifiers]
This table describes the parameters for the show mpls forwarding vrf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Displays IP prefix address (in dotted decimal notation)

and length of mask (0 to 32)
(Optional) Displays destination network mask in dotted decimal

notation
(Optional) Displays detailed information on the VRF routes

Defaults
This command has no default behavior or values.
Usage Guidelines
Use this command to display label-forwarding entries associated with a particular VRF or IP
prefix.
5-87
Monitoring Labels Associated with VPNv4

Routes
This topic describes how to monitor labels associated with VPNv4 routes.
Monitoring Labels Associated

with VPNv4 Routes
Displays labels associated with VPNv4 routes

MPLS v2.25-20
You can use the show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels command to display tags assigned to local or
remote VRF routes by the local or remote PE router. This command displays labels associated
with all VPNv4 routes when you use the all keyword. This command can also display tags
associated with a specified RD or VRF.
This table describes the fields displayed by this command.
Field Descriptions
5-88
Field
Description
Network
Displays the network address from the BGP table
Next Hop
Specifies the BGP next-hop address
In tag
Displays the label (if any) assigned by this router
Out tag
Displays the label assigned by the BGP next-hop router
Identifying Other MPLS VPN Monitoring

Commands
This topic identifies the command syntax that is used with other MPLS VPN monitoring
commands.
Other MPLS VPN Monitoring Commands
Performs PE-CE Telnet through specified VRF
Performs ping based on VRF routing table
Performs VRF-based traceroute

MPLS v2.25-21
These three additional Cisco IOS software monitoring commands are VRF-aware:
The telnet command can be used to connect to a customer edge (CE) router from a PE
router using the /vrf option.
The ping vrf command can be used to ping a destination host reachable through a VRF.
The trace vrf command can be used to trace a path toward a destination reachable through
a VRF.
5-89
Summary
Summary
Use the following commands to monitor VRF information:
show ip vrf
show ip vrf detail
Use the following commands to monitor VRF routing:
show ip protocols vrf vrf-name
show ip route vrf vrf-name
show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name
Use the show ip bgp neighbors command to monitor MPBGP sessions.
MPLS v2.25-22
Summary (Cont.)
Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 command to monitor an MP-BGP
VPNv4 table.
Use these commands to monitor the per-VRF CEF and LFIB
structures:
show ip cef vrf
show ip cef vrf detail
show mpls forwarding vrf vrf-name
Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels command to monitor
MP-BGP VPNv4 labels.
Other commands to monitor MPLS VPN are as follows:
telnet ip-address /vrf vrf-name
ping vrf vrf-name ip-address
trace vrf vrf-name ip-address
5-90
MPLS v2.25-23
Lesson 6
Configuring OSPF as the

Routing Protocol Between PE
and CE Routers
Overview
steps required when you are running Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) between PE and CE
routers, and the issues that may be encountered.
It is important to understand not only what you can configure between provider edge (PE) and
customer edge (CE) routers when you are setting up Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), but also how to accomplish the configuration successfully.
This lesson looks at the configuration parameters that you need to configure an MPLS VPN
PE-CE routing exchange.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure OSPF as the routing
protocol between PE and CE routers. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the features of the OSPF hierarchical model
Describe the propagation of OSPF customer routes across the MPLS VPN backbone
Describe how an MPLS VPN is implemented as an OSPF superbackbone
Configure a PE-CE OSPF routing session
Describe how the OSPF down bit is used to address the route loop issue
Describe how packet forwarding is optimized across the MPLS VPN
Describe how the OSPF tag field is used to address the root loop issue
Describe the features of a sham link
Configure a sham link
What Is the Enhanced OSPF Hierarchical Model?

This topic describes the features of the enhanced OSPF hierarchical model.
OSPF Hierarchical Model
OSPF divides a network into areas, all of them linked through

the backbone (Area 0).
Areas could correspond to individual sites from an MPLS
VPN perspective.
MPLS v2.25-3
The OSPF routing protocol was designed to support hierarchical networks with a central
backbone. The network running OSPF is divided into areas. All areas have to be directly
connected to the backbone area (Area 0). The whole OSPF network (backbone area and any
other connected areas) is called the OSPF domain.
The OSPF areas in the customer network can correspond to individual sites, but these other
options are often encountered:
A single area could span multiple sites (for example, the customer decides to use an area
per region, but the region contains multiple sites).
The backbone area could be extended into individual sites.
Note
5-92
Please refer to the Building Scalable Cisco Internetworks (BSCI) course for background
information on OSPF.
Propagating OSPF Customer Routes

This topic describes the propagation of OSPF customer routes across the MPLS VPN
backbone.
OSPF in an MPLS VPN Routing Model
From the customer perspective, an MPLS VPN-based network

has a BGP backbone with IGP running at customer sites.
Redistribution between IGP and BGP is performed to
propagate customer routes across the MPLS VPN backbone.
MPLS v2.25-4
The MPLS VPN routing model introduces a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) backbone into the
customer network. Isolated copies of the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) run at every site, and
Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) is used to propagate routes between sites.
Redistribution between customer IGPrunning between PE routers and CE routersand the
backbone MP-BGP is performed at every PE router.
5-93
OSPF in an MPLS VPN Routing Model:

OSPF-BGP Redistribution Issue
MPLS v2.25-5
The IGP-BGP redistribution introduced by the MPLS VPN routing model does not fit well into
customer networks running OSPF. When an OSPF customer is migrated to an MPLS VPN
implementation, any route that is redistributed into OSPF from another routing protocol will
now be redistributed as an external OSPF route. The OSPF routes received by one PE router
are propagated across the MPLS backbone and redistributed back into OSPF at another site as
external OSPF routes.
Note
5-94
Remember that link-state advertisement (LSA)1 and LSA 2 never leave the OSPF area.
OSPF in an MPLS VPN Routing Model:

Classic OSPF-BGP Redistribution
OSPF route type is not preserved when the OSPF
route is redistributed into BGP.
All OSPF routes from a site are inserted as
external (type 5 LSA) routes into other sites.
Result: OSPF route summarization and stub areas
are hard to implement.
Conclusion: MPLS VPN must extend the classic
OSPF-BGP routing model.
MPLS v2.25-6
With the traditional OSPF-BGP redistribution, the OSPF route type (internal or external route)
is not preserved when the OSPF route is redistributed into BGP. When that same route is
redistributed back into OSPF, it is always redistributed as an external OSPF route.
This list identifies some of the caveats associated with external OSPF routes:
External routes cannot be summarized.
External routes are flooded across all OSPF areas.
External routes could use a different metric type that is not comparable to OSPF cost.
External routes are not inserted in stub areas or not-so-stubby areas (NSSAs).
Internal routes are always preferred over external routes, regardless of their cost.
Because of all these caveats, migrating an OSPF customer toward an MPLS VPN service might
have a severe impact on the routing of that customer. The MPLS VPN architecture must
therefore extend the classic OSPF-BGP routing model to support transparent customer
migration.
5-95
Implementing MPLS VPNs as an OSPF

Superbackbone
This topic describes how an MPLS VPN is implemented as an OSPF superbackbone.
OSPF Superbackbone:
OSPF-BGP Hierarchy Issue
OSPF Area 0 might extend into individual sites.

The MPLS VPN backbone has to become a superbackbone
for OSPF.
MPLS v2.25-7
The MPLS VPN architecture extends the OSPF architecture by introducing another backbone
above OSPF Area 0, the superbackbone. The OSPF superbackbone is implemented with
MP-BGP between the PE routers but is otherwise transparent to the OSPF routers. The
architecture even allows disjointed OSPF backbone areas (Area 0) at MPLS VPN customer
sites.
5-96
OSPF in MPLS VPNs:

Goals
OSPF between sites shall not use normal OSPF-BGP
redistribution.
OSPF continuity must be provided across the MPLS
VPN backbone:
Internal OSPF routes should remain internal OSPF routes.
External routes should remain external routes.
OSPF metrics should be preserved.
CE routers run standard OSPF software.
MPLS v2.25-8
Here are the goals that have to be met by the OSPF superbackbone:
The superbackbone shall not use standard OSPF-BGP redistribution.
OSPF continuity must be provided between OSPF sites, as follows:
Internal OSPF routes must remain internal OSPF routes.
External OSPF routes must remain external OSPF routes.
Non-OSPF routes redistributed into OSPF must appear as external OSPF routes in
OSPF.
OSPF metrics and metric types (external 1 or external 2) have to be preserved.
The OSPF superbackbone shall be transparent to the CE routers that run standard OSPF
software.
5-97
OSPF Superbackbone:
Route Propagation Example
MPLS v2.25-9
The MPLS VPN superbackbone appears as another layer of hierarchy in the OSPF architecture.
The PE routers that connect regular OSPF areas to the superbackbone therefore appear as OSPF
Area Border Routers (ABRs) in the OSPF areas to which they are attached. In Cisco IOS
implementation, ABRs also appear as Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBRs) in
nonstub areas.
From the perspective of a standard OSPF-speaking CE router, the PE routers insert interarea
routes from other areas into the area in which the CE router is present. The CE routers are not
aware of the superbackbone or of other OSPF areas present beyond the MPLS VPN
superbackbone.
With the OSPF superbackbone architecture, the following describes how the continuity of
OSPF routing is preserved:
The OSPF intra-area routedescribed in the OSPF router LSA or network LSAis
inserted into the OSPF superbackbone by redistributing the OSPF route into MP-BGP.
Route summarization can be performed on the redistribution boundary by the PE router.
The MP-BGP route is propagated to other PE routers and inserted as an OSPF route into
other OSPF areas.
Note
5-98
Because the superbackbone appears as another area behind the PE router (acting as ABR),
the MP-BGP route derived from the intra-area route is always inserted as an interarea route.
The interarea route can then be propagated into other OSPF areas by ABRs within the
customer site.
OSPF Superbackbone:
Rules
OSPF superbackbone behaves exactly like
Area 0 in regular OSPF:
PE routers are advertised as Area Border Routers.
Routes redistributed from BGP into OSPF appear
as interarea summary routes or as external routes
(based on their original LSA type) in other areas.
Routes from Area 0 at one site appear as interarea
routes in Area 0 at another site.
MPLS v2.25-10
Here is a summary of the OSPF superbackbone rules:

PE routers advertise themselves as ABRs. The superbackbone appears as another area to
the CE routers.
Routes redistributed into MP-BGP from OSPF will appear as interarea routes in other
OSPF sites if the original route was an intra-area or interarea route, and as external routes if
the original route was an external route.
Note
As a consequence of the second rule, routes from the backbone area at one site appear as
interarea routes (not as backbone routes) in backbone areas at other sites.
5-99
OSPF Superbackbone:
Implementation
Extended BGP communities are used to propagate
OSPF route type across BGP backbone.
OSPF cost is copied into MED attribute.
MPLS v2.25-11
The OSPF superbackbone is implemented with the help of several BGP attributes.
A new BGP extended community was defined to carry OSPF route type and OSPF area across
the BGP backbone. The format of this community is defined in this table.
BGP Extended Community Format
Field
Number of Bytes
Comments
Community type
The community type is 0x8000.
OSPF area
This field carries the OSPF area from which the route was
redistributed into MP-BGP.
LSA type
This field carries the OSPF LSA type from which the route
was redistributed into MP-BGP.
Option
This field is used for external metric type. The low-order

bit is set for external 2 routes.
Note
The option field in the OSPF route type extended community is not equivalent to the option
field in the OSPF LSA.
As in the standard OSPF-BGP redistribution, the OSPF cost is carried in the multi-exit
discriminator (MED) attribute.
5-100
OSPF Superbackbone:
Implementation (Cont.)
OSPF route type is copied into extended BGP community on

redistribution into BGP.
Egress PE router performs interarea transformation.
MPLS v2.25-12
This figure illustrates the propagation of internal OSPF routes across the MPLS VPN
superbackbone.
Example: OSPF Superbackbone Implementation

The sending PE router redistributes the OSPF route into MP-BGP, copies the OSPF cost into
the MED attribute, and sets the BGP extended community to indicate the LSA type from which
the route was derived.
The receiving PE router redistributes the MP-BGP route back into OSPF and uses the original
LSA type and the MED attribute to generate an interarea summary LSA.
An interarea summary LSA or type 3 LSA is always generated because the receiving PE router
acts as an ABR between the superbackbone and the OSPF area (or areas).
Note
If the OSPF superbackbone connects two or more instances of the same area, the
redistributed route will appear as an interarea summary LSA.
5-101
OSPF Superbackbone:
External Routes
External OSPF routes are propagated in the same way as

internal OSPF routes across the superbackbone.
External metric and route type are preserved.
MPLS v2.25-13
The external OSPF routes are redistributed into MP-BGP in exactly the same way as the
internal OSPF routes. Here is how the process changes slightly on the receiving PE router:
For external routes (type 5 LSA), the LSA is reoriginated, with the receiving PE router
being the ASBR. The external metric type is copied from the BGP extended community,
and the external cost is copied from the MED.
For NSSA external routes (type 7 LSA), the route is announced to the other OSPF sites as a
type 5 LSA external route, because the route has already crossed the area boundary.
5-102
OSPF Superbackbone:
Mixing Routing Protocols
Routes from the MP-BGP backbone that did not originate in

OSPF are still subject to standard redistribution behavior when
inserted into OSPF.
MPLS v2.25-14
The MPLS VPN superbackbone still retains the traditional OSPF-BGP route redistribution
behavior for routes that did not originate in OSPF at other sites (and therefore do not carry the
OSPF extended BGP community). These routes are inserted into the OSPF topology database
as type 5 external routes (or type 7 external routes for NSSA areas), with the default OSPF
metric (not the value of MED).
5-103
Configuring OSPF PE-CE Routing

This topic describes how to configure a PE-CE OSPF routing session.
Configuring PE-CE OSPF Routing

Follow these steps to configure OSPF as the PE-CE
routing protocol:
Configure per-VRF copy of OSPF.
Configure redistribution of MP-BGP into OSPF.
Configure redistribution of OSPF into MP-BGP.
MPLS v2.25-15
To configure OSPF as a PE-CE routing protocol, you need to start a separate OSPF process for
each virtual routing and forwarding instance (VRF) in which you want to run OSPF. The
per-VRF OSPF process is configured in the same way as a standard OSPF process. You can use
all of the OSPF features that are available in Cisco IOS software.
You need to redistribute OSPF routes into BGP and redistribute BGP routes into OSPF if
necessary. Alternatively, you can originate a default route into a per-VRF OSPF process by
using the default-information originate always command in router configuration mode.
MP-BGP propagates more than just OSPF cost across the MPLS VPN backbone. The
propagation of additional OSPF attributes into MP-BGP is automatic and requires no extra
configuration.
5-104
Configuring PE-CE OSPF Routing (Cont.)
This command starts the per-VRF OSPF routing

process.
The total number of routing processes per router is
limited to 32.
This command redistributes MP-BGP routes into

OSPF. The subnets keyword is mandatory for proper
operation.
MPLS v2.25-16
OSPF is the only PE-CE routing protocol that is not fully VPN-aware. A separate OSPF
process is run for every VRF.
Note
Prior to Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)T, Cisco IOS software implementation limits the overall
number of routing protocols in a router to 32. Two routing methods are predefined (static
and connected), and two routing protocols are needed for proper MPLS VPN backbone
operationBGP and backbone IGP. The number of PE-CE routing processes was therefore
limited to 28.
This restriction was removed for MPLS in Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)T.
5-105
router ospf
To configure an OSPF routing process within a VRF, use the router ospf command in global
configuration mode. To terminate an OSPF routing process, use the no form of this command.
router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name
no router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name
This table describes the parameters for the router ospf command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Internally used identification parameter for an OSPF routing

process
This parameter is locally assigned and can be any positive
integer. A unique value is assigned for each OSPF routing
process.
Name of the VRF where the OSPF process will reside
Defaults
No OSPF routing process is defined.
5-106
Configuring PE-CE OSPF Routing (Cont.)
OSPF-BGP route redistribution is configured with the

redistribute command under the proper address-family
command.
Without the OSPF match keyword specified, only
internal OSPF routes are redistributed into OSPF.
MPLS v2.25-17
Use the standard BGP redistribution commands.
5-107
Using the OSPF Down Bit

This topic describes how the OSPF down bit is used to address the route loop issue.
OSPF Down Bit:

Routing Loops between MP-BGP and OSPF
MPLS v2.25-18

OSPF developers took many precautions to avoid routing loops between OSPF areasfor
example, intra-area routes are always preferred over interarea routes. These rules do not work
when the superbackbone is introduced. Consider, for example, the network in the figure, where
the receiving OSPF area has two PE routers attached to it.
This table indicates the process steps that could produce a routing loop.
Process Steps in a Routing Loop
5-108
Step
Action
The sending PE router receives an intra-area OSPF route.
The intra-area OSPF route is redistributed into MP-BGP. An OSPF community is attached
to the route to indicate that it was an OSPF route before being redistributed.
The receiving PE router redistributes the MP-BGP route into OSPF as an internal interarea
summary route.
The summary route is propagated across the OSPF area and received by the other PE
router attached to the same area.
The administrative distance of the OSPF route is better than the administrative distance of
the MP-BGP route; therefore, the PE router selects the OSPF route and redistributes the
route back into the MP-BGP process, potentially resulting in a routing loop.
OSPF Down Bit:

Loop Prevention
An additional bit (down bit) has been introduced in
the options field of the OSPF LSA header.
PE routers set the down bit when redistributing
routes from MP-BGP into OSPF.
PE routers never redistribute OSPF routes with the
down bit set into MP-BGP.
MPLS v2.25-19
These two mechanisms were introduced to prevent route redistribution loops between OSPF
(running between PE and CE routers) and MP-BGP running between PE routers:
One of these mechanisms is the BGP Site of Origin (SOO), which is discussed in the
Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model lesson of the MPLS VPN Technology
module and detailed further in the Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol Between PE
and CE Routers lesson of the MPLS VPN Implementation module.
The other mechanism is the down bit in the options field of the OSPF LSA header.
5-109
OSPF Down Bit:

Loop Prevention (Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-20
The down bit is used between the PE routers to indicate which routes were inserted into the
OSPF topology database from the MPLS VPN superbackbone and thus shall not be
redistributed back in the MPLS VPN superbackbone. The PE router that redistributes the MPBGP route as an OSPF route into the OSPF topology database sets the down bit. The other PE
routers use the down bit to prevent this route from being redistributed back into MP-BGP.

The typical usage of the down bit is shown in the figure. The steps that show how the down bit
prevents routing loops are detailed in this table.
Process to Prevent Routing Loops
5-110
Step
Action
The PE router receives an OSPF route.
The PE router redistributes the OSPF route into MP-BGP. The MP-BGP route is
propagated to the other PE routers.
The MP-BGP route is inserted as an interarea route into an OSPF area by the receiving
PE router. The receiving PE router sets the down bit in the summary (type 3) LSA.
When the other PE routers receive the summary LSA with the down bit set, they do not
redistribute the route back into MP-BGP.
Optimizing Packet Forwarding Across the MPLS

VPN Backbone
This topic describes how packet forwarding is optimized across the MPLS VPN backbone.
Optimizing of Packet Forwarding Across

the MPLS VPN Backbone
MPLS v2.25-21
The OSPF superbackbone implementation with MP-BGP has other implications beyond the
potential for routing loops between OSPF and BGP.
Example: Optimizing of Packet Forwarding

Consider, for example, the network in the figure. This table indicates a typical flow for routing
updates.
Process Steps for Routing Update Flow
Step
Action
The PE router redistributes the OSPF route into MP-BGP. The route is
propagated to other PE routers as an MP-BGP route. The route is also
redistributed into other OSPF areas.
The redistributed OSPF route is propagated across the OSPF area with the
down bit set.
The ingress PE router receives an MP-IBGP route with an administrative

distance of 200 and an OSPF route with an administrative distance of 110.
The OSPF route is preferred over the Multiprotocol Internal Border Gateway
Protocol (MP-IBGP) route, and the data packets flow across customer sites,
not directly over the MPLS VPN backbone.
5-111

the MPLS VPN Backbone (Cont.)
The PE routers ignore OSPF routes with the down
bit set for routing purposes:
These routes originated at other sites; therefore,
the traffic toward them should go via the
MP-BGP backbone.
The routing bit is not set on OSPF routes with the
down bit set:
These routes do not enter the IP routing table,
even when they are selected as the best routes
using the SPF algorithm.
MPLS v2.25-22
To prevent the customer sites from acting as transit parts of the MPLS VPN network, the OSPF
route selection rules in PE routers need to be changed. The PE routers have to ignore all OSPF
routes with the down bit set, because these routes originated in the MP-BGP backbone and the
MP-BGP route should be used as the optimum route toward the destination.
This rule is implemented with the routing bit in the OSPF LSA. For routes with the down bit
set, the routing bit is cleared and these routes never enter the IP routing tableeven if they are
selected as the best routes by the shortest path first (SPF) algorithm.
Note
5-112
The routing bit is the Cisco extension to OSPF and is used only internally in the router. The
routing bit is never propagated between routers in LSA updates.

the MPLS VPN Backbone (Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-23
With the new route OSPF selection rules in place, the packet forwarding in the network shown
in the figure follows the desired path. The process steps are described in this table.
Process Steps for Optimizing Packet Forwarding
Step
Action
The OSPF route is redistributed into MP-BGP by a PE router and

propagated to other PE routers.
The receiving PE routers redistribute the MP-BGP route into OSPF.
Other PE routers might receive the MP-BGP and OSPF routes but will ignore the OSPF route
for routing purposes because it has the down bit set. The data packets will flow across the
MPLS VPN backbone, following only the MP-BGP routes, not the OSPF routes derived from
the MP-BGP routes.
5-113
Using the OSPF Tag Field

This topic describes how the OSPF tag field is used to address the root loop issue.
OSPF Tag Field:

Routing Loops Across OSPF Domains
MPLS v2.25-24
The down bit stops the routing loops between MP-BGP and OSPF. The down bit cannot,
however, stop the routing loops when redistribution between multiple OSPF domains is
involved.
Example: Routing Loops Across OSPF Domains

The figure illustrates this example. The routing loop in this network occurs as part of the steps
outlined in this table.
Process Steps for Routing Loops Across OSPF Domains
5-114
Step
Action
The PE router redistributes a non-OSPF route into an OSPF domain as an external route.
The down bit is set because the route should not be redistributed back into MP-BGP.
A CE router redistributes the OSPF route into another OSPF domain. The down bit is lost
if the CE router does not understand this OSPF extension.
The OSPF route is propagated through the other OSPF domain with the down bit cleared.
A PE router receives the OSPF route; the down bit is not set, so the route is redistributed
back into the MP-BGP backbone, resulting in a routing loop.
OSPF Tag Field:

Operation
The tag field in external OSPF routes is used to detect
cross-domain routing loops.
PE routers set the tag field to the BGP AS number
when redistributing non-OSPF routes from
MP-BGP into OSPF.
The tag field is propagated between OSPF domains
when the external OSPF routes are redistributed
between OSPF domains.
PE routers filter external OSPF routes to MP-BGP with
OSPF tag field AS numbers matching BGP AS
numbers.
MPLS v2.25-25
The routing loops introduced by route redistribution between OSPF domains can be solved with
the help of the tag field, using standard OSPF-BGP redistribution rules.
In standard OSPF-BGP or OSPF-OSPF redistribution, these rules apply:
Whenever a router redistributes a BGP route into OSPF, the tag field in the type 5
(or type 7) LSA is set to the autonomous system (AS) number of the redistributing router.
The tag field from an external OSPF route is propagated across OSPF domains when the
external OSPF route is redistributed into another OSPF domain.
In addition to these standard mechanisms, PE routers filter external OSPF routes based on
their tag field and do not redistribute, into MP-BGP, routes with a tag field equal to the
BGP AS number.
5-115
OSPF Tag Field:

Usage Guidelines
Internal OSPF routes have no tag field.
This technique does not detect cross-domain
routing information loops for routes inserted as
internal OSPF routes by the PE routers.
The tag field can be set manually on the router,
redistributing routes between OSPF domains with
the redistribute ospf source-process-id tag value
command.
Alternatively, only the internal OSPF routes can be
redistributed into MP-BGP on the PE routers.
MPLS v2.25-26
The OSPF tag field is present only in the external OSPF routes (type 5 LSA or type 7 LSA).
This technique, therefore, cannot detect cross-domain loops involving internal OSPF routes.
Here are the two manual methods that you can use to overcome this OSPF limitation:
You can set the tag field manually on the router, redistributing routes between OSPF
domains using the redistribute ospf source-process-id tag value command.
The PE router can be configured to redistribute only internal OSPF routes into MP-BGP.
5-116
OSPF Tag Field:

Routing Loop Prevention
MPLS v2.25-27
The OSPF tag field can be used to prevent routing loops when the redistribution is done
between OSPF domains.
Example: OSPF Tag FieldRouting Loop Prevention

The figure illustrates this example. This table lists the steps in this process.
Process Steps to Prevent Routing Loops
Step
Action
A non-OSPF route is redistributed as an external OSPF route by a PE router.
The tag field is set to the BGP AS number, and the down bit is set. The redistributed route
is propagated across the OSPF domain.
When the route is redistributed into another OSPF domain, the tag field is propagated, but
the down bit is cleared.
The route is propagated across the OSPF domain with the tag set to the BGP AS number.
Another PE router receives the external OSPF route and filters the route based on the tag
field. The route is not redistributed into MP-BGP.
5-117
What Is a Sham Link?

This topic describes the features of a sham link.
Sham Link
OSPF prefers intra-area paths to interarea paths.

The path over a backdoor link will always be selected.
MPLS v2.25-28
Although OSPF PE-CE connections assume that the only path between two client sites is across
the MPLS VPN backbone, backdoor paths between VPN sites may exist.
Example: Sham Link

The figure illustrates the backdoor paths between VPN sites. If these sites belong to the same
OSPF area, the path over a backdoor link will always be selected because OSPF prefers intraarea paths to interarea paths. (PE routers advertise OSPF routes learned over the VPN backbone
as interarea paths.) For this reason, OSPF backdoor links between VPN sites must be taken into
account so that routing is performed based on policy.
Because each site runs OSPF within the same Area 1 configuration, all routing between the
sites follows the intra-area path across the backdoor links, rather than over the MPLS VPN
backbone.
5-118
Sham Link (Cont.)

A logical intra-area link.
Carried by the superbackbone.
A sham link is required only between two VPN
sites that belong to the same area and have a
backdoor link for backup purposes.
OSPF adjacency is established across the
sham link.
LSA flooding occurs across the sham link.
MPLS v2.25-29
If the backdoor links between sites are used only for backup purposes and do not participate in
the VPN service, the default route selection shown in the preceding figure is not acceptable. To
reestablish the desired path selection over the MPLS VPN backbone, you must create an
additional OSPF intra-area (logical) link between ingress and egress VRFs on the relevant PE
routers. This link is called a sham link.
A sham link is required between any two VPN sites that belong to the same OSPF area and
share an OSPF backdoor link. If no backdoor link exists between the sites, no sham link is
required.
5-119
Sham Link (Cont.)

When a sham-link route is preferred by OSPF:
The OSPF route is not redistributed to MP-BGP.
Instead, the router on the other end of the sham
link performs the redistribution.
The forwarding information from the MP-BGP route
is used.
MPLS v2.25-30
A cost is configured with each sham link. This cost is used to decide whether traffic will be sent
over the backdoor path or the sham-link path. When a sham link is configured between PE
routers, the PE routers can populate the VRF routing table with the OSPF routes learned over
the sham link.
Sham Link (Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-31
Because the sham link is seen as an intra-area link between PE routers, an OSPF adjacency is
created and a database exchange (for the particular OSPF process) occurs across the link. The
PE router can then flood LS100
5-120
As between sites from across the MPLS VPN backbone. As a result, the desired intra-area
connectivity is created.
Sham Link (Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-32
Because the OSPF cost of the sham link has been configured as preferred over the backdoor
link, the PE routers will prefer routes learned via the high-bandwidth backbone. The
implementation results in optimum packet flow.
5-121

This topic describes how to configure a sham link.

A separate /32 address space is required in each
PE router for each sham link.
This /32 address space:
Is required so that OSPF packets can be sent over the
VPN backbone to the remote end of the sham link
Must belong to the VRF
Must not be advertised by OSPF
Must be advertised by BGP
MPLS v2.25-33
When you are configuring a sham link, a separate /32 address space is required in each PE
router.
The criteria listed here apply to this /32 address space:
Required so that OSPF packets can be sent over the VPN backbone to the remote end of the
sham link
Must belong to the VRF
Must not be advertised by OSPF
Must be advertised by BGP
5-122
Configuring a Sham Link (Cont.)
This command was introduced in Cisco IOS

Release 12.2(8)T.
The sham link belongs to the specified area.
Sham-link packets sent across the MPLS VPN
backbone will have the specified source and
destination addresses.
When the SPF algorithm is executed, the sham link
will have the specified cost.
MPLS v2.25-34
To configure a sham-link interface on a PE router in an MPLS VPN backbone, use the area
sham-link cost command in global configuration mode. To remove the sham link, use the no
form of this command.
area area-id sham-link source-address destination-address cost number
no area area-id sham-link source-address destination-address cost number
This table describes the parameters for the area sham-link cost command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ID number of the OSPF area assigned to the sham link; valid

values: numeric value or valid IP address
There is no default.
IP address of the source PE router in the format: ip-address

[mask]
IP address of the destination PE router in the format: ip-address

[mask]
OSPF cost to send IP packets over the sham-link interface

Valid values are from 1 to 65535.
Defaults
There is no default behavior or values.
5-123
Command Modes
Use this command in global configuration mode.
Sample Sham-Link Configuration
MPLS v2.25-35
A sham link is used only to affect the OSPF intra-area path selection of the PE and CE routers.
Example: Sample Sham-Link Configuration

The figure illustrates this example. The PE router also uses the information received from MPBGP to set the outgoing label stack of incoming packets and to decide to which egress PE
router to label-switch the packets.
The figure shows a sample MPLS VPN topology in which a sham-link configuration is
necessary. A VPN client has two sites connected by a backdoor link. A sham link has been
configured between the two PE routers.
5-124
Summary
Summary
OSPF areas connect to a common backbone area in a
two-tier hierarchical model.
Basic OSPF across an MPLS VPN includes a BGP
backbone. OSPF is run at each site, while MP-BGP is
used to propagate routes between each site.
A better option implements the MP-BGP backbone as a
new transparent OSPF superbackbone above existing
areas.
OSPF PE-CE routing is implemented as a separate
routing process. (One routing process per VRF.)
MPLS v2.25-36
Summary (Cont.)
The OSPF down bit prevents routing loops.
The OSPF tag field is also used to prevent routing
loops.
Packet forwarding is optimized across the MPLS VPN
using the OSPF routing bit
A sham link is required between any two VPN sites
that belong to the same OSPF area and share an
OSPF backdoor link.
The area sham-link cost command is used to
configure a sham link across a MPLS VPN backbone.
MPLS v2.25-37
5-125
5-126
Lesson 7
Configuring BGP as the

Routing Protocol Between PE
and CE Routers
Overview
steps required when you are using Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) as the routing protocol
between provider edge (PE) and customer edge (CE) routers.
It is important to understand not only what you can configure between PE and CE routers when
you are setting up Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs),
but also how to accomplish the configuration successfully. This lesson looks at the
configuration parameters that you need to configure an MPLS VPN PE-CE routing exchange.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure BGP as the routing
protocol between CE and PE routers. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Configure a per-VRF BGP routing context
Explain the reason for limiting the number of routes in a VRF
Describe how to limit the number of prefixes received from a BGP neighbor
Describe how to limit the total number of VRF routes
Identify the issues encountered when a customer wants to reuse the same AS number on
several sites
Identify the issues encountered when a customer site links two VPNs
Implement SOO for loop prevention
Configuring a Per-VRF BGP Routing Context

This topic describes how to configure a per-virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) BGP routing
context.
Configuring per-VRF BGP Routing Context
Select per-VRF BGP context with the

command.
Configure CE EBGP neighbors in the VRF context,
not in the global BGP configuration.
CE neighbors have to be activated with the
command.
MPLS v2.25-3
Select the VRF routing context with the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command in the
BGP routing processes. All per-VRF routing protocol parameters (network numbers, passive
interfaces, neighbors, filters, and so on) are configured under this address family.
When you configure BGP as the PE-CE routing protocol, you must start with the per-VRF BGP
configuration. Use the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command in router configuration
mode. Enter the address family configuration mode, and then define and activate the BGP
neighbors. You also have to configure redistribution from all other per-VRF routing protocols
into BGP.
Note
You always have to configure a BGP address family for each VRF and configure route
redistribution into BGP for each VRF, even if you do not use BGP as the PE-CE routing
protocol.
Several BGP options have different default values when you configure the per-VRF BGP
routing context, as follows:
BGP synchronization is disabled (default = enabled).
Autosummarization (automatic generation of classful networks out of subnetworks
redistributed into BGP) is disabled (default = enabled). This is because the MPLS VPN
backbone has to propagate customer subnetworks unchanged to facilitate transparent endto-end routing between customer sites. Redistribution of internal BGP routes into Interior
Gateway Protocol (IGP) is enabled (default = disabled).
5-128
Note
The common parameters defined in router configuration mode are inherited by all address
families defined for this routing process and can be overridden for each individual address
family.
address-family ipv4
To enter address family configuration mode for configuring routing sessions (such as BGP) that
use standard IP version 4 (IPv4) address prefixes, use the address-family ipv4 command in
router configuration mode. To disable address family configuration mode, use the no form of
this command.
address-family ipv4 [multicast | unicast | vrf vrf-name]
no address-family ipv4 [multicast | unicast | vrf vrf-name]
This table describes the parameters for the address-family ipv4 command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Specifies IPv4 multicast address prefixes
(Optional) Specifies IPv4 unicast address prefixes
(Optional) Specifies the name of the VRF instance to associate

with subsequent IPv4 address family configuration mode
commands
Defaults
IPv4 address prefixes are not enabled. Unicast address prefixes are the default when IPv4
address prefixes are configured.
Command Modes
Use this command in router configuration mode.
5-129
Configuring per-VRF BGP Routing Context

(Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-4
The PE router can be defined as a BGP neighbor.
Example: Configuring per-VRF BGP Routing Context

The figure shows that BGP is activated on the CE router and that the PE router is defined as a
BGP neighbor. In addition, on the PE router the CE router is defined as a BGP neighbor and
activated under the address-family ipv4 vrf Site_A command.
5-130
What Are the Reasons for Limiting the Number of

Routes in a VRF?
This topic explains the reasons for limiting the number of routes in a VRF.
Limiting the Number of Routes in a VRF

SPs offering MPLS VPN services are at risk of
denial-of-service attacks similar to those aimed at
SPs offering BGP connectivity:
Any customer can generate any number of routes, using
resources in the PE routers.
Therefore, resources used by a single customer

have to be limited.
Cisco IOS software offers two solutions:
It can limit the number of routes received from a BGP
neighbor.
It can limit the total number of routes in a VRF.
MPLS v2.25-5
MPLS VPN architecture achieves a tight coupling between the customer and the service
provider network, resulting in a number of advantages. The tight coupling might also result in a
few disadvantages, because the service provider (SP) network is exposed to design and
configuration errors in customer networks, and a number of new denial-of-service attacks based
on routing protocol behavior.
To limit the effect of configuration errors and malicious user behavior, Cisco IOS software
offers these two features that limit the number of routes and resource consumption that a VPN
user can take advantage of at a PE router:
The BGP maximum-prefix feature limits the number of routes that an individual BGP peer
can send.
The VRF route limit restricts the total number of routes in a VRF regardless of whether
those routes are received from CE routers or from other PE routers via Multiprotocol
Internal Border Gateway Protocol (MP-IBGP).
5-131
Limiting the Number of Prefixes Received from a

BGP Neighbor
This topic describes how to limit the number of prefixes received from a BGP neighbor.
Limiting the Number of Prefixes Received

from a BGP Neighbor
Controls how many prefixes can be received from a

neighbor
Optional threshold parameter specifies the
percentage where a warning message is logged
(default is 75 percent)
Optional warning-only keyword specifies the
action on exceeding the maximum number
(default is to drop peering)
MPLS v2.25-6
neighbor maximum-prefix
To control how many prefixes can be received from a neighbor, use the neighbor maximumprefix command in router configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this
command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]
[warning-only]
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold]
[warning-only]
5-132
This table describes the parameters for the neighbor maximum-prefix command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Name of a BGP peer group
Maximum number of prefixes allowed from this neighbor
(Optional) Integer identifying at what percentage of the maximum

the router starts to generate a warning message
The range is 1 to 100; the default is 75 (percent).
(Optional) Allows the router to generate a log message when the

maximum is exceeded instead of terminating the peering.
Defaults
Default is disabled; there is no limit on the number of prefixes.
5-133

This topic describes how to limit VRF routes.

The VRF maximum routes limit command limits the
number of routes that are imported into a VRF:
Routes coming from CE routers
Routes coming from other PE routers
(imported routes)
The route limit is configured for each VRF.

If the number of routes exceeds the route limit:
A syslog message is generated.
The Cisco IOS software can be configured to reject routes
(optional).
MPLS v2.25-7
The VRF route limit, contrary to the BGP maximum-prefix limit, limits the overall number of
routes in a VRF regardless of their origin. Similar to the BGP maximum-prefix feature, the
network operator might be warned via a syslog message when the number of routes exceeds a
certain threshold. Additionally, you can configure Cisco IOS software to ignore new VRF
routes when the total number of routes exceeds the maximum configured limit.
The route limit is configured for each individual VRF, providing maximum design and
configuration flexibility.
Note
5-134
The per-VRF limit could be used to implement add-on MPLS VPN services. A user desiring
a higher level of service might be willing to pay to be able to insert more VPN routes into the
network.

(Cont.)
This command configures the maximum number

of routes accepted into a VRF:
The limit parameter is the route limit for the VRF.
The warn-threshold parameter is the percentage value over
which a warning message is sent to syslog.
The warn-only option creates a syslog error message
when the maximum number of routes exceeds the
threshold.
Syslog messages generated by this command are

rate-limited.
MPLS v2.25-8
maximum routes
To limit the maximum number of routes in a VRF to prevent a PE router from importing too
many routes, use the maximum routes command in VRF configuration submode. To remove
the limit on the maximum number of routes allowed, use the no form of this command.
maximum routes limit {warn-threshold | warn-only}
no maximum routes
This table describes the parameters for the maximum routes command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of routes allowed

in a VRF. You may select from 1 to 4,294,967,295 routes to be
allowed in a VRF.
This parameter rejects routes when the threshold limit is reached.

The threshold limit is a percentage of the limit specified, from 1 to
100.
This parameter issues a syslog error message when the

maximum number of routes allowed for a VRF exceeds the
threshold. However, additional routes are still allowed.
Defaults
5-135

(Cont.)
MPLS v2.25-9
The network designer can decide to limit the number of routes in a VRF.
Example: Limiting the Total Number of VRF Routes

In this figure, the network designer has decided to limit the number of routes in a VRF to 4,
with the warning threshold being set at 75 percent (or 3 routes).
When the first two routes are received and inserted into the VRF, the router accepts them.
When the third route is received, a warning message is generated, and the message is repeated
with the insertion of the fourth route.
Note
The syslog messages are rate-limited to prevent indirect denial-of-service attacks on the
network management station.
When the PE router receives the fifth route, the maximum route limit is exceeded and the route
is ignored. The network operator is notified through another syslog message.
5-136
Identifying AS-Override Issues

This topic identifies the issues encountered when a customer wants to reuse the same
autonomous system (AS) number on several sites.
AS-Override:
The Issue
The customer wants to reuse the same AS number on several

sites:
CE-BGP-A1 announces network 10.1.0.0/16 to PE-Site-X.
The prefix announced by CE-BGP-A1 is propagated to PE-Site-Y as an
internal route through MP-BGP.
PE-Site-Y prepends AS 65115 to the AS path and propagates the prefix to
CE-BGP-A2.
CE-BGP-A2 drops the update because AS 65213 is already in the AS path.
MPLS v2.25-10
Here are the two ways that an MPLS VPN customer can deploy BGP as the routing protocol
between PE and CE routers:
If the customer has used any other routing protocol in the traditional overlay VPN network
before, there are no limitations on the numbering of the customer autonomous systems.
Every site can be a separate AS.
If the customer has used BGP as the routing protocol before, there is a good chance that all
the sites (or a subset of the sites) are using the same AS number.
BGP loop prevention rules disallow discontiguous autonomous systems. Two customer sites
with the identical AS number cannot be linked by another AS. If such a setup happens (as in
this example), the routing updates from one site are dropped when the other site receives them.
There is no connectivity between the sites.
5-137
AS-Override:
Implementation
New AS path update procedures have been
implemented to reuse the same AS number on all
VPN sites.
The procedures allow the use of private and public
AS numbers.
The same AS number may be used for all sites.
MPLS v2.25-11
When you are migrating customers from traditional overlay VPNs to MPLS VPNs, it is not
uncommon to encounter a customer topology that requires the same customer AS number to be
used at more than one site. This requirement can cause issues with the loop prevention rules of
BGP. However, the AS path update procedure in BGP has been modified to address this issue.
The new AS path update procedure supports the use of one AS number at many sites (even
between several overlapping VPNs) and does not rely on a distinction between private and
public AS numbers.
5-138
AS-Override:
Implementation (Cont.)
With AS-override configured, the AS path update procedure
on the PE router is as follows:
If the first AS number in the AS path is equal to the
neighboring AS, it is replaced with the provider AS
number.
If the first AS number has multiple occurrences (because
of AS path prepend), all occurrences are replaced with the
provider AS number.
After this operation, the provider AS number is prepended
to the AS path.
MPLS v2.25-12
The modified AS path update procedure is called AS-override, which is described here:
The procedure is used only if the first AS number in the AS path is equal to the AS number
of the receiving BGP router.
In this case, all leading occurrences of the AS number of the receiving BGP router are
replaced with the AS number of the sending BGP router. Occurrences farther down the AS
path of the AS number of the receiving router are not replaced because they indicate a real
routing information loop.
An extra copy of the sending router AS number is prepended to the AS path. The standard
AS number prepending procedure occurs on every External Border Gateway Protocol
(EBGP) update.
5-139
AS-Override:
Command
This command configures the AS-override AS path

update procedure for the specified neighbor.
AS-override is configured for CE EBGP neighbors
in the VRF address family of the BGP process.
MPLS v2.25-13
neighbor as-override
To configure a PE router to override a site AS number with a provider AS number, use the
neighbor as-override command in router configuration mode. To remove VPN version 4

(VPNv4) prefixes from a specified router, use the no form of this command.
neighbor ip-address as-override
no neighbor ip-address as-override
This table describes the parameters for the neighbor as-override command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the router IP address to override with the AS number

provided
Defaults
5-140
Example: AS-Override
In this figure, customer sites A and B use BGP to communicate with the MPLS VPN backbone.
Both sites use AS 213. Site B would drop the update sent by site A without the AS-override
mechanism.
AS-Override:
Example
PE-Site-Y replaces AS 65213 with AS 65115 in the AS path, prepends another

copy of AS 65115 to the AS path, and propagates the prefix.
MPLS v2.25-14
The AS-override mechanism, configured on the PE-Site-Y router, replaces the customer AS
number (65213) with the provider AS number (65115) before sending the update to the
customer site. An extra copy of the provider AS number is prepended to the AS path during the
standard EBGP update process.
5-141
Example: AS-Path Prepending

In this figure, the customer is using AS prepending to influence BGP path selection within the
MPLS VPN backbone.
AS-Override:
AS-Path Prepending
PE-Site-Y replaces all occurrences of AS 65213 with AS 65115 in the AS

path, prepends another copy of AS 65115 to the AS path, and propagates
the prefix.
MPLS v2.25-15
The PE router has to send a route with an AS path containing multiple copies of the customer
AS number to the CE router. In this case, all the leading copies of the customer AS number are
replaced with the provider AS number (resulting in two occurrences of the provider AS number
in the example), and the third occurrence of the provider AS number is prepended to the BGP
update before it is sent to the CE router.
5-142
Identifying Allowas-in Issues

This topic identifies the issues encountered when a customer site links two VPNs.
Allowas-in:
The Issue
Customer site links two VPNs

Not a usual setup (traffic between VPNs should not flow over
the customer site)
Sometimes used for enhanced security
MPLS v2.25-16
In some security-conscious implementations, customer VPNs are linked by a customer router

that performs security functions, such as access filtering or access logging.
Note
This setup is not usual because it deviates from the basic goal of MPLS VPNreplacing the
hub-and-spoke routing of a traditional overlay VPN with optimum any-to-any routing.
5-143
Allowas-in:
The Issue (Cont.)
VPN perspective: VPN-A is connected to VPN-B via CE-AB.

Physical topology: The CE-AB router is dual-connected to the PE routers.
MPLS VPN perspective: The CE-AB router has two links into the Pnetwork.
BGP perspective shows issue: The CE-AB router has two connections to
AS 65115.
MPLS v2.25-17
The setup in which a customer router links two VPNs in an MPLS VPN backbone can be
viewed from several different perspectives, as follows:
From the VPN perspective, a CE router links two VPNs.
From the physical perspective, the CE router is connected through two separate links
(physical or logical interface) to one or two PE routers.
In MPLS VPN terms, the CE router has two links into the provider network (P-network).
There is no problem with the proposed customer setup if the setup is analyzed through these
perspectives. All of the potential setups represent valid connectivity or routing options.
The issue appears when the setup is analyzed through the BGP perspective:
The CE (CE-AB) router has to propagate routes between two PE routers, which are both in
the same AS.
5-144
Allowas-in:
The Issue (Cont.)
PE-1 announces network 10.1.0.0/16 to CE-AB.

CE-AB prepends its AS number to the AS path and propagates
the prefix to PE-2.
PE-2 drops the update because its AS number is already in the AS path.
AS-override is needed on CE-AB, which may require a Cisco IOS software
upgrade on the CE router.
MPLS v2.25-18
The BGP loop prevention rules prevent a PE router from accepting the routing update sent by
the CE router if that routing update already contains the AS number of the MPLS VPN
backbone (which it will if the CE router is propagating routes between two VPNs).
One solution to this BGP routing problem is that AS-override has to be used on the CE router.
This solution requires a recent version of Cisco IOS software (Cisco IOS Release 12.0T or
later) on the CE router. The solution is not enforceable in every customer situation.
5-145
Example: Using Allowas-in to Support Customer Site Linking

Two VPNs
This example discusses using the allowas-in command on the PE router to support a customer
site linking two VPNs. This example is similar to the situation in which two customer sites use
the same AS number.
Allowas-in:
Implementation
The allowas-in BGP option disables the AS path check
on the PE router:
The number of occurrences of the PE router AS number is
limited to suppress real routing loops.
The limit has to be configured.
The PE router will reject the update only if its AS number
appears in the AS path more often than the configured limit.
MPLS v2.25-19
Networks may need to support topologies in which a CE router with no AS-override support
links two VPNs. A specific need exists to modify the BGP loop prevention mechanism on the
PE routers. The allowas-in feature supports situations in which the PE router receives routes
with its own AS number already in the AS path.
With this feature configured on a BGP neighbor of the PE router, the PE router would not drop
incoming BGP updates with its AS number in the AS path if the updates are received from that
neighbor. To prevent real BGP routing information loops, the number of occurrences of the
MPLS VPN backbone AS number can be limited so that incoming updates that exceed the limit
can be dropped.
5-146
Allowas-in:
Command
This command disables the traditional BGP AS

path check.
An incoming update is rejected only if the AS
number of the PE router appears in the AS path
more often than the configured limit.
MPLS v2.25-20
neighbor allowas-in
To configure PE routers to allow readvertisement of all prefixes containing duplicate AS
numbers, use the neighbor allowas-in command in router configuration mode. To disable
readvertisement of the AS number of a PE router, use the no form of this command.
neighbor allowas-in number
no neighbor allowas-in number
This table describes the parameters for the neighbor allowas-in command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
This parameter specifies the number of times to allow

advertisement of the AS number of a PE router. Valid values are
from 1 to 10 times.
Defaults
5-147

This topic describes how to implement Site of Origin (SOO) for loop prevention.
AS path-based BGP loop prevention is bypassed with the

AS-override and allowas-in features.
MPLS v2.25-21
Most aspects of BGP loop prevention are bypassed when either the AS-override feature or the
allowas-in feature is used. Routing information loops can still be detected by manually
counting occurrences of an AS number in the AS path in an end-to-end BGP routing scenario
then ensuring that the number field in the neighbor allowas-in command is set low enough to
prevent loops.
The ability to still detect loops can present a particular problem when BGP is mixed with other
PE-CE routing protocols. The SOO extended BGP community can be used as an additional
loop prevention mechanism in these scenarios.
Note
5-148
SOO and any other loop prevention mechanisms are needed only for customer networks
with multihomed sites. Loops can never occur in customer networks that have only stub
sites.

(Cont.)
The SOO attribute (extended BGP community) can
be used to prevent loops in these scenarios.
The SOO attribute is needed only for multihomed
sites.
When EBGP is run between PE and CE routers, the
SOO attribute is configured through a route-map
command.
For other routing protocols, the SOO attribute can
be applied to routes learned through a particular
VRF interface during the redistribution into BGP.
MPLS v2.25-22
Here are the two ways to set the SOO attribute on a BGP route:
For routes received from BGP-speaking CE routers, the SOO attribute is configured by the
incoming route map on the PE router.
For all other routes, a route map setting the SOO attribute is applied to the incoming
interface. The SOO attribute, as set by the route map, is attached to the BGP route when an
IGP route received through that interface is redistributed into BGP.
Outgoing filters based on the SOO attribute also depend on the routing protocol used, as
described here:
Where EBGP is used as the PE-CE routing protocol, outbound route maps can be used on
the PE router to deny routes matching particular SOO values.
For all other routing protocols, filtering is performed on the basis of the SOO route map
configured on the outgoing interface before the update is sent across that interface to the
CE router.
5-149

(Cont.)
Inbound EBGP Update
Creates a route map that sets the SOO attribute
Applies an inbound route map to the CE EBGP

neighbor
MPLS v2.25-23
set extcommunity
To set the extended communities attribute, use the set extcommunity command in route map
no set extcommunity
set extcommunity extcommunity-type community-number [additive]
no set extcommunity extcommunity-type community-number [additive]
5-150
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the route target (RT) extended community attribute
Specifies the SOO extended community attribute
Specifies the value to be set

The value can be one of these combinations:
autonomous-system-number:network-number
ip-address:network-number
(Optional) Adds space after the closing parenthesis; adds the

extended community to the already existing extended
communities
Defaults
neighbor route-map
To apply a route map to incoming or outgoing routes, use the neighbor route-map command
in address family or router configuration mode. To remove a route map, use the no form of this
command.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out}
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out}
This table describes the parameters for the neighbor route-map command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Name of a BGP or Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (MPBGP) peer group
Name of a route map
Applies route map to incoming routes
Applies route map to outgoing routes
5-151

(Cont.)
Other Inbound Routing Updates
Applies a route map that sets the SOO extended

community attribute to inbound routing updates
received from this interface
MPLS v2.25-24
ip vrf sitemap
To set the SOO extended community attribute, use the ip vrf sitemap command in interface
ip vrf sitemap route-map-name
no ip vrf sitemap route-map-name
This table describes the parameters for the ip vrf sitemap command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Sets the name of the route map to be used
Defaults
No route map is used to set the SOO extended community attribute.
Note
5-152
An example configuring SOO for EIGRP PE-CE loop prevention was discussed in the
Configuring EIGRP PE-CE Routing topic of the Configuring Small-Scale Routing Protocols
Between PE and CE Routers lesson.

(Cont.)
Defines a route map that discards routes with the

desired SOO value
Applies the route map to outbound updates sent to

the EBGP CE neighbor
MPLS v2.25-25
In this example, a route map matching a specific SOO value was defined using the ip
extcommunity-list command to establish a SOO filter. The route-map command was used to
define the route map based on the filter.
The newly defined route map is then applied to a BGP neighbor (CE router) on the PE router.
5-153
Summary
Summary
Use the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command in
the BGP routing process to configure a per-VRF
BGP routing context.
SPs offering MPLS VPN services are at risk of
denial-of-service attacks. Limiting VRF tables is
one method to prevent such attacks.
Use the neighbor maximum-prefix command to limit
the number of prefixes received from a BGP
neighbor.
Use the maximum routes command to limit the total
number of VRF routes.
MPLS v2.25-26
Summary (Cont.)
BGP loop detection prevents customers from
reusing their AS number. The neighbor ip-address
as-overide command prevents this issue by
replacing the customer AS number with the ISP AS
number.
By default, a customer site cannot link two VPN
sites of the same AS number because of BGP loop
detection. The neighbor allowas-in number command
disables the BGP path check and permits routing
updates.
The SOO extended BGP community is used as a
loop prevention mechanism for multihomed
customer sites.
5-154
MPLS v2.25-27
Lesson 8
Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs

Overview
This lesson explains the preliminary steps for troubleshooting a Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN). The lesson also looks at routing information flow
troubleshooting and VPN data flow troubleshooting.
It is important to be able to determine what steps you should take when trying to solve a
problem with your MPLS VPN network. This lesson looks at how to go about correcting MPLS
VPN network problems.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to troubleshoot MPLS VPN
Identify the preliminary steps in MPLS VPN troubleshooting
Identify the issues that you should consider when verifying the routing information flow in
an MPLS VPN
Describe the process used to validate CE-to-PE routing information flow
Describe the process used to validate PE-to-PE routing information flow
Describe the process used to validate PE-to-CE routing information flow
Identify the issues that you should consider when verifying the data flow in an MPLS VPN
Describe how to validate CEF status
Describe how to validate the end-to-end LSP
Describe how to validate the LFIB status
Identifying Preliminary Steps in MPLS VPN

Troubleshooting
This topic identifies the preliminary steps in MPLS VPN troubleshooting.
Preliminary Steps in MPLS VPN

Troubleshooting
Perform basic MPLS troubleshooting:
Is CEF enabled?
Are labels for IGP routes generated and propagated?
Are large labeled packets propagated across the
MPLS backbone (maximum transmission unit
issues)?
MPLS v2.25-3
Before you start in-depth MPLS VPN troubleshooting, you should ask the following standard
MPLS troubleshooting questions:
Is Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) enabled on all routers in the transit path between the
provider edge (PE) routers?
Are labels for Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) next hops generated and propagated?
Are there any maximum transmission unit (MTU) issues in the transit path (for example,
LAN switches not supporting a jumbo Ethernet frame)?
MPLS VPN troubleshooting consists of these two major steps:
Verifying the routing information flow using the checks outlined in the figure
Verifying the data flow, or packet forwarding
5-156

This topic identifies the issues that you should consider when verifying the routing information
flow in an MPLS VPN.

Verify the routing information flow:
Are CE routes received by a PE router?
Are routes redistributed into MP-BGP with proper extended
communities?
Are VPNv4 routes propagated to other PE routers?
Is the BGP route selection process working correctly?
Are VPNv4 routes inserted into VRFs on other PE routers?
Are VPNv4 routes redistributed from BGP into the
PE-CE routing protocol?
Are IPv4 routes propagated to other CE routers?
MPLS v2.25-4
Verification of the routing information flow should be done systematically, starting at the
ingress customer edge (CE) router and moving to the egress CE router.
5-157
Validating CE-to-PE Routing Information Flow

This topic describes the process that is used to validate CE-to-PE routing information flow.
Validating CE-to-PE Routing

Information Flow
Are CE routes received by the PE router?

Verify with the show ip route vrf vrf-name command on PE-1.
Perform traditional routing protocol troubleshooting if needed.
MPLS v2.25-5
Troubleshooting routing information flow requires the verification of end-to-end routing

information propagation between CE routers. The first step is to check the routing information
exchange from CE routers to PE routers. Use the show ip route vrf vrf-name command to
verify that the PE router receives customer routes from the CE router. Use traditional routing
protocol troubleshooting if needed. BGP-specific troubleshooting is described in the individual
modules of the Configuring BGP on Cisco Routers (BGP) course.
5-158
Validating PE-to-PE Routing Information Flow

This topic describes the process that is used to validate PE-to-PE routing information flow.
Validating PE-to-PE Routing

Information Flow
Are routes redistributed into MP-BGP with proper

extended communities?
Verify with the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name ip-prefix command
on PE-1.
Troubleshoot with debug ip bgp commands.
MPLS v2.25-6
The CE routes received by the PE router need to be redistributed into Multiprotocol BGP
(MP-BGP); otherwise, the routes will not get propagated to other PE routers. Common
configuration mistakes in this step include the following:
Failing to configure redistribution between the PE-CE routing protocol and the per-virtual
routing and forwarding (VRF) routing context of the BGP
Using a route map on redistribution that filters CE routes
Proper redistribution of CE routes into a per-VRF instance of BGP can be verified with the
show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name command. The route distinguisher (RD) prepended to the
IPv4 prefix and the route targets (RTs) attached to the CE route can be verified with the show
ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name ip-prefix command.
5-159

Information Flow (Cont.)
Are VPNv4 routes propagated to other PE routers?

Verify with the show ip bgp vpnv4 all ip-prefix/length command.
Troubleshoot PE-to-PE connectivity with traditional BGP
troubleshooting tools.
MPLS v2.25-7
The CE routes redistributed into MP-BGP need to be propagated to other PE routers. Verify
proper route propagation with the show ip bgp vpnv4 all ip-prefix command on the remote PE
router.
Note
Routes sent by the originating PE router might not be received by a remote PE router
because of automatic RT-based filters installed on the remote PE router.
Automatic route filters are based on RTs. Verify that the RTs attached to the CE route in the
originating PE router match at least one of the RTs configured as import RTs in the VRF on the
receiving PE router.
5-160

Is the BGP route selection process working correctly

on PE-2?
Verify with the
vrf-name ip-prefix command.
Change local preference or weight settings if needed.

Do not change MED if you are using IGP-BGP redistribution
on PE-2.
MPLS v2.25-8
In complex environments with multihomed customer sites, the BGP route selection process
might affect proper MPLS VPN operation. Use standard BGP route selection tools (weights or
local preference) to influence BGP route selection. The multi-exit discriminator (MED)
attribute should not be changed inside the MPLS VPN backbone if you plan to use two-way
route redistribution between the PE-CE routing protocol and BGP.
Refer to the BGP course for more information on BGP weights, local preference, and the MED
attribute.
5-161

Are VPNv4 routes inserted into VRFs on PE-2?

Verify with the show ip route vrf command.
Troubleshoot with the show ip bgp ip-prefix and show ip vrf detail
command.
Perform additional BGP troubleshooting if needed.
MPLS v2.25-9
The VPN version 4 (VPNv4) routes received by the PE router have to be inserted into the
proper VRF. This insertion can be verified with the show ip route vrf command. Common
configuration mistakes in this step include the following:
The wrong import RTs are configured in the VRF.
The route map configured as the import route map is rejecting the VPNv4 routes. Refer to
the Using Advanced VRF Import and Export Features lesson in the Complex MPLS
VPNs module for more information on import route maps.
The validity of the import RTs can be verified with the show ip bgp vpnv4 all ip-prefix
command, which displays the RTs attached to a VPNv4 route. You can also verify the validity
of the import RTs with the show ip vrf detail command, which lists the import RTs for a VRF.
At least one RT attached to the VPNv4 route needs to match at least one RT in the VRF.
Note
5-162
Be patient when troubleshooting this step. The import of VPNv4 routes into VRFs is not
immediate and can take more than a minute in the worst circumstances.

Are VPNv4 routes redistributed from BGP into the

PE-CE routing protocol?
Verify redistribution configurationis the IGP metric specified?
Perform traditional routing protocol troubleshooting.
MPLS v2.25-10
Finally, the BGP routes received via MP-BGP and inserted into the VRF need to be
redistributed into the PE-CE routing protocol. A number of common redistribution mistakes
can occur here, starting with missing redistribution metrics.
Refer to the Building Scalable Cisco Internetworks (BSCI) course for more information on
route redistribution troubleshooting.
5-163
Validating PE-to-CE Routing Information Flow

This topic describes the process used to validate PE-to-CE routing information flow.
Validating PE-to-CE Routing

Information Flow
Are VPNv4 routes propagated to other CE routers?

Verify with the show ip route command on CE-Spoke.
Alternatively, do CE-Spokes have a default route toward PE-2?
Perform traditional routing protocol troubleshooting if needed.
MPLS v2.25-11
Last but not least, the routes redistributed into the PE-CE routing protocol have to be
propagated to CE routers. You may also configure the CE routers with a default route toward
the PE routers. Use standard routing protocol troubleshooting techniques in this step.
Note
5-164
When using a default route on the CE routers, verify that the CE routers use classless
routing configured with the ip classless command.
Identifying the Issues When Verifying the Data

Flow
This topic identifies the issues that you should consider when verifying the data flow in an
MPLS VPN.
Verifying the Data Flow

Verify proper data flow:
Is CEF enabled on the ingress PE router interface?
Is the CEF entry correct on the ingress PE router?
Is there an end-to-end label switched path tunnel
(LSP tunnel) between PE routers?
Is the LFIB entry on the egress PE router correct?
MPLS v2.25-12
After you have verified proper route exchange, start MPLS VPN data flow troubleshooting
using the checks listed in the next figures.
5-165

This topic describes how to validate CEF status.
Is CEF enabled on the ingress PE router interface?

Verify with the show cef interface command.
MPLS VPN needs CEF enabled on the ingress PE router
interface for proper operation.
CEF might become disabled because of additional features
deployed on the interface.
MPLS v2.25-13
One of the most common configuration mistakes related to data flow is the failure to enable
CEF on the ingress PE router interface. The presence of CEF can be verified with the show cef
interface command. CEF is the only switching method that can perform per-VRF lookup and
thus support MPLS VPN architecture.
Assuming that CEF is enabled on the router, here are the three common CEF configuration
mistakes:
CEF is manually disabled on an interface.
The interface is using an encapsulation method that is not supported by CEF, such as X.25
or Multilink PPP (MLP) with interleaving.
Another feature has been configured on the interface that disables CEF (for example, IP
precedence accounting).
5-166
Validating CEF Status:

show cef interface

MPLS v2.25-14
show cef interface

To display detailed CEF information for all interfaces, use the show cef interface command in
EXEC mode.
show cef interface type number [statistics][detail].
This table describes the parameters for the show cef interface command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Displays interface type and number for CEF information
(Optional) Displays switching statistics for the line card
(Optional) Displays detailed CEF information for the specified

interface type and number
Usage Guidelines
This command is available on routers that have route processor (RP) cards and line cards.
The detail keyword displays more CEF information for the specified interface. You can use
this command to show the CEF state on an individual interface.
5-167
This table describes the fields shown in the output.

Syntax Description
5-168
Parameter
Description
Indicates status of the interface
Internet address of the interface
Indicates how packet forwarding is configured
Status of load balancing in use on the interface (enabled

or disabled)
Indicates status of IP unicast Reverse Path Forwarding

(RPF) check on the interface
Number of inbound access lists defined for the interface
Number of outbound access lists defined for the interface
Indicates the status of IP policy routing on the interface
Interface type and number configured
Indicates switching mode in use; used for troubleshooting
Indicates the switching path used
Slot number
Indicates the number of packets in the transmit queue
Indicates the maximum number of packets allowed in the

transmit queue
Value of the MTU size set on the interface
Is the CEF entry correct on the ingress PE router?

Display the CEF entry with the
show ip cef vrf vrf-name ip-prefix/length detail command.
Verify the label stack in the CEF entry.
MPLS v2.25-15
If CEF switching is enabled on the ingress interface, you can verify the validity of the CEF
entry and the associated label stack with the show ip cef vrf vrf-name ip-prefix detail
command. The top label in the stack should correspond to the BGP next-hop label as displayed
by the show mpls forwarding-table command on the ingress router. The second label in the
stack should correspond to the label allocated by the egress router. You can verify this by using
the show mpls forwarding-table command on the egress router.
5-169
Validating the End-to-End LSP

This topic describes how to validate the end-to-end label-switched path (LSP).
Validating the End-to-End Label

Switched Path
Is there an end-to-end LSP tunnel between PE routers?

Check summarization issuesBGP next hop should be reachable as
host route.
Quick checkif TTL propagation is disabled, the trace from PE-2 to
PE-1 should contain only one hop.
If needed, check LFIB values hop by hop.
Check for MTU issues on the pathMPLS VPN requires a larger label
header than pure MPLS.
MPLS v2.25-16
If CEF is enabled on the ingress interface and the CEF entry contains proper labels, the data
flow problem might lie inside the MPLS core. Two common mistakes include summarization
of BGP next hops inside the core Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) and maximum transmission
unit (MTU) issues.
The quickest way to diagnose summarization problems is to disable IP time-to-live (TTL)
propagation into the MPLS label header using the no mpls ip ttl-propagate configuration
command on the P and PE routers. The traceroute command from the ingress PE router toward
the BGP next hop should display no intermediate hops when TTL propagation is disabled. If
intermediate hops are displayed, the LSP tunnel between PE routers is broken at those hops and
the VPN traffic cannot flow.
5-170

This topic describes how to validate the label forwarding information base (LFIB) status.
Is the LFIB entry on the egress PE router correct?

Find out the second label in the label stack on PE-2 with the
show ip cef vrf vrf-name ip-prefix detail command.
Verify correctness of LFIB entry on PE-1 with the
show mpls forwarding vrf vrf-name value detail command.
MPLS v2.25-17
As a last troubleshooting measure (usually not needed), you can verify the contents of the LFIB
on the egress PE router and compare them with the second label in the label stack on the
ingress PE router. A mismatch indicates an internal Cisco IOS software error that you will need
to report to the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
5-171
Summary
Summary
Divide MPLS troubleshooting into two main steps:
Verify routing information flow.
Verify proper data flow.
Validate CE-to-PE routing information flow by checking
the routing information exchange from CE routers to
PE routers.
Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name ip-prefix
command to validate PE-to-PE routing information flow.
Verify that routes are redistributed back into the CE
routing protocol on the PE route and propagated
toward CE routers to validate PE-to-CE routing
information flow.
MPLS v2.25-18
Summary (Cont.)
Verify data flow systematically, starting at the ingress
CE router and moving to the egress CE router.
Verify that CEF and LSP switching are operational.
Use the show cef interface command to verify the CEF
status.
When validating the end-to-end LSP, verify that there
is an end-to-end LSP tunnel between PE routers.
To validate the LFIB status, review the contents of the
LFIB on the egress PE router in comparison to the
second label in the label stack on the ingress PE
router.
5-172
MPLS v2.25-19
Module Summary
Module Summary
The VRF table is a virtual routing and forwarding
instance separating sites with the same connectivity
requirements.
Configuring VRF tables requires defining the VRF
name, RD, and import and export RTs.
MP-BGP configuration must define the neighbors,
define the address family, for VPNv4 routing, and
finally activate the neighbors.
RIPv2 and EIGRP routing for PE to CE requires use
of the address-family ipv4 command to define the
routing context. Redistribution is also required
between IGP and BGP.
MPLS v2.25-1
Module Summary (Cont.)

Monitoring MPLS VPN operations includes monitoring
MP-BGP neighbor status, VRF routing process, and
CEF and LFIB status.
The MPLS VPN routing model implements MP-BGP as
the superbackbone for OSPF. PE-to-CE OSPF routing is
defined as a new routing process via the VRF name.
The MPLS VPN routing model implements BGP routing
between PE and CE as BGP instances using the
command address-family ipv4.
MPLS VPN troubleshooting uses a systematic process
starting at the ingress PE router and moving to the
egress PE router using a variety of show commands.
MPLS v2.25-2
5-173
An MPLS VPN implementation involves virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) tables, the
interaction between customer-to-provider routing protocols, and Multiprotocol Border Gateway
Protocol (MP-BGP) in the service provider backbone.
References
Cisco Systems, Inc. The BGP Filtering and Route Selection module in the Configuring
BGP on Cisco Routers (BGP) course.
Cisco Systems, Inc. The Advanced BGP Configuration module in the BGP course.
Cisco Systems, Inc. Building Scalable Cisco Internetworks (BSCI) course.
5-174
Module Self-Check
Q1)
In an MPLS VPN implementation, what is a VRF? (Source: Using MPLS VPN

Mechanisms of Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q2)
the routing and forwarding instance for all sites belonging to a single customer
the routing and forwarding instance for all sites belonging to a single customer
location
the routing and forwarding instance for all sites using a common routing
protocol
the routing and forwarding instance for a set of sites with identical connectivity
requirements
Why are VRFs used to establish separate routing protocol contexts? (Source: Using
MPLS VPN Mechanisms of Cisco IOS Platforms)
______________________________________________________________________
Q3)
Which two protocols are VPN-aware? (Choose two.) (Source: Using MPLS VPN
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q4)
VRFs are assigned to an interface. (Source: Using MPLS VPN Mechanisms of Cisco
IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
Q5)
RIPv2
IS-IS
ODR
EIGRP
true
false
A PE router is supporting site A for a VPN on one interface using RIP as the routing
protocol. Site B belongs to the same VPN and is being supported on a second interface
using EBGP as the routing protocol. Why is it necessary to redistribute the RIP-learned
route into the per-VRF instance of the BGP process? (Source: Using MPLS VPN
A)
B)
C)
D)
to allow site A and B to communicate with each other

to allow the RIP route to be propagated to the VRF routing tables
to allow the RIP routes to be propagated to the local EBGP session
to allow the RIP routes to be propagated through the backbone MP-BGP
process to other PE routers
5-175
Q6)
How are VPNv4 routers propagated to a RIP-speaking CE router? (Source: Using

MPLS VPN Mechanisms of Cisco IOS Platforms)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q7)
Which command do you use to create a VRF named VPNA? (Source: Configuring
VRF Tables)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q8)
Which two VRF parameters specify the extended community attribute used in VPNv4
BGP? (Choose two.) (Source: Configuring VRF Tables)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q9)
It will remain unchanged.

It will be removed from the interface.
It will be changed to the loopback 0 address.
It will be moved under the VRF configuration.
You have created a configuration that defines three import route targets (65001:01,
65002:02, and 65003:03) for a VRF. A route update has three RTs (65003:03,
65004:04, and 65005:05) attached to it. How will this update be processed and why?
(Source: Configuring VRF Tables)
A)
B)
C)
D)
5-176
ip vrf VPNA
ip vrf VPNA int e0/0
ip vrf forwarding VPNA
ip vrf VPNA forwarding e0/0
What happens to the existing IP address of an interface when you associate the
interface with a VRF? (Source: Configuring VRF Tables)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q11)
rd route-distinguisher
route-target export RT
route-target import RT
ip vrf forwarding vrf-name
Which command do you use to associate interface e0/0 with a VRF named VPNA?
(Source: Configuring VRF Tables)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q10)
ip vrf VPNA
ip rt vrf VPNA
ip rd vrf VPNS
ip vrf forwarding VPNA
The update will be accepted by the VRF because it matches the import RD of
03.
The update will be discarded by the VRF because it does not match all of the
RTs in the import list.
The update will be accepted by the VRF because it matches at least one of the
RTs in the import list.
The update will be discarded by the VRF because it does not match all of the
RDs in the import list.
Q12)
In which two ways does the MPLS VPN architecture use the BGP routing protocol?
(Source: Configuring an MP-BGP Session Between PE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q13)
What is a BGP address family? (Source: Configuring an MP-BGP Session Between PE

Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q14)
What are the two types of BGP address families that can be configured on a PE router?
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q15)
Which mandatory parameters do you have to configure on an MP-BGP neighbor?

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q16)
Why is it necessary to enable extended BGP communities when you are supporting
MPLS VPNs? (Source: Configuring an MP-BGP Session Between PE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q17)
Why would you want to disable propagation of IPv4 routing updates between MP-BGP
neighbors? (Source: Configuring an MP-BGP Session Between PE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
5-177
Q18)
How do you configure the routing context in RIP? (Source: Configuring Small-Scale
Routing Protocols Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q19)
How do you propagate static VRF routes between PE routers? (Source: Configuring
Small-Scale Routing Protocols Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q20)
How would you configure redistribution to propagate customer RIP routing updates
across the MPLS VPN backbone? (Source: Configuring Small-Scale Routing Protocols
Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q21)
Which three commands do you use to display all configured VRFs on the router?
(Source: Monitoring MPLS VPN Operations)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q22)
How do you verify the contents of a VRF routing table? (Source: Monitoring MPLS
VPN Operations)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q23)
Why is the BGP protocol always running in every VRF, and how would you display
the BGP parameter related to a VRF? (Source: Monitoring MPLS VPN Operations)
______________________________________________________________________
5-178
Q24)
How do you verify that a session has been established between two VPNv4 neighbors?
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q25)
How do you verify the contents of a BGP VPNv4 routing table? (Source: Monitoring
MPLS VPN Operations)
______________________________________________________________________
Q26)
Which three commands can be used to display per-VRF FIB and LFIB information?
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q27)
Which command can be used to display labels assigned to local or remote VRF routes
by the local or remote PE router? (Source: Monitoring MPLS VPN Operations)
Q28)
Which command do you use to perform each of the following traceroutes? (Source:
Monitoring MPLS VPN Operations)
ingress CE to egress PE:
ingress CE to egress CE:
ingress PE to egress PE:
ingress PE to egress CE:
Q29)
Why is the OSPF superbackbone needed in MPLS VPN environments? (Source:

Configuring OSPF as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
5-179
Q30)
What is the interaction between Area 0 and a superbackbone? (Source: Configuring

OSPF as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q31)
What is the interaction between a superbackbone and other areas? (Source: Configuring
OSPF as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q32)
How are OSPF route attributes propagated across an MPLS VPN backbone? (Source:
Configuring OSPF as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q33)
What is the purpose of the down bit in an LSA header? (Source: Configuring OSPF as
the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q34)
Why do you need a VRF route limit? (Source: Configuring BGP as the Routing
Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q35)
When would you need the AS-override feature? (Source: Configuring BGP as the
Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
5-180
Q36)
How does the AS-override feature work? (Source: Configuring BGP as the Routing
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q37)
When would you need the allowas-in feature? (Source: Configuring BGP as the
Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q38)
When is it necessary to use the AS-override feature instead of the allowas-in feature?
(Source: Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q39)
How do you prevent BGP loops when using AS-override? (Source: Configuring BGP
as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q40)
How do you prevent BGP loops when using allowas-in? (Source: Configuring BGP as
the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
Q41)
What is the SOO? (Source: Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol Between PE and
CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
5-181
Q42)
When would you have to use the SOO? (Source: Configuring BGP as the Routing
______________________________________________________________________
Q43)
Where can you set the SOO? (Source: Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol
Between PE and CE Routers)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q44)
What are the preliminary MPLS VPN troubleshooting steps? (Source: Troubleshooting
MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q45)
Which command do you use to verify that the PE router is receiving customer routes
from the CE router? (Source: Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q46)
How do you verify the routing information exchange between PE routers? (Source:
Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q47)
How do you verify redistribution of VPNv4 routes into the PE-CE routing protocol?
(Source: Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
5-182
Q48)
How do you test end-to-end data flow between PE routers? (Source: Troubleshooting
MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
Q49)
How do you verify that the PE router ingress interface supports CEF switching?
(Source: Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
Q50)
How do you verify that there is an end-to-end LSP? (Source: Troubleshooting MPLS
VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
Q51)
How do you verify that the LFIB entry on the egress PE router is correct? (Source:
Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
5-183

Q1)
Q2)
With routing protocols such as RIP and BGP, only a single copy of the protocol may be running in the
router.
Q3)
A, D
Q4)
False. Interfaces are assigned to a VRF.
Q5)
Q6)
VPNv4 routers are redistributed from the global BGP table to the per-instance BGP table and then to the
per-instance RIP, which is propagated to the CE router.
Q7)
Q8)
B, C
Q9)
Q10)
Q11)
Q12)
EBGP is used to carry routing updates between the PE router and the CE router.
IBGP (VNPv4) is used to carry VPN route updates between PE routers.
Note
5-184
IBGP (IPv4) is used to carry non-VPN route updates between PE routers.
Q13)
A BGP address family is a routing protocol context that is used to configure global BGP routing, VPN
routing, and CE-to-PE routing into the same BGP process.
Q14)
VPNv4 and IPv4
Q15)
neighbor ip-address remote-as as-number

neighbor ip-address update-source interface-type interface number
address-family vpnv4
neighbor ip-address activate
neighbor ip-address next-hop-self
Q16)
Extended BGP communities attached to VPNv4 prefixes have to be exchanged between MP-BGP
neighbors because they contain the RT information.
Q17)
when you are supporting only VPN routes
Q18)
On the CE, enable RIP. On the PE, enable RIP and use the address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command
under the router RIP section.
Q19)
Enable the static route using the ip route vrf name static route parameters command.
Q20)
Use the redistribute rip command under the BGP address family on the ingress PE router to redistribute
the RIP updates into MP-BGP. MP-BGP uses VPNv4 updates to propagate the updates to the egress PE
router. The redistribute bgp metric transparent command under the RIP address family is used on the
egress PE to redistribute the updates back into RIP.
Q21)
show ip vrf
show ip vrf detail
Q22)
Use the show ip route vrf command.
Q23)
The BGP protocol is needed to carry the VPNv4 routes. Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf command.
Q24)
Use the show ip bgp neighbors command and verify that the VPNv4 status is advertised and received.
Q25)
Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name command.
Q26)
show ip cef vrf

show ip cef vrf detail
show mpls forwarding-table vrf
Q27)
show ip bgp vpnv4 all labels
Q28)
ingress CE to egress PE: trace

ingress CE to egress CE: trace
ingress PE to egress PE: trace
ingress PE to egress CE: trace vrf vrf-name
Q29)
Because MPLS VPNs use BGP to propagate routes between sites; internal OSPF routers in one area will
appear as external routes in another area unless the superbackbone makes the MPLS VPN backbone
transparent to OSPF.
Q30)
The superbackbone is transparent to Area 0.
Q31)
The superbackbone appears as Area 0 to non-Area 0 areas.
Q32)
The OSPF routes are propagated into BGP.

The OSPF metrics and LSA information are carried in the BGP community attribute.
Q33)
The down bit is used to prevent routing loops.
Q34)
You need a VRF route limit because of tight coupling of the customer and the service provider network in
the MPLS VPN architecture. This tight coupling might also result in the service provider network being
exposed to design and configuration errors in customer networks and to a number of new denial-of-service
attacks based on routing protocol behavior.
Q35)
when you need to connect two or more sites that use the same AS number via a VPN
Q36)
All leading occurrences of the AS number of the receiving BGP router are replaced with the AS number of
the sending BGP router. Other occurrences (farther down the AS path) of the AS number of the receiving
router are not replaced because they indicate a real routing information loop.
Q37)
In some security-conscious implementations, customer VPNs are linked by a customer router that performs
security functions, such as access filtering or access logging.
Q38)
in solutions where customer VPNs are linked by a customer router that do not support the AS-override
feature
Q39)
Only the leading occurrences of the AS number of the receiving BGP router are replaced with the AS
number of the sending BGP router. Any other occurrences (farther down the AS path) of the AS number of
the receiving router are not replaced because they indicate a real routing information loop.
Q40)
Allowas-in specifies the number of times to allow advertisement of an AS number of a PE router. Valid
values are from 1 to 10, using the number parameter of the allowas-in command.
Q41)
The SOO is an extended BGP community that is used to indicate the site that has originated the routing
update.
Q42)
The SOO is used as an additional loop-prevention mechanism in scenarios when the allowas-in feature is
enabled.
5-185
5-186
Q43)
For routes received from BGP-speaking CE routers, the SOO is configured by the incoming route map on
the PE router. For all other routes, a route map setting the SOO is applied to the incoming interface and the
SOO is attached to the BGP route when an IGP route received through that interface is redistributed into
BGP.
Q44)
Is CEF enabled?
Are labels for IGP routes generated and propagated?
Are large labeled packets propagated across the MPLS backbone (MTU issues)?
Q45)
show ip route vrf vrf-name
Q46)
Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 all ip-prefix/length command to verify proper route propagation.
Q47)
Use the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf-name ip-prefix command on the egress PE router or use the show ip
route command on the egress CE router.
Q48)
From the ingress PE router, use the ping vrf vrf-name command to ping the interface that supports the CE
router.
Q49)
Use the show cef interface command.
Q50)
Check LFIB values hop by hop or use the trace vrf vrf-name command from the ingress PE router.
Q51)
Determine the second label in the label stack on the ingress PE with the show ip cef vrf vrf-name ip-prefix
detail command. Verify the correctness of the LFIB entry on the egress PE with the show mpls
forwarding vrf vrf-name value detail command.
Module 6
Complex MPLS VPNs

Overview
This module discusses some advanced configuration features that can help increase the stability
of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN) backbone. The
module also discusses various MPLS VPN features that a service provider might use to help
meet service requirements, and looks at various types of VPN solutions and topologies.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe how the MPLS VPN model can be
used to implement managed services and Internet access. This ability includes being able to
Configure advanced VRF import and export features
Identify the characteristics of overlapping VPNs
Identify the characteristics of the central services VPN solutions
Identify the characteristics of the managed CE router service
6-2
Lesson 1
Using Advanced VRF Import

and Export Features
Overview
Some virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) features allow you to be more selective with routes,
by specifying which routes will or will not be added. You may also limit the number of routes
that a customer can insert into the VRF instance. This lesson presents the command syntax that
is used to limit each type of route and shows configuration examples of these commands.
It is important to understand how to fine-tune the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Virtual Private Network (VPN) parameters that will enhance operation of the network.
Customer service level agreements (SLAs) should be adhered to so that they provide the best
possible solutions for each specific customer. This lesson looks at some key areas regarding the
use of VRF import and export features.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure advanced VRF
import and export features. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify advanced VRF features
Configure selective VRF imports
Configure selective VRF exports
What Are Advanced VRF Features?

This topic identifies the advanced VRF features.
Advanced VRF Features

Selective import
This features allows you to specify additional
criteria for importing routes into the VRF.
Selective export
This features allows you to specify additional RTs
attached to exported routes.
VRF route limit
This features allows you to specify the maximum
number of routes in a VRF to prevent memory
exhaustion on PE routers or denial-of-service
attacks.
MPLS v2.26-3
These advanced VRF features allow you to deploy advanced MPLS VPN topologies or increase
the stability of the MPLS VPN backbone:
The selective import feature allows you to select routes to be imported into a VRF based on
criteria other than the route target (RT) of the VRF.
The selective export feature allows you to attach specific RTs to a subset of routes exported
from a VRF. By default, the same RTs get attached to all exported routes.
The VRF route limit feature allows you to limit the number of routes that the customeror
other provider edge (PE) routerscan insert in the VRF. This feature prevents undesirable
consequences such as configuration errors or denial-of-service attacks.
6-4

This topic describes how to configure selective VRF import.

VRF import criteria might be more specific than
just the match on the RTfor example:
Import only routes with specific BGP attributes
(community, and so on).
Import routes with specific prefixes or subnet masks
(only loopback addresses).
A route map can be configured in a VRF to make

the route import more specific.
MPLS v2.26-4
Selective route import into a VRF allows you to narrow the route import criteria. Selective
route import uses a route map that can filter the routes selected by the RT import filter. The
routes imported into a VRF are Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes, so you can use match
conditions in a route map to match any BGP attribute of a route. These attributes include
communities, local preference, multi-exit discriminator (MED), autonomous system (AS) path,
and so on.
The import route map filter is combined with the RT import filter. A route has to pass the RT
import filter first and then the import route map. The necessary conditions for a route to be
imported into a VRF are as follows:
At least one of the RTs attached to the route matches one of the import RTs configured in
the VRF.
The route is permitted by the import route map.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-5
Configuring Selective VRF Import (Cont.)
This command attaches a route map to the VRF

import process.
A route is imported into the VRF only if at least one
RT attached to the route matches one RT
configured in the VRF and the route is accepted by
the route map.
MPLS v2.26-5
import map
To configure an import route map for a VRF, use the import map command in VRF
configuration submode: import map route-map.
This table describes the parameters for the import map command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the route map to be used as an import route map for

the VRF
Defaults
There is no default. A VRF has no import route map unless one is configured using the import
map command.
6-6
Example: Configuring Selective VRF Import

The figure shows an example in which an import route map is used to match the IP version 4
(IPv4) portion of incoming VPN version 4 (VPNv4) routes and to import into the VRF only
routes matching a certain prefix.
Configuring Selective VRF Import (Cont.)
MPLS v2.26-6
A configuration similar to this one could be used to accomplish the following:

Deploy advanced MPLS VPN topologies (for example, a managed router services
topology)
Increase the security of an extranet VPN by allowing only predefined subnetworks to be
inserted into a VRF, thus preventing an extranet site from inserting unapproved
subnetworks into the extranet
Note
A similar function is usually not needed in an intranet scenario because all customer routers
in an intranet are usually under common administration.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-7

This topic describes how to configure selective VRF export.

Routes from a VRF might have to be exported with
different RTs.
An example would be export management routes with
particular RTs.
An export route map can be configured

on a VRF:
This route map can set extended community RTs.
No other set operations can be performed by this route map.
MPLS v2.26-7
Some advanced MPLS VPN topologies are easiest to implement if you can attach a variety of
RTs to routes exported from the same VRF. This capability allows only a subset of the routes
exported from a VRF to be imported into another VRF. Most services in which customer
routers need to connect to a common server (for example, network management stations, voice
gateways, and application servers) fall into this category.
The export route map function provides exactly this functionality. A route map can be specified
for each VRF to attach additional RTs to routes exported from that VRF. The export route map
performs only the attachment of RTs. It does not perform any filtering function.
Attributes attached to a route with an export route map are combined with the export RT
attributes. If you specify export RTs in a VRF and set RTs with an export route map, all
specified RTs will be attached to the exported route.
Note
6-8
The export route map provides functionality almost identical to that of the import route map,
but applied to a different VRF. Any requirement that can be implemented with an export
route map can also be implemented with an import route map. However, the implementation
of export maps can be more complicated and harder to manage.
Configuring Selective VRF Export (Cont.)
This command creates a route map that matches

routes based on any route map conditions and
sets RTs.
MPLS v2.26-8
set extcommunity
To set the BGP extended communities attribute, use the set extcommunity command in routemap configuration mode. To delete the entry, use the no form of this command.
no set extcommunity {rt extended-community-value [additive] | soo extended-communityvalue}
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the RT extended community attribute.
Specifies the SOO extended community attribute.
Specifies the value to be set. The value can be one of the

following combinations:
autonomous-system-number: network-number
ip-address: network-number
(Optional) Adds an RT to the existing RT list without replacing

any RTs.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-9
Defaults
This command attaches a route map to the VRF

export process.
All exported routes always get RTs configured with
the route-target export command in the VRF.
A route that is matched by the export route map will
have additional RTs attached.
MPLS v2.26-9
export map
To apply a route map to filter and modify exported routes, use the export map command in
VRF configuration mode. To remove the route map from the VRF, use the no form of this
command.
export map route-map
no export map route-map
This table describes the parameters for the export map command.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies the name of the route map to be used
Defaults
No route map is used.
6-10
Example: Configuring Selective VRF Export

In the figure, the configuration is implemented with an export route map.
Note
MPLS v2.26-10
Depending on when you configure the export map command, you may need to use the
clear ip bgp command to force the existing BGP session to propagate the extended
communities.
In the earlier example, selective import of routes into a VRF was achieved with an import route
map in the receiving VRF that allowed only routes from a certain address block to be inserted
into the VRF. In this example, routes from a certain address block are marked with an
additional RT in the originating VRF and are automatically inserted into the receiving VRF on
the basis of their RT.
The main difference between import and export route maps is therefore the deployment point:
The import route map is deployed in the receiving VRF.
The export route map is deployed in the originating VRF.
Based on the network design, the functionality of one or the other might be preferred.
Note
Import and export route maps can increase the number of routes processed by a router. The
BGP maximum-prefix function can be used to ensure that the number of routes does not
exceed the network design. (See the Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol Between PE
and CE Routers lesson in the MPLS VPN Implementation module for further details.)
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-11
Summary
Summary
Two advanced VRF features were discussed:
Selective import
Selective export
Use the import map command to configure an
import route map for VRF.
Use the export map command to attach a route map
to the VRF export process.
6-12
MPLS v2.26-11
Lesson 2
Introducing Overlapping VPNs

Overview
Overlapping Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) are usually used to connect parts of two separate
VPNs. A third VPN is created within the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) VPN network
that contains sites from both VPNs. A new route target (RT) extended community is used for
networks originating in the sites that are also in the new VPN. This action may require a new
virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance, resulting in a new route distinguisher (RD).
Networks originating in these sites are exported with two RT extended communities: one for
the original VPN and one for the overlapping VPN. This lesson looks at the requirements,
usage, and solutions associated with overlapping VPNs.
It is important to understand customer needs and how to best fit those needs. This lesson looks
at an area that helps to clarify some solutions regarding multiple separate VPNs.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to identify the characteristics of overlapping
VPNs. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the participants in overlapping VPNs
Identify typical overlapping VPN usages
Describe the routing update flow in an overlapping VPN
Describe the data flow in an overlapping VPN
Configure overlapping VPNs
Who Are the Participants in Overlapping VPNs?

This topic identifies the participants in overlapping VPNs.
Overlapping VPNs
CE routers participate in simple VPNs.

Some CE routers participate in more than one simple VPN:
Here, A-Central talks to B-Central.
MPLS v2.26-3
When two VPN customers want to share some information, they may decide to interconnect
their central sites. To achieve this interconnection, two simple VPNs are created, each
containing a customer central site and its remote sites. Then a third VPN, which partially
overlaps with the customer VPNs but connects only their central sites, is created. The central
sites can talk to each other. Each central site can also talk to the remote sites in its simple VPN,
but not to the remote sites belonging to the other customer simple VPN. The addresses used in
the central sites, however, have to be unique in both VPNs.
Another option is to use dual Network Address Translation (NAT) with a registered address to
be imported and exported between the two central sites.
6-14
What Are Typical Overlapping VPN Usages?

This topic identifies typical overlapping VPN usages.
Typical Overlapping VPN Usages

Companies where central sites participate in a
corporate network and in an extranet
A company with several security-conscious
departments that exchange data between their
servers
MPLS v2.26-4
These are two typical uses for overlapping VPNs:

Companies that use MPLS VPNs to implement both intranet and extranet services might
use overlapping VPNs. In this scenario, each company participating in the extranet VPN
would probably deploy a security mechanism on its customer edge (CE) routers to prevent
other companies participating in the VPN from gaining access to other sites in its VPN.
A security-conscious company might decide to limit visibility between different
departments in the organization. Overlapping VPNs might be used as a solution.
Note
Security issues might force an enterprise network to be migrated to an MPLS VPN even if it
is not using MPLS VPN services from a service provider.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-15

This topic describes the routing update flow in an overlapping VPN.
MPLS v2.26-5
Some key points regarding the routing update flow in overlapping VPNs are as follows:
Each VPN has its own RT (123:750, 123:760) that the sites participating in the VPN import
and export.
Sites that participate in more than one VPN import routes with RTs from any VPN in
which they participate and export routes with RTs for all VPNs in which they participate.
Example: Overlapping VPN Routing

The figure shows how to implement overlapping VPNs.
For site A-1 and site A-2 (participating only in VPN-A), do the following:
Export all networks with RT 123:750.
Import all networks that carry RT 123:750 (VPN-A).
For site B-1 and site B-2 (participating only in VPN-B), do the following:
Export all networks with RT 123:760.
Import all networks that carry RT 123:760 (VPN-B).
6-16
For site A-Central (participating in VPN-A and the overlapping VPN), do the following:
Export all networks with RTs 123:750 and 123:1001.
Import all networks that carry RT 123:750 (VPN-A) or 123:1001 (overlapping VPN).
For site B-Central (participating in VPN-B and the overlapping VPN), do the following:
Export all networks with RTs 123:760 and 123:1001.
Import all networks that carry RT 123:760 (VPN-B) or 123:1001 (overlapping VPN).
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-17

This topic describes the data flow in an overlapping VPN.
MPLS v2.26-6
Because sites belonging to different VPNs do not share routing information, they cannot talk to
each other. The figure shows overlapping VPN data flow:
The simple VPN for customer A contains routes that originate from the following:
A-Central site
A remote sites
The simple VPN for customer B contains routes that originate from the following:
B-Central site
B remote sites
The overlapping VPN contains routes that originate from the following:
A-Central site
B-Central site
All of the customer A sites can communicate with each other.

All of the customer B sites can communicate with each other.
A-Central and B-Central can communicate with each other.
The customer A remote site cannot communicate with the customer B remote sites.
Note
6-18
If a site participating in more than one VPN is propagating a default route to other sites, it
can attract traffic from those sites and start acting as a transit site between VPNs, enabling
sites that were not supposed to communicate to establish two-way communication.
Configuring Overlapping VPNs

This topic describes how to configure overlapping VPNs.
Overlapping VPNsConfiguration Tasks
Configure one VRF per set of sites with the same VPN
membership per PE router.
For every set of sites with the same VPN membership, use the
same RD.
Configure RTs based on the VPN membership of sites in
each VRF.
MPLS v2.26-7
You can have a network with four types of sites with different VPN memberships.
Example: Overlapping VPNsConfiguration Tasks

The figure illustrates this example. This situation requires at least the following four VRFs:
A-Spoke-1 and A-Spoke-2 are members of VPN-A only. (They need two VRFs because
they are not connected to the same PE router; they can, however, use the same RD and
RTs.)
B-Spoke-1 and B-Spoke-2 are members of VPN-B only. (They need two VRFs because
they are not connected to the same PE router; they can, however, use the same RD and
RTs.)
A-Central is a member of VPN-A and overlapping VPN-AB. (It cannot use the same RD as
A-Spoke-1 and A-Spoke-2 because it has different routing requirements. It needs a unique
RD and RTs for VPN-A as well as Central.)
B-Central is a member of VPN-B and overlapping VPN-AB. (It needs a unique RD as well
as RTs for VPN-B as well as Central.)
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-19
This table shows an RT and RD numbering scheme for PE-1.

PE-1 RT and RD Numbering Scheme
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
VPN-A
123:750
123:750
123:750
VPN-B
123:760
123:760
123:760
VPN-A-Central
123:751
123:750
123:750
123:1001
123:1001
This table shows an RT and RD numbering scheme for PE-2.

PE-2 RT and RD Numbering Scheme
6-20
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
VPN-A
123:750
123:750
123:750
VPN-B
123:760
123:760
123:760
VPN-B-Central
123:761
123:760
123:760
123:1001
123:1001
Configuring Overlapping VPN VRFs
MPLS v2.26-8
The Cisco IOS software configuration for PE-1 and PE-2 reflects the RT and RD numbering
scheme from the two tables.
Example: Configuring Overlapping VPN VRFs

The figure shows only VRF configuration and does not show VPN routing or Multiprotocol
Border Gateway Protocol (MP-BGP) routing between the PE routers.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-21
Summary
Summary
Overlapping VPNs are used to provide connectivity between
segments of two VPNs.
There are two uses for overlapping VPNs:
Companies that use MPLS VPNs to implement both intranet and extranet
services
Companies that might decide to limit visibility between departments
Sites that participate in more than one (overlapping) VPN import

and export routes with RTs from any VPN in which they
participate.
Sites cannot talk to each other if they belong to different VPNs.
Overlapping VPN sites are configured with the required RTs
based on the VPN membership.
6-22
MPLS v2.26-9
Lesson 3
Introducing Central Services

VPNs
Overview
A central services Virtual Private Network (VPN) is used when multiple VPNs need to share a
common set of servers. These servers reside in the central services VPN, and all other VPNs
have access to this VPN. The other VPNs, however, are not able to see one another. The central
services VPN is implemented using two route target (RT) extended communities, where one
imports networks into the VPN and the other exports networks. The client sites do the opposite.
Two RT extended communities are needed to prevent client sites from exchanging routing
information. This lesson looks at central services VPN solution topologies and how routing
updates within that topology would flow. The lesson also discusses the implications of
combining a central services VPN with a simple customer VPN. It is important to understand
fully the topologies that make the most sense for the customer and to be able to configure or
recommend other options.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to identify the characteristics of the central
services VPN. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the access characteristics of a central services VPN
Describe the routing characteristics of a central services VPN
Describe the data flow within a central services VPN
Configure a central services VPN
Identify the connectivity requirements when you are integrating a central services VPN
with a simple VPN
Identify the RD requirements when you are integrating a central services VPN with a
simple VPN
Identify the RT requirements when you are integrating a central services VPN with a
simple VPN
What Are the Access Characteristics of a Central

Services VPN?
This topic describes the access characteristics of a central services VPN.
Central Services VPN
Clients need access to central servers.

Servers can communicate with each other.
Clients can communicate with all servers but not with each
other.
MPLS v2.26-3
A central services VPN is a topology with these characteristics:

Some sites (server sites) can communicate with all other sites.
All the other sites (client sites) can communicate only with the server sites.
This topology can be used in these situations:
The service provider offers services to all customers by allowing them access to a common
VPN.
Two (or more) companies want to exchange information by sharing a common set of
servers.
A security-conscious company separates its departments and allows them access only to
common servers.
6-24
What Are the Routing Characteristics of a Central

Services VPN?
This topic describes the routing characteristics of a central services VPN.
Central Services VPN Routing

Client routes need
to be exported to the
server site.
Server routes need to
be exported to client
and server sites.
No routes are
exchanged between
client sites.
MPLS v2.26-4
There is a specific routing model used to implement a central services VPN.
Example: Central Services VPN Routing

The figure illustrates the MPLS VPN routing model that is used to implement a central services
VPN:
Client 1 and client 2 have their own RTs (123:101, 123:102) that they import and export;
they also export networks with RT 123:193 and import networks with RT 123:192.
Note
Client-specific RTs were introduced to comply with the implementation requirements of

Cisco IOS Software Release 12.0 T, in which each virtual routing and forwarding (VRF)
instance has to have at least one of its export RTs configured as its import RT.
The central site imports and exports networks with the RT of its VPN, but it also imports
networks with RT 123:193 and exports networks with RT 123:192.
Client 1 does the following:
Exports all networks with RTs 123:101 or 123:193
Imports all networks that carry RT 123:101 or 123:192
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-25
Client 2 does the following:

Exports all networks with RTs 123:102 or 123:193
Imports all networks that carry RT 123:102 or 123:192
The central site does the following:
Exports all networks with RT 123:192 or RT 123:199
Imports all networks that carry RT 123:193 or RT 123:199
6-26
Identifying the Central Services VPN Data Flow

Model
This topic describes the data flow within a central services VPN.
Central Services VPN Data Flow Model
Client VRFs contain

server routes; clients can
talk to servers.
Server VRFs contain
client routes; servers can
talk to clients.
Client VRFs do not
contain routes from other
clients; clients cannot
communicate.
Make sure that there is no
client-to-client leakage
across server sites.
MPLS v2.26-5
In the central services VPN topology, the client VRF contains only routes from the client site
and routes from the server sites. This setup precludes the client sites from communicating with
other client sites.
A server VRF in this topology contains routes from the site or sites attached to the VRF and
also routes from all other client and server sites. Hosts in server sites can therefore
communicate with hosts in all other sites.
Note
If the central site is propagating a default route to other sites, it can result in client sites
seeing each other through the customer edge (CE) router in the central site.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-27

This topic describes how to configure a central services VPN.
Steps for Configuring a Central

Services VPN
Client sites:
Use a separate VRF per client site.
Use a unique RD on each client site.
Import and export routes with an RT that is the same value as the
RD for each client site (VPN of client).
Export routes with an RT (clients-to-server) associated with
the server site.
Import routes with the RT (server-to-clients) into client VRFs.
MPLS v2.26-6
To configure a central services VPN, you need to address these requirements:

You need a separate VRF for each client.
You need one VRF per provider edge (PE) router connecting a server site.
You need a unique route discriminator (RD) on each client site.
You need a unique RD on each set of server sites.
You need an import-export RT with the same value as the RD for each client site.
6-28
Steps for Configuring a Central

Services VPN (Cont.)
Server sites:
Use one VRF for each service type.
Use a unique RD on each service type.
Import and export routes with an RT that is the same value as the
RD for each server site (VPN of server).
Export server site routes with an RT (server-to-client).
Import routes with the RT (clients-to-server) into the server VRFs.
MPLS v2.26-7
This table shows an RD and RT numbering scheme for PE-1.

PE-1 RD and RT Numbering Scheme
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
Client-1
123:101
123:101
123:101
123:192
123:193
123:102
123:102
123:192
123:193
Client-2
123:102

VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
Client-4
123:104
123:104
123:104
123:192
123:193
123:105
123:105
123:192
123:193
Client-5
123:105
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-29
This table shows an RD and RT numbering scheme for PE-CS-1.

PE-CS-1 RD and RT Numbering Scheme
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
Server
123:103
123:103
123:103
123:193
123:192
This table shows an RD and RT numbering scheme for PE-CS-2.

PE-CS-2 RD and RT Numbering Scheme
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
Server
123:103
123:103
123:103
123:193
123:192
MPLS v2.26-8
Use the ip vrf command to configure a central services VPN.
Example: Configuring a Central Services VPN

The figure shows a fraction of the configuration according to the RD and RT numbering
scheme presented in the tables.
6-30
Integrating a Central Services VPN with a Simple

VPN
This topic identifies the connectivity requirements when you are integrating a central services
VPN with a simple VPN.
Central Services VPN and Simple VPN

Requirements
Customers run a simple VPN:

- All A-Spoke sites in A-VPN
- All B-Spoke sites in B-VPN
Only A-Central and B-Central need access to central servers.
This situation results in a combination of rules from the
overlapping VPN and central services VPN.
MPLS v2.26-9
In this design, some of the customer sites need access to the central server. All other sites just
need optimal intra-VPN access. The design is consequently a mixture of simple VPN topology
and central services VPN topology.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-31
Central Services VPN and Simple VPN

Requirements (Cont.)
For all sites participating in a simple VPN, configure a separate VRF per
set of sites participating in the same VPNs per PE router.
For sites that are only clients of central servers, create a VRF per site.
Create one VRF for central servers per PE router.
MPLS v2.26-10
When integrating a central services VPN with a simple VPN, you need one VRF per VPN for
sites that have access to other sites in the customer VPN but no access to the central services
VPN. You need one VRF per VPN for sites that have access to the central services VPN.
Finally, you need one VRF for the central services VPN; this VPN is on another PE router in
the example.
6-32
Identifying the RD Requirements When

Integrating Central Services and Simple VPNs
This topic identifies the RD requirements when you are integrating a central services VPN with
a simple VPN.
Configuring RDs in a Central Services VPN

and Simple VPN
Configure a unique RD for every set of VRFs with unique

membership requirements:
A-Spoke-1 and A-Spoke-2 can share the same RD.

B-Spoke-1 and B-Spoke-2 can share the same RD.
A-Central needs a unique RD.
B-Central needs a unique RD.
Configure one RD for all central server VRFs.

MPLS v2.26-11
For this design, you need two RDs per VPN:

Configure one RD for simple VPN sites. (The same value should also be used for import
and export RTs.)
Configure one RD for the central services VRFs.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-33
Identifying the RT Requirements When

Integrating Central Services and Simple VPNs
This topic identifies the RT requirements when you are integrating a central services VPN with
a simple VPN.
Configuring RTs in a Central Services VPN

and Simple VPN
Configure the customer VPN import-export route target in all VRFs

participating in customer VPN.
Configure a unique import-export route target in every VRF that is only
a client of central servers.
Configure the central services import and export route targets in VRFs
that participate in central services VPN.
MPLS v2.26-12

6-34
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
VPN-A
123:750
123:750
123:750
VPN-B
123:760
123:760
123:760
VPN-A-Central
123:751
123:750
123:750
123:101
123:100

VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
VPN-A
123:750
123:750
123:750
VPN-B
123:760
123:760
123:760
VPN-B-Central
123:761
123:760
123:760
123:101
123:100
This table shows an RD and RT numbering scheme for PE-CS.

PE-CS RD and RT Numbering Scheme
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
Server
123:101
123:101
123:101
123:100
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-35
Configuring VRFs in a Central Services

VPN and Simple VPN
MPLS v2.26-13
Use the ip vrf command to configure VRFs in a central services and simple VPN.
Example: Configuring VRFs in a Central Services and Simple

VPN
The example shows a fraction of the configuration using the RD and RT numbering scheme
presented in the tables.
6-36
Summary
Summary
A central services VPN is used to provide access from centralized
servers to one or more customers.
A central services VPN routing model indicates these
requirements:
Client routes need to be exported to the server site.
Service routes need to be exported to client and server sites.
No routes are exchanged between client sites.
The data flow in a central services VPN model indicates these

requirements:
Client VRFs contain server routes and do not contain routes from other
clients.
Server VRFs contain client routes.
Some of the requirements to configure a central services VPN are

these:
Use a separate VRF for each client.

Use a unique RD on each client site.
Use a unique RD in each set of server sites.
Use import and export RT matching between server and client sites.
MPLS v2.26-14
Summary (Cont.)
The hybrid of a simple VPN and a central VPN provides the
following:
Customers have intra-VPN access, including their central
site.
The central sites of each customer can access centralized
servers available to multiple customers.
Intra-VPN customer sites can share the same RD. The central
site of a customer and shared centralized servers require a
unique RD.
The import-export RT must match from respective customer
intra-VPN sites to a central site. A different import-export RT
set must match from the central site of the respective
customers to the shared centralized server site.
MPLS v2.26-15
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-37
6-38
Lesson 4
Introducing the Managed CE

Routers Service
Overview
A service provider can use a separate network management Virtual Private Network (VPN) to
manage the customer edge (CE) routers of all the VPNs. A pair of route target (RT) extended
communities is used to accomplish this goal. One RT exports CE router loopback addresses and
is imported into the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance of the network management
VPN. The other RT exports the networks from the VRF associated with the network
management VPN and imports them into all other VRF instances. This lesson explains some of
the requirements and the implementation solution for the managed CE routers service.
It is important to be able to recognize the requirements of the network and to match them with
customer requests. This lesson looks at one such requirement and explains how to handle it.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to identify the characteristics of the managed CE
routers service. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the overall requirements of a managed CE routers VPN
Identify the VRF and RD requirements of a managed CE routers VPN
Configure a managed CE routers VPN
What Are the Requirements of Managed CE

Routers?
This topic identifies the overall requirements of a managed CE routers VPN.
Managed CE Routers
Central server NMS needs access to loopback addresses of all

CE routers.
Very similar to central services and simple VPNs:
All of the CE routers participate in the central services VPN.
Only the loopback addresses of the CE routers need to be
exported into the central services VPN.
MPLS v2.26-3
If the service provider is managing the customer routers, it is convenient to have a central point
that has access to all CE routers but doe not have access to the other destinations at the
customer sites. This requirement is usually implemented by deploying a separate VPN for
management purposes. This VPN needs to see all the loopback interfaces of all the CE routers.
All CE routers have to see the network management VPN. The design is similar to that of the
central services VPN; the only difference is that you mark only loopback addresses to be
imported into the network management VPN.
Note
6-40
The topology described in this lesson is sometimes referred to as a gray network

management VPN implementation, because all CE routers are accessed through a single
link between the network management system (NMS) CE router and the network core. An
alternative solution (a rainbow network management VPN), in which the NMS CE router
has separate connections to each managed CE router, is usually used in combination with
overlay VPNs (for example, Frame Relay networks).
What Are the VRF and RD Requirements?

This topic identifies the VRF and route discriminator (RD) requirements of a managed CE
routers VPN.
VRF Creation and RD Overview
Create one VRF per customer VPN per PE router.

Assign the same RD to each customer VRF.
Create an NMS VRF on the PE-CS router.
Assign a unique RD to the NMS VRF.
MPLS v2.26-4
The VRF and RD design is the same as with central services VPNs. The only difference
between this topology and the central services VPN topology combined with a simple VPN
topology is the RT marking process during route export.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-41
Configuring Managed CE Routers

This topic describes how to configure a managed CE routers VPN.
Configuring Route Targets
Configure the per-customer import-export RT in all customer

VRFs.
Configure the NMS import-export RT in NMS VRF.
Import routes with the NMS RT into the customer VRF.
Export loopback addresses from the customer VRF with RT
NMS_Client.
Import routes with RT NMS_Client into NMS VRF.
MPLS v2.26-5

VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
VPN-A
123:750
123:750
123:750
123:101
123:100 (using
NMS route-map)
123:760
123:760
123:101
123:100 (using
NMS route-map)
VPN-B
123:760
This table shows an RD and RT numbering scheme for PE-CS.

PE-CS RD and RT Numbering Scheme
VRF
RD
Import RT
Export RT
NMS
123:101
123:101
123:101
123:100
(NMS_Client)
6-42
Configuring VRFs
MPLS v2.26-6
You can have a configuration for a customer VRF with differentiated RT export for loopback
addresses.
Example: Configuring VRFs

The figure illustrates this example. An export route map is used to match one part of the IP
address space and attach an additional RT to the routes within this address space (CE router
loopback addresses).
Note
The routing protocol between provider edge (PE) and CE routers has to be secured (with
distribute lists or prefix lists) to prevent customers from announcing routes in the address
space dedicated to network management; otherwise, customers can gain two-way
connectivity to the network management station.
The CE router loopback addresses are then imported into the server VPN based on the
additional RT attached to them during the export process.
Note
This design allows client sites to send packets to the network management VPN regardless
of the source address. Special precautions should be taken to protect the network
management VPN from potential threats and denial-of-service attacks coming from
customer sites.
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-43
Summary
Summary
The managed CE routers service allows the
service provider to access the loopback addresses
of the CE router for management purposes.
Managed VRF and RD design is the same as with
the hybrid of a central and a simple VPN.
Managed RT design is the same as with the hybrid
of a central and simple VPN, except for the RT
marking process during route export.
6-44
MPLS v2.26-7
Module Summary
Module Summary
Advanced VRF features allow selective import or
export of routes.
Overlapping VPNs are used to provide connectivity
between segments of two VPNs.
Central services VPNs are used to share a common
set of servers with VPNs of multiple customers.
CE routers for all VPNs can be managed by
service providers using a separate network
management VPN.
With MPLS managed services, ISPs can provide
additional centralized services that are integrated
with existing VPN service to customers.
MPLS v2.26-1
Market forces continually drive service providers to provide more complex centralized services
for their customers. These services, such as advanced virtual routing and forwarding (VRF)
import and export features, overlapping Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), and central services
VPNs, help to meet service requirements and provide VPN solutions and topologies.
References
Cisco Systems, Inc. NAT Integration with MPLS VPNs.
Cisco Systems, Inc. DHCP RelayMPLS VPN Support.
Cisco Systems, Inc. Multicast VPN Design Guide
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-45
Module Self-Check
Q1)
Why do you need a selective VRF import command? (Source: Using Advanced VRF
Import and Export Features)
______________________________________________________________________
Q2)
How does the import route map affect the VRF import process? (Source: Using
Advanced VRF Import and Export Features)
______________________________________________________________________
Q3)
Why do you need a selective VRF export command? (Source: Using Advanced VRF
Import and Export Features)
______________________________________________________________________
Q4)
How does the export route map affect the VRF export process? (Source: Using
Advanced VRF Import and Export Features)
______________________________________________________________________
Q5)
Which BGP attributes can be set with an export route map? (Source: Using Advanced
VRF Import and Export Features)
______________________________________________________________________
Q6)
Who are the typical users of overlapping VPNs? (Source: Introducing Overlapping
VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
6-46
Q7)
What are the connectivity requirements for overlapping VPNs? (Source: Introducing
Overlapping VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
Q8)
What are the typical usages for a central services VPN topology? (Source: Introducing
Central Services VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q9)
What is the connectivity model for a central services VPN topology? (Source:
Introducing Central Services VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-47
Q10)
Q11)
What command syntax do you use to implement a central services VPN topology that
supports two clients? (Source: Introducing Central Services VPNs)
client PE router
server PE router
client PE router
server PE router
How many RDs do you need for a central services VPN solution with 50 client sites
and 3 server sites? How many RTs? (Source: Introducing Central Services VPNs)
route distinguishers =
Q12)
route targets =
How do you combine a central services VPN topology with a simple VPN topology?
(Source: Introducing Central Services VPNs)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
6-48
Q13)
Why do you need the managed CE routers service? (Source: Introducing Managed CE
Routers Service)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q14)
What is the main difference between the managed CE routers service and the typical
central services VPN topology? (Source: Introducing Managed CE Routers Service)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Q15)
What syntax would you use for an export statement that limits the export to the
loopback address of 192.168.10.1? (Source: Introducing Managed CE Routers Service)
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-49
6-50
Q1)
A selective VRF import command allows you to select routes to be imported into a VRF based on criteria
other than the VRF RT.
Q2)
The import route map filter is combined with the RT import filtera route has to pass the RT import filter
first and then pass the import route map to be imported into the VRF.
Q3)
A selective VRF export command allows you to attach specific RTs to a subset of routes exported from a
VRF. (By default, the same RTs get attached to all exported routes.)
Q4)
A route map can be specified for each VRF to attach additional RTs to routes exported from a VRF. The
export route map performs only the attachment of RTs; it does not perform any filtering function, and you
cannot change any other route attributes with it.
Q5)
extended community RTs
Q6)
companies that use MPLS VPNs to implement both intranet and extranet services, or a security-conscious
company that wishes to limit visibility between different departments in the organization
Q7)
Selected sites in a VPN can communicate only with sites within their VPN. Other selected sites can
communicate with sites in their VPN and selected sites in a second VPN.
Q8)
in solutions where some sites (server sites) can communicate with all other sites, but all the other sites
(client sites) can communicate only with the server sites
Q9)
The clients have their own RTs that they import and export; the clients also export networks with an RT
that will be used by the services VRF and import networks with an RT that identifies the routes of the
services site. The services site imports and exports networks with the RT of its VPN, but it also imports
networks with RTs that identify the client sites.
Q10)
Client PE router:
ip vrf Client_1
rd 123:101
route-target both 123:101
route-target export 123:303

Q11)
route distinguishers = 51
route targets = 52
You need one RD for each client (50) and one RD (1) shared by both server sites. You need one RT for
each client (50) to export its routes to its VPN, one RT (1) for all of the clients to export their routes to the
server, and one RT (1) that is shared by both server sites to export their routes to the clients.
Q12)
Create a simple VPN that provides connectivity for all of the customer sites that do not need access to the
central services.
Next, create a simple VPN that provides access between all of the server sites that are in the service.
Finally, create an overlapping VPN that contains the sites that must have access to both the customer
VPNs and the services VPN.
Q13)
If the service provider is managing the customer routers, it is convenient to have a central point that has
access to all CE routers but not to the other destinations at customer sites.
Q14)
The VRF and RD design is similar to that of a central services VPN. The managed CE routers service
combines a service VPN and simple VPN topology like the central services VPN. However, the route
Server PE router:
ip vrf Server
rd 123:103
route-target both 123: 203
route-target import 123:303
export statement uses an access list to limit the exported addresses to the loopback address of the managed
routers.
Q15)
ip vrf VPN_A
export route-map NMS
route-map NMS
match ip access-list 10
set extcommunity rt 123:100 additive
access-list 10 permit 192.160.10.1 0.0.0.0
Complex MPLS VPNs
6-51
6-52
Module 7
Internet Access and MPLS

VPNs
Overview
Integrating Internet access with a Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private
Network (VPN) solution is one of the most common service provider business requirements.
This module provides a good understanding of underlying design issues, several potential
design scenarios, and some sample configurations. Various topologies and implementation
methods are discussed, along with ways to separate Internet access from VPN services.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe the various Internet access
implementations available. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe Internet connectivity scenarios
Describe implementing separate Internet access and MPLS VPN services
Describe implementing Internet access as a separate VPN service on a MPLS VPN
backbone
7-2
Lesson 1
Introducing Internet Access

with MPLS VPNs
Overview
This lesson describes common customer Internet connectivity scenarios and identifies two
design models for combining Internet access with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Virtual Private Network (VPN) services. The lesson lists the benefits and drawbacks of these
models, and then gives an overview of the implications of their use.
This lesson is crucial for learners planning to enhance their usage of network resources using
MPLS VPNs.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe VPN Internet access implementation
methods. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe common customer Internet connectivity scenarios
Identify the two major design models for combining Internet access with MPLS VPN
services
Describe the benefits and drawback of Internet access through global routing
Describe the benefits and drawback of Internet access in a separate VPN
Describe the disadvantages of providing Internet access through route leaking
Customer Internet Connectivity Scenarios

This topic describes some customer Internet connectivity scenarios.

Classical Internet access is implemented through a central firewall that connects the customer
network to the Internet in a secure fashion.
Customer connects to the Internet through a central site firewall.

Firewall provides NAT or proxy services as needed.
Since all Internet traffic goes across the central site, flow to
Internet is not optimal.
MPLS v2.27-3
The customer network and the Internet are connected only through the firewall. The addressing
requirements for this type of connection are very simple. The customer is assigned a small
block of public address space used by the firewall. The customer typically uses private
addresses inside the customer network. The firewall performs Network Address Translation
(NAT) between the customers private addresses and the public addresses assigned to the
customer by the Internet service provider. Alternatively, the firewall might perform an
application-level proxy function that also isolates private and public IP addresses.
There are a number of benefits associated with this design. It is a well-known setup, and the
expertise needed to implement such a setup is thus simple and straightforward. There is only
one interconnection point between the secure customer network and the Internet that needs to
be managed.
The major drawback of this design is the traffic flow. All traffic from the customer network to
the Internet passes through the central firewall. Although this might not be a drawback for
smaller customers, it can be a severe limitation for large organizations with many users,
especially when they are geographically separated.
7-4

Some customers find the traffic flow limitations of the central firewall setup too limiting. To
bypass the limitations of Internet access through a central firewall, some customers are using
designs in which each customer site has its own independent Internet access.
Customers have Internet access directly from every site.

There is optimum traffic flow to and from Internet sites.
Each site has to be secured against unauthorized Internet
access.
MPLS v2.27-4
This design solves traffic flow issues, but the associated drawback is higher exposure. Each site
has to be individually secured against unauthorized Internet access, which leads to the
increased complexity of managing a firewall at every customer site.
To achieve Internet access from every customer site, each customer edge (CE) router must
forward VPN traffic toward other customer sites and forward Internet traffic toward Internet
destinations. The two traffic types are usually sent over the same physical link but different
logical links to minimize costs.
For customers that do not want the complexity of managing their own firewalls, a managed
firewall service offered by the service provider can help address the security issues of Internet
connectivity.
7-5

A service provider may provide wholesale Internet access to customers from a range of
upstream Internet service providers (ISPs) to satisfy the connectivity and reliability
requirements of various customers.
Customers chose ISP and get address space from that ISP.
The wholesale Internet access provider may have to use a different
address pool for every upstream service provider.
MPLS v2.27-5
The selection of upstream ISPs and the corresponding configuration processes should therefore
be as easy as possible for the service provider. From an Internet perspective, customers A, B,
and C are connected to ISP X or ISP Y. This means that the IP address space used by the
customer should be allocated from the block of addresses administered by the selected ISP. The
service provider providing wholesale Internet access may have to use a different address for
every upstream ISP.
7-6
Internet Design Models for Service Providers

This topic identifies two major design models for service providers combining Internet access
with MPLS VPN services.
Service Provider Shared Backbone
MPLS v2.27-6
Because Internet access is one of the most popular services that service providers offer their
customers, many service providers offer Internet access as well as MPLS VPN service on their
shared backbone. Integrating Internet access with an MPLS VPN solution is one of the most
common service provider business requirements. A background of common customer Internet
connectivity scenarios will help in assessing possible implementations.
7-7
Major Design Models

Network designers who want to offer Internet access and MPLS VPN services in the same
backbone can choose between these two major design models:
Internet access that is implemented through global routing on the provider edge (PE)
routers and that is not a VPN service
Internet access that is implemented as a separate VPN in the ISP network
Major Design Models

Two major design models:
Internet access separate from VPN services
Internet access as a separate VPN
MPLS v2.27-7
In both cases, security should be the most important concern for customers when they connect
to public networks. Customers should isolate private VPNs from Internet traffic, either
physically on a separate interface or on a subinterface. Appropriate firewall support either in a
dedicated device or integrated in the router Cisco IOS software is a necessity. Depending on the
network addressing, network address translation (NAT) will be needed for most customers.
7-8

This topic describes options for implementing Internet access through global routing.

Implementation via separate interfaces that are not
placed in any VRF, via either:
Static default routing on a PE
BGP between CE and PE
Benefits:
Well-known setup; equivalent to classical Internet service
Easy to implement; offers a wide range of design options
Drawback:
Requires separate physical links or WAN encapsulation
that supports subinterfaces
MPLS v2.27-8
Implementing Internet access through global routing is identical to building a traditional IP

backbone offering Internet services. Depending on whether or not the customer sites need full
Internet routes, static routes or Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is used for routing to the
Internet. For full Internet routes, BGP is deployed between the PE routers and the PE Internet
gateway to exchange Internet routes, and the global routing table on the PE routers is used to
forward the customer traffic toward Internet destinations. The PE routers may or may not have
the full Internet routing table. The PEs and the provider Internet gateway are in the same
Internal BGP (IBGP) area.
The PE routers also use Multiprotocol BGP (MP-BGP) to support VPNs for their customers.
The customers reach the global routing table by using a separate logical link for Internet access.
Internet access through global routing on separate logical links is easy to set up, because it is
the equivalent of the classical combination of Internet and VPN services that many customers
use today. This setup is also compatible with all the Internet services required by some
customers (for example, the requirement to receive full Internet routing from a service
provider).
The drawback of this design is the increased complexity, or cost, of the provider edge-customer
edge (PE-CE) connectivity. Separation of Internet and VPN connectivity requires either two
separate physical links or a single physical link with encapsulation that supports subinterfaces
(for example, Frame Relay).
7-9

This topic describes the benefits and drawbacks of having Internet access in a separate VPN.
Internet Access Through a Separate

VPN Service
Implementation through a separate VPN
Benefit:
The provider backbone is isolated from the Internet;
increased security is realized.
Drawback:
All Internet routes are carried as VPN routes; full Internet
routing cannot be implemented because of scalability
problems.
MPLS v2.27-9
For a service provider, implementing Internet access through a separate VPN is similar to
offering another managed VPN service.
The major benefit of implementing Internet access as a separate VPN is increased isolation
between the provider backbone and the Internetwhich results in increased security for the
provider. The flexibility of MPLS VPN topologies also provides for some innovative design
options that allow service providers to offer services that were simply not possible to
implement with pure IP routing.
The obvious drawback of running the Internet as a VPN in the MPLS VPN architecture is the
scalability of such a solution. An Internet VPN simply cannot carry full Internet routing
because of the scalability problems associated with having all the Internet routes inside a single
VPN.
7-10
Disadvantages of Providing Internet Access

Through Route Leaking
A third variant for Internet support with MPLS VPNs is to provision route leaking into the
global routing context. Although this not a recommended design, this option is briefly
discussed to show an alternate practice that has been used in the industry.
Internet Access Through Route Leaking

Implementation through corporate VPN
Benefit:
Does not use a separate connection for Internet traffic
Drawback:
Insecure because Internet traffic is mingled with corporate
traffic in the VPN
Harder to apply security policies on mingled traffic
Cannot implement full Internet routing because of
scalability problems
MPLS v2.27-10
Some customers may want to obtain Internet access across their corporate VPN by leaking
routes between the VRF and global routing tables.
Note
For security reasons, this approach is not recommended. It is not a good practice to
bring in Internet traffic using the corporate VPN. This practice negates the isolation of the
corporate VPN.
With route leaking, the customer site uses a static default route in the virtual routing and
forwarding (VRF) table pointing to the global next-hop address of an Internet gateway. Any
packets that use the default route leave the VPN space and are routed based on the global
routing table at the PE that is the next-hop router. This feature allows leaking of VPN packets
into the global address space.
The next-hop address for the static default route points to the interface where the Internet routes
are learned on the Internet gateway. This interface address must be present within the global
routing table so that label switching of the packets between the PE and Internet gateway router
can occur. This means that the Internet gateway router must advertise its Internet interface
address within the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) that runs across the service provider
backbone.
7-11
Because there is no redistribution between IP version 4 (IPv4) and VPN version 4 (VPNv4)
routes, a mechanism is needed to allow the PE router to resolve the next-hop address for the
Internet gateway from within the VRF. This is achieved through the use of the global keyword
within the static default route configuration. The global keyword specifies that the next-hop
address of the static route is resolved within the global routing table, not within the VRF.
Each of the customer IP subnets that are used as source addresses for Internet access must be
advertised through the global BGP version 4 (BGP-4) process toward the Internet. The easiest
solution for placing these routes in the global routing table is to configure further global static
routes so that the VPN subnets appear within the global routing table as well as the VRF. This
makes them available for advertisement via BGP-4. These static routes must point to an
interface, with a next-hop address specified if the outbound interface is multiaccess (such as
Ethernet). Then either these routes can be redistributed into BGP or the network command can
be used within the BGP process. If redistribution is used, a route map can be utilized to specify
which addresses to advertise.
Note
7-12
This approach is not recommended. It is not discussed further in this course. This
option is briefly discussed only to show an alternate practice that has been used in the
industry.
Summary
Summary
Classical Internet access connects through a central
firewall. You can use a centralized ISP managed firewall
service.
Multisite Internet access connects the firewall of every
site. You can use a centralized ISP-managed firewall
service.
Wholesale Internet access service offers connectivity
to multiple ISPs.
MPLS v2.27-11
Summary (Cont.)
There are two recommended service provider designs
for combining Internet access with MPLS VPN services:
Global routing (Internet access not from a VPN),
which uses separate interfaces that are not placed in
any VRF
Internet services as a separate VPN, which allows for
service provider separation of backbone and Internet
traffic
Route leaking is insecure and not recommended
because of this approach negates isolation of the
corporate VPN.
MPLS v2.27-12
7-13
7-14
Lesson 2
Implementing Separate
Internet Access and VPN
Services
Overview
This lesson describes implementing Internet access service totally separate from Multiprotocol
Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN) services. It is important to understand
why you may choose to use global routing to separate Internet access from VPN services.
This lesson identifies the provider edge-customer edge (PE-CE) requirements for separating
Internet access from VPN services and describes how to implement the solution in an MPLS
VPN network. This lesson is crucial for learners planning to enhance their usage of network
resources using MPLS VPNs.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the methods to separate Internet
access from VPN services. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Describe the features of classical Internet access for a VPN customer
Describe how separate subinterfaces are implemented to support Internet access using
global routing
Describe how Internet access can be obtained for every customer site
Identify the benefits and limitations of separating Internet access from VPN services
Classical Internet Access for a VPN Customer

This topic describes the features of classical Internet access for a VPN customer on a shared
service provider backbone.
Classical Internet Access for a VPN

Customer
MPLS v2.27-3
The classical Internet access design for a customer is based on a separate Internet access model.
One central customer site has connectivity to the Internet and provides access to the rest of the
customer sites. The central site either connects through a firewall or runs the Cisco IOS firewall
feature set.
In the shared service provider backbone, the provider edge (PE) routers have full or partial
Internet routes to offer the customer. The providers Internet gateway (Internet-GW) is in the
same Internal Border Gateway Protocol (IBGP) domain as the provider (P) and PE routers.
This design model can easily map to a customer with an MPLS VPN implementation. In this
example, the customer network has been interconnected with an MPLS VPN. A central
customer edge router (CE-Central) has Internet connectivity and provides Internet access
through a firewall for all the sites in the customer network.
This traditional Internet access implementation model provides maximum design flexibility,
because the Internet access is completely separated from the MPLS VPN services. However,
the limitations of traditional IP routing prevent this implementation method from being used for
innovative Internet access solutions, such as wholesale Internet access.
7-16

For security reasons, the VPN and Internet routes to a customer should be on separate
interfaces. This topic describes how separate subinterfaces can be used for implementing
Internet access through global routing.

Separate physical links for VPN and Internet traffic
are sometimes not acceptable because of high
cost.
Subinterfaces could be used.
Over WAN links using Frame Relay or ATM encapsulation
(including xDSL)
Over LAN links
A tunnel interface could be used.

Over a VRF-aware tunnel, so that VPN traffic does not run
over a global tunnel
MPLS v2.27-4
Instead of separate physical links for VPN and Internet traffic, subinterfaces can be used to
create two logical links over a single physical link. Subinterfaces can be configured only on
WAN links using Frame Relay or ATM encapsulation (including xDSL) and on LAN links
using any VLAN encapsulationInter-Switch Link Protocol (ISL) or 802.1q.
For other encapsulation types, a tunnel interface can be used between the CE router and the PE
router. Depending on the router platform and Cisco IOS version, virtual routing and forwarding
(VRF)-aware tunnels are now supported.
VRF-aware tunnels remove the need for the endpoints of the tunnel to be in a global
routing table.
Without a VRF-aware tunnel, MPLS VPN traffic would need to be tunneled across the
Internet interface.
Note
Further information on VRF-aware tunnels is outside the scope of this course.
7-17
Example Configuration: Static Routes
MPLS v2.27-5
Example: Internet Access Through Static Routes

Using static routing on the CE and the PE routers is the simplest and most common
implementation for providing Internet access. The figure illustrates a configuration used to
implement Internet access through two Frame Relay subinterfaces with static routes. In this
simple example, CE-Central does not need to receive full Internet routing; it just needs a
default static route to PE3 to reach the Internet. PE3 has a route to the Internet through
Internet-GW, as well as a static route for the Customer A subnets pointing to CE-Central. The
full Internet routing table needs to be present only on Internet-GW.
The following configuration steps are performed:
The customer VRF instance VPN-A is created.
The VPN subinterface (Serial0.1) is created and associated with data-link connection
identifier (DLCI) 101. The subinterface is added to the VPN-A VRF.
The CE router is configured as a BGP neighbor inside the VPN in the VRF VPN-A with
the neighbor ip-address remote-as as-number command in address-family ipv4
configuration mode.
A separate Internet subinterface (Serial0.2) is created and associated with DLCI 102.
A static route to the public CE routes is created and placed in the global routing table.
In addition to the PE configuration, the CE router implements a default static route pointing to
171.68.10.1 on PE3.
Note
7-18
On the CE-Central router, distribution of the default route may be needed so that remote
sites can also access the Internet. Issues of security and private addresses would have to
be resolved.
Example Configuration: Dynamic Routes
MPLS v2.27-6
Example: Dynamic Internet Access Through a Separate

Subinterface
The figure illustrates the configuration needed to implement Internet access through a dedicated
Frame Relay interface. Some additional configuration steps are needed, compared to the
previous static example:
The CE router is configured as a BGP neighbor in the global BGP process with the
neighbor ip-address remote-as as-number command in router configuration mode.
A static route to the public CE routes is not needed, because the central CE will advertise
the company routes to the PE through the BGP process
In this example, PE3 configures CE-Central as a BGP peer in the global BGP process using the
non-VPN interface as the neighbor address. CE-Central will also need to establish peering with
PE3 and announce the customer routes that it needs to advertise.
Note
On the CE routers, static routes or redistribution may need to be implemented so that

appropriate customer sites can access the Internet. Issues of security and private addresses
would have to be resolved.
7-19
Internet Access Through a Dedicated

SubinterfaceTraffic Flow
MPLS v2.27-7
Example: Internet Access Through a Dedicated Subinterface

Traffic Flow
The Internet traffic flow in this setup is identical to the traditional Internet traffic flow. When a
packet is received from the CE router through the Internet subinterface, a lookup is performed
in the global Forwarding Information Base (FIB) on the PE router, and the packet is forwarded
toward the BGP next hop.
7-20
Accessing the Internet from Every Customer Site

This topic describes how Internet access is implemented at every customer site.
Internet Access at Every Customer Site
Every CE router needs two links (or subinterfaces) to its PE

router.
Using a separate link or links for Internet access will lead to a
complex setup for this customer type.
MPLS v2.27-8
Another option is to provide separate Internet access at every customer site. In this case, two
physical (or logical) links between every CE router and its PE router would be needed. This
design often becomes too complex or too expensive to implement. Issues including customer
route propagation to the Internet and securing access at multiple access points would need to be
resolved.
Note
The allowas-in feature may need to be configured on the PE router if the customer is
propagating individual site routes to the Internet through BGP.
7-21
Separate Internet Access Benefits and

Limitations
This topic describes the benefits and limitations of separate Internet access.
Benefits and Limitations of Separate

Internet Access for the Service Provider
Benefits:
Well-known model
Supports all customer requirements
Allows all Internet services implementations, including a
BGP session with the customer
Drawbacks:
This design model requires separate physical link or specific
WAN encapsulation.
PE routers must be able to perform Internet routing
(and potentially carry full Internet routing).
Wholesale Internet access or central firewall service cannot
be implemented with this model.
MPLS v2.27-9
The benefits of a separate Internet access design model are as follows:

It is a well-known and widely understood model.
It supports all customer requirements, including multihomed customer connectivity with
full Internet routing.
This model allows all Internet services implementations, including BGP sessions with
customers.
The drawbacks of this model are as follows:
It requires two dedicated physical links between the PE and the CE router or specific WAN
or LAN encapsulations that might not be suitable for all customers.
The PE routers must be able to perform hop-by-hop Internet routing and use either the
default route to reach the Internet or carry the full Internet routing table.
Advanced Internet access services (central managed firewall service or wholesale Internet
access service) cannot be realized with this model at all.
7-22
Summary
Summary
Classical Internet access for a VPN customer is
based on a separated Internet access design
model
Separate subinterfaces can be used for
implementing Internet access through global
routing
Internet access from every customer site can be
supported but is often too complex or too
expensive with classic Internet access.
The main drawback of separate Internet access
is that PE routers potentially carry full Internet
routing table
MPLS v2.27-10
7-23
7-24
Lesson 3
Implementing Internet Access

as a Separate VPN
Overview
This lesson describes the characteristics of Internet access solutions in which the Internet access
is provided as a separate Virtual Private Network (VPN). The lesson identifies the scaling
issues of this design, and discusses how to implement the design in a Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS) VPN network.
This lesson is crucial for learners planning to improve their usage of network resources using
MPLS VPNs.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the characteristics of implementing
Internet access solutions in which the Internet access is provided as a separate VPN. This
Describe the features of using Internet access as a separate VPN
Describe the features of a redundant Internet access implementation
Configure classical Internet access for a VPN customer
Configure Internet access from every customer site
Describe how to implement wholesale Internet access
Identify the benefits and limitations of running an Internet backbone in a VPN

This topic describes the features of using a separate MPLS VPN to provide Internet access.

A provider Internet gateway is connected as a CE
router to the MPLS VPN backbone.
The Internet gateway does not insert full Internet
routing into the Internet VPN.
Only the default route and the local (regional)
routes are inserted.
Every customer site that needs Internet access is
assigned to the same Internet VPN as the Internet
gateway.
MPLS v2.27-3
The MPLS VPN architecture can provision a separate VPN to provide Internet access for VPN
customers. The service provider defines the Internet VPN and can use different MPLS VPN
topologies to implement various types of Internet access. Under this design model, the provider
Internet gateways appear as customer edge (CE) routers to the MPLS VPN backbone.
Customer Internet access is enabled using a dual VPN topology supporting both an Internet
VPN and a customer VPN across separate customer interfaces.
In this design, the Internet VPN should not contain the full set of global Internet routes, because
that would make the solution completely nonscalable. The provider Internet gateway routers
should announce a default route toward the provider edge (PE) routers. To optimize local
routing, the local and regional Internet routes should be inserted in the Internet VPN.
7-26
Internet Access as a Separate VPN (Cont.)
The Internet VPN is isolated from the P routers.

MPLS v2.27-4
When the service provider implements Internet access as a separate VPN, the Internet backbone
is carried on a VPN, which is isolated from the provider backbone. This topology results in
increased security for the provider backbone, because Internet hosts can reach only PE routers,
not the core provider routers (P routers). The VPN customers are connected to the Internet
simply through an additional virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance at the PE.
7-27
Example: Configuring the Internet Gateway in a Separate VPN

This section shows an example configuration implementing the Internet gateway in a separate
VPN.
Example: Configuring the Internet Gateway

in a Separate VPN
MPLS v2.27-5
The figure shows a sample configuration of the Internet-GW router with conditional default
route advertisement. Router Internet-GW will advertise the default route to the PE-GW router
only if Internet-GW can reach the network 192.168.0.0/16.
The following steps are used to configure this functionality:
7-28
Step 1
A static default route is configured toward a next hop in network 192.168.0.0. If the
network 192.168.0.0 is not reachable, this static route will not enter the IP routing
table.
Step 2
The default route origination is configured in the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
routing process with the network command. The default route will be originated in
BGP only if it is present in the IP routing table (which, based on Step 1, means that
the network 192.168.0.0/16 is reachable).
Step 3
Prefix lists are used to filter BGP routing updatesthe default route is sent only to
the PE routers, not to the other Internet routers.
Step 4
PE-GW configures the Internet VRF and applies it to the appropriate interface.
Implementing Redundant Internet Access

This topic describes how to implement redundant Internet access.
Redundant Internet Access
The default route should be advertised by all Internet gateways

only if they can reach the upstream ISP core.
MPLS v2.27-6
Redundant Internet access is easy to achieve when the Internet service is implemented as a
VPN in the MPLS VPN backbone:
Multiple Internet gateways (acting as CE routers) have to be connected to the MPLS VPN
backbone to ensure router and link redundancy.
All Internet gateways advertise the default route to the PE routers, resulting in routing
redundancy.
The Internet gateways also announce local Internet routes. Because these routes are
announced with different BGP attributes (most notably, multi-exit discriminator [MED]),
the PE routers select the proper Internet-GW router as the exit point toward those
destinations.
The MED attribute can also be used to indicate the preferred default route to the PE routers.
In this setup, one Internet-GW router acts as a primary Internet gateway, and the other
Internet-GW router acts as a backup.
The redundancy established so far covers the path between customer sites and the
Internet-GW routers. A failure in the Internet backbone might break the Internet
connectivity for the customers if the Internet-GW routers announce the default route
unconditionally. Conditional advertisement of the default route is therefore configured on
the Internet-GW routersthe Internet-GW routers announce the default route to the PE
routers only if the Internet-GW routers can reach an upstream destination.
7-29
Implementing Classical Internet Access for a

VPN Customer
This topic describes how to implement classical Internet access for a VPN customer.

Customer
MPLS v2.27-7
The classical Internet access model can be easily implemented with the Internet VPN over the
MPLS VPN backbone. The link between a PE router and the Internet-GW router is assigned to
the Internet VRF as discussed before. Internet-GW announces a default route to the Internet.
One link between the PE router and each central customer router is assigned to the customer
VRF, and one is assigned to the Internet VRF.
In this example, PE3 connects CE-Central of customer A to both the VPN-A VRF and the
Internet VRF. A prefix list is used on PE3 in the Internet address family configuration to filter
BGP advertisements to the CE-Central router.
7-30

Customer (Cont.)
MPLS v2.27-8
The CE-Central router has two neighbor relationships with PE3. It announces the summary
route for range of networks that have been assigned to customer A. These networks may be at
remote locations.
In this example, the remote locations CE-A1 and CE-A2 will need a default route across
VPN-A to reach CE-Central and through CE-Central reach the Internet.
If needed, an External BGP (EBGP) multihop session can be configured between the Internet
gateway (Internet-GW) and the CE-Central router to give full Internet routes to the customer.
These routes would not be injected into the Internet VRF.
7-31
Implementing Internet Access from Every

Customer Site
This topic describes how to implement Internet access from every customer site.
Internet Access from Every Customer Site
Configure Internet VRF

for every location.
MPLS v2.27-9
Internet access from every customer site can be implemented by configuring the Internet VRF
at every location. This solution adds complexity for the customer, because firewall and NAT
support may be needed at every site unless a central managed firewall service is offered by the
service provider.
7-32
Implementing Wholesale Internet Access

This topic describes how to implement the wholesale Internet access model.
A separate VPN is created for each upstream ISP.

Each ISP gateway announces the default route to the VPN.
Customers are assigned into the VRF that corresponds to the VPN of
the desired upstream ISP.
Changing an ISP is as easy as reassigning an interface into a
different VRF (and attending to address allocation issues).
MPLS v2.27-10
Wholesale Internet access is implemented by creating a separate VPN for every upstream
Internet service provider (ISP). The Internet gateway of the upstream ISP (acting as a CE router
toward the MPLS VPN-based Internet access backbone) announces a default route, which is
used for routing inside the VPN.
Customers are tied to upstream service providers simply by placing the PE-CE link into the
VRF associated with the upstream service provider. Changing an ISP becomes as easy as
reassigning the interface into a different VRF and attending to address allocation issues. For
customers using access methods supporting dynamic address allocation (for example, dialup or
cable), the new customer IP address is assigned automatically from the address space of the
new ISP.
7-33
Running an Internet Backbone in a VPN

This topic identifies the benefits and limitations of running an Internet backbone in a VPN.
Limitations of Running an Internet

Backbone in a VPN
Benefits:
Supports all Internet access service types
Can support all customer requirements, including
a BGP session with the customer, accomplished
through advanced BGP setup
Drawbacks:
Full Internet routing cannot be carried in the VPN;
default routes are needed that can lead to
suboptimal routing.
Internet gateway routers act as CE routers on the
VPN backbone; implementing overlapping Internet
and VPN backbones requires care.
MPLS v2.27-11
Internet access implemented as a separate VPN has the following benefits:

This design model supports all Internet access services, ranging from traditional Internet
access to innovative services such as wholesale Internet access.
This design also supports all customer requirements, including full Internet routing on
customer routers through an EBGP multihop session with the Internet gateway
(Internet-GW).
Internet access implemented as a separate VPN has the following drawbacks:
Full Internet routing cannot be carried inside a VPN; therefore, default routing toward the
Internet gateways has to be used, potentially resulting in suboptimal routing.
The Internet backbone gateway router is positioned as a customer edge route connected to
the MPLS VPN backbone. If the service provider runs Internet service and MPLS VPN
service on the same set of routers, the interconnection between the two services requires
special considerations.
The benefits of the separate VPN design far outweigh the limitations.
Note
7-34
An MPLS VPN extension is carrier supporting carrier (CSC). The CSC feature enables one
MPLS VPN-based service provider to allow other service providers to use a segment of its
backbone network. Discussion of the CSC feature is not within the scope of this course.
Summary
Summary
MPLS VPN architecture supports defining the Internet
as a VPN.
Redundant Internet access is easy to achieve.
The classical Internet access model can be easily
implemented using the Internet VPN.
Internet access from every customer site can be
implemented by configuring the Internet VRF on a
second interface at every location
Wholesale Internet access can be implemented by
creating a separate VPN for every upstream ISP.
Internet VPNs supports all customer requirements,
including full Internet routing.
MPLS v2.27-12
7-35
Module Summary
Module Summary
Separating Internet access from VPN services can
be accomplished though use of logical
subinterfaces.
Classical Internet access uses a separate logical
IPv4 interface.
MPLS VPN architecture can implement the Internet
as another VPN.
MPLS v2.27-1
There are several different models that are used to combine Internet access with Multiprotocol
Label Switching (MPLS) Virtual Private Network (VPN) services. Each model has benefits and
drawbacks. It is important to understand the implications of implementing the various models.
References
For additional information, refer to this resource:
Access Cisco.com for additional information about MPLS Internet access.
MPLS Internet Connectivity Options
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk436/tk428/technologies_white_paper09186a00801281f
1.shtml
7-36
Module Self-Check
Q1)
What is the major drawback of the classical Internet access model? (Source:
Introducing Internet Access Models with MPLS VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q2)
When the wholesale Internet access solution is implemented, which statement is

correct? (Source: Introducing Internet Access Models with MPLS VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q3)
using a separate VPN for Internet access

using global route leaking
using global routing on PE routers
using default routes
What are two major benefits of using VPNs to provide Internet access? (Choose two.)
(Source: Introducing Internet Access Models with MPLS VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q5)
The downstream ISP allocates a portion of its address space to the end users
connected to the Internet access backbone.
The upstream ISP allocates a portion of its address space to the end users
connected to the Internet access backbone.
Both the upstream and downstream ISPs must allocate a portion of their
address space to the end users connected to the Internet access backbone.
None of the above is correct.
What are the two major design models for implementing Internet access and MPLS
VPNs? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing Internet Access Models with MPLS VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q4)
All of the customer Internet traffic passes through the central firewall service.
None of the customer Internet traffic passes through the central firewall
service.
Only some of the customer Internet traffic passes through the central firewall
service.
There is no drawback.
Only some of the customer Internet traffic needs to pass through a firewall.
The provider backbone is isolated from the Internet.
Security is increased.
The Internet VRF can support full Internet routes.
What is the recommended implementation option for using global routing to provide
Internet access? (Source: Introducing Internet Access Models with MPLS VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
The separate subinterfaces are placed in separate VRFs.

The Internet subinterface is not placed in a VRF.
One interface for the Internet and the MPLS VPN is recommended.
Static routes are always needed for Internet access.
7-37
Q6)
Which is the main benefit of using separate interfaces or subinterfaces to provide

Internet access? (Source: Introducing Internet Access Models with MPLS VPNs)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q7)
The traditional Internet access implementation model provides _____. (Source:

Implementing Separate Internet Access and VPN Services)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q8)
B)
C)
D)
too complex to implement

too expensive to implement
too complex and too expensive to implement
the most secure solution to implement
The Internet VPN should _____. (Source: Implementing Internet Access as a Separate
VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
7-38
classical Internet access

route peaking
route leaking
classical Intranet access
For customers that need Internet access from every site, two physical (or logical) links
between every CE router and its PE router might be _____. (Source: Implementing
Separate Internet Access and VPN Services)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q11)
the Internet access should be integrated with the MPLS VPN through route
leaking
the Internet access should be integrated with the MPLS VPN through route
peaking
VRFs can be used to create two logical links over a single physical link
subinterfaces can be used to create two logical links over a single physical link
Which setup for a VPN customer is based on a separated Internet access design model?
(Source: Implementing Separate Internet Access and VPN Services)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q10)
minimum design flexibility, because the Internet access is completely

separated from the MPLS VPN services
maximum design flexibility, because the Internet access is completely
separated from the MPLS VPN services
the ability to put the separate subinterfaces into separate VRFs
no ability to use wholesale Internet services
In situations where cost prohibits separate physical links for VPN and Internet traffic
for classical Internet access, _____. (Source: Implementing Separate Internet Access
and VPN Services)
A)
Q9)
Wholesale Internet access or central firewall service cannot be implemented.

It is easy to implement internal BGP sessions between the PE router and CE
router.
They are well-known and are easy to implement.
The separate subinterfaces are placed in separate VRFs.
contain the full set of Internet routes because that would supportable optimal
routing
not contain the full set of Internet routes because that would make the solution
completely nonscalable
support route leaking because that would make the solution completely
scalable
not be used for optimal scalability
Q12)
What should multiple provider Internet gateways in the Internet VPN advertise to the
PE routers? (Source: Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q13)
In a classical Internet access using the separate VPN model, the link between a PE
router and the Internet gateway router is assigned to the _____ VRF, and the link
between a PE router and the CE-Central router is assigned to the _____ VRF. (Source:
Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q14)
creating a separate Internet VPN for every customer

assigning customers to their ISPs by default routes in the Internet VRF
creating a separate customer VPN
implementing the managed firewall service through the Internet gateway
Wholesale Internet access can be implemented by _____. (Source: Implementing

Internet Access as a Separate VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q17)
this option cannot be implemented with a VPN solution

firewall services would be needed at every site
any leaked routes support suboptimal routing
wholesale Internet access cannot be implemented
A central managed firewall service can be implemented by _____. (Source:

Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q16)
Internet, customer
customer, Internet
Internet, Internet
customer, customer
The main disadvantage of having Internet access at every customer site is that _____.
(Source: Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q15)
the full set of Internet routes, because that would support optimal routing
any leaked routes, to support optimal routing
the full set of Internet routes, because that would provide redundant routing
the default route, for routing redundancy
creating a separate VPN for every upstream ISP

assigning customers to their ISPs by default routes in the Internet VRF
creating a separate VPN for every customer
propagating full Internet routes into the Internet VRF
Which two are drawbacks of Internet access that is implemented as a separate VPN?
(Choose two.) (Source: Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Full Internet routing cannot be carried inside a VRF.

The customer has no ability to receive full Internet routes.
Default routing toward the Internet gateways has to be used, which can
potentially result in suboptimal routing.
The customer must use default routes.
7-39
7-40
Q1)
Q2)
Q3)
A, C
Q4)
B, C
Q5)
Q6)
Q7)
Q8)
Q9)
Q10)
Q11)
Q12)
Q13)
Q14)
Q15)
Q16)
Q17)
A, C
Module 8
MPLS TE Overview
Overview
This module provides a brief overview of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic
engineering (TE). The module covers the requirement for TE in modern networks and presents
the basic concepts and mechanics that support TE, including tunnel path discovery with linkstate protocols and tunnel path signaling with Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP). The
module describes the basic MPLS TE commands for the implementation of MPLS traffic
tunnels.
Module Objectives
Upon completing this module, you will be able to describe the tasks and commands that are
necessary to implement MPLS TE. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify basic TE and MPLS TE concepts
Identify MPLS TE components
Create and configure MPLS TE
Monitor basic MPLS TE on Cisco IOS platforms
8-2
Lesson 1
Introducing the TE Concept

Overview
This lesson describes the concepts that allow service providers and enterprises to map traffic
through specific routes to optimize network resources, especially bandwidth. Traffic
engineering (TE) enables backbone networks to be engineered to deliver the total subscribed
capacity to customers more efficiently.
This lesson is a helpful introduction for learners who are planning to improve the usage of their
network resources with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) TE.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the basic TE concepts. This ability
includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the concepts behind TE
Identify the major business drivers for implementing TE
Identify congestion avoidance and describe how TE can reduce some congestion-avoidance
issues
Identify how TE is implemented using a Layer 2 overlay model
Identify how TE is implemented using a Layer 3 model
Identify how TE is implemented using the MPLS TE model
What Is TE?
This topic identifies the underlying concepts of TE.
What Is Traffic Engineering?

Traffic engineering is manipulating your traffic to fit
your network.
Network engineering is building your network to
carry your predicted traffic.
TE is commonly used in voice telephony networks.
TE is a process of measures, models, and controls
of traffic to achieve various goals.
TE for data networks provides an integrated
approach to managing traffic at Layer 3.
MPLS v2.28-3
Traffic engineering (TE) can be contrasted to network engineering:

Traffic engineering is manipulating your traffic to fit your network
Network engineering is building your network to carry your predicted traffic
TE has been widely used in voice telephony. TE means that the traffic is measured and
analyzed. A statistical model is then applied to the traffic pattern to make a prognosis and
estimates.
If the anticipated traffic pattern does not match the network resources well, the network
administrator remodels the traffic pattern. Such decisions can be made to achieve a more
optimal use of the resources or to reduce costs by selecting a cheaper transit carrier.
In the data communications world, traffic engineering provides an integrated approach to
engineering traffic at Layer 3 in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The integrated
approach means that routers are configured to divert traffic from destination-based forwarding
and move the traffic load from congested parts of the network to uncongested parts.
Traditionally, this diversion has been done using overlay networks where routers use carefully
engineered ATM permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or Frame Relay PVCs to distribute the
traffic load on Layer 2.
8-4
What Is Traffic Engineering?

Traffic Engineering Motivations
Reduce the overall cost of operations by more
efficient use of bandwidth resources
Prevent a situation where some parts of a network
are overutilized (congested), while other parts
remain underutilized
Implement traffic protection against failures
Enhance SLA in combination with QoS
MPLS v2.28-4
Cost reduction is the main motivation for TE.

A cost savings, which results from a more efficient use of resources, will help to reduce the
overall cost of operations.
Additionally, more efficient use of bandwidth resources means that a service provider or
enterprise network manager can avoid a situation where some parts of a network are congested,
while other parts are underutilized.
Because TE can be used to control traffic flows, it can also be used to provide protection
against link or node failures by providing backup tunnels.
Finally, when combined with quality of service (QoS) functionality, TE can provide enhanced
service level agreements (SLAs).
MPLS TE Overview
8-5
Business Drivers for TE

This topic identifies some business drivers that may lead to implementation of TE.
Business Drivers for Traffic Engineering

Routers forward traffic along the least-cost route
discovered by routing protocols.
Network bandwidth may not be efficiently utilized:
The least-cost route may not be the only possible route.
The least-cost route may not have enough resources to
carry all the traffic.
Alternate paths may be underutilized.
MPLS v2.28-5
In a Layer 3 routing network, packets are forwarded hop by hop. In each hop, the destination
address of the packet is used to make a routing table lookup. The routing tables are created by
an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which finds the least-cost route, according to its metric, to
each destination in the network.
In many networks, this method works well. But in some networks, the destination-based
forwarding results in the overutilization of some links, while others are underutilized. This
imbalance will be the case when there are several possible routes to reach a certain destination.
The IGP selects one of them as the best and uses only that route. In the extreme case, the best
path may have to carry so large a volume of traffic that packets are dropped, while the next-best
path is almost idle.
One solution to the problem would be to adjust the link bandwidths to more appropriate values.
The network administrator could reduce the bandwidth on the underutilized link and increase
the bandwidth on the overutilized one. However, making this adjustment is not always possible.
The alternate path is a backup path. In the case of a primary link failure, the backup must be
able to forward at least the major part of the traffic volume that is normally forwarded by the
primary path. Therefore, it may not be possible to reduce the bandwidth on the backup path.
And without a cost savings, the budget may not allow an increase to the primary link
bandwidth.
8-6
To provide better network performance within the budget, network administrators move a
portion of the traffic volume from the overutilized link to the underutilized link. During normal
operations, this move results in fewer packet drops and quicker throughput. In the case of a
failure to any of the links, all traffic is forwarded over the remaining link, which then, of
course, becomes overutilized.
Moving portions of the traffic volume cannot be achieved by traditional hop-by-hop routing
using an IGP for path determination.
Business Drivers for Traffic Engineering

(Cont.)
Lack of resources results in congestion in two
ways:
When network resources themselves are insufficient to
accommodate offered load
When traffic streams are inefficiently mapped onto
available resources
Some resources are overutilized while others

remain underutilized.
MPLS v2.28-6
Network congestion, caused by too much traffic and too few network resources, cannot be
solved by moving portions of the traffic between different links. Moving the traffic will help
only in the case where some resources are overutilized and others are underutilized. The traffic
streams in normal Layer 3 routing are inefficiently mapped onto the available resources.
Good mapping of the traffic streams onto the resources constitutes better use of the money
invested in the network.
Cost savings that result in a more efficient use of bandwidth resources help to reduce the
overall cost of operations. These reductions, in turn, help service providers and organizations
gain an advantage over their competitors. This advantage becomes more and more important as
the service provider market gets more and more competitive.
A more efficient use of bandwidth resources means that a provider could avoid a situation
where some parts of its network are congested while other parts are underutilized.
MPLS TE Overview
8-7
Congestion Avoidance and TE

This topic discusses congestion avoidance and how TE can reduce some congestion issues.
Congestion Avoidance and Traffic

Engineering
Network congestion can be addressed by
either:
Expansion of capacity or classical congestion
control techniques (queuing, rate limiting, and so
on)
Traffic engineering, if the problems result from
inefficient resource allocation
The focus of TE is not on congestion created

as a result of a short-term burst, but on
congestion problems that are prolonged.
MPLS v2.28-7
TE does not solve temporary network congestion that is caused by traffic bursts. This type of
problem is better handled by an expansion of capacity or by classical techniques such as
various queuing algorithms, rate limiting, and intelligent packet dropping. TE does not solve
problems when the network resources themselves are insufficient to accommodate the required
load.
TE is used when the problems result from inefficient mapping of traffic streams onto the
network resources. In such networks, one part of the network suffers from prolonged
congestion, possibly continuously, while other parts of the network have spare capacity.
8-8
TE with a Layer 2 Overlay Model

This topic discusses the use of a Layer 2 overlay model with TE.
Traffic Engineering with a Layer 2 Overlay

Model
The use of the explicit Layer 2 transit layer allows very exact control of
how traffic uses the available bandwidth.
PVCs or SVCs carry traffic across Layer 2.
Layer 3 at the edge sees a complete mesh.
MPLS v2.28-8
In the Layer 2 overlay model, the routers (Layer 3 devices) are overlaid on top of the Layer 2
topology. The routers are not aware of the physical structure and the bandwidth that is available
on the links. The IGP views the PVCs or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) as point-to-point
links and makes its forwarding decisions accordingly.
All engineering is done at Layer 2. PVCs are carefully engineered across the network, normally
using an offline management system. SVCs are automatically established using signaling, and
their way across the Layer 2 network is controlled by integrated path determination, such as the
Private Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) protocol.
In the Layer 2 overlay model, PVCs or SVCs carry the traffic across the network. With a Frame
Relay network, PVC setup is most often made using a management tool that helps the network
administrator calculate the optimum path across the Layer 2 network with respect to available
bandwidth and other constraints that may be applied on individual links.
ATM may use the same type of tools as Frame Relay for PVC establishment or may use the
SVC approach, where routers use a signaling protocol to dynamically establish an SVC.
If the Layer 2 network provides a full mesh between all routers, the Layer 3 IGP sees all the
other routers as directly connected and, most likely, uses the direct logical link whenever it
forwards a packet to another router. The full mesh gives Layer 2 full control of the traffic load
distribution. Manual engineering of PVCs and the configuration of PNNI parameters are the
tools that allow very exact control of how the traffic uses the available bandwidth.
MPLS TE Overview
8-9

Model: Example
MPLS v2.28-9
Traffic engineering in Layer 2, using the overlay model, allows detailed decisions about which
link should be used to carry various traffic patterns.
In this example, traffic from R2 to R3 uses the red PVC (solid arrows), which takes the shortest
path using the upper transit switch.
However, traffic from R1 to R3 uses the blue PVC (dashed arrows), which does not take the
shortest path. TE on Layer 2 has been applied to let the second PVC use links that would
otherwise have been underutilized. This approach avoids overutilization of the upper path.
8-10

Model (Cont.)
Drawbacks of the Layer 2 overlay solution
Extra network devices
More complex network management:
Two-level network without integrated network
management
Additional training, technical support, field engineering
IGP routing scalability issue for meshes

Additional bandwidth overhead (cell tax)
No differential service (class of service)
MPLS v2.28-10
Using the Layer 2 overlay model has several drawbacks:

The routers are not physically connected to other routers. The Layer 2 network introduces
the need for an additional device, the ATM or Frame Relay switch.
Two networks must be managed. The Layer 2 network requires its own management tools,
which, among several other tasks, support TE as well. At the same time, the router network
(Layer 3), with its IGP and tuning parameters, must be managed. Both these management
tasks require trained staff for technical support and in the field.
The Layer 3 network must be highly meshed to take advantage of the benefits that are
provided by the Layer 2 network. The highly meshed network may cause scalability
problems for the IGP because of the large number of neighbors.
Overlay networks always require an extra layer of encapsulation. A Frame Relay header
must be added to the IP packets, or, when ATM is used, the IP packet must be segmented
into cells, each of which must have its own header. The extra layer of encapsulation causes
bandwidth overhead.
The Layer 2 devices do not have any Layer 3 knowledge. After the router has transmitted
the IP packet across the physical link to the first switch, all IP knowledge is lost. When
congestion does occur in the Layer 2 network, the switches have no ability to selectively
discard IP packets or to requeue them. Thus, no IP differentiated services can be used
within the Layer 2 switch network.
MPLS TE Overview
8-11
TE with a Layer 3 Model

This topic discusses the use of a Layer 3 model with TE.
Layer 3 Model with No Traffic Engineering
MPLS v2.28-11
If the same network topology is created using routers (Layer 3 devices), TE must be performed
differently. In the example here, if no traffic engineering is applied to the network, traffic from
both R8 and R1 toward R5 will use the least-cost path (the upper path). This flow may result in
the overutilization of the path R2, R3, R4, R5, while the path R2, R6, R7, R4, R5 will be
underutilized.
8-12
Traffic Engineering with a Layer 3 Model

(Cont.)
The current forwarding paradigm, centered around
destination-based, is clearly inadequate:
Path computation based just on IGP metric is not
enough.
Support for explicit routing (source routing) is not
available.
Supported workarounds are static routes, policy
routing.
Provide controlled backup and recovery.
MPLS v2.28-12
The destination-based forwarding paradigm that is currently used in Layer 3 networks cannot
resolve the problem of overutilization of one path while an alternate path is underutilized.
The IGP uses its metric to compute a single best way to reach each destination. There are
problems with Layer 3 TE:
IP source routing could be used to override the IGP-created routing table in each of the
intermediate routers. However, in a service provider network, source routing is most often
prohibited. The source routing would also require the host to create the IP packets to
request source routing. The conclusion is that source routing is not an available tool for TE.
Static routing, which overrides the IGP, can be used to direct traffic to take a different path
than that of other traffic. However, static routing does not discriminate among various
traffic flows based on the source. Static routing also restricts how redundancy in the
network can be used.
Policy-based routing (PBR) is able to discriminate packet flows based on the source, but it
suffers from low scalability and the same static routing restrictions as to how redundancy
can be used.
MPLS TE Overview
8-13
TE with the MPLS TE Model

This topic discusses using TE with the MPLS TE model.
Traffic Engineering with the MPLS TE Model
Tunnel is assigned labels that represent the path (LSP) through the
system.
Forwarding within the MPLS network is based on labels
(no Layer 3 lookup).
MPLS v2.28-13
In the MPLS TE implementation, routers use MPLS label switching with TE.
The aim is to control the paths along which data flows, rather than relying simply on
destination-based routing. MPLS TE uses tunnels to control the data flow path. An MPLS TE
tunnel is simply a collection of data flows that share some common attribute. This attribute
might be all traffic sharing the same entry point to the network and the same exit point.
A TE tunnel maps onto an MPLS label-switched path (LSP). After the data flows and the TE
tunnels are defined, MPLS technology is used to forward traffic across the network. Data is
assigned an MPLS TE, which defines the route taken through the network. The packets that are
forwarded under MPLS TE have a stack of two labels imposed by the ingress router. The
topmost label identifies a specific LSP or TE tunnel to use to reach another router at the other
end of the tunnel. The second label indicates what the router at the far end of the tunnel should
do with the packet.
Note
8-14
Additional details on MPLS tunnels are covered in the next lesson.
Traffic Engineering with the MPLS TE

Model (Cont.)
The MPLS TE LSPs are created by RSVP.
The actual path can be specified:
Explicitly defined by the system administrator
Dynamically defined using the underlying IGP protocol
MPLS v2.28-14
For MPLS TE, manual assignment and configuration of the labels can be used to create LSPs to
tunnel the packets across the network on the desired path. However, to increase scalability, the
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is used to automate the procedure.
By selecting the appropriate LSP, a network administrator can direct traffic via explicitly
indicated routers. The explicit path across identified routers provides benefits that are similar to
those of the overlay model without introducing a Layer 2 network. This approach also
eliminates the risk of running into IGP scalability problems because of the many neighbors that
exist in a full mesh of routers.
MPLS TE provides mechanisms equivalent to those described previously in this lesson in
connection with the Layer 2 overlay network. For circuit-style forwarding, instead of using
ATM or Frame Relay virtual circuits, the MPLS TE tunnel is used. For signaling, RSVP is used
with various extensions to set up the MPLS TE tunnels.
For constraint-based routing (CBR) used in MPLS TE, either Intermediate System-toIntermediate System (IS-IS) or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) with extensions is used to
carry resource information, such as available bandwidth on the link. Both link-state protocols
use new attributes to describe the nature of each link with respect to the constraints. A link that
does not have the required resource is not included in the MPLS TE tunnel.
To actually direct the traffic onto the MPLS TE tunnels, network administrators need
extensions to IS-IS and OSPF. Directing the traffic into tunnels results in the addition of entries
in the Forwarding Information Base (FIB). The IP packets are directed into the MPLS TE
tunnel by imposing the correct label stack.
MPLS TE Overview
8-15
Summary
Summary
Traffic engineering measures, models, and controls
traffic to achieve various goals.
TE is driven by inefficient bandwidth utilization.
TE focuses on prolonged congestion problems.
With the TE Layer 2 overlay model, routers are not aware of

the physical structure and bandwidth available on links.
With the TE Layer 3 model, the destination-based forwarding
paradigm cannot handle the problem of overutilization of
one path while an alternate path is underutilized.
TE with the MPLS TE model means that the routers use the
MPLS label-switching paradigm.
MPLS v2.28-15
References
RFC 3209, RSVP-TE: Extensions to RSVP for LSP Tunnels
8-16
Lesson 2
Understanding MPLS TE
Components
Overview
This lesson explains the components of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic
engineering (TE), such as traffic tunnels (along with associated characteristics and attributes),
tunnel path discovery based on link-state protocols, and tunnel setup signaling with Resource
Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the basic components of MPLS TE.
This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify, at a conceptual level, how a traffic tunnel functions
Identify traffic tunnel characteristics
Identify traffic tunnel attributes
Identify the relation between network links and link attributes
Identify the function of constraint-based path computation
Identify TE procedures
Identify the role of RSVP in path setup and admission contol
Identify how using TE modifies the forwarding table mechanisms

This topic describes the concept of traffic tunnels.

The concept of MPLS TE traffic tunnels was
introduced to overcome the limitations of hop-byhop IP routing:
A tunnel is an aggregation of traffic flows that are
placed inside a common MPLS label-switched path.
Flows are then forwarded along a common path
within a network.
MPLS v2.28-3
The aim of TE is to control the paths along which data flows, rather than relying simply on
normal destination-based routing. To fulfill this aim, the concept of a traffic tunnel has
been introduced.
A traffic tunnel is simply a collection of data flows that share some common attribute:
Most simply, this attribute might be the sharing of the same entry point to the network and
the same exit point. In practice, this point could be an Internet service provider (ISP)
network, where there is a definable data flow from the points of presence (POPs), where
the customers attach to the ISP network. There are also the Internet exchange points (IXPs),
where data typically leaves the ISP network to traverse the Internet.
In a more complex situation, this attribute could be augmented by defining separate tunnels
for different classes of service. For example, in an ISP model, leased-line corporate
customers could be given a preferential throughput over dial-in home users. This
preference might be greater guaranteed bandwidth or lower latency and higher precedence.
Even though the traffic enters and leaves the ISP network at the same points, different
characteristics could be assigned to these types of users by defining separate traffic tunnels
for their data.
8-18
Traffic Tunnels: Concepts (Cont.)
Unidirectional single class of service model encapsulates all

of the traffic between an ingress and an egress router.
Different classes of service model assigns traffic into
separate tunnels with different characteristics.
MPLS v2.28-4
Defining traffic trunks (tunnels) requires an understanding of the traffic flows in the network.
By understanding the ingress and corresponding egress points, a picture of the traffic flows in
the network can be produced.
In the example, there are two traffic tunnels (TT1 and TT2) that are defined for data from PE1
to PE3. These tunnels are unidirectional; they identify the traffic flows from PE1.
Note
In practice, there are probably similar tunnels operating in the opposite direction, to PE1.
There may also be tunnels that are defined from all the other routers to each other. Defining
tunnels from every router in the network to every router might sound like an administrative
nightmare. However, this is not usually the case for the following reasons:
The routers that are identified are on the edge of the network. The traffic tunnels link these
routers across the core of the network.
In most networks it is relatively easy to identify the traffic flows, and they rarely form a
complete any-to-any mesh.
For example, in ISP networks, the traffic tunnels generally form a number of star
formations, with their centers at the IXPs and the points at the POPs. Traffic in an ISP
network generally flows from the customers that are connected at the POPs to the rest of
the Internet (reached via the IXPs). A star-like formation can also exist in many networks
centering on the data center. This tendency is found in both ISP networks (providing webhosting services) and enterprise networks.
After the data flows, and therefore the traffic tunnels, are defined, the technology that they use
to forward the data across the network is MPLS. Data that enters a traffic tunnel is assigned an
MPLS label-switched path (LSP). The LSP defines the route that is taken through the network.
MPLS TE Overview
8-19
Traffic Tunnels: Characteristics

This topic describes the characteristics of traffic tunnels.
Traffic Tunnels Characteristics

A traffic tunnel is distinct from the MPLS LSP
through which it traverses:
More than one TE tunnel can be defined between two
points:
Each tunnel may pick the same or different paths
through the network
Each tunnel will use different MPLS labels
A traffic tunnel can be moved from one path onto another
based on resources in the network.
A traffic tunnel is configured by defining its

required attributes and characteristics.
MPLS v2.28-5
Traffic tunnels are distinct from the MPLS LSPs that they use in two key ways:
There is a one-to-one mapping of traffic tunnels onto MPLS LSPs. Two tunnels may be
defined between two points and may happen to pick the same path through the network.
However, they will use different MPLS labels.
Traffic tunnels are not necessarily bound to a particular path through the network. As
resources change in the core, or perhaps as links fail, the traffic tunnel may reroute, picking
up a new MPLS LSP as it does.
Configuring the traffic tunnels includes defining the characteristics and attributes that it
requires. In fact, defining the characteristics and attributes of traffic tunnels is probably the
most important aspect of TE. Without a specification of the requirements of the data in a traffic
tunnel, the data might as well be left to route normally based only on destination information
over the least-cost path.
8-20

This topic describes the attributes of traffic tunnels.
Attributes are explicitly assigned through administrative action.

A traffic tunnel is characterized by:
Its ingress (headend) and egress (tailend) label switch routers
The forwarding equivalence class that is mapped onto it
A set of attributes that determine its characteristics
MPLS v2.28-6
A traffic tunnel is a set of data flows sharing some common feature, attribute, or requirement. If
there is no characteristic in the data flow in common with some other flow, there is nothing to
define that data as part of a flow or group of flows.
Therefore, the traffic tunnel must include attributes that define the commonality between the
data flows making up the tunnel. The attributes that characterize a traffic tunnel include the
following:
Ingress and egress points: These points are, fundamentally, the routers at the ends of the
tunnel. They are the most basic level of commonality of data flows, given that the flows in
a tunnel all start in the same place and end in the same place.
Complex characteristics of the data flows: Examples are bandwidth and latency and
precedence requirements.
Class of data: This attribute defines what data is part of this tunnel and what is not. This
definition includes such characteristics as traffic flow, class of service, and application
class.
The network administrator defines the attributes of a traffic tunnel when the tunnel itself is
defined. However, some of these attributes are, in part, influenced by the underlying network
and protocols.
Note
MPLS TE setup is a control plane function.
MPLS TE Overview
8-21
Traffic TunnelsAttributes (Cont.)

The administrator enters the relevant information
(attributes) at the headend of the traffic tunnel:
Traffic parameterResources required for tunnel (for example,
required bandwidth)
Generic path selection and managementPath can be
administratively specified or computed by the IGP
Resource class affinityInclude or exclude certain links for
certain traffic tunnels
AdaptabilityShould the traffic tunnel be reoptimized?
Priority and preemptionImportance of a traffic tunnel and
possibility for a preemption of another tunnel
ResilienceDesired behavior under fault conditions
MPLS v2.28-7
The general tunnel characteristics must be configured by the network administrator to create the
tunnel. This configuration includes some or all of the following:
Traffic parameters: Traffic parameters are the resources that are required by the tunnel,
such as the minimum required bandwidth.
Generic path selection and management: This category refers to the path selection
criteria. The actual path that is chosen through the network could be statically configured
by the administrator or could be assigned dynamically by the network, based on
information from the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which is Intermediate SystemIntermediate System (IS-IS) or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).
Resource class affinity: This category refers to restricting the choice of paths by allowing
the dynamic path to choose only certain links in the network.
Note
This restriction can also be accomplished by using the IP address exclusion feature.
Adaptability: Adaptability is the ability of the path to reroute on failure or to optimize on

recovery or discovery of a better path.
Priority and preemption: Traffic tunnels can be assigned a priority (0 to 7) that signifies
their importance. When you are setting up a new tunnel or rerouting, a higher-priority
tunnel can tear down (preempt) a lower-priority tunnel; in addition, a new tunnel of lower
priority may fail to set up because some tunnels of a higher priority already occupy the
required bandwidth of the lower-priority tunnel.
Resilience: Resilience refers to how a traffic tunnel responds to a failure in the network.
Does it attempt to reroute around failures or not?
8-22

This topic discusses the relationship between network links and link attributes.

Resource attributes (link availability) are
configured locally on the router interfaces:
Maximum bandwidth
The amount of bandwidth available
Link affinity string

To allow the operator to administratively include or exclude
links in path calculations
Constraint-based specific metric

TE default metric
MPLS v2.28-8
For the tunnel to dynamically discover its path through the network, the headend router must be
provided with information on which to base this calculation. Specifically, it needs to be
provided with the following:
Maximum bandwidth: The maximum bandwidth is the amount of bandwidth that is
available on each link in the network. Because there are priority levels for traffic tunnels,
the availability information must be sent for each priority level for each link. Including
priority levels means that the path decision mechanism is given the opportunity to choose a
link with some bandwidth already allocated to a lower-priority tunnel, forcing that lowerpriority tunnel to be bounced off the link.
Link resource class: For administrative reasons, the network administrator may decide
that some tunnels are not permitted to use certain links. To accomplish this goal, for each
link, a link resource class must be defined and advertised. The definition of the tunnel may
include a reference to particular affinity bits. The tunnel affinity bits are matched against
the link resource class to determine whether a link may be used as part of the LSP.
Constraint-based specific metric: Each link has a cost or metric for calculating routes in
the normal operation of the IGP. It may be that, when calculating the LSP for traffic
tunnels, the link should use a different metric. Thus, a constraint-based specific metric may
be specified.
MPLS TE Overview
8-23

This topic introduces constraint-based path computation.

Constraint-based routing is demand-driven.
Resource-reservation-aware routing paradigm:
Based on criteria including, but not limited to,
network topology
Calculated at the edge of a network:
Modified Dijkstras algorithm at tunnel headend (CSPF
[Constraint-based SPF] or PCALC [path calculation]).
Output is a sequence of IP interface addresses (nexthop routers) between tunnel endpoints.
MPLS v2.28-9
In traditional networks, the IGP calculates paths through the network based on the network
topology alone. Routing is destination-based, and all traffic to a given destination from a given
source uses the same path through the network. That path is based simply on what the IGP
regards as the least cost between the two points (source and destination).
Constraint-based routing (CBR) is the term that is used most often for this approach. In some
situations it is also referred to as a constraint-based shortest path first (CSPF) calculation or a
path calculation (PCALC).
CBR behaves in these ways:
It augments the use of link cost by also considering other factors, such as bandwidth
availability or link attributes, when choosing the path to a destination.
It tends to be carried out at the edge of the network, discovering a path across the core to
some destination elsewhere at the other edge of the network. Typically, this discovery uses
the CSPF calculation (a version of shortest path first [SPF] that is used by IS-IS and OSPF,
but considering other factors besides cost, such as bandwidth availability).
It produces a sequence of IP addresses that correspond to the routers that are used as the
path to the destination; these addresses are the next-hop addresses for each stage of the
path.
A consequence of CBR is that, from one source to one destination, many different paths can be
used through the network, depending on the requirements of those data flows.
8-24
Constraint-Based Path Computation (Cont.)

Constraint-based routing takes into account:
Policy constraints associated with the tunnel and physical
links
Physical resource availability
Network topology state
Two types of tunnels can be established across

those links with matching attributes:
DynamicUsing the least-cost path computed by OSPF or
IS-IS
ExplicitDefinition of a path by using Cisco IOS
configuration commands
MPLS v2.28-10
When choosing paths through the network, the CBR system takes into account the following
factors:
The topology of the network, including information about the state of the links (the same
information that is used by normal hop-by-hop routing)
The resources that are available in the network, such as the bandwidth not already allocated
on each link and at each of the eight priority levels (priority 0 to 7)
The requirements that are placed on the constraint-based calculation that is defining the
policy or the characteristics of this traffic tunnel
Of course, CBR is a dynamic process, which responds to a request to create a path and
calculates (or recalculates) the path based on the status of the network at that time. The network
administrator can also explicitly define the traffic tunnel.
By using commands such as exclude-address or next-hop loose in the explicit path
configuration, the network administrator can mix static and dynamic computation.
MPLS TE Overview
8-25
MPLS v2.28-11
An example network is shown in the figure. Each link specifies a link cost for metric
calculation and a bandwidth available for reservation; for example, a metric of 10 and an
available bandwidth of 100 Mbps is shown for the link between R1 and R2. Other than these
criteria, no links are subject to any policy restriction that would disallow their use for creating
traffic tunnels.
The requirement is to create a tunnel from R1 to R6 with a bandwidth of 30 Mbps.
Based simply on the link costs, the least-cost path from R1 to R6 is R1-R4-R6 with a cost of
30. However, the link from R4 to R6 has only 20 Mbps of bandwidth available for reservation
and therefore cannot fulfill the requirements of the tunnel.
Similarly, the link R5-R6 has only 20 Mbps available as well, so no paths can be allocated
via R5.
8-26
MPLS v2.28-12
The diagram now shows only those links that can satisfy the requirement for 30 Mbps of
available bandwidth.
Over this topology, two tunnel paths are shown:
The red (solid arrow) path shows the result of a dynamic constraint-based path calculation.
The calculation has ignored any links that do not satisfy the bandwidth requirement (those
shown in the previous figure but not shown here, such as the connections to R5) and then
executes a CSPF calculation on what remains. This calculation has yielded the path R1-R2R5-R6 with a path cost of 40.
The network administrator has statically defined the blue (dashed arrow) path (R1-R4-R5R6). Had the administrator attempted to define a path that did not have the required free
bandwidth, tunnel establishment would have failed. This tunnel does indeed fulfill the
minimum bandwidth requirement. However, adding the link costs yields a total of 45,
which is not the lowest cost possible.
MPLS TE Overview
8-27
TE Processes
This topic explains the processes used in traffic engineering (TE).
Traffic Engineering Processes

Information distribution
Path selection and calculation
Path setup
Trunk admission control
Forwarding traffic on to tunnel
Path maintenance
MPLS v2.28-13
There are six TE processes to understand:

Information distribution: Because the resource attributes are configured locally for each
link, they must be distributed to the headend routers of traffic trunks. These resource
attributes are flooded throughout the network using extensions to link-state intradomain
routing protocols, either IS-IS and OSPF. The flooding takes places under these conditions:
Link-state changes occur.
The resource class of a link changes (this could happen when a network
administrator reconfigures resource class of a link).
The amount of available bandwidth crosses one of the preconfigured thresholds.
The frequency of flooding is bounded by the OSPF and IS-IS timers. There are up
thresholds and down thresholds. The up thresholds are used when a new trunk is admitted.
The down thresholds are used when an existing trunk goes away.
Note
8-28
Extensions to IS-IS and OSPF are discussed in a later topic.
Path selection: Path selection for a traffic trunk takes place at the headend routers of traffic
trunks. Using extended IS-IS or OSPF, the edge routers have knowledge of both network
topology and link resources. For each traffic trunk, the router starts from the destination of
the trunk and attempts to find the shortest path toward the source (that is, using the SPF
algorithm). The SPF calculation does not consider the links that are explicitly excluded by
the resource class affinities of the trunk or the links that have insufficient bandwidth. The
output of the path selection process is an explicit route consisting of a sequence of label
switching routers. This path is used as the input to the path setup procedure.
Path setup: Path setup is initiated by the headend routers. Resource Reservation Protocol
(RSVP) is the protocol that establishes the forwarding state along the path computed in the
path selection process. The headend router sends a PATH message for each traffic trunk it
originates.
Trunk admission control: Trunk admission control handles the situation when a router
along a computed path has insufficient bandwidth to honor the resource requested in the
PATH message.
Forwarding of traffic to a tunnel: Traffic can be forwarded to a tunnel by several means,
including these:
Static routing
Policy routing from the global routing table
Autoroute
Path maintenance: Path maintenance refers to two operations: path reoptimization and
restoration.
MPLS TE Overview
8-29
Role of RSVP in Path Setup and Trunk Admission

Control
This topic explains how RSVP is used in setting up an LSP path and in trunk admission control.
Role of RSVP in Path Setup Procedures

When the path has been determined, a signaling
protocol is needed:
To establish and maintain label-switched paths (LSPs) for
traffic tunnels
For creating and maintaining resource reservation states
across a network (bandwidth allocation)
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) was

adopted by the MPLS workgroup of the IETF.
MPLS v2.28-14
The result of the constraint-based calculation is a list of routers that form the path to the
destination. The path is a list of IP addresses that identify each next hop along the path.
However, this list of routers is known only to the router at the headend of the tunnel that is
attempting to build the tunnel. Somehow, this now-explicit path must be communicated to the
intermediate routers. It is not up to the intermediate routers to make their own CSPF
calculations; they merely abide by the path that is provided to them by the headend router.
Therefore, some signaling protocol is required to confirm the path, to check and apply the
bandwidth reservations, and finally to apply the MPLS labels to form the MPLS LSP through
the routers. The MPLS working group of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) has
adopted RSVP to confirm and reserve the path and apply the labels that identify the tunnel.
Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) is used to apply the labels for the underlying MPLS
network.
Note
8-30
RSVP is needed for both explicit and dynamic path setup.

RSVP is used for path setup.

When the path has been calculated, it must be
signaled across the network.
Reserve any bandwidth to avoid double booking from
other TE reservations.
Priority can be used to preempt low priority existing tunnels.
RSVP is used to set up TE LSP.

PATH message (from head to tail) carries LABEL_REQUEST.
RESV message (from tail to head) carries LABEL.
When RESV messages reaches headend, tunnel

interface is up.
RSVP messages exist for LSP teardown and error
signaling.
MPLS v2.28-15
To signal the calculated path across the network, a PATH message is sent to the tailend router
by the headend router for each traffic tunnel the headend originates.
Note
This process occurs in the MPLS control plane.
The PATH message carries the explicit route (the output of the path selection process)
computed for this traffic trunk, consisting of a sequence of label switching routers. The PATH
message always follows this explicit route. Each intermediate router along the path performs
trunk admission control after receiving the PATH message. When the router at the end of the
path (tailend router) receives the PATH message, it sends a RESV message in the reverse
direction toward the headend of the traffic trunk. As the RESV message flows toward the
sender, each intermediate node reserves bandwidth and allocates labels for the trunk. When the
RESV message reaches the sender, the LSP is already established.
RSVP messages also support for LSP teardown and error signaling.
MPLS TE Overview
8-31
Trunk Admission Control with RSVP

RSVP is also used in trunk admission control.
RSVP and Trunk Admission Control

On receipt of PATH message:
Router checks whether there is bandwidth available to
honor the reservation.
If bandwidth is available, then RSVP is accepted.
On receipt of a RESV message:

Router actually reserves the bandwidth for the TE LSP.
If preemption is required, lower priority LSPs are torn
down.
OSPF or IS-IS updates are triggered.
MPLS v2.28-16
Trunk admission control is used to confirm that each device along the computed path has
sufficient provisioned bandwidth to support the resource requested in the PATH message.
When a router receives a PATH message, it checks whether there is enough bandwidth to honor
the reservation at the setup priority of the traffic trunk. Priority levels 0 to 7 are supported. If
there is enough provisioned bandwidth, the reservation is accepted, otherwise the path setup
fails. When the router receives the RESV message, it reserves bandwidth for the LSP. If
preemption is required, the router must tear down existing trunks with a lower priority. As part
of trunk admission control, the router must do local accounting to keep track of resource
utilization and trigger IS-IS or OSPF updates when the available resource crosses the
configured thresholds.
8-32

This topic discusses changes that occur in the forwarding table when MPLS TE is
implemented.

IP routing is separate from LSP routing and does
not see internal details of the LSP.
The traffic has to be mapped to the tunnel:
Static routingThe static route in the IP routing table
points to an LSP tunnel interface.
Policy routingThe next-hop interface is an LSP tunnel.
AutorouteSPF enhancement:
The headend sees the tunnel as a directly connected interface
(for modified SPF only).
The default cost of a tunnel is equal to the shortest IGP metric
regardless of the used path.
MPLS v2.28-17
The tunnel normally does not appear in the IP routing table. The IP routing process does not see
the tunnel, so the tunnel is normally not included in any SPF calculations. The IP traffic can be
mapped onto a tunnel in four ways:
Using static routes that point to the tunnel interfaces.
Using policy-based routing (PBR) and setting the next hop for the destination to the
tunnel interface.
Using the autoroute feature, an SPF enhancement that includes the tunnel interface in the
route calculation as well. The result of the autoroute feature is that the tunnel is seen at the
headend (and only there) as a directly connected interface. The metric (cost) of the tunnel is
set to the normal IGP metric from the tunnel headend to the tunnel endpoint (over the leastcost path, regardless of whether the tunnel is actually using the least-cost path).
Note
With the autoroute feature, the traffic-engineered tunnel appears in the IP routing table as
well, but this appearance is restricted to the tunnel headend only.
Using forwarding adjacency, which allows the tunnel to be announced via OSPF or IS-IS
like any other unidirectional link (UDL). To be used for data forwarding, such a tunnel has
to be set up bidirectionally.
The first two options are not very flexible or scalable. The traffic for each destination that needs
to use the tunnel must be manually mapped to the tunnel.
MPLS TE Overview
8-33
For example, when you are using static routes, the tunnel is used only for the explicit static
routes. Any other traffic that is not covered by the explicit static routes, including traffic for the
tailend router (even though the tunnel terminates on that router), will not be able to use the
tunnel; instead, it will follow the normal IGP path.
Forwarding Traffic to a Tunnel: Autoroute

This topic describes how the IP forwarding database is modified when the autoroute feature is
implemented.
IP Forwarding Database Modification with

Autoroute
Autoroute feature enables the headend to see the
LSP as a directly connected interface:
This feature is used only for the SPF route determination,
not for the constraint-based path computation.
All traffic directed to prefixes topologically behind the
tunnel endpoint (tailend) is forwarded onto the

tunnel.
Autoroute affects the headend only; other routers
on the LSP path do not see the tunnel.
Tunnel is treated as a directly connected link to
the tailend:
When tunnel tail is seen in PATH list during IGP SPF,
replace outgoing physical interface with tunnel interface.
Inherit tunnel to all downstream neighbors of tailend.
MPLS v2.28-18
To overcome the problems that result from static routing configurations onto MPLS TE
tunnels, the autoroute feature of Cisco IOS software was introduced. The autoroute feature
enables the headend router to see the MPLS TE tunnel as a directly connected interface. The
headend uses the MPLS TE in its modified SPF computations.
Note
The MPLS TE tunnel is used only for normal IGP route calculation (at the headend only) and
is not included in any constraint-based path computation.
When the tunnel is built, there is a directly connected link from headend to tailend.
The autoroute feature enables all the prefixes that are topologically behind the MPLS TE tunnel
endpoint (tailend) to be reachable via the tunnel itself. This contrasts with static routing, where
only statically configured destinations are reachable via the tunnel.
The autoroute feature affects the headend router only and has no effect on intermediate routers.
These routers still use normal IGP routing for all the destinations.
8-34
Autoroute Topology (OSPF and ISIS)
Tunnel1: R1
Tunnel2: R1
R2
R6
R3
R7
R4
R4
R5
MPLS v2.28-19
The figure shows an example with two TE tunnels from R1. When the tunnels are up, R4 and
R5 appear as directly connected neighbors to R1.
Note
The tunnels are seen for routing purposes only by R1, the headend router. Intermediate
routers do not see the tunnel nor do they take it into consideration for route calculations.
Autoroute Topology (OSPF and ISIS)
From R1 Router Perspective:

Next hop to R5 is Tunnel1.
Next hop to R4 and R8 is Tunnel2.
All nodes behind tunnel are routed via tunnel.
20
MPLS v2.28-20
MPLS TE Overview
8-35
Summary
Summary
Traffic tunnels are configured with a set of
resource requirements, such as bandwidth and
priority.
CSPF augments the link cost by considering other
factors such as bandwidth availability or link
latency when choosing a path.
RSVP with TE extensions is used for establishing
and maintaining LSPs.
TE tunnels do not appear in the IP routing table.
MPLS v2.28-21
References
RFC 2746, RSVP Operation over IP Tunnels
8-36
Lesson 3
Configuring MPLS TE on
Cisco IOS Platforms
Overview
This lesson describes the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE)
commands for the implementation of MPLS traffic tunnels. The configuration commands that
are needed to support MPLS TE are explained, and sample setups are presented.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to configure MPLS TE on Cisco
IOS platforms. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Identify the tasks that are required to implement MPLS TE
Enable device-level MPLS TE support
Enable MPLS TE support in an IS-IS environment
Enable MPLS TE support in an OSPF environment
Enable MPLS TE on an interface
Create and configure a traffic tunnel
Enable traffic tunnels with autoroute

This topic describes the requirements to implement MPLS TE on a Cisco IOS device.

Use device supporting MPLS.
Implement ip cef global configuration command.
Use IGP supporting MPLS TE.
OSPF
IS-IS
Enable MPLS TE tunnels.
Configure mpls traffic-eng tunnels (global configuration
mode).
Configure mpls traffic-eng tunnels (interface configuration
mode).
Create and configure traffic tunnels.
Deploy traffic tunnels with autoroute.
MPLS v2.28-3
MPLS has to be supported to implement MPLS TE, so Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is
required.
MPLS TE has to be supported in the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF) and Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) currently have MPLS TE
support available. The configuration process for both IGPs is covered later in this lesson.
MPLS TE needs to be enabled both in global configuration mode and on specific interfaces.
After MPLS TE is enabled, you need to create and configure traffic tunnels and then send the
appropriate traffic into the tunnels.
8-38

This topic describes the command syntax that is required to enable device-level MPLS TE
support on a Cisco IOS device.
Enables IP CEF switching
Enables the MPLS TE tunnel feature on a device
MPLS v2.28-4
ip cef
To enable CEF on the router, use the ip cef command in global configuration mode. To disable
CEF, use the no form of this command.
ip cef [distributed]
no ip cef [distributed]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Enables distributed CEF (dCEF) operation. Distributes

CEF information to line cards. Line cards perform express
forwarding.
Usage Guidelines
CEF is an advanced Layer 3 IP switching technology. CEF optimizes network performance and
scalability for networks with dynamic, topologically dispersed traffic patterns, such as those
associated with web-based applications and interactive sessions.
Note
CEF is a prerequisite for MPLS traffic engineering.
MPLS TE Overview
8-39
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (global)

To enable MPLS TE tunnel signaling on a device, use the mpls traffic-eng tunnels command
in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng tunnels
no mpls traffic-eng tunnels
Usage Guidelines
Enables the MPLS TE feature on a device. To use the feature, MPLS TE must also be enabled
on the desired interfaces.
Implementing Device-Level
MPLS TE Support
MPLS v2.28-5
This figure illustrates the global configuration commands needed to enable device-level MPLS
TE support.
Note
8-40
These basic commands need to be configured on all provider edge (PE) and provider (P)
routers in the MPLS network.

This topic describes the command syntax that is required to enable MPLS TE support in an
IS-IS implementation.
Turns on MPLS traffic engineering for IS-IS Level 1 or Level 2
Specifies the interface to be associated with the TE router

identifier (also endpoint of a tunnel)
Configures a router to generate and accept only new-style TLV

objects
MPLS v2.28-6
mpls traffic-eng
To configure a router running IS-IS so that it floods MPLS TE link information into the
indicated IS-IS level, use the mpls traffic-eng command in router configuration mode. To
disable the flooding of MPLS TE link information into the indicated IS-IS level, use the no
form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng {level-1 | level-2}
no mpls traffic-eng {level-1 | level-2}
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Floods MPLS TE link information into IS-IS Level 1
Floods MPLS TE link information into IS-IS Level 2
Usage Guidelines
This command appears as part of the routing protocol tree and causes link resource information
(for instance, the bandwidth available) for appropriately configured links to be flooded in the
IS-IS link-state database.
MPLS TE Overview
8-41

To specify the TE router identifier that is to be the IP address that is associated with the given
interface for the node, use the mpls traffic-eng router-id command in router configuration
mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng router-id interface
no mpls traffic-eng router-id interface
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
The MPLS TE router identifier is taken from the IP address of the

supplied interface. This MPLS TE router identifier should be
configured as the tunnel destination for tunnels that originate at
other routers and terminate at this router. This interface should be
a stable interface that will not go up and down, such as a
loopback interface.
Usage Guidelines
The router identifier acts as a stable IP address for the TE configuration. This stable IP address
is flooded to all nodes. For all TE tunnels that originate at other nodes and end at this node, the
tunnel destination must be set to the TE router identifier of the destination node, because that
identifier is the address that the TE topology database at the tunnel head uses for its path
calculation.
Note
The MPLS router ID has to be the same address as the IGP router ID. Typically a loopback
interface is used for the router ID.
It is a best practice to use the same loopback interface for MPLS TE, IGP, Border Gateway
Protocol (BGP), and Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) router identification.
metric-style wide
To configure a router running IS-IS so that it generates and accepts only new-style type, length,
and value (TLV) objects, use the metric-style wide command in router configuration mode. To
disable this function, use the no form of this command.
metric-style wide [transition] [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2]
no metric-style wide [transition] [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2]
8-42
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Instructs the router to accept both old- and new-style

TLV objects
Enables this command on routing Level 1
Enables this command on routing Level 2
Enables this command on routing Levels 1 and 2
Usage Guidelines
If you enter the metric-style wide command, a router generates and accepts only new-style
TLV objects. The router uses less memory and other resources than it would if it were
generating both old-style and new-style TLV objects.
This style is appropriate for enabling MPLS TE across an entire network.
Note
This discussion of metric styles and transition strategies is oriented toward TE deployment.
Other commands and models may be appropriate if the new-style TLV objects are desired
for other reasons. For example, a network may require wider metrics but may not use TE.
Implementing MPLS TE Support

in IS-IS
MPLS v2.28-7
This figure illustrates typical the router mode configuration commands needed to enable MPLS
TE support in an IS-IS implementation.
Note
These commands need to be configured on all PE and P routers in the MPLS network for an
IS-IS implementation.
MPLS TE Overview
8-43

This topic describes the command syntax that is required to enable MPLS TE support in an
OSPF implementation.
Turns on OSPF traffic engineering for the area
Specifies the interface to be associated with the TE router

identifier (also endpoint of a tunnel)
MPLS v2.28-8

To configure a router running OSPF MPLS so that it floods TE for the indicated OSPF area,
use the mpls traffic-eng area command in router configuration mode. To disable flooding of
TE for the indicated OSPF area, use the no form of this command.
mpls traffic-eng area area-number
no mpls traffic-eng area area-number
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Indicates the OSPF area on which MPLS TE is enabled
Usage Guidelines
This command affects the operation of MPLS TE only if MPLS TE is enabled for that routing
protocol instance. Currently, only a single area may be enabled for TE.
8-44

To specify the TE router identifier for the node that is to be the IP address that is associated
with the given interface, use the mpls traffic-eng router-id command in router configuration
mode.
mpls traffic-eng router-id interface
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
The MPLS TE router identifier is taken from the IP address of the

supplied interface. This MPLS TE router identifier should be
configured as the tunnel destination for tunnels that originate at
other routers and terminate at this router. This interface should be
a stable interface that will not go up and down, such as a
loopback interface.
Usage Guidelines
This router identifier acts as a stable IP address for the TE configuration. This stable IP address
is flooded to all nodes. For all TE tunnels that originate at other nodes and end at this node, the
tunnel destination must be set to the TE router identifier of the destination node, because that
identifier is the address that the TE topology database at the tunnel head uses for its path
calculation.
Note
The MPLS router ID has to be the same address as the IGP router ID. Typically a loopback
interface is used for the router ID.
It is a best practice to use the same loopback interface for MPLS TE, IGP, BGP, and LDP
router identification.
MPLS TE Overview
8-45
Implementing MPLS TE Support

in OSPF
MPLS v2.28-9
This figure illustrates the typical router mode configuration commands needed to enable MPLS
TE support in an OSPF implementation.
Note
8-46
These commands need to be configured on all PE and P routers in the MPLS network for an
OSPF implementation.

This topic describes the command syntax that is required to enable basic MPLS TE on an
interface on a Cisco IOS device.
Enables MPLS on an interface
Enables the MPLS TE tunnel feature on an interface
Enables RSVP for IP on an interface and specify amount of

bandwidth to be reserved
MPLS v2.28-10
mpls ip
To enable MPLS forwarding of IP version 4 (IPv4) packets along normally routed paths for a
particular interface, use the mpls ip command in interface configuration mode. To disable this
feature, use the no form of this command.
mpls ip
no mpls ip
mpls traffic-eng tunnels (interface)

To enable MPLS TE tunnel signaling on an interface, use the mpls traffic-eng tunnels
command in interface configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this
command.
no mpls traffic-eng tunnels
Note
MPLS TE tunnel signaling must first be enabled at the global level.
MPLS TE Overview
8-47
Usage Guidelines
This command enables the MPLS TE feature on the interface. To use the feature, MPLS TE
must also be enabled on the device globally. An enabled interface has its resource information
flooded into the appropriate IGP link-state database and accepts TE tunnel signaling requests.
ip rsvp bandwidth
To enable Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) for IP on an interface, use the ip rsvp
bandwidth interface configuration command. To disable RSVP, use the no form of this
command.
ip rsvp bandwidth [interface-kbps [single-flow-kbps]]
no ip rsvp bandwidth [interface-kbps [single-flow-kbps]]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Maximum amount of bandwidth, in kilobits per second,

that may be allocated by RSVP flows. The range is from 1 to
10,000,000.
(Optional) Maximum amount of bandwidth, in kilobits per second,

that may be allocated to a single flow. The range is from 1 to
10,000,000.
Usage Guidelines
RSVP is disabled by default. If the ip rsvp bandwidth command is entered but no bandwidth
values are supplied (for example, if you enter ip rsvp bandwidth and then press the Enter key),
a default bandwidth value is assumed for both the interface-kbps and single-flow-kbps
arguments.
RSVP cannot be configured with Versatile Interface Processor (VIP) dCEF.
Note
8-48
To make MPLS TE work over a subinterface, you must configure RSVP on the main
interface with the ip rsvp bandwidth command even if the main interface is not used for
MPLS TE.
Implementing Basic MPLS TE on an

Interface

MPLS v2.28-11
This figure illustrates the commands to enable basic MPLS TE support on an interface.
Note
These commands need to be configured on all interfaces between the PE and P routers in
the MPLS network.
MPLS TE Overview
8-49

This topic describes the command syntax that is required to create and configure a traffic tunnel
on a Cisco IOS device.
Creating a Tunnel
Configures a tunnel interface

Enables IP on the interface, and brings it up without a unique IP
address
Specifies the destination for the tunnel

The tunnel source command is not needed.
MPLS v2.28-12
interface tunnel
The interface tunnel command is used to declare a tunnel interface. The tunnel interface
number parameter value is in the range of 0 to 2147483647.
interface tunnel number
ip unnumbered
To enable IP processing on an interface without assigning an explicit IP address to the
interface, use the ip unnumbered command in interface configuration mode or subinterface
configuration mode. To disable IP processing on the interface, use the no form of this
command.
ip unnumbered type number
no ip unnumbered type number
Note
8-50
Although the tunnel interface could be assigned an IP address with the ip address
command, using an unnumbered interface is considered a best practice.
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Type of another interface on which the router has an assigned IP

address. The interface cannot be another unnumbered interface.
Number of another interface on which the router has an assigned

IP address. The interface cannot be another unnumbered
interface.
Usage Guidelines
Whenever the unnumbered interface generates a packet (for example, for a routing update), it
uses the address of the specified interface as the source address of the IP packet. It also uses the
address of the specified interface in determining which routing processes are sending updates
over the unnumbered interface.
For MPLS TE tunnels, it is recommended that you use a loopback interface for addressing the
unnumbered interface.
tunnel destination
To specify the destination for a tunnel interface, use the tunnel destination interface
configuration command.
tunnel destination {hostname | ip-address}
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Name of the host destination
IP address of the host destination expressed in decimal in fourpart dotted notation
Usage Guidelines
For MPLS TE, it is a good practice to use the router ID of the remote router as the destination
address.
Note
Two tunnels cannot use the same encapsulation mode with exactly the same source and
destination address.
With MPLS traffic engineering, the source for the tunnel is set automatically.
Note
The tunnel source command is not used.
MPLS TE Overview
8-51
Example: Creating a Tunnel Interface
MPLS v2.28-13
This figure illustrates the commands to create a tunnel interface.

Note
These commands are configured only on the ingress PE for the MPLS TE tunnel.
Configuring a Traffic Tunnel

This topic describes the command syntax that is required to create and configure a traffic tunnel
on a Cisco IOS device.
Sets the tunnel encapsulation mode to MPLS TE
Configures the requested bandwidth for the MPLS TE tunnel
Configures the setup and reservation priority for an MPLS TE

tunnel
8-52
MPLS v2.28-14

To set the mode of a tunnel to MPLS for TE, use the tunnel mode mpls traffic-eng command
in interface configuration mode.
Usage Guidelines
This command specifies that the tunnel interface is for an MPLS TE tunnel and enables the
various tunnel MPLS configuration options.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth

To configure the bandwidth that is required for an MPLS TE tunnel, use the tunnel mpls
traffic-eng bandwidth command in the interface configuration mode. To disable this feature,
tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth [sub-pool | global] bandwidth
no tunnel mpls traffic-eng bandwidth [sub-pool | global] bandwidth
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
The bandwidth required for an MPLS TE tunnel. Bandwidth is

specified in kilobits per second. Bandwidth, in kilobits per second,
is set aside for the MPLS traffic engineering tunnel. The range is
between 1 and 4294967295.
sub-pool
(Optional) Indicates a subpool tunnel.
global
(Optional) Indicates a global pool tunnel. Entering this keyword is

not necessary, for all tunnels are global pool in the absence of
the sub-pool keyword. But if users of pre-DiffServ-aware TE
images enter this keyword, it is accepted.
Usage Guidelines
This command specifies that the tunnel bandwidth for an MPLS TE tunnel.
Default
The default bandwidth is 0.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority

To configure the setup and reservation priority for an MPLS TE tunnel, use the tunnel mpls
traffic-eng priority command in interface configuration mode. To remove the specified setup
and reservation priority, use the no form of this command.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority setup-priority [hold-priority]
no tunnel mpls traffic-eng priority setup-priority [hold-priority]
MPLS TE Overview
8-53
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
The priority that is used when signaling a label-switched path

(LSP) for this tunnel to determine which existing tunnels are
eligible for preemption. The range is from 0 to 7, where a lower
numeric value indicates a higher priority.
(Optional) The priority that is associated with an LSP for this

tunnel when it has been established to determine whether it
should be preempted by other LSPs that are being signaled. The
range is from 0 to 7, where a lower numeric value indicates a
higher priority.
Usage Guidelines
When an LSP is being signaled and an interface does not currently have enough bandwidth
available for that LSP, the call admission software preempts lower-priority LSPs so that the
new LSP can be admitted. (LSPs are preempted if doing so allows the new LSP to be admitted.)
In the described determination, the priority of the new LSP is its setup priority, and the priority
of the existing LSP is its hold priority. The two priorities make it possible to signal an LSP with
a low setup priority (so that the LSP does not preempt other LSPs on setup) but a high hold
priority (so that the LSP is not preempted after it is established).
Setup priority and hold priority are typically configured to be equal, and setup priority cannot
be better (numerically smaller) than the hold priority.
Defaults
The defaults are as follows:
Setup priority = 7
Hold priority = 7

(Cont.)

Enters the subcommand mode for IP explicit paths and creates or
modifies the specified path

Specifies the next IP address in the explicit path

Configures the tunnel to use a named IP explicit path or a path
dynamically calculated from the TE topology database
8-54
MPLS v2.28-15
ip explicit-path
To enter the subcommand mode for IP explicit paths to create or modify the named path, use
the ip explicit-path command in global configuration mode. An IP explicit path is a list of IP
addresses, each representing a node or link in the explicit path.
ip explicit-path {name word | identifier number} [{enable | disable}]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Specifies an explicit path by name.
Specifies an explicit path by number. You can specify a number

from 1 to 65535.
(Optional) Sets the state of the path to be enabled.
(Optional) Prevents the path from being used for routing while it is
being configured.
next-address
To specify the next IP address in the explicit path, use the next-address command in IP explicit
path configuration mode. To remove the specified next IP address in the explicit path, use the
no form of this command.
next-address ip-address
no next-address ip-address
Default
The next IP address in the explicit path is not specified.
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option

To configure a path option for an MPLS-TE tunnel, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng
path-option command in interface configuration mode. To disable the specified path option,
tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option number {dynamic | explicit {name path-name |
path-number}} [lockdown]
no tunnel mpls traffic-eng path-option number {dynamic | explicit {name path-name |
path-number}} [lockdown]
MPLS TE Overview
8-55
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
When multiple path options are configured, lower-numbered options are

preferred.
Path of the LSP is dynamically calculated.
Path name of the IP explicit path that the tunnel uses with this option.
Path number of the IP explicit path that the tunnel uses with this option.
(Optional) The LSP cannot be reoptimized.
Usage Guidelines
Multiple path setup options may be configured for a single tunnel. For example, you can
configure several explicit paths and a dynamic option for one tunnel. Path setup prefers options
with lower numbers to options with higher numbers, so option 1 is the most strongly preferred
option. The explicit path is configured using the ip explicit-path command.
8-56
Mapping Traffic into Tunnels with Autoroute

This section identifies the command syntax that is required to deploy traffic tunnels with the
autoroute feature on Cisco IOS devices.
Deploying Traffic Tunnels with Autoroute
Causes the IGP to use the tunnel in its enhanced SPF
MPLS v2.28-16

To instruct the IGP to use the tunnel in its shortest path first (SPF) calculation if the tunnel is
up, use the tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce command in interface configuration
mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
no tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce
Default
The tunnel is not used by the IGP in its SPF next-hop calculation unless a mechanism to map
traffic to the tunnel is implemented.
Usage Guidelines
The tunnel mpls traffic-eng autoroute announce command is a scalable way to map IP traffic
onto a tunnel. Alternate mapping methods include static routes pointing to the tunnel interface
and using policy-based routing (PBR) to set the next hop for the destination to the tunnel
interface.
For flexibility, the autoroute feature is preferred over these alternatives.
MPLS TE Overview
8-57
Example: Configuring TE Options

on a Tunnel Interface

MPLS v2.28-17
This figure illustrates commands to configure some TE options on a tunnel interface.

Note
8-58
These commands are configured only on the ingress PE for the MPLS TE tunnel.
Summary
Summary
Required tasks to implement TE in a MPLS VPN
network include:
Enabling device-level MPLS TE support on PE and P
routers
Enabling MPLS TE support in an IS-IS environment on PE
and P routers
Enabling MPLS TE support in an OSPF environment on PE
and P routers
Enabling MPLS TE on an interface on PE and P routers
Creating and configuring a traffic tunnel on ingress PE
router
Enabling traffic tunnels with autoroute in ingress PE
router
MPLS v2.28-18
References
MPLS Configuration Examples and TechNotes.
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk436/tk428/tech_configuration_examples_list.html
MPLS TE Overview
8-59
8-60
Lesson 4
Monitoring Basic MPLS TE on

Cisco IOS Platforms
Overview
This lesson presents some of the commands, syntax, and descriptions for monitoring
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic engineering (TE). This lesson explains how to
monitor simple TE tunnels in an MPLS network to ensure that traffic engineering is functioning
appropriately.
Objectives
Upon completing this lesson, you will be able to describe how to monitor basic MPLS TE on
Cisco IOS platforms. This ability includes being able to meet these objectives:
Monitor MPLS TE tunnels
Monitor MPLS TE, including verifying RSVP information on an interface, verifying that
MPLS TE is present in the global routing table, and verifying that IP traffic is forwarded
through the MPLS TE tunnels

This topic describes how to monitor MPLS TE tunnels.
Confirms which interfaces have RSVP information configured
Shows summary information about a tunnel
Shows detailed information about a tunnel
MPLS v2.27-3

To display Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-related information, use the show ip rsvp
interface command in EXEC mode.
show ip rsvp interface [interface-type interface-number] [detail]
Syntax Description
8-62
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Type of interface
(Optional) Number of interface
(Optional) Displays additional information about interfaces
The example shows output from the show ip rsvp interface command.
Monitoring MPLS TE Tunnels:

MPLS v2.27-4

To show information about MPLS TE tunnels, use the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels
command.
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels tunnel-interface [brief]
show mpls traffic-eng tunnels [destination address]
[source-id {number | ip-address | ip-address number}]
[role {all | head | middle | tail | remote}] [up | down] [name string]
[suboptimal constraints {none | current | max}] [[interface in physical-interface]
[interface out physical-interface] | [interface physical-interface] [brief]
The table describes the parameters available for the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels command.
MPLS TE Overview
8-63
Syntax Description
8-64
Parameter
Description
Displays information for the specified tunneling interface.
(Optional) Displays the information in brief format.
(Optional) Restricts the display to tunnels that are destined to the

specified IP address.
(Optional) Restricts the display to tunnels with a matching source

IP address or tunnel number.
(Optional) Tunnel number.
(Optional) Source IP address.
(Optional) Source IP address and tunnel number.
(Optional) Restricts the display to tunnels with the indicated role

(all, head, middle, tail, or remote).
(Optional) Displays all tunnels.
(Optional) Displays tunnels with their heads at this router.
(Optional) Displays tunnels with their midpoints at this router.
(Optional) Displays tunnels with their tails at this router.
(Optional) Displays tunnels with their heads at another router; this

display is a combination of the middle and tail keyword values.
(Optional) Displays tunnels if the tunnel interface is up. Tunnel

midpoints and tails are typically up or not present.
(Optional) Displays tunnels that are down.
(Optional) Displays tunnels with the specified name. The tunnel

name is derived from the interface description, if specified;
otherwise, it is the interface name. The tunnel name is included in
the signaling message so that it is available at all hops.
(Optional) Displays tunnels whose path metric is greater than the

shortest unconstrained path. Selected tunnels have a longer path
than the shortest path of the Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP).

current shortest path, constrained by the configured tunnel
options. Selected tunnels would have a shorter path if they were
reoptimized immediately.

current shortest path, constrained by the configured tunnel
options and considering only the capacity of the network.
Selected tunnels would have a shorter path if no other tunnels
were consuming network resources.
(Optional) Displays tunnels that use the specified input interface.
(Optional) Displays tunnels that use the specified output

interface.
(Optional) Displays tunnels that use the specified interface as an

input or output interface.
(Optional) Specifies one line per tunnel.
The example shows output from the show mpls traffic-eng tunnels brief command.
Monitoring MPLS TE Tunnels:

show mpls traffic-eng tunnels brief
Note
MPLS v2.27-5
Depending on its length, the tunnel name may be truncated.
MPLS TE Overview
8-65
Monitoring MPLS TE
This topic describes how to monitor MPLS TE.
Monitoring MPLS TE
Shows tunnels that are announced to IGP, including interface,

destination, and bandwidth
Shows network entries in the Forwarding Information Base

(FIB) to verify that IP traffic is forwarded through tunnel
interface
Shows VRF network entries in the FIB to verify that MPLS VPN
traffic is forwarded through tunnel interface
MPLS v2.27-6

To show tunnels that are announced to IGP, including interface, destination, and bandwidth,
use the show mpls traffic-eng autoroute command in privileged EXEC mode.
Usage Guidelines
The enhanced shortest path first (SPF) calculation of the IGP has been modified so that it uses
TE tunnels. This command shows which tunnels the IGP is currently using in its SPF, or which
tunnels that are up and have autoroute configured.
8-66
The example shows output from the show mpls traffic-eng autoroute command.
Monitoring MPLS TE:

Note
MPLS v2.27-7
The list of tunnels is organized by destination. All tunnels to a destination will carry a share
of the traffic to that destination.
MPLS TE Overview
8-67
show ip cef network

To verify that IP traffic is forwarded through a tunnel interface, use the show ip cef network
command in privileged EXEC mode.
show ip cef network [mask]
The example shows output from the show ip cef network command.
Monitoring MPLS TE:

show ip cef network
8-68
MPLS v2.27-8

To verify that Virtual Private Network (VPN) traffic is forwarded through a tunnel interface,
use the show ip cef vrf vrf-name network command in privileged EXEC mode.
show ip cef vrf vrf-name network [mask]
The example shows output from the show ip cef vrf vrf-name network command.
Monitoring MPLS TE:

MPLS v2.27-9
MPLS TE Overview
8-69
Summary
Summary
Use the following commands to monitor MPLS TE
tunnels:
Use the following commands to monitor MPLS TE:

show ip cef network
MPLS v2.27-10
References
8-70
Module Summary
Module Summary
Traffic engineering measures, models, and
controls traffic
The MPLS TE uses traffic tunnels, RSVP with TE
extensions, and a link state IGP
MPLS TE implementation includes device,
interface, routing protocol, and tunnel
configuration
Commands including show ip cef and show mpls
can be used to monitor MPLS TE
MPLS v2.27-1
This module provides a brief introduction to Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) traffic
engineering (TE).
References
MPLS TE Overview
8-71
Module Self-Check
Q1)
What is the main motivation for implementing traffic engineering? (Source:

Introducing the TE Concept)
Q2)
Which two situations can result in network congestion? (Choose two.) (Source:
Introducing the TE Concept)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q3)
Short traffic bursts are best handled by which three mechanisms? (Choose three.)
(Source: Introducing the TE Concept)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q4)
using static routes

using policy routing
unavailability of explicit routing
path computation that is based just on the IGP metric
When you are using MPLS-TE, a minimum of _____ labels is assigned to a packet at
the ingress router. (Source: Introducing the TE Concept)
A)
B)
C)
D)
8-72
DVCs
PVCs
RVCs
SVCs
When you are using a traffic-engineered Layer 3 model, which two of the following are
limitations? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing the TE Concept)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q6)
rate limiting
traffic engineering
queuing algorithms
intelligent packet dropping
When you are using TE with a Layer 2 overlay model, which two of the following
transport traffic across a network? (Choose two.) (Source: Introducing the TE Concept)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q5)
The least-cost network path is being used to route traffic.

Traffic streams are efficiently mapped onto available resources.
Network resources are insufficient to accommodate the offered load.
Traffic streams are inefficiently mapped onto available resources.
one
two
three
four
Q7)
A set of data flows that share some common feature, attribute, or requirement is called
_____. (Source: Understanding MPLS TE Components)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q8)
The constraint-based path computation uses which algorithm? (Source: Understanding

MPLS TE Components)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q9)
ip cef
mpls ip
mpls-te enable
The command to allow a router to generate and accept only new-style TLV objects
under IS-IS is the ________________ command. (Source: Configuring MPLS TE on
Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q13)
It identifies the best path for the tunnel.

It reserves the bandwidth required by the tunnel.
It performs the CBR calculations for the tunnel setup.
It assigns the label for the MPLS LSP.
To enable MPLS TE tunnel signaling on a device, you must use the _____ command.
(Source: Configuring MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q12)
autoroute feature
TE mapping statement
static routes
mpls traffic-eng tunnels command
What is the role of RSVP in an MPLS TE implementation? (Source: Understanding

MPLS TE Components)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q11)
DUAL algorithm
modified Dijkstra algorithm
modified Bell-Howell algorithm
none of the above
Which two can be used to advertise a traffic tunnel so that it will appear in the IP
routing table? (Choose two.) (Source: Understanding MPLS TE Components)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q10)
a static route
a policy route
a TE tunnel
TE LSP
ip cef
metric-style wide
mpls traffic-eng
Which command enables MPLS TE in an OSPF implementation? (Source: Configuring

MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)

metric-style wide
mpls traffic-eng
MPLS TE Overview
8-73
Q14)
The _____ command is used to declare a TSP tunnel interface. (Source: Configuring
MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q15)
The _____ command is used to instruct the IGP to use the tunnel in its SPF or next-hop
calculation. (Source: Configuring MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q16)

show ip cef network
show ip rsvp network
The _____ command is used to show information about MPLS TE tunnels. (Source:
Monitoring Basic MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
8-74

show ip cef network
The _____ command is used to verify that IP traffic is forwarded through a tunnel
interface. (Source: Monitoring Basic MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q18)

tunnel destination ip-address
The _____ command is used to display Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-related

information. (Source: Monitoring Basic MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms)
A)
B)
C)
D)
Q17)

tunnel destination ip-address

show ip cef network
Answer Key
Q1)
Cost reduction
Q2)
C, D
Q3)
A, C, D
Q4)
B, D
Q5)
C, D
Q6)
Q7)
Q8)
Q9)
A, C
Q10)
Q11)
Q12)
Q13)
Q14)
Q15)
Q16)
Q17)
Q18)
MPLS TE Overview
8-75
8-76
MPLS
Implementing Cisco
MPLS
Version 2.2
Lab Guide
Editorial, Production, and Web Services: 06.29.07
DISCLAIMER WARRANTY: THIS CONTENT IS BEING PROVIDED AS IS. CISCO MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE CONTENT PROVIDED HEREUNDER, EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR IN ANY OTHER PROVISION OF
THIS CONTENT OR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CISCO AND YOU. CISCO SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE. This learning product may contain early release
content, and while Cisco believes it to be accurate, it falls subject to the disclaimer above.
MPLS
Lab Guide
Overview
This guide presents the instructions and other information concerning the activities for this
course. You can find the solutions in the activity Answer Key.
Outline
This guide includes these activities:
Lab 2-1: Establishing the Service Provider IGP Routing Environment
Lab 3-1: Establishing the Core MPLS Environment
Lab 5-1: Configuring Initial MPLS VPN Setup
Lab 5-2: Running EIGRP Between PE and CE Routers
Lab 5-3: Running OSPF Between PE and CE Routers
Lab 5-4: Running BGP Between PE and CE Routers
Lab 6-1: Establishing Overlapping VPNs
Lab 6-2: Merging Service Providers
Lab 6-3: Establishing a Common Services VPN
Lab 7-1: Establishing Central Site Internet Connectivity with an MPLS VPN
Lab 8-1: Implementing Basic MPLS TE
Answer Key
Lab 2-1: Establishing the Service Provider IGP

Routing Environment
Complete this lab activity to practice what you learned in the related module.
Activity Objective
In this activity, you will use the tasks and commands necessary to implement the service
provider IGP and routing environment. After completing this activity, you will be able to meet
these objectives:
Verify the service provider IP addressing scheme, DLCI assignment, and interface status
Enable the service provider IGP and configure appropriate IP addressing
Visual Objective
The figure illustrates what you will accomplish in this activity. This activity contains
information about your laboratory setup, details of the physical and logical connectivity in the
laboratory, and information about the addressing scheme and IGP routing. The class will be
divided into service providers, or SPs, (where x represents your assigned SP number). Each SP
will contain the router types as defined in the table.
The names of all routers in your SP follow the naming convention detailed in this table.
Router Naming Convention
Router Role
Description
P (provider)
Px1 and Px2 are core routers in the network of the provider.
PE(provider edge)
PEx1 and PEx2 are provider edge routers connecting from the
provider to the customer network.
CE(customer edge)
CEx1A and CEx2A and CEx1B and CEx2B are customer edge
routers for customer A and customer B, respectively.
SP numbering will be provided by your instructor. SP 3, 4, 5, and 6 will be used for this course.
MPLS Lab Physical Connection Diagram
MPLS v2.21
Physical connectivity has been provided by preconfigured PVCs defined by their respective
DLCIs. The first serial interface of each router (P, PE, and CE) is connected to a Frame Relay
switch. The DLCI values for all Frame Relay virtual circuits are shown in the DLCI
identification table and the logical connection diagram figure. The subinterface number
matches the DLCI values for all Frame Relay virtual circuits.
DLCI Identification
Source Router
Destination Router
DLCI
Interface
CEx1A
PEx1
101
S0/0.101
CEx1B
PEx1
102
S0/0.102
CEx2A
PEx2
101
S0/0.101
CEx2B
PEx2
102
S0/0.102
PEx1
CEx1A
101
S0/0.101
PEx1
CEx1B
102
S0/0.102
PEx1
Px1
111
S0/0.111
PEx2
CEx2A
101
S0/0.101
PEx2
CEx2B
102
S0/0.102
PEx2
Px2
111
S0/0.111
Px1
PEx1
111
S0/0.111
Px1
Px2
112
S0/0.112
Px2
PEx2
111
S0/0.111
Px2
Px1
112
S0/0.112
Lab Guide
MPLS Lab Logical Connection Diagram
MPLS v2.22
This figure represents the logical connection of two service providers. The Frame Relay DLCI
information is included from the DLCI identification table. Note that the serial subinterface
number matches the DLCI number.
Each SP has two P routers creating the core of the service provider network. Each P router
connects to the PE router that supports the POP, which is the interface between the service
provider network and the customer network. The PE routers interconnect two different
customers (A and B).
Each SP is further divided into two POPs which correspond to student workgroups. Each
student workgroup should configure its respective left or right side of the SP. For example,
workgroup 31 at POP 31 should configure P31, PE31, CE31A, and CE31B. This leaves
workgroup 32 at POP 32 to configure P32, PE32, CE32A, and CE32B.
Your POP will still depend on the other POP in your SP network to complete end-to-end
connectivity for customer A and customer B. Each customer has a location on each side of the
POPs. An example is customer A with sites CE31A and CE32A. Site CE31A is connected to
PE31 within POP 31; site CE32A is connected to the other PE32 router within POP 32.
MPLS Lab IP Addressing Scheme
MPLS v2.23
The IP addressing of routers has been performed using the allocation scheme detailed in the IP
host address table. Note that x equals your SP number.
For all exercises, there are three distinct IP address ranges.
The 10.1.0.0 and 10.2.0.0 ranges are used to provide network addressing for the networks of
customers A and B respectively. The second octet indicates the customer. The third octet of the
address indicates the SP POP.
For example, 10.1.41.16/28 is a customer A subnet on POP 41 for SP 4.
The 150.0.0.0 range is used to provide addressing for the links between the CE routers and the
PE routers. The second octet of the address indicates the SP, and the third octet indicates the SP
POP.
For example, 150.5.51.16/28 is a link between a CE router (CE51) and POP 51 (or router
PE51) for SP 5.
The 192.168.0.0 range is used to provide addressing for the core MPLS network of the SP. The
third octet of the address indicates the SP number.
For example, 192.168.6.64/28 is a link between a PE router (PE62) and a core router (P62)
for SP 6.
Lab Guide
IP Host Address
Parameter
Value
CEx1A (S0/0.101)
150.x.x1.17/28
CEx1A (loopback0)
10.1.x1.49/32
CEx1A (E0/0)
10.1.x1.17/28
CEx2A (S0/0.101)
150.x.x2.17/28
CEx2A (loopback0)
10.1.x2.49/32
CEx2A (E0/0)
10.1.x2.17/28
CEx1B (S0/0.102)
150.x.x1.33/28
CEx1B (loopback0)
10.2.x1.49/32
CEx1B (E0/0)
10.2.x1.17/28
CEx2B (S0/0.102)
150.x.x2.33/28
CEx2B (loopback0)
10.2.x2.49/32
CEx2B (E0/0)
10.2.x2.17/28
PEx1 (S0/0.101)
150.x.x1.18/28
PEx1 (S0/0.102)
150.x.x1.34/28
PEx1 (loopback0)
192.168.x.17/32
PEx1 (S0/0.111)
192.168.x.49/28
PEx2 (S0/0.101)
150.x.x2.18/28
PEx2 (S0/0.102)
150.x.x2.34/28
PEx2 (loopback0)
192.168.x.33/32
PEx2 (S0/0.111)
192.168.x.65/28
Px1 (S0/0.111)
192.168.x.50/28
Px1 (S0/0.112)
192.168.x.113/28
Px1 (loopback0)
192.168.x.81/32
Px2 (S0/0.111)
192.168.x.66/28
Px2 (S0/0.112)
192.168.x.114/28
Px2 (loopback0)
192.168.x.97/32
Note
This addressing scheme has been selected for ease of use in the labs; it does not optimize
the use of the address space.
Required Resources
This is the resource that is required to complete this activity:
Cisco IOS documentation
Command List
The table describes the commands that are used in this activity.
IP, IGP, and Interface Commands
Command
Description
To specify a list of networks for the

EIGRP routing process, use the network
router configuration command. To
remove an entry, use the no form of this
command.
To configure the EIGRP routing process,

use the router eigrp global configuration
command. To shut down a routing
process, use the no form of this
command.
To define a logical point-to-point

subinterface on a physical serial
interface.
Enables Frame Relay encapsulation..
Specifies the DLCI associated with its

point-to-point link.
To display statistics about PVCs for

Frame Relay interfaces, use the show
frame-relay pvc privileged EXEC
command.
To display information about a serial

interface, use the show interfaces
serial command in privileged EXEC
mode. When using Frame Relay
encapsulation, use the show interfaces
serial command in EXEC mode to
display information about the multicast
DLCI, the DLCIs used on the interface,
and the DLCI used for the LMI.
To display the parameters and current

state of the active routing protocol
process, use the show ip protocols
EXEC command.
To display the current state of the routing

table, use the show ip route EXEC
command.
Lab Guide
Task 1: Configure the Service Provider IP Interfaces

Your task is to configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 addressing and ensure that the proper interfaces
are enabled.
Note
The enable password on all routers is mpls.
Activity Procedure
Complete these steps with reference to the preceding MPLS logical connection diagram and IP
addressing scheme. Workgroup x1 on POP x1 and workgroup x2 on POP x2 of each SP should
configure their respective group of routers.
Step 1
Configure and enable each P router interface, subinterface, and loopback for its
appropriate DLCI and IP addressing.
Step 2
Configure and enable each PE router interface, subinterface, and loopback for its
appropriate DLCI and IP addressing.
Step 3
Configure and enable each CE router interface, subinterface, and loopback for
appropriate DLCI and IP addressing. Configure the Ethernet interfaces to be halfduplex with no keepalives.
Activity Verification
You have completed this task when you attain these results:
You have pinged the remote end of each serial link from each router to verify that each link
is operational.
Task 2: Configure the Service Provider IGP

Your next task is to establish the service provider IGP routing environment. This task will
involve enabling the EIGRP routing protocol.
Activity Procedure
Complete these steps for POP x1 and x2 of each SP:
Step 1
On each CE router, enable the RIP version 2 (RIPv2) routing process. Advertise the
10.0.0.0 and the 150.x.0.0 networks. Disable the autosummarization feature of this
routing protocol.
Step 2
On each P and PE router, enable the EIGRP routing process, using 1 as the AS
number, and ensure that the service provider networks are configured and are being
advertised by the EIGRP process. Disable the autosummarization feature of this
routing protocol.
Step 3
Ensure that the other POP has completed its configuration tasks.
On each P and PE router, you have verified that the EIGRP router process is active.
On each P and PE router, you have verified that the EIGRP router process is enabled on all
serial interfaces.
On each P and PE router, you have verified that the loopback interfaces of all P and PE
routers are displayed in the IP routing table.
On each P and PE router, you have verified that the 192.168.x.0 subnetworks of all P and
PE routers are displayed in the IP routing table.
On each PE router, you have verified that the 150.x.0.0 subnetworks of all P and PE routers
are displayed in the IP routing table.

Lab Guide
10
Lab 3-1: Establishing the Core MPLS

Environment
Activity Objective
In this activity, you will use the tasks and commands necessary to implement MPLS on framemode Cisco IOS platforms. After completing this activity, you will be able to meet these
objectives:
Enable LDP on your PE and P routers
Enable and disable MPLS TTL propagation
Configure conditional label distribution
Remove conditional label distribution
Visual Objective
The figure illustrates what you will accomplish in this activity.
MPLS Lab Core LDP Scheme
MPLS v2.24
Required Resources
Lab Guide
11
Command List
MPLS Commands
Command
Description
To configure the access list mechanism for filtering frames by

protocol type or vendor code, use the access-list global
configuration command. To remove the single specified entry
from the access list, use the no form of this command.
To enable CEF, use the ip cef command in global configuration

mode. To disable CEF, use the no form of this command.
To enable MPLS forwarding of IPv4 packets along normally

routed paths for the platform, the mpls ip command can be used
in global configuration mode (for TE) but must be used at the
interface configuration mode for LDP to become active. To
disable this feature, use the no form of this command.
To specify the label distribution protocol to be used on a given

interface, use the mpls label protocol interface configuration
command. Use the no form of the command to disable this
feature.
To display information about one or more interfaces that have
been configured for label switching, use the show mpls
interfaces privileged EXEC command.
To display the status of the LDP discovery process, use the

show mpls ldp discovery privileged EXEC command. This
command generates a list of interfaces over which the LDP
discovery process is running.
To display the status of LDP sessions, issue the show mpls ldp
neighbor privileged EXEC command.
To display the contents of the LIB, use the show mpls ldp
bindings privileged EXEC command.
12
To control the generation of the TTL field in the MPLS header

when labels are first added to an IP packet, use the mpls ip
propagate-ttl global configuration command. To use a fixed TTL
value (255) for the first label of the IP packet, use the no form of
this command.
To control the distribution of locally assigned (incoming) labels by

means of LDP, use the mpls ldp advertise-labels command in
global configuration mode. This command is used to control
which labels are advertised to which LDP neighbors. To prevent
the distribution of locally assigned labels, use the no form of this
command.
Task 1: Enable LDP on Your PE and P Routers

Your next task is to establish MPLS within the service provider routing environment. This task
will involve enabling CEF and MPLS.
Activity Procedure
Complete these steps:
Step 1
On your assigned PE router, do the following:

Enable CEF.
Enable LDP on the subinterface that is connected to your assigned P router.
Step 2
On your assigned P router, do the following:

Enable CEF.
Enable LDP on the subinterface that is connected to your assigned PE router.
Enable LDP on the subinterface that is connected to the P router of the other
POP.
Note
The mpls label protocol ldp command can be issued at the global configuration level.
Step 3
Verify that the other POP has completed its configuration.
Step 4
On your assigned PE router, determine the default TTL propagation status by using
the traceroute command to the loopback address of the PE router of the other POP.
Note
The mpls ip command is issued to enable MPLS on an interface, but it will be displayed in
the show running-config command output as the tag-switching ip command.
On each of your routers, you have verified that the interfaces in question have been
configured to use LDP.

Lab Guide
13
On each of your routers, you have verified that the interface is up and has established an
LDP neighbor relationship.

14
On each of your routers, you have verified that LDP has allocated a label for each prefix in
its IP routing table.

On each of your routers, you have verified the LDP bindings for all prefixes of the other
core routers.

Lab Guide
15
On your PE router, you have determined TTL propagation status by performing a

traceroute to the loopback address of the PE router of the other POP.

16
Task 2: Experiment with TTL Propagation

In this task, you will enable MPLS TTL propagation and verify the results. Workgroup x1 on
POP x1 will configure PEx1 and Px1. Workgroup x2 on POP x2 will configure PEx2 and Px2..
Activity Procedure
Step 1
On your assigned PE router, enable MPLS TTL propagation.
Step 2
On your assigned P router, enable MPLS TTL propagation.
Step 3
Verify that the other POP has completed its configuration.
Step 4
Verify that the MPLS TTL propagation is working.
Step 5
On your assigned PE router, disable MPLS TTL propagation.
Step 6
On your assigned P router, disable MPLS TTL propagation.
You have completed this task when you attain these results while MPLS TTL propagation is
enabled:
You have performed a traceroute from your PE router to the loopback address of the PE
router of the other POP and verified that the results display the associated labels.

Note
When you are troubleshooting, it may become necessary to view the core routes when
doing traces. If so, it will be necessary to enable TTL propagation.
For this course, enabling TTL propagation will affect the results of some of the traces shown
in the lab activity verification because additional hops and labels will be displayed.
Lab Guide
17
Task 3: Configure Conditional Label Distribution

For the label binding displays that you did in Task 1, you can see that a label is assigned to
every prefix that is in the IP routing table of a router. This label assignment results in wasting
label space and resources to build unused LSPs. In this task, you will use conditional label
advertising to restrict the distribution of labels related to the WAN interfaces in the core.
Workgroup x1 on POP x1 will configure PEx1 and Px1. Workgroup x2 on POP x2 will
configure PEx2 and Px2.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
On your PE router, display the LSPs that are being built.

Step 2
Note that an LSP has been built to the WAN interfaces that connect the PE and P
routers. This LSP will never be used because traffic will not normally terminate at
this point.
Step 3
On your assigned P and PE routers, configure conditional label distribution to allow

only the distribution of labels related to the core loopback addresses and the
interfaces that provide direct customer support.
Step 4
Verify that the other POP has completed its configuration tasks.
On your PE router, you have confirmed that LSPs are not being built for the links between
the PE and P routers.

18
Note
An LSP is no longer built to the WAN interface that connects the other PE and P routers.
On your P router, you have verified the LDP bindings.

Lab Guide
19
Note
The prefixes assigned to the WAN interfaces connecting the other P and PE routers no
longer have a remote label assigned. Further, none of the core WAN interfaces have remote
labels assigned. This lessening of assignments results in a reduced label space, which
saves memory resources.
Task 4: Remove Conditional Label Distribution

For the conditional label distribution displays that you did in Task 3, you can see that a label is
not assigned to every prefix that is in the IP routing table of a router. In this task, you will
remove conditional label advertising so that there are no restrictions on the distribution of
labels related to the WAN interfaces in the core.
Note
For this simple lab environment, there are no memory constraints that would lead you to
implement conditional label distribution.
Workgroup x1 on POP x1 will configure PEx1 and Px1. Workgroup x2 on POP x2 will
configure PEx2 and Px2
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Remove conditional label distribution and the access list that supported it.
Step 2
Verify that the other POP has completed its configuration task.
On your PE router, you have confirmed that all the LSPs that are being built.

20
Lab Guide
21
Lab 5-1: Configuring Initial MPLS VPN Setup

Activity Objective
The company that you work for is a small service provider. Your SP has been given the task of
creating two simple VPNs to support two new customers (customer A and customer B) that
have just signed with you.
In this activity, you will create a simple VPN for your customer. After completing this activity,
you will be able to meet these objectives:
Configure MP-BGP to establish routing between the PE routers of your POP
Configure the VRF tables necessary to support your customer and establish your customer
RIP routing using a simple VPN
Visual Objective
Two Simple VPNs with a BGP Core
MPLS v2.25
These activities rely on Lab 3-1, Establishing the Core MPLS Environment, in which you
established MPLS connectivity in your backbone.
Please verify that MPLS has been enabled on all core interfaces in your backbone and that it
has not been enabled on interfaces toward the customer POP routers or other SPs.
22
For your reference, the figure shows the addresses in use in the network.
MPLS v2.26
This activity contains tasks that enable you to configure your core MPLS VPN infrastructure
and to establish a simple any-to-any VPN service for a customer.
You will also test various PE-CE routing options, ranging from RIP and OSPF to running BGP
between the PE and the CE routers.
Required Resources
Command List
VPN-Related Commands
Command
Description
Selects a per-VRF instance of a routing protocol.
Selects VPNv4 address family configuration.
Assigns an interface to a VRF.
Creates a VRF table.
Lab Guide
23
Command
Description
Activates an exchange of routes from address family under

the configuration for the specified neighbor.
Configures a route reflector client on a route reflector.
To configure the router as the next hop for a BGP-speaking

neighbor or peer group, use the neighbor next-hop-self
router configuration command. To disable this feature, use
the no form of this command.
To add an entry to the BGP or MP-BGP neighbor table, use

the neighbor remote-as router configuration command. To
remove an entry from the table, use the no form of this
command.
To specify that a community attribute should be sent to a

BGP neighbor, use the neighbor send-community
command in address family or router configuration mode. To
remove the entry, use the no form of this command.
To have Cisco IOS software allow IBGP sessions to use any

operational interface for TCP connections, use the neighbor
update-source router configuration command. To restore the
interface assignment to the closest interface, which is called
the best local address, use the no form of this command.
Pings a host reachable through the specified VRF.
Assigns an RD to a VRF.
Redistributes BGP routes into RIP with propagation of the

MED into the RIP hop count.
Selects BGP configuration.
Assigns an RT to a VRF.
Displays information on global BGP neighbors.
Displays VPNv4 routes associated with the specified VRF.
Displays an IP routing table of the specified VRF.
Displays detailed VRF information.
Displays the MPLS forwarding table for a specific VRF
Task 1: Configure MP-BGP

In this task, you will configure MP-BGP between the PE routers in your POP.
Workgroup x1 on POP x1 will configure MP-BGP on PEx1, and workgroup x2 on POP x2 will
perform the same task on PEx2.
24
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Activate the BGP process on your assigned router using AS 65001 as the AS
number. Disable the autosummarization feature.
Step 2
Activate VPNv4 BGP sessions between your assigned PE router and the PE router
being configured by the other POP. Disable the autosummarization feature.
Step 3
Verify that the other POP has completed its configuration tasks.
You have displayed the BGP neighbor information and ensured that BGP sessions have
been established between the two PE routers.

Lab Guide
25
Task 2: Configure VRF Tables

In this task and the following task, you will establish simple VPNs for customer A and
customer B. Workgroup x1 will establish a VPN between CEx1A and CEx2A, and workgroup
x2 will establish a VPN between CEx1B and CEx2B. Each POP is responsible for all PE router
configurations related to its customer. This division of work between POPs applies to all future
exercises.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Note
26
Design your VPN networksdecide on the RD and the RT numbering. Coordinate

your number with the other POP.
The easiest numbering plan would be to use the same values for the RD and the RT. Use
simple valuesfor example, x:10 for customer A and x:20 for customer B.
Step 2
Create VRFs on the PE routers and associate the PE-CE interfaces into the proper
VRFs; use simple yet descriptive VRF names (for example, CustA and CustB).
Step 3
Your customer is using RIP as its IGP, so enable RIP for the VRF that you have
created.
Step 4
Configure redistribution of RIP into BGP from the address-family ipv4 vrf
vrf-name command mode.
Step 5
Configure redistribution of BGP into RIP from the address-family ipv4 vrf
vrf-name command mode.
Step 6
Configure RIP metric propagation through MP-BGP by using the redistribute bgp
as-number metric transparent command in the RIP process.
Step 7
Ensure that RIP is enabled on all of the CE routers. Make sure that all of the
networks (including loopbacks) are active in the RIP process.
On a CE router, using the show ip route command, you have verified that the router is
receiving all VPN routes. Also, you have verified that no routes from the other customer or
the MPLS core are being received. On CEx1A, the printout should be similar to this
example:

Lab Guide
27
You have used ping and trace on the CE routers to verify connectivity across the VPN.

You have verified that you have the proper configuration of your VRF tables with the show
ip vrf detail command. Your printout should be similar to this example:

28
You have checked the routing protocols running in your VRF with the show ip protocols
vrf command. When executed on PEx1, your printout should be similar to this example:

Lab Guide
29
30
You have verified the per-VRF routing table on the PE router with the show ip route vrf
command. Your printout should be similar to this example:

Lab Guide
31
You have used the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf command to display the BGP routing table
associated with a VRF. The printout from the PEx1 router is shown here:

32
You have used the show mpls forwarding vrf vrf-name command on the PE routers to
verify the forwarding table for each VRF.

You have used the show ip route command on the PE routers to verify that the customer
routes are not in the global IP routing table.

Lab Guide
33
You have used the ping and trace commands on the PE routers to verify that you cannot
reach your customer networks from global address space.

You have used the ping vrf command on the PE routers to verify that you can reach your
customer networks from global address space.

34
Lab 5-2: Running EIGRP Between PE and CE

Routers
Activity Objective
Some customers use EIGRP as the routing protocol in their VPN; sometimes, EIGRP is even
combined with RIP or BGP at other sites. In this activity, the customers of the service provider
have decided to migrate some of their sites to EIGRP.
In this activity, you will deploy EIGRP as the PE-CE routing protocol in the VPN of your
customer. After completing this activity, you will be able to meet this objective:
Convert one of each of the customer sites to EIGRP (from RIP) and establish VPN routing
using EIGRP. The other site will continue running RIP as the IGP.
Visual Objective
MPLS Lab Customer EIGRP Scheme
MPLS v2.28
Lab Guide
35
MPLS v2.27
Required Resources
36
Command List
OSPF Commands
Command
Description
Enters address family configuration mode and specifies the

name of the VRF to associate with submode commands.
Specifies the network for the VRF. The network statement is

used to identify which interfaces to include in EIGRP. The
VRF must be configured with addresses that fall within the
subnetwork range of the configured network statement.
Redistributes BGP into the EIGRP. The AS number and

metric of the BGP network are configured in this step. BGP
must be redistributed into EIGRP for the CE site to accept the
BGP routes that carry the EIGRP information. A metric must
also be specified for the BGP network and is configured in
this step.
Enters router configuration mode and creates an EIGRP

routing process.
Displays EIGRP interfaces that are defined under the

specified VRF. If an interface is specified, only that interface
is displayed. Otherwise, all interfaces on which EIGRP is
running as part of the specified VRF are displayed.
Displays when VRF neighbors become active and inactive.

This command can be used to help debug transport
problems.
Displays VRF entries in the EIGRP topology table. This

command can be used to determine Diffusing Update
Algorithm (DUAL) states and to debug possible DUAL
problems.
Displays the set of defined VRFs and associated interfaces.

This command is used to verify that the correct RDs are
configured for the VRF.
Task 1: Enable an EIGRP VPN

In this task, your customer has decided to convert only one of its two locations from RIP to
EIGRP. Workgroup x1 will convert the customer A site, CEx1A, from RIP to EIGRP and
establish a simple VPN.
Workgroup x2 will convert the customer B site, CEx2B, from RIP to EIGRP and establish a
simple VPN.
Each POP is responsible for all PE router configurations related to its customer.
Lab Guide
37
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Disable RIP and configure EIGRP on one of the two routers of your customer.
Workgroup x1 on POP x1 will configure CEx1A, and Workgroup x2 on POP x2 will
configure CEx2B. Use x, your SP number, as the AS number for EIGRP. Because
both customers are connected via the same 150.x.0.0 network, be specific on the
EIGRP statement to match the appropriate interface.
Step 2
Remove the appropriate address family from the RIP routing process on your PE
router.
Step 3
Configure EIGRP on your PE router.
Step 4
On your assigned PE router, configure redistribution of EIGRP into BGP with the
address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command. Because the source EIGRP metric is
incompatible with the destination RIP metric, set the default metric to 1.
Step 5
On your assigned PE router, configure redistribution of BGP into EIRGP with the
address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name command. Disable the autosummarization feature
of EIGRP.
You have verified that EIGRP has been activated on the proper interfaces.

You have verified that EIGRP adjacencies have been established between the CE and PE
routers.

38
You have checked the EIGRP topology database on the CE routers.

Lab Guide
39
You have verified connectivity across the VPN by using ping and trace commands on the
CE routers and ping vrf and trace vrf commands on the PE routers.

40
Lab Guide
41
Lab 5-3: Running OSPF Between PE and CE

Routers
Activity Objective
Some customers insist on using OSPF as the routing protocol in their VPN, sometimes even
combined with RIP or BGP at other sites. In this activity, you will migrate the CE-to-PE
routing protocol to OSPF. After completing this activity, you will be able to meet these
objectives:
Convert one of each of the customer sites to OSPF (from RIP) and establish VPN routing
using OSPF
Visual Objective
MPLS Lab Customer OSPF Scheme
42
MPLS v2.210
MPLS v2.29
Required Resources
Lab Guide
43
Command List
OSPF Commands
Command
Description
Selects a per-VRF instance of a routing protocol
Generates a default route into OSPF
Assigns an interface to a VRF
Creates a VRF table
Pings a host reachable through the specified VRF
Assigns an RD to a VRF
Redistributes BGP routes (including subnetwork routes) into

OSPF
Selects BGP configuration
Starts an OSPF process within the specified VRF
Assigns an RT to a VRF
Displays VPNv4 routes associated with the specified VRF
Displays OSPF database information
Displays an IP routing table of the specified VRF
Displays detailed VRF information
Makes a Telnet connection to a CE router connected to the

specified VRF
Task 1: Configure OSPF as the PE-CE Routing Protocol

In this task, your customer has decided to have OSPF as the only IGP. This decision means that
the customer sites that are running EIGRP or RIP will have to be converted to OSPF.
Workgroup x1 will convert customer A (CEx1A and CEx2A), and Workgroup x2 will convert
customer B (CEx1B and CEx2B) to establish a simple VPN.
Each POP is responsible for all PE router configurations related to its customer.
44
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Disable EIGRP and RIP and configure OSPF on the CE routers of your customer.
Configure OSPF areas (use an OSPF process ID of 1 for CustA and a process ID of
2 for CustB) in the CE router according to the information here.
Area
Interface (or Interfaces)
Area 0
WAN interface toward PE router

Loopback 0
Area 1
E0/0
Step 2
Configure OSPF (use an OSPF process ID of 1 for CustA and a process ID of 2 for
CustB) in the VRFs on the PE routers using the router ospf vrf command. Use
OSPF Area 0 on the PE-CE link.
Step 3
Configure redistribution from OSPF to MP-BGP using the redistribute ospf

command inside the VRF address family configuration.
Step 4
Configure redistribution from MP-BGP to OSPF using the redistribute bgp

subnets command in the OSPF router configuration.
You have verified the OSPF adjacency on PEx1 and PEx2 routers using the show ip ospf
neighbor command.

Lab Guide
45
You have checked the OSPF topology database on CEx1A and CEx2B. You should see
router link states (resulting from OSPF connectivity between the PE and the CE routers)
and type 5 external link states. A sample printout from CEx1A is shown here:

46
You have checked the IP routing table on CEx1A and noted the OSPF interarea (IA) routes
in the routing table.

You have verified connectivity across the VPN by using ping and trace commands on the
CE routers and ping vrf and trace vrf commands on the PE routers. These are just a few
examples.

Lab Guide
47
48
Lab 5-4: Running BGP Between PE and CE

Routers
Activity Objective
Your customer has indicated that it wants to have a backup link for a selected site for
redundancy. This addition will produce a multihomed environment. As a result, it is necessary
to use BGP as the CE-to-PE routing protocol. The provider has decided to implement this
conversion in phases. The existing links will be converted to BGP, and then the backup links
will be added and activated.
In this activity, you will convert the CE-to-PE routing protocol of your customer to BGP. After
completing this activity, you will be able to meet these objectives:
Enable EBGP as the CE-to-PE link routing protocol
Enable a backup link
Configure BGP to control the selection of primary and backup links
Visual Objective
MPLS Lab Customer BGP Scheme
MPLS v2.212
Lab Guide
49
MPLS v2.211
Required Resources
50
Command List
BGP Commands
Command
Description
Selects a per-VRF instance of a routing protocol.
Assigns an interface to a VRF.
Creates a VRF table.
To configure a PE router to override the AS number of a site with

the AS number of a provider, use the neighbor as-override
command in router configuration mode. To remove VPNv4
prefixes from a specified router, use the no form of this
command.
Applies a route map to BGP updates received from or sent to the

specified neighbor.
Enables a BGP neighbor previously disabled with the neighbor

shutdown command.
Pings a host reachable through the specified VRF.
Assigns an RD to a VRF.
Creates an entry in a route map.
Selects BGP configuration.
Assigns an RT to a VRF.
Sets the BGP MED attribute in a route map.
Displays VPNv4 routes associated with the specified VRF.
Displays an IP routing table of the specified VRF.
Makes a Telnet connection to a CE router connected to the

specified VRF.
Task 1: Configure BGP as the PE-CE Routing Protocol

In this task, you will make BGP the routing protocol between the PE router and your customer
routers. OSPF will remain the customer IGP. You will need to redistribute from BGP to OSPF
and from OSPF to BGP on the routers of your customer. You will establish simple VPNs for
customer A and customer B. Workgroup x1 will convert customer A (CEx1A and CEx2A), and
workgroup x2 will convert customer B (CEx1B and CEx2B) to establish a simple VPN. Each
POP is responsible for all PE router configurations related to its customer.
Lab Guide
51
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Activate the BGP routing process on the CE routers of your customer using
AS650x1 for customer A and AS 650x2 for customer B. Disable the
autosummarization BGP feature.
Step 2
Remove OSPF on the associated PE router and activate the BGP neighbor
relationship between each CE router and its associated PE router.
Step 3
Because both customers use the same AS number at all their sites, you will need to
enable the AS-override feature on the PE routers.
You have checked BGP connectivity with the show ip bgp summary command on the CE
routers.

52
Task 2: Configure the Backup PE-CE Link

In this task, you will enable the backup links on the PE routers. Workgroup x1 on POP x1 will
establish the link between its PEx1 router and the CEx2A router, and workgroup x2 on POP x2
will establish the link between its PEx2 router and the CEx1B router. Ensure that the interface
is added to the proper VRF and that BGP is activated.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Configure an additional subinterface on the existing serial interfaces on your PE and

CE routers. Use the DLCI number as the subinterface number.
Step 2
Add the backup link to the appropriate VRF.

Which VRF is interface Se0/0.113 from CEx1B added to?
Which VRF is interface Se0/0.113 from CEx2A added to?
Lab Guide
53
Step 3
Configure IP addresses and DLCIs on this interface using the parameters in the
table.
Backup Link Configuration Parameters
Step 4
Source
Router
IP Address
DLCI
Destination Router
IP Address
DLCI
CEx2A
150.x.x1.49/28
113
PEx1
150.x.x1.50/28
113
CEx1B
150.x.x2.49/28
113
PEx2
150x.x2.50/28
113
Activate the BGP neighbor relationship between your CE router and the appropriate
PE router.
You have verified point-to-point connectivity over the new subinterface.

54
You have checked BGP connectivity with the show ip bgp summary command on the CE
routers.

Lab Guide
55
56
Task 3: Select the Primary and Backup Link with BGP

It may be necessary to control the BGP selection of the link to establish a primary backup
relationship. In this task, you will use the local preference and MED attributes to control link
selection. In this implementation, the new link bypasses the MPLS core. However, because it is
a high-cost link, it should be considered only as the backup link; the link through the MPLS
core is to be used as the primary link.
Lab Guide
57
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Use the BGP local preference on the CE router to select the link to its local PE
router (through the MPLS core) as the primary link and the link to the remote PE
router (bypass link) as the backup link. Use a lower local preference on the preferred
path.
Step 2
Set the MED in outgoing routing updates from your CE router to make sure that the
PE routers prefer the link through the MPLS core before using the backup link.
You may have had to issue a clear ip route or clear ip bgp * command on the CE router to
propagate routes with the new parameters.
You have verified that the primary link (the link to your local PE router) is being used. Use
the show ip bgp command to verify this. Make sure that the routes received from the
primary link are always selected as the best routes.

58
You have verified the proper setting of the MED by using the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf
command on the PE routers. Make sure that the PE routers select routes coming from the
primary link as the best routes.

You have shut down the link from the local PE router to the dual-connected CE router.
(This is interface Se0/0.102 on PEx1, and Se0/0.101 on PEx2.)
Lab Guide
59
You have verified that the backup link (the link to your remote PE router) is being used.
Use the show ip bgp command to verify this after BGP converges.

You have re-enabled the subinterface.
60
After the BGP session is established with the local PE router, you have verified that the
local link is shown as the preferred link for traffic. Use the show ip bgp command to verify
this.

Lab Guide
61
Lab 6-1: Establishing Overlapping VPNs

Activity Objective
Your VPN customers want to exchange data between their central sites. You have decided to
implement this request with an overlapping VPN topology.
In this activity, you will establish overlapping VPNs to support the needs of your customers.
After completing this activity, you will be able to meet these objectives:
Design a VPN solution
Remove CEx1A and CEx2B from existing VRFs
Configure new VRFs for CEx1A and CEx2B
Visual Objective
MPLS Lab: Overlapping VPNs
62
MPLS v2.213
In this lab activity, you will establish overlapping VPNs with the following connectivity goals:
Simple VPN communication
CEx1A and CEx2A can communicate.
CEx1B and CEx2B can communicate.
CEx1A and CEx1B cannot communicate.
CEx2A and CEx2B cannot communicate.
CEx1B and CEx2A cannot communicate.
Overlapping VPN communication (CustAB)
CEx1A and CEx2B can communicate.
Required Resources
Command List
The commands that are used in this activity have been described in previous activities.
Task 1: Design Your VPN Solution

Site CEx1A cannot belong to the same VRF as the other xA sites. Similarly, site CEx2B cannot
belong to the same VRF as the xB sites. Also, CEx1A and CEx2B cannot share the same VRF.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
On paper, allocate new RDs for VRFs to which CEx1A and CEx2B will be
connected.
Step 2
A new RT is needed for the CustAB VPN. Coordinate the value of this RT with the
other POP within your SP.
Note
You could use x:11 as the RD for VRFs connected to CEx1A, and you could use x:21 as the
RD for VRFs connected to CEx2B. You could use x:1001 as the RT for the CustAB VPN.
You have completed this task when you attain this result:
You have designed RDs and RTs for the new VRFs.
Lab Guide
63
Task 2: Remove CEx1A and CEx2B from Existing VRFs

CEx1A and CEx2B must be migrated to new routing contexts. It is tempting to do this by
merely changing the RDs and RTs of their existing VRF. However, this approach is not
possible because the other VPN site, connected to the same PE router, is sharing those VRFs.
Note
When you enabled the backup link, you connected both CEx1A and CEx2A to PEx1.
Therefore, if you change the routing context of customer A on PEx1, you will affect both
CEx1A and CEx2A. This situation also holds true for CEx1B, CEx1B, and PEx2.
Sites CEx1A and CEx2B have to be migrated to new VRFs. All of the references to these sites
must be removed from the existing routing protocol contexts.
In this task, you will remove the references to CEx1A and CEx2B.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Remove the address family BGP neighbor relationship between CEx1A and CEx2B
on their respective PE routers.
Step 2
Check any other references to CEx1A and CEx2B in their PE router configurations
and, if required, remove them.
On the PE router, you have verified that the interface toward the CE router is no longer in
the original VRF by using the show ip vrf interfaces command. This action should result
in a printout similar to the one here:

64
You have verified that the BGP neighbor relationship has been removed on the PE router
with the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf summary command. This action should give you a
printout similar to the one here. Check the status of CEx1A and CEx2B in the printout.

Lab Guide
65
Task 3: Configure New VRFs for CEx1A and CEx2B

In this task, you will create the new VRFs for CEx1A and CEx2B.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Create the new VRFs for CEx1A and CEx2B on their PE router with the ip vrf
command.
Step 2
Assign new RDs to the newly created VRFs with the rd command.
Step 3
Assign proper import and export RTs to the newly created VRFs with the routetarget command.
Step 4
Reestablish BGP routing between the PE routers and the CE routers. Please refer to
Lab 5-4, Running BGP Between PE and CE Routers, if you need more details.
On the PE router, you have verified that the interface toward the CE router is in the proper
VRF by using the show ip vrf interfaces command. This action should result in a printout
similar to the one here:

You have verified the BGP neighbors on the PE router with the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf
summary command. This action should result in a printout similar to the one here. Check
the status of CEx1A and CEx2B in the printout.

66
You have checked the BGP routing table in the new VRF with the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf
command. You should see routes from CEx1A or CEx2B and routes imported from other
VRFs. Use the AS path to work out which routes belong to which CE router. Routes
announced by CEx1A should have 650x1 in the AS path, and routes announced by CEx2B
should have 650x2 in the AS path.

Lab Guide
67
You have connected to CEx1A and performed ping and trace tests to the loopback address
of CEx2B (or vice versa). The other router should be reachable. For subgroup B, perform
the test in the other direction.

From CEx1A, perform a ping test to the loopback address of CEx1B (or vice versa). The
other router should not be reachable.

68
Connect to CEx2A and try to ping CEx2B or CEx1B. Those routers should not be reachable
from CEx2A.

Lab Guide
69
Lab 6-2: Merging Service Providers

Activity Objective
Your small service provider is merging with several other small service providers. To
accomplish this consolidation, a new central P router (P1) has been installed and configured.
Frame Relay connectivity has been provided from each local Px1 and Px2 router to P1. In
addition, the core IGP is being converted from EIGRP to IS-IS.
In this activity, you will merge your small service provider with several other small service
providers. After completing this activity, you will be able to meet these objectives:
Establish connectivity with the central P1 router
Convert the core IGP from EIGRP to IS-IS
Enable MPLS LDP connectivity with the central P router
Enable IBGP connectivity between all PE routers
Visual Objective
You will configure your PE router, and the directly connected P router. P1 has been
preconfigured.
MPLS Lab: Merging Service Providers
70
MPLS v2.214
Required Resources
Command List
Commands for Merging Service Providers
Command
Description
To enable the IS-IS routing protocol and to specify an IS-IS

process, use the router isis command in global configuration
mode. To disable IS-IS routing, use the no form of this command.
To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a

Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) routing process, use the
net command in router configuration mode. To remove a NET,
To configure the type of adjacency, use the isis circuit-type

interface configuration command. To reset the circuit type to
Level l and Level 2, use the no form of this command.
To configure a router running IS-IS so that it generates and

accepts only new-style type, TLV objects, use the metric-style
wide command in router configuration mode. To disable this
function, use the no form of this command.
Task 1: Enable Connectivity with the Central P Router

In this task, you will enable the Frame Relay link between your P routers and P1, and then
enable LDP connectivity between the two routers.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Note
Configure IP addresses and DLCIs on your P router on the interface to P1 using the
parameters in the table.
The parameters are configured on the P routers of the SP and not the PE routers.
IP Address and DLCI Configuration Parameters
Router
Subinterface
DLCI
IP Address
P31
S0/0.231
231
192.168.100.10/29
P32
S0/0.232
232
192.168.100.18/29
P41
S0/0.241
241
192.168.100.26/29
P42
S0/0.242
242
192.168.100.34/29
Lab Guide
71
Router
Subinterface
DLCI
IP Address
P51
S0/0.251
251
192.168.100.42/29
P52
S0/0.252
252
192.168.100.50/29
P61
S0/0.261
261
192.168.100.58/29
P62
S0/0.262
262
192.168.100.66/29
You have completed this task when you attain this result:
On your P router, you have used the show interface command to verify that the new
interfaces are operational.
Task 2: Migrate the Core to IS-IS

Because a link-state protocol is more scalable than a distance vector protocol, the service
provider has decided to migrate the core to IS-IS. The P1 router has already been migrated.
Your POP is responsible for the migration of all of your assigned routers. Workgroup x1 will
migrate PEx1 and Px1. Workgroup x2 will migrate PEx2 and Px2.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Disable EIGRP as the core IGP on your assigned routers.
Step 2
Enable IS-IS as the core IGP using the parameters detailed in the table.
IS-IS Parameters
Router ID
NET
Remarks
PEx1
net 49.0001.0000.0000.01x1.00
Where x = the SP number
PEx2
net 49.0001.0000.0000.01x2.00
Px1
net 49.0001.0000.0000.02x1.00
Px2
net 49.0001.0000.0000.02x2.00
Note
72
Ensure that the metric-style command is set to wide, the is-type command is set to level2-only, and IS-IS has been enabled on the active serial interfaces that are supporting the
core MPLS.
You have used the show ip protocols command to verify that IS-IS is active and enabled
on all appropriate interfaces on the PE routers.

Note
The IS-IS gateways should show the loopback addresses of the PE and P routers. In these
results, x is your SP number, and y is the number of the other SP.
Depending on how far along the other SP is in configuring its devices, you may not see the y
routes.
Lab Guide
73
You have used the show ip route command on the PE routers to verify that all routers are
sending and receiving the appropriate prefixes.

Note
In these results, x is your SP number, and y is the number of the other SP.
Depending on how far along the other SP is in configuring its devices, you may not see the y
routes.
74
You have used the show ip protocols command to verify that IS-IS is active and enabled
on all appropriate interfaces on the P routers.

Note
You have used the show ip route command on the P routers to verify that all routers are
sending and receiving the appropriate prefixes.


Lab Guide
75
Note
Task 3: Enable MPLS LDP Connectivity with the Central P

Router
In this task you will enable LDP connectivity between your routers and P1.
Activity Procedure
Complete this step:
Step 1
Enable LDP on the subinterface that you have created on Px1 or Px2 router.
On your P router, you have verified that an LDP neighbor relationship has been established
between your P router and P1.

76
On your PE router, you have verified that labels are being received from the other POPs.

Lab Guide
77
Note
In these results, x is your SP number, and y is the number of the other SP. The [V]
indicates a VPN prefix.
Task 4: Enable IBGP Connectivity for All PE Routers

At this point, you have established LDP connectivity for all of the PE and P routers in your new
service provider environment, but you have not yet established BGP connectivity. You now
need to establish IBGP connectivity for your PE routers.
There are two methods that you can implement. The first is to use the bgp neighbor command
to add a neighbor relationship between each of the routers, but this approach would entail a
substantial configuration effort.
The second method is to implement route reflectors. To this end, P1 has been configured as a
BGP route reflector. However, to take advantage of this fact, you will need to remove the
neighbor relationship between your two PE routers and make them neighbors of P1.
Note
The loopback address for P1 is 192.168.100.129 with AS 65001. Ensure that your update
source is also your loopback interface.
Workgroup x1 will configure PEx1, and Workgroup x2 will configure PEx2.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Remove the neighbor relationship between your PE router and the PE router in your
remote POP.
Step 2
Configure your PE router as a neighbor of P1.

What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustA?
What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustB?
What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustAB?
78
On your PE routers, you have checked BGP connectivity to all POPs with the show ip bgp
summary and show ip bgp neighbor commands on CE routers.

You have verified the per-VRF BGP table for your customer on your PE routers with the
show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf command. You should still see that the BGP routes coming from
the CE routers are being selected as the best routes for those destinations.


Lab Guide
79
You have verified the per-VRF table for your customer on your PE routers with the show
ip route vrf command. You should still see only the routes coming from the CE routers
being selected.

80
Lab Guide
81
Lab 6-3: Establishing a Common Services VPN

The new MPLS VPN infrastructure can be used to implement a new approach to managed CE
router services, where the central NMS can monitor all CE routers through a dedicated VPN.
The NMS VPN should provide connectivity only between the NMS and a single IP address on
the CE router that is used for network management purposes.
In this activity, your SP has established a network management center using a VPN between
the loopback interfaces of the CE routers and the NMS router. You will establish connectivity
only between the NMS and the CE router loopback interfaces with a /32 subnet mask.
Activity Objective
In this activity, you will establish a network management VPN between the loopback interfaces
of the CE routers and the NMS router. After completing this activity, you will be able to meet
these objectives:
Implement a network management VPN between the management VRF and customer
VRFs by configuring proper RTs
Visual Objective
MPLS Lab: Managed Services
PE NMS can reach all CE Lo0.

Each CE Lo0 can reach
PE NMS.
NMS VRF does not support
CE Lo0 to CE Lo0.
Note
82
MPLS v2.215
The NMS router is simulated by a loopback on the P1 router.
Required Resources
Command List
Network Management VPN Commands
Command
Description
Specifies a VRF export route map
Creates a route map entry
Appends the specified RT to a route matched with the match

command
Task 1: Establish Connectivity Between the NMS VRF and

Other VRFs
The network management VPN is a common services VPN. Therefore, two RTs are needed for
the VPN: the server RT and the client RT. On the PE router supporting the NMS, a VRF for the
network management VPN and associated RD are also needed. Here are the relevant parts of
the configuration on the NMS PE router:
Note
This configuration resides on the P1 router, which in this exercise is simulating the central
service PE router.

Note
You will need to configure the VRF of your customer only on the local PE router to match the
RT used by the NMS VPN.
To establish connectivity between the NMS VRF and the customer VRF, you must attach the
client RT to the CE router loopback addresses when the routes are exported from the customer
VRF. You also need to import routes from the NMS router into all customer VRFs.
Lab Guide
83
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Create an IP access list that will match the CE router loopback addresses.
Step 2
Create a route map that will match the CE router loopback addresses with the access
list and append the client RT to those routes.
Step 3
Apply the route map to routes exported from the customer VRF with the
export map command.
Step 4
Import NMS routes into the customer VRF by specifying the proper import RT.
What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustA on your PE?
What routes do you expect to see in VRF NMS on your PE?
What routes do you expect to see in VRF NMS on P1?
You have verified that the proper RTs are appended to the routes toward the CE router
loopback addresses by using the show ip bgp vpnv4 vrf name prefix command. This
action should result in a printout similar to this example:

Note
84
If after a few minutes you do not see RT:101:501 in the extended community list on the PE
router, you may need to use the clear ip bgp * command to reset the BGP session.
You have verified that the proper routes are in the VRF CustA on your PE router. You
should now see the simulated NMS address and the prefixes for your CustA routes.

You have verified that no routes are in the VRF NMS on your PE router. You should not
see any routes because you do not have interfaces in that VRF, and the VRF is not
configured on your router.

Using an extended ping command, you have verified that you can ping from the loopback
address of the managed CE router to the loopback address of the NMS CE router
(10.10.10.49).

Lab Guide
85
Using an extended ping command, you have verified that you cannot ping from the
Ethernet address of the managed CE router to the loopback address of the NMS CE router
(10.10.10.49).
You have verified that your CE router is seeing only prefixes within your VPN and that no
prefixes are being leaked from other VPNs.

86
You have verified that the P router has only the management prefixes in the NMS VRF.

Note
In these results, x is your SP number, and y is the number of the other SP. You need only
check for the x routes.
Lab Guide
87
Lab 7-1: Establishing Central Site Internet

Connectivity with an MPLS VPN
Internet connectivity in MPLS VPN-based networks can be achieved through a dedicated
Internet VPN. The dedicated Internet VPN approach provides better security because it
completely isolates the service provider core (P routers) from the Internet. On the other hand,
this approach is also less scalable; for example, you cannot export full Internet routing updates
into an Internet VPN.
Activity Objective
In this activity, you will remove the overlapping VPNS between customer A and customer B
and then configure a separate VPN for Internet access for each customer. After completing this
activity, you will be able to meet these objectives:
Restore a simple customer VPN configuration
Establish CE-PE connectivity for central site Internet access
Establish central site CE-PE connectivity for Internet access across a separate MPLS VPN
Establish remote site Internet connectivity through the central site router
Visual Objective
The figure illustrates what you will accomplish in this activity. For clarity, customer A
connectivity is shown on the left side of the diagram, and customer B connectivity is shown on
the right side of the diagram. Customer A is connected through POP x1, customer B is
connected through POP x2.
Internet Connectivity Through Central Site
88
MPLS v2.216
Note
The simulated Internet gateway router with an Internet VRF is preconfigured on P1.
You will first remove the overlapping VPNs between customer A and customer B, and
reestablish simple VPN connectivity for each customer. You will then configure additional
virtual links between the central site CE routers (CEx1A and CEx2B) and their PE routers.
These separate circuits will connect from the central CE routers to their PE router to carry the
Internet traffic.
The figure illustrates the new subinterfaces.
Separate Internet Connection for

Central Sites
MPLS v2.217
You will next create connectivity on the PE router between the Internet VPN and the customer
central site for all Internet traffic in the SP. Each POP will be responsible for performing the
configuration tasks on its PE router. The PE router will send only the default route from the
Internet gateway to the central CE router.
Because the remote sites (CEx1B and CEx2A) will access the Internet using the MPLS VPN
connection to their respective central sites, you will create default routes for each VPN pointing
to the central CE router.
Note
Internet traffic within the SP will not go to the Internet gateway but will be appropriately
routed by the PE routers.
Lab Guide
89
Required Resources
Command List
The table describes some commands that are used in this activity. All other commands used in
this lab have been described in previous labs.
Command
Description
Creates an IP prefix list that matches a specific address and

mask
Filters BGP advertisements to a neighbor based on the prefix list
Pings a host using a specified source address
Task 1: Restore a Simple Customer VPN Configuration

In this task, you will remove the overlapping VRF CustAB. You will restore all customer A
sites to VRF CustA and all customer B sites to VRF CustB with the following connectivity
goals:
CEx1A and CEx2A can communicate with each other, but not to CEx*B devices.
CEx1B and CEx2B can communicate with each other, but not to CEx*A devices.
Activity Procedure
90
Step 1
Remove the address family BGP neighbor relationship between CEx1A and CEx2B
on their respective PE router.
Step 2
Configure CEx1A with the CustA address family BGP neighbor relationship.
Step 3
Configure CEx2B with the CustB address family BGP neighbor relationship.
You have verified that the appropriate neighbor relationships are in place. Use the show ip
bgp command to verify this.

Lab Guide
91
From your customer router, you have verified that you can ping the loopback interface of
the remote customer router.

Note
92
You may need to issue a clear ip bgp * command on the CE router to force the propagation
of the new routes.
Task 2: Establish CE-PE Connectivity for Central Site Internet

Access
In this task, you will add a new subinterface to support the Internet VPN on the central site
router.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Create a separate subinterface (S0/0.114) on the central router of the customer using
the address information in the table.
Router ID
IP Address
DLCI
CEx1A
150.x.x1.66/28
114
CEx2B
150.x.x2.66/28
114
Step 2
Activate the new interface in the IGP routing process and make the interface
passive.
Step 3
Create a separate subinterface (S0/0.114) on the PE routers using the address

information in this table.
Router ID
IP Address
DLCI
PEx1
150.x.x1.65/28
114
PEx2
150.x.x2.65/28
114
Step 4
Activate the new interface in the IGP routing process and make the interface
passive.
Note
Global routing between your PE router and P1 was established in Lab 6-2, Merging Service
Providers.
You have used the show ip interface command to verify the status of the new interfaces.

Lab Guide
93
Task 3: Establish Central Site Connectivity for Internet Access

Another group in the service provider organization has already created a VPN in the provider
core to carry the Internet traffic. You will connect the central customer site CE to the Internet
VPN to support all Internet traffic from the customer. Each POP will be responsible for
performing the configuration tasks on its PE router.
To control Internet routes forwarded to the customer, the PE router will send only the default
route from the Internet gateway to the central CE router.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
Create /24 summary routes for both customer sites with default routes to the Null0
interface on the central CE router.
Step 2
Add the appropriate PE router neighbor statement to the BGP process on the CE
router.
Step 3
Add the summary networks to the BGP routing process on the central CE router.
Step 4
Create a VRF named Internet on the PE router. Use RD 100:600, and import RT
100:600.
Step 5
Create a route-map to export only the default route and the /24 summary routes from
the customer.
Step 6
Place the new interface (Se0/0.114) that will support the central site CE router
(CEx1A or CEx2B) into the Internet VRF on the PE router.
Step 7
Create a prefix list to permit only the default route.
Step 8
Add the central site router neighbor statements to the IPv4 VRF address family for
the Internet VRF on the PE router.
You have verified that the central site CE router is receiving only the default route across
the Internet subinterface from its PE neighbor and that /24 summary routes for both
customer sites are in the routing table.

94
Lab Guide
95
You have verified that the PE router is receiving Internet routes from the central CE router
as well as the Internet gateway. The /24 summary routes for both customer sites are in the
Internet routing table.

Note
96
In these results, x is your SP number, and y is the number of the other SP in the merged SP
network. Depending on the status of the other groups, you could see the /24 subnets for
CEx1A, CEx2A, CEx1B, CEx2B, CEy1A, CEy2A, CEy1B, and CEy2B.
Note
Lab Guide
97
You have verified that the /24 summary routes for both customer sites are in the Internet
routing table on the P1 router.

Note
P1 also has loopbacks simulating Internet devices. You should be able to ping 10.0.0.1,
172.176.0.1, and 192.168.0.1 from any prefix in this routing table.
98
You have verified that the central customer site devices can reach the simulated networks
the P1 Internet VRF routing table.

Note
The packet from the central CE router should go to its PE router (150.x.x1.65) through the
Internet interface to reach the Internet address.
Lab Guide
99
Task 4: Establish Remote Site Internet Connectivity Through

the Central Site Router
Because the remote sites (CEx1B and CEx2A) will access the Internet using the MPLS VPN
connection to their respective central sites, you will create default routes for each VPN pointing
to the central CE router.
Activity Procedure
Step 1
On your PE router, add a default VRF route pointing to Loopback0 on the central
CE router.
Step 2
Add the redistribute static command and the default-information originate

command to your address family to propagate this route to the CEs.
You have verified that the remote CE router has a default route across the MPLS VPN to
its CE neighbor.

100
You have verified that the PE routers have the appropriate default routes across the MPLS
VPN to the CE neighbor.

Lab Guide
101
You have used the ping and trace commands to verify that you can reach remote devices.

102
Note
If you trace the path, the packet from the remote CE router should go to its PE (150.x.x2.18),
then to the central site PE (150.x.x1.18 outbound), then to the central site CE (150.x.x1.17) ,
and then out the central site CE Internet interface to the central site PE (150.x.x1.65) to
reach the Internet address.
Lab Guide
103
Lab 8-1: Implementing Basic MPLS TE

In this exercise, you will establish MPLS traffic tunnels to support a new requirement of the SP
management.
Activity Objective
In this activity, you will configure MPLS TE to forward all traffic through the P1 router. The
links between Px1 and Px2 will be retained for backup purposes. You will use MPLS TE to
direct customer traffic across the P1 router. After completing this activity, you will be able to
Follow traffic flows in a MPLS backbone
Configure basic MPLS TE support on your routers
Configure MPLS TE tunnels
Visual Objective
MPLS Traffic Engineering Layout
MPLS v2.218
Required Resources
104
Command List
Command
Description
Creates a tunnel interface
Enters the subcommand mode for IP explicit paths and creates or

modifies the specified path
Enables RSVP on an interface
Specifies the IS-IS metric type
Starts MPLS support and LDP on an interface
Enables MPLS TTL propagation support
Configures IS-IS TE support
Configures MPLS TE logging
Controls the frequency with which tunnels with established LSPs

are checked for better LSPs
Defines the IP address that is used as the tunnel destination for

this router
Enables MPLS TE globally or on an interface
Specifies the next IP address in the explicit path
Starts IS-IS configuration
Displays autoroute information
Displays detailed tunnel information
Displays the overall status of MPLS TE tunnels
Specifies the tunnel tailend router
Specifies tunnel encapsulation mode
Enables autoroute on an MPLS TE tunnel
Specifies the bandwidth that is reserved by the MPLS TE tunnel
Specifies that the MPLS TE path option will use an explicit path
Specifies MPLS TE tunnel setup and hold priority
Lab Guide
105
Task 1: Log the Existing Traffic Flow

In this task, you will log the existing traffic flow pattern to establish the current path through
the network.
Exercise Procedure
Step 1
Enable MPLS TTL propagation on all PE and P routers.
Step 2
Perform a traceroute between your two assigned CE routers.
Exercise Verification
You have used the trace command to verify the route between the devices.

106
Task 2: Configure MPLS TE Support on the PE and P Routers

In this task, you will enable global features that will allow TE tunnels to be built.
Exercise Procedure
Step 1
Configure global MPLS TE support.
Step 2
Configure IS-IS support to generate and accept only new-style TLV objects.
Configure IS-IS to support level 2 TE.
Step 3
Use loopback0 as the router ID on the Px1, Px2, PEx1, and PEx2 routers.
Step 4
Configure MPLS TE support and reservable bandwidth on all links between the
backbone routers. Allow up to 128 kbps of reservable bandwidth on any single
subinterface and up to 128 kbps of reservable bandwidth on physical interfaces.
Note
To make MPLS TE work over a subinterface, you must configure RSVP on the main
interface with the ip rsvp bandwidth command even though the main interface is not used
for MPLS TE.
You have used the show ip rsvp interface command to confirm the RVSP information that
has been configured. Verify that the proper interface and bandwidths have been enabled.

Lab Guide
107
Task 3: Configure MPLS TE Tunnels

In this task, you will create the traffic tunnels between PE routers.
Exercise Procedure
Step 1
108
On both of your PE routers, configure an MPLS TE tunnel toward the other PE

router in your SP passing through the P1 router (for example, PEx1 Px1 P1
Px2 PEx2). Use the tunnel parameters shown in the table.
Parameter
Value
IP address
Loopback 0
Tunnel bandwidth
100 kbps
Path options
Explicit path selection
Tunnel priority
Setup = 0, hold = 0
Autoroute
Enabled
Step 2
Enable MPLS forwarding on the MPLS TE tunnels to establish end-to-end LSPs to

be used for MPLS VPN traffic.
Step 3
Force faster tunnel optimization with the global command mpls traffic-eng
reoptimize timers frequency 30.
You have used the show mpls traffic-engineering tunnels brief command to display
tunnels that are going through a particular router and verified the operational state of the
tunnels that are originating in the router. You should get a printout similar to this example.

Note
If the tunnel does not come up, check these conditions:

a) The required global commands are implemented on the P and PE routers.
b) The required ISIS commands are implemented on the P and PE routers.
c) The required interface commands are implemented on the P and PE routers.
d) The explicit tunnel path is correctly configured.
e) The ingress tunnel interface commands are correctly configured.
Lab Guide
109
You have used show ip route to verify that the tunnel is in the global routing table.

Note
110
In these results, x is your SP, and y is the other SP as viewed from PEx1. Depending on
how far along the other SP is in configuring its devices, you may not see the y routes. You
need be concerned only about the x routes.
Note
In these results, x is your SP, and y is the other SP as viewed from PEx2. Depending on
how far along the other SP is in configuring its devices, you may not see the y routes. You
need be concerned only about the x routes.
Lab Guide
111
You have used the show ip cef network command to verify that the IP traffic toward the
tunnel destination gets forwarded through the tunnel interface.

You have used the show ip cef vrf name network command to verify that the MPLS VPN
traffic gets forwarded through the tunnel interface.

112
You have repeated the traces that you did in Task 1 to verify that the trace now bypasses
the direct Px1-to-Px2 link and passes through the P router links.

Note
The third and fourth router addresses will vary, based on the SP.
Note
The third and fourth router addresses will vary, based on the SP.
Lab Guide
113
Answer Key
The correct answers and expected solutions for the activities that are described in this guide
appear here.
Lab 2-1 Answer Key: Establishing the Service

Provider IGP Routing Environment
When you complete this activity, your router will be similar to the results here, with differences
that are specific to your SP. The PE routers need the EIGRP network 150.x.0.0 command only
for testing. It can be removed after testing. The CE routers will need network 150.x.0.0 in a
later lab, so you could add the network statement in this lab.
Task 1: Configure the Service Provider IP Interfaces

Configuration steps on PEx1:


114
Configuration steps on Px1:


Configuration steps on CEx1A routers:

Lab Guide
115
Configuration steps on CEx1B routers:

Configuration steps on CEx2A routers:

Configuration steps on CEx2B routers:

116
Task 2: Configure the Service Provider IGP





Configuration steps on all CE routers:

Lab Guide
117
Lab 3-1 Answer Key: Establishing the Core MPLS

Environment
that are specific to your SP.
Task 1: Enable LDP on Your PE and P Routers


Note
The mpls label protocol ldp command can be issued at the global configuration level.



Note
118
The mpls ip command is issued to enable MPLS on an interface but will be displayed in the
show running-config command output as the tag-switching ip command.
Task 2: Experiment with TTL Propagation

Configuration steps on PEx1 and PEx2 to enable MPLS TTL propagation:

Configuration steps on Px1 and Px2 to enable MPLS TTL propagation:

Configuration steps on PEx1 and PEx2 to disable MPLS TTL propagation:

Configuration steps on Px1 and Px2 to disable MPLS TTL propagation:

Task 3: Configure Conditional Label Distribution

Note
There are various ways to construct an access list to accomplish the desired result. This
example shows one way. The key, however, is to meet the task objective.
Configuration steps on PEx1 and PEx2:

Configuration steps on Px1 and Px2:

Task 4: Remove Conditional Label Distribution

Configuration steps on PEx1 and PEx2:

Configuration steps on Px1 and Px2:

Lab Guide
119
Lab 5-1 Answer Key: Configuring Initial MPLS

VPN Setup
Task 1: Configure MP-BGP



Task 2: Configure VRF Tables


120

Lab Guide
121
Lab 5-2 Answer Key: Running EIGRP Between PE

and CE Routers
Task 1: Enable an EIGRP VPN

Configuration steps on CEx1A:

Configuration steps on CEx2B:



122
Lab Guide
123
Lab 5-3 Answer Key: Running OSPF Between PE

and CE Routers
Task 1: Configure OSPF as the PE-CE Routing Protocol






124

Lab Guide
125
Lab 5-4 Answer Key: Running BGP Between PE

and CE Routers
Task 1: Configure BGP as the PE-CE Routing Protocol





126


Lab Guide
127
Task 2: Configure the Backup PE-CE Link

Answer to Which VRF is interface Se0/0.113 from CEx1B added to?
CustB
Answer to Which VRF is interface Se0/0.113 from CEx2A added to?
CustA




128
Task 3: Select the Primary and Backup Link with BGP



Lab Guide
129
Lab 6-1 Answer Key: Establishing Overlapping

VPNs
Task 1: Design Your VPN Solution

No configuration steps are required for this task. On paper, you defined new RDs for VRFs to
which CEx1A and CEx2B will be connected. A new RT is needed for the CustAB VPN. The
RT value should be the same with the other POP within your SP. It was suggested to use x:11
as the RD for VRFs connected to CEx1A, x:21 as the RD for VRFs connected to CEx2B, and
x:1001 as the RT for the CustAB VPN.
Task 2: Remove CEx1A and CEx2B from Existing VRFs


Note
After removing the interface from the VRF, the following message will appear:
% Interface Serial0/0.101 IP address 150.x.x1.18 removed due to disabling VRF CustA.

Note
After removing the interface from the VRF, the following message will appear:
% Interface Serial0/0.102 IP address 150.x.x2.34 removed due to disabling VRF CustB.
Task 3: Configure New VRFs for CEx1A and CEx2B

Note
The RDs and RTs listed in these results may not match those that you have used in this
task.

130

Lab Guide
131
Lab 6-2 Answer Key: Merging Service Providers

Task 1: Enable Connectivity with the Central P Router

Note
The subinterface number and DLCI number in these configurations will match with the
central P router and are determined by the instructions for this task.
This task is for the Px1 and Px2 routers of the SP, and not the PE routers.
Configuration steps on the Px1 routers:

Configuration steps on the Px2 routers:

132
Task 2: Migrate the Core to IS-IS

Note
Take care to apply the configuration steps to the appropriate PE or P router.

Lab Guide
133

Note
The configuration steps shown next apply to the P routers.


134
Task 3: Enable MPLS LDP Connectivity with the Central P

Router
Note
The subinterface number and DLCI number in these configurations match each other and
are determined by the instructions for this task.


Task 4: Enable IBGP Connectivity for All PE Routers

Answer to What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustA?
Only routes from your SP: 10.1.x1.16/28, 10.1.x1.49/32, 10.1.x2.16/28,
10.1.x2.49/32, 150.x.x1.16/18, 150.x.x1.48/28, 150.x.x2.16/18
Answer to What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustB?
10.2.x2.49/32, 150.x.x2.32/18, 150.x.x2.48/28, 150.x.x1.32/18
Answer to What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustAB?
10.1.x2.49/32, 10.2.x2.16/28, 10.2.x2.49/32, 150.x.x1.16/18, 150.x.x1.48/28,
150.x.x2.16/18, , 150.x.x2.32/18

Lab Guide
135

136
Lab 6-3 Answer Key: Establishing a Common

Services VPN
Task 1: Establish Connectivity Between the NMS VRF and

Other VRFs
Answer to What routes do you expect to see in VRF CustA on your PE?
All the routes from before, plus the prefix for the new link and 10.10.10.49. These
should include: 10.1.x1.16/28, 10.1.x1.49/32, 10.1.x2.16/28, 10.1.x2.49/32,
150.x.x1.16/18, 150.x.x1.48/28, 150.x.x1.64/28, 150.x.x2.16/18, and
10.10.10.10.49/32.
Answer to What routes do you expect to see in VRF NMS on your PE?
None, because the PE router has no interfaces in the NMS VRF and does not have
the NMS VRF configured.
Answer to What routes do you expect to see in VRF NMS on P1?
The loopback addresses of the CE routers in the SP and 10.10.10.49. You need only
check for your loopback address: 10.1.x1.49/32, 10.2.x1.49/32, 10.1.x2.49/32,
10.2.x1.49/32, and 10.10.10.49/32.
Configuration steps on PEx1 for customer A:

Configuration steps on PEx2 for customer A:

Lab Guide
137
Configuration steps on PEx1 for customer B:

Configuration steps on PEx2 for customer B:

138
Lab 7-1 Answer Key: Establishing Central Site

Internet Connectivity with an MPLS VPN
Task 1: Restore a Simple Customer VPN Configuration



Lab Guide
139
Task 2: Establish CE-PE Connectivity for Central Site Internet

Access




Task 3: Establish Central Site Connectivity for Internet Access


140



Lab Guide
141
Task 4: Establish Remote Site Internet Connectivity Through

the Central Site Router
Configuration steps on the PE routers:

142
Lab 8-1 Answer Key: Implementing Basic MPLS

TE
Task 1: Log the Existing Traffic Flow

Configuration steps on the PE routers:

Configuration steps on the P routers:

Task 2: Configure MPLS TE Support on the PE and P Routers

Configuration steps on the PEx* routers:

Note
When steps show PEx*, implement them on both the PEx1 and PEx2 routers.
Configuration steps on the Px* routers:

Note
When steps show Px*, implement them on both the Px1 and Px2 routers.
Lab Guide
143
Task 3: Configure MPLS TE Tunnels

Configuration steps on the PEx1 router:

144
Configuration steps on the PEx2 router:

Lab Guide
145
146

Implementing Cisco MPLS

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Implementing Cisco MPLS

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MPLS

Introducing Basic MPLS Concepts

Introducing MPLS Labels and Label Stacks

Identifying MPLS Applications

Label Assignment and Distribution

Discovering LDP Neighbors

Introducing Typical Label Distribution in Frame-Mode MPLS

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

Introducing Convergence in Frame-Mode MPLS

Introducing MPLS Label Allocation, Distribution, and Retention Modes

Frame-Mode MPLS Implementation on Cisco IOS Platforms

Introducing CEF Switching

Configuring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms

Example: Configuring MPLS on a Frame-Mode Interface

Monitoring Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms

Troubleshooting Frame-Mode MPLS on Cisco IOS Platforms

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

MPLS VPN Technology

Introducing MPLS VPN Architecture

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

Introducing the MPLS VPN Routing Model

Forwarding MPLS VPN Packets

MPLS VPN Implementation

Using MPLS VPN Mechanisms of Cisco IOS Platforms

Configuring VRF Tables

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

Specifying Export and Import RTs

Configuring an MP-BGP Session Between PE Routers

Configuring Small-Scale Routing Protocols Between PE and CE Routers

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

Monitoring MPLS VPN Operations

Configuring OSPF as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

Configuring BGP as the Routing Protocol Between PE and CE Routers

Troubleshooting MPLS VPNs

Complex MPLS VPNs

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

Using Advanced VRF Import and Export Features

Introducing Overlapping VPNs

Introducing Central Services VPNs

Introducing the Managed CE Routers Service

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

Internet Access and MPLS VPNs

Introducing Internet Access with MPLS VPNs

Implementing Separate Internet Access and VPN Services

Implementing Internet Access as a Separate VPN

Introducing the TE Concept

TE with the MPLS TE Model

Understanding MPLS TE Components

Configuring MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms

Monitoring Basic MPLS TE on Cisco IOS Platforms

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.

Implementing Cisco MPLS (MPLS) v2.2

Learner Skills and Knowledge

Learner Skills and Knowledge

Note: Practical experience with deploying and operating networks based on